F250 UME Application Software - Omron eData

F250 UME Application Software - Omron eData
)80($SSOLFDWLRQ6RIWZDUH
2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
5HYLVHG'HFHPEHU
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always
heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people
or damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
!WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it
refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the
product.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types
of information.
Note
1,2,3...
Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
,QGLFDWHVOLVWVRIRQHVRUWRUDQRWKHUVXFKDVSURFHGXUHVFKHFNOLVWVHWF
Precaution
Indicates information required to take full advantage of the functions and performance of the product. Incorrect application methods may result in the loss
of damage or damage to the product. Read and follow all precautionary information.
CHECK
Indicates points that are important in using product functions or in application
procedures.
SeeAlso
HELP
Indicates where to find related information.
Indicates information helpful in operation, such as the definition of terms.
¸ OMRON, 2001
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover,
because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained
in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation
of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is
any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1
Basic Operating Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-(1)
1-1
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-(2)
1-2
Operational Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-(3)
1-3
Installing the Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-(4)
1-4
Displaying Images and Focussing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-(10)
1-5
Menu Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-(12)
1-6
Basic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-(28)
1-7
Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-(62)
1-8
Saving Settings and Shutting Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-(64)
SECTION 2
Processing Items Setting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-(1)
2-1
Inputting Camera Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-(1)
2-2
Switching Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-(1)
2-3
Changing Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3-(1)
2-4
Filtering Again. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4-(1)
2-5
Binary Position Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5-(1)
2-6
EC Position Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6-(1)
2-7
Edge Position Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7-(1)
2-8
Model Position Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8-(1)
2-9
Circle Position Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9-(1)
2-10 Reset Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10-(1)
2-11 Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11-(1)
2-12 Detecting Binary Defects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12-(1)
2-13 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13-(1)
2-14 Density Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14-(1)
2-15 EC Defect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15-(1)
2-16 EC Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16-(1)
2-17 Edge Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17-(1)
2-18 Fine Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18-(1)
2-19 EC Circle Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19-(1)
2-20 Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20-(1)
2-21 QUEST Character Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21-(1)
2-22 Rotation Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22-(1)
2-23 ECM Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23-(1)
2-24 Lot Number OCV 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24-(1)
2-25 Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25-(1)
2-26 Label Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26-(1)
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2-27 Edge Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27-(1)
2-28 Density Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28-(1)
2-29 Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29-(1)
2-30 Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30-(1)
2-31 Get Unit Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31-(1)
2-32 Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32-(1)
2-33 Set Unit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33-(1)
2-34 Trend Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34-(1)
2-35 Conditional Branching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35-(1)
2-36 DI Branch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36-(1)
2-37 End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37-(1)
2-38 Memory Card Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38-(1)
2-39 DO Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39-(1)
2-40 DO Judgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40-(1)
2-41 Host Link Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41-(1)
2-42 Normal Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42-(1)
2-43 Display String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43-(1)
2-44 Display Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44-(1)
2-45 Display Judgement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45-(1)
2-46 Display Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46-(1)
2-47 Display Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47-(1)
2-48 Display Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48-(1)
2-49 Display Line, Display Box, Display Circle, and Display Cursor . . . . . . . 2-49-(1)
SECTION 3
Monitor Mode and Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-(1)
3-1
Testing Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-(2)
3-2
Starting Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-(5)
SECTION 4
Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-(1)
vi
4-1
Changing Scenes and Scene Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-(2)
4-2
Backing Up Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-(9)
4-3
Clearing Measurement Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-(24)
4-4
Checking Image Density Distribution: Line Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-(25)
4-5
Checking I/O Status with External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-(28)
4-6
Memory Card Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-(33)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-(1)
5-1
Entering System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-(2)
5-2
Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-(3)
5-3
Screen Display and Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-(5)
5-4
Customizing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-(17)
5-5
Setting Conditions for Saving Measurement Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-(27)
5-6
Using BUSY Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-(31)
5-7
Setting Startup Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-(33)
5-8
Setting the Calendar Date and Time (Date/Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-(34)
5-9
Checking System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-(35)
SECTION 6
Communicating with External Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-(1)
6-1
Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-(1)
6-2
Normal Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-(1)
6-3
Host Link Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-(1)
6-4
Serial Interface Menu Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-(1)
SECTION 7
Appendices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-(1)
7-1
Set Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-(2)
7-2
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-(4)
7-3
FAQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-(9)
7-4
Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-(12)
7-5
Character Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-(15)
7-6
Menu Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-(16)
Revision History
vii
$ERXWWKLV0DQXDO
This manual describes the operation of the F250-UME Application Software and it includes
the sections described below.
This is one of a pair of manuals. Refer to the following table for the contents of each manual.
Manual
1: Setup Manual
Contents
Provides information on system hardware and installation. Be sure to read this manual first.
Cat. No.
SCHB-736
This manual is provided with the Controller.
2: Operation Manual Describes the operation of the F250-UME Application
Software, including installation of the Application Software, basic operating methods, setting methods for processing items, communications methods for external
devices, and other operating procedures.
Z153-E1-02
This manual is provided on CD-ROM.
Please read the above manuals carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install or operate the Application Software.
Section 1 Basic Operating Procedures describes the basic operating procedures for the
Application Software.
Section 2 Processing Item Setting Procedures explains in more detail the basic setting
operations for the processing items that control Application Software operation.
Section 3 Testing and Starting Measurements describes the procedures used to test
operation and then actually take measurements.
Section 4 Other Functions describes additional functions, such as changing the measurement setup or backing up data.
Section 5 System Settings describes how to set conditions related to the system environment.
Section 6 Communicating with External Devices describes the methods used to connect
to and communicate with external devices.
Section 7 Appendices provides information on terminology, character codes, troubleshooting, and answers to FAQs.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section in
its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related
sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
viii
SECTION 1
Basic Operating Procedures
This section describes the basic operating procedures for the Application Software.
1-1
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(2)
1-2
Operational Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(3)
1-3
Installing the Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(4)
1-3-1
Starting the Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(4)
1-3-2
Selecting Installation Processing Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(6)
1-3-3
Executing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(7)
1-4
Displaying Images and Focussing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(10)
1-5
Menu Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(12)
1-5-1
Input Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(12)
1-5-2
Screen Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(13)
1-5-3
Creating Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(14)
1-5-4
Drawing a Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(24)
1-5-5
Inputting Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(26)
1-5-6
Inputting Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(27)
Basic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(28)
1-6-1
STEP 1: Settings for Image Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(29)
1-6-2
STEP 2: Settings for Position Displacement Compensation. . . . . . .
1-(38)
1-6-3
STEP 3: Setting Measurement Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(40)
1-6-4
STEP 4: Setting Results Output Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(58)
1-6-5
STEP 5: Start Test or Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(59)
Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(62)
1-7-1
Entering Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(62)
1-7-2
Performing Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(63)
Saving Settings and Shutting Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-(64)
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-(1)
Section 1-1
Using this Manual
1-1
Using this Manual
The structure of the PDF files in this manual is shown below. Bookmarks are
provided to link the initial file to sections and sections to detailed information.
Linked files
Processing Item Files
Initial File and Section Files
Initial file
Front Matter
Files containing only links
Individual files
Inputting Images
Camera image
About this Manual
Switch camera
Filtering again
Change filtering
Position Compensation
EC pos. comp
Binary pos. comp
Edge pos. comp
Model pos. comp
Circle pos. comp
Reset scroll
SECTION 1
Basic Operating Procedures
Scroll
General Measurements
Binary defect
Classification
SECTION 2
Detailed Setting Operations
SECTION 3
Executing Tests and
Measurements
Density defect
EC defect
EC position
Edge position
Fine matching
EC circle count
Pattern
QUEST OCV
Rotate position
ECM search
Lot No. OCV1
Labeling
Label data
Edge pitch
Density data
Measurement Support
Calculation
Elapsed time
Get unit data
Wait
Set unit data
Branch Control
SECTION 4
Other Functions
Branch
Trend monitor
DI branch
End
Results Output
Memory card data
DO judge
DO data
Host link data
Normal data
SECTION 5
System Settings
Results Display
Display string
Display measure
Display judge
Display item
Display time
Display figure
Display line/box/circle/cursor
SECTION 6
Communicating with External
Devices
Parallel Interface
Serial Interface: Normal
Serial Interface: Host Link
SECTION 7
Appendices
1-(2)
Serial Interface: Menu Operations
This manual can
be printed out by
opening the file
and following the
instructions in the
Acrobat printing
dialog box.
Section 1-2
Operational Flow
1-2
Operational Flow
Preparations
Install the Application Software in the Controller. Refer to 1-3 Installing the
Application Software.
SeeAlso
Refer to 1-6 Basic Operations to learn about the basic operational flow from
setting detection conditions to executing measurements.
Setting Detection Conditions
STEP 1: Make the settings required to input images. Refer to1-6-1 STEP 1:
Settings for Image Input.
STEP 2: Make settings to correct positioning. Refer to 1-6-2 STEP 2: Settings
for Position Displacement Compensation.
STEP 3: Set the actual measurement methods. Refer to 1-6-3 STEP 3: Setting
Measurement Methods.
STEP 4: Make settings to output the results. Refer to 1-6-4 STEP 4: Setting
Results Output Methods.
Confirming Settings and Executing
STEP 5: Perform test measurements and start executing measurements.
Refer to 1-6-5 STEP 5: Start Test or Measurement and to SECTION 3 Monitor
Mode and Run Mode.
Selecting Processing Items that Suit the Application
Refer to SECTION 2 Processing Items Setting Procedures.
Changing and Deleting Settings
Copy, clear, and change units and unit names by refer to &KDQJLQJWR2WKHU
3URFHVVLQJ,WHPVRQSDJH .
Saving Settings
1.
Save detection conditions. Refer to 1-8 Saving Settings and Shutting
Down.
2.
Back up image, system, and scene data. Refer to 4-2 Backing Up Data for
information on how to back up settings.
Application Setting Operations
1. Set conditions by product type. Refer to 4-1 Changing Scenes and Scene
Groups for information on scene and scene-group functions.
2.
Set system environment conditions. Refer to SECTION 5 System Settings.
3.
Initialize the measurement conditions that have bee set. Refer to 4-1-3 Initializing Measurement Conditions: Clearing Scenes and 7-1 Set Up Menu.
4.
Set communications specifications and I/O format for communications with
external devices. Refer to SECTION 6 Communicating with External Devices.
1.
Use Memory Cards if required. Refer to 4-6 Memory Card Operations.
2.
Check communications status with external devices if required. Refer to 45 Checking I/O Status with External Devices.
Additional Functions
Troubleshooting
HELP
When an error message is displayed on the screen, refer to 7-4 Terminology.
HELP
If you have a question, refer to 7-3 FAQ.
HELP
If you don’t understand a term, refer to 7-4 Terminology.
1-(3)
Section 1-3
Installing the Application Software
1-3
Installing the Application Software
This section describes how to install the processing items in the F250-UME
Application Software to the Controller. The Setup Menus are used to install
these processing items.
1-3-1
Starting the Setup Menu
1.
Check that the basic components are connected.
Monitor
Camera
POWER
SYNC
Console
Power supply
CHECK
Always refer to the Setup Manual when connecting components or wiring the
power supply or ground wires.
2.
Mount the F250-UME Application Software Card to Memory Card slot 0.
3.
Turn ON the power supply switch to the Monitor.
4.
Turn ON the Controller power supply.
The Language Selection Screen for the Setup Menus will be displayed.
Language
Japanese
English
CHECK
1-(4)
The language selected here applies only to the Setup Menus.
Section 1-3
Installing the Application Software
5.
Select a language.
Use the Up or Down Key on the Console to move the cursor.
Japanese: Messages will be displayed in Japanese.
English:
Messages will be displayed in English.
This manual shows screens displayed with English messages.
6.
Press the ENT Key on the Console to confirm the language selection.
After a short time, the Basic Screen for the Setup Menus will be displayed.
Set up
Select items
Install
Backup data load
Clear memory
Precaution
About the F250-UME Application Software
If the F250-UME Application Software Card is mounted to a personal computer or other device and the data changed, the Setup Menus will no longer
start properly. Never perform any of the following operations.
• Do not change file names.
• Do not move or delete files.
• Do not write data to the F250-UME Application Software Card.
• Do not format the F250-UME Application Software Card.
1-(5)
Section 1-3
Installing the Application Software
1-3-2
Selecting Installation Processing Items
The F250-UME has many processing items. Select the processing items
required for the application. Refer to SECTION 2 Processing Items Setting
Procedures for an outline of each processing item.
1.
Select Select items.
Set up
Select items
Install
Backup data load
Clear memory
A list of processing items will be displayed.
Select items
Input Image
Camera image
ON
Switch camera
ON
Change Filtering
ON
Filtering again
ON
Position Compensation
Binary pos. comp OFF
Model pos. comp OFF
End
2.
Move the cursor to the item to be installed.
3.
If that item is “OFF,” press the ENT Key.
The selections (ON/OFF) will be displayed.
Select Items
Input Image
Camera image
ON
Switch camera
ON
Change Filtering
ON
Filtering again
ON
Position Compensation
Binary pos. comp OFF
ON
Model pos. comp OFF
OFF
End
4.
Select ON.
5.
Repeat this process to set to ON the processing items to be installed and
set to OFF the items that are not to be installed.
6.
Select END.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
1-(6)
Section 1-3
Installing the Application Software
1-3-3
Executing Installation
This section describes how to install the selected processing items to the Controller.
1.
Select Install.
Set up
Select items
Install
Backup data load
Clear memory
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Selected Programs
will be installed.
The programs and data
stored at present
are cleared.
Execute
2.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The size of the processing items will be calculated to determine if they can
be installed.
If the total size of the selected processing items is too large to be installed,
a confirmation message will be displayed to ask if the files are to be compressed.
Total size of selected items
is too large to install.
Compressing programs make
the installation possible,
but startup time will
be longer.
Compress programs?
Execute Cancel
To STEP 3 Refer to page 1-(9).
Precaution
Do not input the RESET signal or turn OFF the power supply while the processing message is being displayed. If the RESET signal is input or the power
is turned OFF, data may be lost and the Controller may not start correctly the
next time.
A confirmation message will be displayed once the installation has been
completed.
Installation finished.
Put off the memory card
and restart.
OK
1-(7)
Section 1-3
Installing the Application Software
3.
Press the ENT Key.
The Main Screen for the Setup Menu will return.
Set up
Select items
Install
Backup data load
Clear memory
CHECK
4.
Turn OFF the power supply to the Controller.
5.
Remove the F250-UME from Memory Card slot 0.
6.
Turn ON the Controller power supply.
If the power is turned ON while the F250-UME is still mounted, the Setup
Menus will open. Always remove the F250-UME before turning ON the power
supply.
After a while the Camera Settings Screen will be displayed.
Camera settings
Camera
:F160-S1
Intelligent Lighting 0:
Out of use
Intelligent Lighting 1:
Out of use
Intelligent Lighting 2:
Out of use
Intelligent Lighting 3:
Out of use
End
SeeAlso
Refer to page SECTION 5 System Settings.
7.
Select the camera to be connected.
8.
If using Intelligent Lighting, select the model.
9.
Select END.
The Basic Screen will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
MON
---- ---ms
Image 0 freeze
1-(8)
Section 1-3
Installing the Application Software
Installation
without
Compressing
Files
If the total program size of the selected items is greater than the file size that
can be installed, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if the files
are to be compressed. If the files are compressed, the Controller startup time
will be longer. Use the following procedure to change the selected processing
items without compressing the files.
1.
Select Cancel from the confirmation message.
Total size of selected items
is too large to install.
Compressing programs make
the installation possible,
but startup time will
be longer.
Compress programs?
Execute Cancel
The program size and capacity will be displayed.
If you don't want to
compress programs,
please select items again
and make the total size
smaller than the capacity
Program size:5120KB
Capacity
:3840KB
OK
2.
Select OK.
The Main Screen for the Setup Menu will return.
Set up
Select items
Install
Backup data load
Clear memory
3.
SeeAlso
Select Select items and reselect the items so that the memory capacity is
not exceeded.
Refer to page 1-(6).
1-(9)
Section 1-4
Displaying Images and Focussing
1-4
Displaying Images and Focussing
This section explains how to check what kind of image is being displayed by
changing the display image to through display and how to adjust the position
of the measurement object and focus the camera.
1.
Change the display image to through display to check what kind of image
is being displayed by pressing the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
The screen for changing the display image will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : None
End
Image 0 freeze
2.
3.
Move the cursor to Freeze (Before Scroll).
Press the ENT Key.
A list of options will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
MON
---- ---ms
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Through
Image
size
: scroll)
All
Freeze
(Before
Display
results : Details
Freeze(After
scroll)
Last NG(Before
End scroll)
Last NG (After scroll)
Image 0 freeze
1-(10)
4.
Select Through.
5.
Select End.
Section 1-4
Displaying Images and Focussing
The Through Display Screen will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
MON
---- ---ms
Image 0 through
6.
Adjust the position of the measurement object so that it appears at the center of the monitor screen.
Adjusting the position of
the measurement object.
7.
Focus the Camera.
• Cameras with a light (including Intelligent Lighting) have lenses with a
fixed focal point. Adjust the Camera position based on the positioning distances in the Setup Manual to focus the Camera.
CHECK
The light level for Intelligent Lighting can be adjusted from the Controller.
Refer to page 1-(31).
• When using a Camera Unit that does not have a light, turn the focus ring
to focus the Camera.
1-(11)
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
1-5
1-5-1
Menu Operations
Input Devices
Menu operations are performed from either the Console or the serial interface.
F150-KP Console
F160-KP Console
SHIFT Key
SHIFT
ESC (escape) Key
ENT (enter) Key
ENT
Up, Down, Left, and
Right Keys (Press left,
right, up, or down.)
SHIFT
ESC
TRIG (trigger) Key
TRIG
ENT
ESC
ESC (escape) Key
TRIG
ESC
TRIG
ENT
ESC
F3
F1
F2
F4
F6
TRIG (trigger) Key
TRIG
Up, Down, Left, and
Right Keys
F5
F9
F7
F8
ENT (enter) Key
ENT
SHIFT
SHIFT Key
Function Keys
F1 to F9
SHIFT
Key
ESC: Escape Key
F150-KP
CONSOLE
Function
Returns the user to the previous menu display or operation.
TRIG: Trigger Key
Starts object measurement.
ENT: Enter Key
Executes a function or sets a value.
Note: On the F160-KP, also functions as a Cursor Key.
SHIFT Key
Must be pressed in combination with another key to have any
effect. Specific functions are assigned to combinations of the
SHIFT Key and other keys for specific screens.
Up, Down, Left,
and Right Keys
The Up and Down Keys are used to move the cursor up and down
and also to set values. The Up Key will increase a value by 1 and
the Down Key will decrease a value by 1. Hold down the Up or
Down Key to quickly increase or decrease a value.
The Left and Right Keys are used to move the cursor left or right.
Function Keys
Functions can be assigned to function keys F1 to F8. Refer to 54-1 Changing Console Key Allocations.
The display can be captured using F9. Refer to 5-4-2 Capturing
and Saving Images.
CHECK
1-(12)
Menu operations can be performed from a personal computer via a serial
interface. Refer to 6-4 Serial Interface Menu Operations.
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
1-5-2
Screen Displays
The Application Software is operated by selecting functions from menus displayed on the screen. Familiarize yourself with each function before operating
the Controller.
Scene Number
Mode
There are 32 screens. Setting
different measurement
conditions for each one allows
easy switching between
0.Scn 0=SET=
different setups.
The current operating mode is
displayed.
0.Camera image
1.
Cursor Keys
The type of image shown on the
screen is displayed in Monitor and
Run Modes.
The cursor is moved to the
desired function by pressing
the Cursor Keys.
Refer to 5-5-1 Displaying
Stored Images.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
Units
A processing item is set for each
unit.
When a measurement command is
input, units are processed in order
from unit 0.
Key Operations
Displays special key combinations at the bottom of the screen
when available.
“SFT” refers to the SHIFT Key. “SFT+ESC” indicates that the
ESC Key should be pressed while the SHIFT Key is pressed.
Sometimes the SFT Key display is abbreviated to just “S”.
Mode
Display
Meaning
SET
Used to set the inspection conditions.
MON (Monitor)
Used to check whether inspections are being performed correctly
under the set inspection conditions. The measurement results are
displayed on the monitor only. The results cannot be output to
external devices.
RUN
Performs inspection. The measurement results are output to an
external device via the parallel interface or serial interface.
SYS (System)
Used to set system conditions.
TOOL
Used to save settings and images to a computer as backup.
SAVE
Used to saves data to flash memory in the Controller. If new settings have been made, be sure to save the data before quitting.
1-(13)
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
1-5-3
Creating Flowcharts
In the Application Software, measurement processing is broken up into different processing items to facilitate a variety of applications.
Flowcharts are created using a combination of processing items to suit each
application.
When Set Mode is entered, the number 1 will be displayed below 0.Camera
image. This number is called the unit number. Processing items set for the unit
numbers.
0.Scn 0=SET=
Unit number
0.Camera image
1.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
CHECK
“Camera image” is set for unit 0 as the default processing item.
The processing items are set in order from unit 0.
Once a processing item is set for unit 1, unit 2 will automatically be displayed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
1-(14)
CHECK
There is no limit to the number of units. Any number of units can be set provided the Controller has enough free memory.
SeeAlso
Refer to SECTION 5 System Settings for information on how to check the
remaining free work memory (main memory) space.
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
When a measurement command is input, the processing will be executed in
order from the item set to unit 0. Register processing items for each unit, just
like creating a flowchart.
Flowchart Image
Start
0.
Read image from Camera.
Screen Image
0.Scn 0=SET=
1.
Perform position
displacement compensation.
2.
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.DO judge
4.
Inspect for defects.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
3.
Output measurement result
to external device.
End
1-(15)
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
The following type of processing is also possible by adjusting the registered
order.
Example: Performing Position Displacement Compensation for Two Measurement Objects in the Same Field of Vision
Flowchart Image
Start
0.
Read image from Camera.
Screen Image
0.Scn 0=SET=
1.
Perform position displacement
compensation for
measurement object 1.
2.
Inspect for defects on
measurement object 1.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
3.
Return the image to its original
position if it has been scrolled after
position displacement compensation.
4.
Perform position displacement
compensation for measurement
object 2.
5.
Inspect for defects on
measurement object 2.
6.
Output measurement result
to external device.
End
1-(16)
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.Reset scroll
4.EC pos. comp
5.Fine matching
6.DO judge
7.
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
The Application Software also has branch control processing items.
Example: Changing Inspection Conditions Based on the Upcoming Product
Product 2
Product 1
Flowchart Image
Start
Screen Image
0.
0.Scn 0 =SET=
Read image from Camera.
0.Camera image
1.Classification
2.Branch
3.Fine matching
4.End
5.Fine matching
6.End
7.
1.
Recognize model.
2.
Change measurement
conditions based on product
type.
3.
Inspect product 1 for
defects.
5.
4.
6.
End
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
Inspect product2 for
defects.
End
1-(17)
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
Registering
Processing
Items to Units
The registration procedure will be explained using the example of registering
binary position compensation, one of the position compensation processing
items. Change the procedure as required to register other processing items.
1.
Move the cursor to a free unit number and press the ENT Key.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The processing item groups will be displayed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.
Input Image
Position Compensation
Measurement
Measurement Support
Branch Control
Results Output
Results Display
2.
Select Position Compensation.
A list of the installed position compensation processing items will be displayed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.
Input Image
Position
Compensation
Binary
pos. comp
Measurement
EC pos. comp
Measurement
Edge pos. Support
comp
Branch
Control
Model
pos. comp
Results
Output
Circle
pos. comp
Results
Display
Reset
scroll
3.
Select Binary pos. comp.
Binary position compensation will be set for unit 1 and the next unit number
(unit 2 in this case) will be displayed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.
1-(18)
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
Changing to
Other
Processing
Items
1.
Move the cursor to the unit number of the processing item to be changed.
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
A list of options will be displayed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.FineChange
matching
Insert
3.
Copy
Delete
Comment
2.
Select Change.
A list of processing items will be displayed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2. Input Image
3. Position Compensation
Measurement
Measurement Support
Branch Control
Results Output
Results Display
3.
Use the same procedure as for registering new processing items to register a different item.
1-(19)
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
Inserting Units
CHECK
When a unit is inserted, the subsequent unit numbers will be increased. The
unit numbers set in other units for outputting results and branching will also be
increased automatically.
1.
Move the cursor to the unit number where a new unit is to be inserted.
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
A list of options will be displayed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
Change
3.
Insert
Copy
Delete
Comment
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
2.
Select Insert.
A list of processing items will be displayed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine
Inputmatching
Image
3. Position Compensetion
Measurement
Measurement Support
Branch Control
Results Output
Results Display
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
3.
Use the same procedure as for registering new processing items to register items for the inserted unit.
The selected processing item will be inserted.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.EC defect
3.Fine matching
4.
1-(20)
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
Copying from
Other Units
Settings data can be copied, which is convenient for reusing data when only a
part of the settings need to be changed.
1.
Move the cursor to the unit where the data to be copied is located.
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
A list of options will be displayed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.
Change
Insert
Copy
Delete
Comment
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
2.
Select Copy.
A screen for selecting the source unit for the data to be copied will be displayed.
Original unit : Unit 0
Unit 0
Execute Unit 1
Unit 2
3.
4.
Select the appropriate unit number.
Select Execute.
The data will be copied.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.Fine matching
4.
1-(21)
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
Deleting Units
CHECK
When units are deleted, the subsequent unit numbers will be decreased. The
unit numbers set in other units for outputting results and branching will also be
reduced automatically.
1.
Move the cursor to the unit to be deleted.
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
A list of options will be displayed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
Change
2.Fine
matching
3. Insert
Copy
Delete
Comment
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
2.
Select Delete.
The selected unit will be deleted and the subsequent unit numbers will be
moved up one.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Fine matching
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
1-(22)
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
Changing
Processing Item
Names
The names of processing items set to units can be changed to any name up to
16 characters long. This is a useful function for easy understanding of the settings and when setting the same processing item to many units.
1.
Move the cursor to the unit for which the name of the processing item is to
be changed. Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.
A list of options will be displayed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.
Change
Insert
Copy
Delete
Comment
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
2.
Select Comment.
A software keyboard will be displayed.
Input comment
]
[LABEL
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS
K
Y
k
y
.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
ENT:Select
SeeAlso
Ins.
Refer to page 1-(27) for information on inputting characters.
3.
4.
Set an item name of up to 16 characters long.
Move the cursor to END and press the ENT Key.
The item name will be changed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Label
3.
1-(23)
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
1-5-4
Drawing a Region
Use the following method to draw model regions and measurement regions.
The region figures that can be drawn depend on the processing item. Refer to
the explanation for each processing item for information on what figures can
be drawn.
Move the cursor with the Up, Down, Left, and Right Keys. Use these keys
together with the SHIFT Key to move the cursor quickly. Press the ENT Key at
the desired positions and press the ESC Key to undo the setting.
Measurement
region selection
Box
Drawing method
The lower right
coordinates move.
The whole
region moves.
ENT
ENT
The figure is set.
ESC
Ellipse
The lower right
coordinates move.
The whole
region moves.
ENT
ENT
The figure is set.
ENT
The figure is set.
ESC
Circle
The whole
region moves.
The diameter
changes.
ENT
ESC
Circumference
The whole
region moves.
The circumference
changes.
ENT
ENT
ESC
ESC
The width changes.
ENT
Polygon
1-(24)
Specify the
first point.
Specify the
second point.
ENT
ENT
ESC
ESC
Specify the third
and other points.
The figure is set.
The figure is set.
ENT
Press the ENT
(Up to 10 points Key twice.
can be specified.)
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
Measurement
region selection
Line
Drawing method
The whole
region moves.
ENT
The length
changes.
The width changes.
ENT
ENT
The figure is set.
ESC
ESC
Arc
The whole
The end
region moves. point moves.
The mid-point
moves.
The width
changes.
ENT
ENT
ENT
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
Drawing Mode
The
figure
is set.
For many processing items, up to 3 figures can be combined to draw a measurement region. Select either the OR or NOT drawing mode.
Drawing
mode
Function
OR
Use this mode to draw a shape as a model or measurement region.
All of the shapes that are drawn are registered as one region.
NOT
Use to delete part of a region.
In this example, the gray area will be the measurement region.
Regions with complicated shapes can be drawn and areas can be omitted
from the measurement region by combining figures.
Figure 1 (drawn using OR)
Figure 2 (drawn using NOT)
Figure 3 (drawn using OR)
1-(25)
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
1-5-5
Inputting Values
This section explains how to input values when setting measurement conditions or communications specifications.
1.
Move the cursor to the item for which a value is to be changed.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[ 2000.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[ 0.000 : 511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[ 0.000 : 483.000]
End
2.
Press the ENT Key.
The cursor will change to a cursor the size of a single digit.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[
2000.000 : 0247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[
0.000 : 511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[
0.000 : 483.000]
End
3.
Move the cursor to the digit to be changed.
Use the Left and Right Keys to move the cursor.
4.
Change the value.
Use the Up Key to increase the value.
Use the Down Key to decrease the value.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
0
[ 2000.000 : 0047808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[ 0.000 : 511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
5.
Repeat these steps to change other values.
6.
Press the ENT Key.
The values will be set.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[ 2000.000 :
25000.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[ 0.000 : 511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[ 0.000 : 483.000]
End
1-(26)
Section 1-5
Menu Operations
1-5-6
Inputting Characters
This section explains how to input characters. The software keyboard shown
below is displayed on the screen where characters are input.
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS ‘ “
1.
K
Y
k
y
.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
These characters can be input.
Inserts a space.
Deletes 1character to the right of the I cursor.
Deletes 1character to the left of the I cursor.
Switches between insert (default)/overwrite.
‘ Moves the I cursor to the left.
“ Moves the I cursor to the right.
END Ends character input.
SPC
DEL
BS
INS
END
Move the cursor to the character to be input.
cursor
]
[
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
2.
Cursor
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS ← →
K
Y
k
y
.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
Press the ENT Key.
The character is set and the I cursor moves one space to the right.
3.
Repeat these steps to input more characters.
4.
Once all required characters have been input, move the cursor to END.
]
[LABEL
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS ← →
K
Y
k
y
.
ENT:Select
5.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
Ins.
Press the ENT Key.
The characters will be set.
CHECK
Characters can be input from a personal computer via a serial interface. Refer
to 6.4 Serial Interface (Menu Operations).
1-(27)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1-6
Basic Operations
This section describes the basic flow of operations up to the setting of measurement conditions and executing measurements. The explanation is based
on the use of the Fine Matching processing item for the measurement method.
Detecting Label Defects
0.Scn0
RUN
NG
Pattern defects
Minor defect
1
Printing defect
Edge defect
step
2
step
Settings for image input
Settings for position
displacement compensation
of measurement object
3Setting measurement method
step
4
step
Settings for measurement
result output method
5
step
Start test or measurement.
1-(28)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1-6-1
STEP 1: Settings for Image Input
To set the inspection conditions, change first to Set Mode.
When Set Mode is entered, the default processing item for unit 0 will be “Camera image.” The conditions for inputting images are set under this processing
item.
1.
Display the Basic Screen and move the cursor to MON and press the ENT
Key.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Image 0 freeze
2.
Select SET.
The initial screen for Set Mode will be displayed.
Camera Image is the default processing item for unit 0.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
3.
Select 0. Camera image.
The initial screen for Camera Image will be displayed.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
1-(29)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
The items that can be set under Camera Image can be broadly classified into
three groups:
• The shutter speed and other conditions relating to when the image is captured (camera settings).
• Selection of which camera image will be measured (camera selection).
• Settings to make the image easier to measure (filtering).
Camera Image
Camera
settings
Camera
0
Image buffer
(for Camera 0)
Camera
1
Image buffer
(for Camera 1)
Filtering
0
Image 0
Filtering
1
Image 1
Camera
selection
Camera
2
Image buffer
(for Camera 2)
Camera
3
Image buffer
(for Camera 3)
* Only one camera can be selected.
The Controller has two image memories. Two images, Image 0 and Image 1,
are stored for the camera image selected under Select Camera. Both images
are for the same Camera but different filtering can be applied to each of the
images.
Some processing items require selection of either Image 0 or Image 1 for
object measurement and other processing items measure only Image 0. Refer
to the explanations for each item for details.
In this section where the example of Fine Matching is used, measurements will
be performed on Image 0.
1-6-1-1
Camera Settings
Shutter Speed
Change the shutter speed when the object is moving quickly, causing the
image to be blurred.
The shutter speed can be changed from the menu for F150-S1A and F160-S1
Cameras only.
For F150-S1A Cameras
Object movement
Shutter speed
Slow
1/100 s
1/500 s
1/2000 s
1/10000 s
Fast
For F160-S1 Cameras
Object movement
Slow
(Default setting: 1/2000 s)
Fast
Shutter speed
1/120 s
1/200 s
1/500 s
1/1000 s
1/2000 s
1/4000 s
1/8000 s
1/20000 s
(Default setting: 1/2000 s)
1-(30)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1.
Select Camera settings.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
The initial Camera Settings Screen will be displayed.
Camera settings
Shutter speed(Cam0)
Light control(Cam0)
Calibration(Cam0)
Shutter speed(Cam1)
Light control(Cam1)
Calibration(Cam1)
Shutter speed(Cam2)
Light control(Cam2)
2.
Select Shutter speed for the Camera to be used.
The shutter speed selections will be displayed.
Shutter speed(Camera0)
1/ 120s
1/ 200s
1/ 500s
1/ 1000s
1/ 2000s
1/ 4000s
1/ 8000s
1/20000s
3.
4.
Select the shutter speed while monitoring the image.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Light Control
SeeAlso
CHECK
When using Cameras with Intelligent Lighting, the light level can be adjusted
from the Controller. Before using Intelligent Lighting, be sure to change the
settings in SYS/Camera settings.
Refer to 5-2 Camera Settings.
When the shutter speed is faster than 1/2000 s, the brightness of the lighting
may not change even if the light level is changed.
Intelligent lighting uses pulse lighting synchronized with the shutter speed and
the light level can be adjusted by changing the pulse width. If the light level is
at the maximum setting of 7, the pulse width is approximately 450 ms and the
time the shutter is open is about the same as when the shutter speed is set to
1/2000 s. This means that settings will become invalid (the brightness will not
1-(31)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
change) if the shutter speed is faster than 1/2000 s and the light level setting is
high.
Example: When Shutter Speed is 1/4000 s, Light Level Adjusted to 4
Light level: 7 (Approx. 450m s max.)
m
Light level: 4
(Approx. 260 s max.)
Flash
Shutter
■
Light level adjustment:
Enabled
Light level adjustment:
Disabled
Lighting Control Screen
B. Light level
Light control(Camera 0)
Lighting pattern 1
50000
A. Segment displays
C. Sample lighting pattern number
A. Segment Display
F150-LTC20
F160-LTC20
As viewed from
this perspective
E
A
B
E A C
D
Lighting can be adjusted
for 5 areas.
CHECK
F150-LTC50
F160-LTC50
HD
B F
C
G
Lighting can be adjusted
for 8 areas.
The lit segments are displayed with thick lines. The brightness depends on the
set light level. Refer to page 1-(33).
B. Light Levels
The light level for each segment is displayed in a 5- or 8-digit value, with each
digit representing the light level of one of the segments. The light levels are
displayed from 0 to 7, with 0 indicating that the light is OFF. The higher the setting, the higher the light level.
F150-LTC50
F160-LTC50
33333333
F150-LTC20
F160-LTC20
33333
Segment A level
Segment B level
Segment E level
Segment D level
Segment C level
Segment A level
Segment B level
Segment C level
Segment D level
Segment H level
Segment G level
Segment F level
Segment E level
C. Number of Sample Lighting Patterns
There are 15 sample lighting patterns registered in advance.
1-(32)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
■
Adjustment Method 1: Sample Lighting Patterns
There are 15 lighting patterns registered in advance. The lighting can be set
simply by going through the different patterns in order and selecting the one
that gives the clearest image. Use the SHIFT+Left and Right Keys to switch
between sample patterns.
F150-LTC20, F160-LTC20
■ Not lit
@ Lit (maximum light level)
Pattern LIght level Pattern Light level Pattern Light level Pattern Light level Pattern Light level
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
1
50000
4
07070
7
22727
10
00070
13
52222
2
03333
5
27272
8
07000
11
00007
14
17777
3
07777
6
00707
9
00700
12
51111
15
27777
F150-LTC50, F160-LTC50
Pattern Light level Pattern Light level Pattern Light level Pattern Light level Pattern Light level
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
1
77777777
4
00004444
7
2
44440000
5
00007777
8
3
77770000
6
70707070
9
07070707
70000000
07000000
10
00700000
13
00000700
11
00070000
14
00000070
12
00007000
15
00000007
1-(33)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
■
Adjustment Method 2: Adjusting Light Levels by Segment
The light level for each segment can be set separately to a value between 0
and 7. The setting “0” represents the unlit state, and the higher the setting
value the higher the light level. Light levels can also be set by adjusting the
light levels for the segments separately after selecting a sample lighting pattern.
Use the Left and Right Keys to select the segment to be adjusted and use the
Up and Down Keys to adjust the light level.
F150-LTC20, F160-LTC20
F150-LTC50, F160-LTC50
1.
Select Camera settings.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
The initial Camera Settings Screen will be displayed.
Camera settings
Shutter speed(Cam0)
Light control(Cam0)
Calibration(Cam0)
Shutter speed(Cam1)
Light control(Cam1)
Calibration(Cam1)
Shutter speed(Cam2)
Light control(Cam2)
2.
1-(34)
Select Light control for the Camera number being used.
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
The Light Control Settings Screen will be displayed.
Light control(Camera0)
Lighting pattern5:27272
SFT+
:Sample
:Segment
:Light volume
Graphic showing light level
3.
CHECK
Switch the sample pattern lighting level using the SHIFT+Left/Right Keys.
For fine adjustment of light levels, move to the desired segment using the
Right and Left Keys and adjust the light level using the Up and Down Keys.
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
Calibration
If all light adjustments are set to 5 or higher, there may be insufficient light
emitted if the distance between measurements is approximately 15 ms or less.
If this happens, set the light level to 4 or less.
Calibration can be set to output the measurement results in physical units.
Set the relationship between the physical coordinates and the camera coordinates to convert the measurement results from pixels to physical units, such
as mm, mm, or cm.
This section gives an outline only. Refer to 2-1 Inputting Camera Images for
details on calibration.
CHECK
To output measurement results in physical units, set Coordinate mode/Calibration to ON for each processing item.
If Calibration remains set to OFF, the default settings will remain, and measurements using the Camera coordinates will be output.
1-6-1-2
Selecting the Camera
Up to 4 Cameras can be connected. The Select Camera setting is used to
select the Camera image that will be used for measurement.
CHECK
The Camera image selected here will be used for all subsequent unit measurements. To switch to a different Camera part way through processing, use
the Switch Camera processing item. Other Camera images stored in the
image buffers can be imported to Image 0 and Image 1.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Density defect
2.Binary defect
3.Fine matching
4.Switch camera
5.Density defect
6Binary defect
The Camera image selected at
0. Camera image will be used
for measurement.
The Camera image selected
using 4. Switch camera will be
used for measurement.
1-(35)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
Note Switch camera only switches between the images saved to Image 0 and
Image 1 from the image buffers. New images cannot be sent to the image buffers using this processing item.
1.
Select Select camera.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
A list of Camera numbers will be displayed.
Select camera
Camera 0
Camera 1
Camera 2
Camera 3
2.
3.
Select the number of the Camera to be used.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
1-6-1-3
Filtering
The image read by the Camera can be manipulated to create an image that is
easier to measure. Image filtering is set by using 3 functions: Filtering Order,
Filtering, and BGS Levels.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
The Controller has two image memories, and Filtering, BGS Levels, and Filtering Order can be set for each.
This section gives an outline only. Refer to 2-1 Inputting Camera Images for
details on filtering.
1-(36)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1-6-1-4
Frame/Field
The Frame/Field function is used to select the unit for one image. Normally, it
is sufficient to use the default setting of Frame.
If the unit is changed to Field, the resolution in the vertical direction is halved
but the image input time is reduced, allowing faster processing.
Field images
Even
Odd
Images showing alternate fields
Resolution: 512 × 242 (H × V)
Resolution: 512 × 242 (H × V)
One frame image is created when
two field images are combined.
Frame image
Resolution: 512 × 484 (H × V)
This section gives an outline only. Refer to 2-1 Inputting Camera Images for
details on Frame/Field.
1-(37)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1-6-2
STEP 2: Settings for Position Displacement Compensation
The position displacement compensation processing items are used when the
position and orientation of measurement objects are not consistent. By using
this function, the displacement between a reference position and the current
position is obtained, and this displacement is compensated for in measurements.
Select the position compensation processing items suitable for the measurement object.
Reference Position
The reference position is used so that the measurement region and measurement object are in the correct positions.
Measurement region
Measurement object
1-(38)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
Measurement Object Displaced
Without compensation, measurement is
performed with part of the measurement
object outside the measurement region.
By making position displacement compensation settings...
Measurement is performed after the
image is returned to the reference
position.
Measurement is performed after the
measurement region is moved to
compensate for the displacement.
In either case, measurement is performed with
the whole measurement object in the
measurement region.
1-(39)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1-6-3
STEP 3: Setting Measurement Methods
This section describes how to inspect for defects using the Fine Matching processing item.
The registered image for an acceptable product and the input image are overlaid (matched) and the differences are detected. This enables small defects in
the pattern and writing on the measurement object to be detected with a high
level of accuracy.
OK Image
(registered)
Image to be
inspected
Images overlaid
Defects are displayed using the NG
color. Defects are judged by the area of
difference from the OK image.
0.Scn 0
MON
NG
Pattern defect
Minute defect
Edge defect
Printing error
Use the following procedure to set Fine Matching for unit 1.
1.
Move the cursor to unit 1 and press the ENT Key.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
1-(40)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
The processing item groups will be displayed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.
Input Image
Position Compensation
Measurement
Measurement Support
Branch Control
Results Output
Results Display
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
2.
Select Measurement.
A list of processing items will be displayed.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
Binary defect
1.
Classification
Input Image
Density defect
Position
ECCompensation
defect
Measurement
ECM search
Measurement
Support
EC position
position
BranchEdge
Control
matching
ResultsFine
Output
Results Display
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
3.
Select Fine matching.
Fine Matching will be set for unit 1.
CHECK
If processing items are set for units after the unit to which Fine Matching has
been set, care must be taken when manipulating images. Refer to page 1(57).
Operational Flow
(As required)
1
2
Select the
method for
matching with
the model.
Change the
labeling
conditions.
(As required)
3
4
5
Register the
model.
Set the
judgement
conditions.
Change the
differential
judgement
value.
6
(As required)
Change the
detailed
conditions.
(As required)
7
8
Set the
coordinate
mode.
Reference
the model.
1-(41)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1-6-3-1
Selecting the Method for Matching with Model
This section describes how to select a matching method suitable for the measurement object.
Measurement conditions
Boundary inspection: ON
Defect inspection : Labeling
Target
:
Both
End
Color for defects (Both*, white, black)
Processing time is reduced if either white or black
is selected when the defect color is consistent.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Use the following as a guide for selection:
Boundary inspection: ON
Defect inspection: Labeling
To detect pattern
defects
(Choose the most stable method.)
Boundary inspection: ON
Defect inspection: Binary
For the fastest
inspections
Boundary inspection: OFF
Defect inspection: Labeling
When there are
defects near the edge
of the measurement
object
Boundary inspection: ON
Defect inspection: Labeling
To detect minute
defects
HELP
Refer to page 1-(43) for information on boundary inspection and defect inspection methods.
1.
Select Fine matching.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Fine matching
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
1-(42)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
The initial screen for fine matching will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Labeling
Model registration
Judgement conditions
Differencial image
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
Model reference
2.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Boundary inspection: ON
Defect inspection : Labeling
Target
:
Both
End
3.
4.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
HELP
Boundary Inspections
Boundary inspections match the boundary areas (areas where the density
changes).
• OFF
This method masks the boundary, excluding it from inspection. This
means that any defects near the boundary will not be detected. The
boundary level sets the number of pixels near the boundary that will be
excluded from the inspection.
SeeAlso
See page 1-(53).
Model
Inspection image
If the measurement object is
displaced slightly higher, the
boundary will be detected as
differing from the registered
1 square = 1 pixel
model.
When Boundary inspection is
OFF: The range of pixels set
for the boundary level are
excluded from the
measurement on both sides of
the boundary.
• ON*
The whole area is inspected and defects near the boundary will be
detected. The processing time, however, will be longer because eroded
and dilated models are matched to prevent inspection mistakes caused by
measurement object displacement. Only defects detected for both models
will be judged as defects. The size of dilation and erosion can be set using
the boundary level.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1-(43)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
SeeAlso
See page 1-(53).
Dilated Model
Eroded Model
Example: Dilation by 3
pixels when the boundary
level is set to 3.
HELP
Example: Erosion by 3
pixels when the boundary
level is set to 3.
Defect Inspection Methods
An image showing the difference between the model image and inspection
image will be converted internally to a binary image. The method for inspecting defects from those binary images is selected here.
• Labeling*
One group of white pixels is detected as one label and one label that
matches the set conditions will be evaluated to determine if it is a defect
or not.
One defect (max. area)
One defect
One defect
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
• Binary
The total area of the white pixels is evaluated to determine if there are
defects or not.
Total area of white pixels
1-(44)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1-6-3-2
Changing Labeling Conditions
When Labeling area is selected as the defect inspection method, the following
labeling conditions can be changed to match the inspection goals.
Labeling
Area
[
Sort
:
0.000 : 247808.000 ]
:
Area descending order
Label No. :[ 0]
Area range for labels (0 to 9,999,999.999 (0 to 247,808.000*))
Label number for which to inspect for defects (0 to 999 (0*))
End
Conditions for reassigning label numbers
Area descending order:*
Sorts in descending order by area.
Area ascending:
Sorts in ascending order by area.
Gravity X descending:
Sorts in descending order by center of gravity X coordinate. (See note.)
Gravity X ascending:
Sorts in ascending order by center of gravity X coordinate. (See note.)
Gravity Y descending:
Sorts in descending order by center of gravity Y coordinate. (See note.)
Gravity Y ascending:
Sorts in ascending order by center of gravity Y coordinate. (See note.)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Note
When X and Y center of gravity are sorted, the upper left corner of the screen is the origin.
X The coordinate system set under
calibration will not be affected.
0
Y
Sort example:
Labeling result
Label numbers in
descending order
by area
Label numbers in
ascending order by
X center of gravity
2
1
0
1
1.
2
Label numbers in
descending order by
Y center of gravity
0
1 2
0
Select Labeling.
1.Fine matching
Measurement conditions
Labeling
Model registration
Judgement conditions
Differencial image
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
Model reference
1-(45)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
The Labeling Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Labeling
Area
[
Sort
:
0.000 : 247808.000 ]
:
Area descending order
Label No. :[ 0]
End
SeeAlso
Refer to page 1-(26) for information on inputting values.
2.
Change the settings.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
1-6-3-3
Registering Models
An image of an acceptable product is registered as the model. The image of
the measurement object read by the Camera is compared with this model and
defects are detected where there are differences from the model.
CHECK
The image stored to Image 0 is used as the measurement image for Fine
Matching.
CHECK
The model registration range is (6,6) to (505,477).
If pre-processing (filtering) is set for the measurement image, the range that
can be registered will be reduced further.
Screen size
Filter size of 5 ™ 5
512 pixels
-2 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3
-1 pixel
484
pixels
Registration range:
(6,6) to (505,477)
1-(46)
Registration range:
(8,8) to (503,475)
Registration range:
(7,7) to (504,476)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1.
Select Model registration.
1.Fine matching
Measurement conditions
Labeling
Model registration
Judgement conditions
Differencial image
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
Model reference
The Model Registration Screen will be displayed.
Model registration
New
Box
End
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
SeeAlso
Refer to page 1-(24) for methods for drawing regions.
2.
Select New.
3.
Select the desired figure.
4.
Select the desired drawing mode (OR/NOT).
An arrow cursor will appear.
Up to three figures (0, 1, and 2)
can be drawn.
Model registration
5.
CHECK
[0]
492,405
Draw the region to be registered as the model with the selected figure.
The range that can be registered as a model is (6,6) to (505,477).
1-(47)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
The figure will be registered.
Once three figures have been drawn,
Add will no longer be displayed.
Model registration
Add
Figure0
End
6.
If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
7.
Repeat steps 3 to 5 as necessary to create the desired shape.
8.
After drawing is completed, select End.
The measurement region will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return. The model region will be displayed.
CHECK
Figures drawn using OR mode are displayed with solid lines and figures drawn
using NOT mode are displayed with dotted lines.
Figure 1 (drawn using OR)
Figure 2 (drawn using NOT)
Figure 3 (drawn using OR)
CHECK
Set the model region so that no more than three areas lie along any one
straight line.
INCORRECT
Rectangle (drawn using OR)
Circumference (drawn using NOT)
Circle (drawn using NOT)
1
1-(48)
2
3
4
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
Correcting or
Clearing Figures
1.
In the screen for step 5 above, select the figure to be changed or cleared
using the Up and Down Keys and press the ENT Key.
Figure 1
Figure 0
Model registration
Add
Figure0
Figure1
End
The figure for the figure number selected using the cursor will be displayed
with solid lines. The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed.
Correct
Clear
2.
Select either Correct or Clear and press the ENT Key.
If Correct is selected, the cursor will be displayed. Correct the size and position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
1-6-3-4
Setting the Judgement Conditions
Make the setting for number of labels, area, and center of gravity.
Range for an OK judgement
Judgement conditions
Quantity : 0 [ 0: 0]
:
Area
123.152
[
0.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 100
[
0.000 : 511.000]
Gravity Y : 100
[
0.000 : 483.000]
End
Range for number of labels (0 to 1,000)
(The total white pixel area is counted as one label
when defect inspection is set to Binary.)
Area range (0 to 9,999,999.999)*
X axis movement range (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)*
Y axis movement range (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)*
* When the defect inspection is set to Labeling,
these settings are the judgement conditions for
the specified label number.
: Measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
1.Fine matching
Measurement conditions
Labeling
Model registration
Judgement conditions
Differencial image
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
Model reference
1-(49)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
The settings screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Quantity : 0 [ 0: 0]
:
Area
123.152
[
0.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 100
[
0.000 : 511.000]
Gravity Y : 100
[
0.000 : 483.000]
End
SeeAlso
Refer to page 1-(26) for information on inputting values.
2.
Make the settings for each item.
3.
Select End.
The judgement condition settings will be registered and the screen in (1.)
will return.
1-6-3-5
Changing Differential Judgements as Required
Differential judgement values use the basic gradation of the differences
between the model and measurement object images. Differential judgement
values can be set between 1 and 255. Pixels in areas with a difference greater
than the differential judgement value are converted to 1 (white) and all other
pixels are converted to 0 (black). Thus, only the defects are converted to white
pixels and are measured.
The default differential judgement value of 50 is usually sufficient, but change
this value if the defects are not being detected properly.
Model image
Inspection image
Overlaid
Pixels in areas with a differential
greater than the differential judgement
value are converted to 1 (white).
All other pixels (no difference to
model) are converted to 0 (black).
1-(50)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1.
Display the image of an NG object to enable the differential judgement value to be adjusted while looking at the differential image.
1.Fine matching
Measurement conditions
Labeling
Model registration
Judgement conditions
Differential image
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
Model reference
2.
Select Differential image
The settings screen will be displayed.
The differential image will be shown within the model registration region.
The rest of the screen will be black.
Differential image
(Black)
SFT+
Difference:[ 50]
OK
:Switch image
Model registration
region
CHECK
There are two differential images, one showing only black defects and the
other showing only white defects. The differential value can be set separately
for each.
Example:
Black defects
(Black marks when compared to model image)
White defects
(White marks when compared with model image)
1-(51)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
3.
Use the SHIFT+Left and SHIFT+Right Keys to switch between the white
defect and black defect images.
Differential image
(White)
SFT+
4.
Difference:[ 50]
OK
:Switch image
Move the cursor to the differential value (difference) and use the Left and
Right Keys to change the value.
Change the value until the defect is displayed in white.
Right Key: Increases the value by 1.
Left Key: Decreases the value by 1.
Repeat the above two steps to adjust the differential value for the other image.
5.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
1-6-3-6
Changing Detailed Conditions as Required
Change the detailed conditions if required when matching is not stable.
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
1.Fine matching
Measurement conditions
Labeling
Model registration
Judgement conditions
Differencial image
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
Model reference
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Boundary level
Perturbation
Normalization
Defect display
:
:
:
:
[3]LVL
OFF
OFF
Simple
End
SeeAlso
Refer to page 1-(26) for information on inputting values.
2.
1-(52)
Make the settings for each item.
Refer to the next page for details.
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
3.
Select End.
The detailed conditions settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will
return.
CHECK
Boundary Level
Re-register the model if the edge level has been changed.
Select the extent to which the boundary difference (change in density) will be
absorbed. Set a value between 1 and 5 (3*). The usage of the boundary level
setting depends on the setting for the Boundary Inspection. Refer to the following information for details.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
SeeAlso
CHECK
Perturbation
See page 1-(43).
Re-register the model if the boundary level has been changed.
Select whether or not to perform a search near the registered model position.
This function can be set to OFF* or ON. If OFF is selected, matching is performed only at the registered position, which reduces processing time.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
ON
OFF
3 pixels
3 pixels
4 pixels
4 pixels
Matching performed for the
registered model position
and surrounding area.
Density
Normalization
Matching performed for
registered model position only.
This function is used to select whether or not to normalize the density in line
with the brightness of the registered model. The selections are OFF* and ON.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
If ON is selected, matching is performed after the density is compensated,
even if the overall brightness of the image has changed. This means that the
measurement is less likely to be affected by lighting variations.
Model image
Inspection image
(Darker overall)
Normalization
1-(53)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
Defect Display
This function is used to select the display method for defects or burrs.
The display will change depending on the settings for the defect inspection.
SeeAlso
See page 1-(44).
Selection
Simple*
Defect
inspection
method
Defect display position
Labeling
The cursor will be
displayed at the center
of the set label.
Binary
Detail
The cursor will be
displayed at the center
of gravity of the defects.
If there is more than one
defect, the cursor will be
displayed at the center
of the white pixels, so it
may not be on a defect.
Labeling
The set label will be
displayed in the NG
color.
Binary
All defects will be
displayed in the NG
color.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1-(54)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1-6-3-7
Setting the Coordinate Mode
When outputting the defect position coordinates, select the type of coordinates.
Before scroll:Output made using the coordinate values before
position displacement compensation
After scroll*: Output made using the coordinate values after
position displacement compensation
Coordinate mode
Refer to 7-4 Terminology for differences between
output coordinates.
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
ON:
Output made using coordinate values set using calibration
OFF*: Output made using Camera coordinate values
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the coordinate mode is changed after the judgement conditions have been
set, the measurement results will change also. Change the judgement conditions to enable correct measurement.
1.
Select Coordinate mode.
1.Fine matching
Measurement conditions
Labeling
Model registration
Judgement conditions
Differencial image
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
Model reference
The Coordinate Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
1-(55)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1-6-3-8
Referencing Models
Models can be displayed on screen to check what kind of images are registered as models.
1.
Select Model reference.
1.Fine matching
Measurement conditions
Labeling
Model registration
Judgement conditions
Differencial image
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
Model reference
The image that is registered as the model will be displayed.
Model reference
ESC:End
2.
Press the ESC Key.
The screen in (1.) will return.
1-(56)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
HELP
Handling Images for Fine Matching
When Fine Matching is executed, the differential image (where only the difference between the model and inspection images has been extracted) is stored
as Image 1.
If Image 1 is to be used for measurement for subsequent units, set Change Filtering before the next processing item and obtain the image stored in the
image buffer again.
Fine matching uses Image 0 for
measurement
Camera
setting
Camera
0
Image buffer
(for Camera 0)
Camera
1
Image buffer
(for Camera 1)
Filter
0
Image 0
Filter
1
Image 1
Camera
selection
Camera
2
Image buffer
(for Camera 2)
Camera
3
Image buffer
(for Camera 3)
The differential image is stored
after fine matching is executed.
Setting Example
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Fine matching
2.Change Filtering
3.Binary defect
Image 1 to be used for
measurement
Image obtained again from image buffer
1-(57)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1-6-4
STEP 4: Setting Results Output Methods
This function is used to set the method for outputting measurement results to
an external device.
When measurement is executed, the overall judgement (OK or NG) for the set
data is output to the parallel interface OR signal.
Only results from measurements performed in Run Mode will be output.
Results of measurements executed in Monitor Mode will not be output to an
external device.
Set the processing items for the desired results output as outlined in the following table.
Data to be output
Appropriate
processing items
Judgement (OK or NG) output via a parallel interface
DO Judgement
Measurement output via a parallel interface
DO Data
Measurement in normal format output via a serial interface
Normal Data
Measurement in Host Link format output via a serial interface Host Link Data
Measurement output to a Memory Card
1-(58)
Memory Card Data
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1-6-5
STEP 5: Start Test or Measurement
This section explains how to check if measurements are being correctly performed with the set measurement conditions using Monitor Mode, and how to
make actual measurements using Run Mode.
1-6-5-1
Entering Monitor Mode
Use the following procedure to check that measurements are being correctly
performed with the set measurement conditions.
1.
Display the Set Mode Screen.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Fine matching
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
2.
Press the ESC Key to leave Set Mode and enter Monitor Mode.
0.Scn 0
MON
---- ---ms
Image 0 freeze
1-(59)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
1-6-5-2
Test Measurement
Use the following procedure to execute measurements according to the conditions set for the scene currently displayed. The test is completed internally by
the Controller and the measurement results are not output via serial or parallel
interfaces. The measurement commands can be input, however, via serial or
parallel interfaces.
SeeAlso
Refer to SECTION 6 Communicating with External Devices.
1.
Press the TRIG Key on the Console or input the measurement command
from an external device.
Overall judgement
0.Scn 0
Measurement time
OK 67ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
Measurement will be executed and the measurement results displayed on
the screen.
1-6-5-3
Changing Results Display
Detailed measurements results can be displayed on the screen in Monitor or
Run mode. This is useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
1.
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
0.Scn 0
NG 67ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
The screen for changing the measurement display settings will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
MON
NG 67ms
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : None
End
Image 0 freeze
1-(60)
Section 1-6
Basic Operations
2.
3.
Change Display results to Details.
Select End.
The Measurement Screen will return.
The detailed screen for unit 0 will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 MON
0.Camera image
NG 67ms
Judge:OK
Image 0 freeze
4.
Press the Down Key to switch to unit 1 display.
The detailed screen for unit 1 (Fine Matching) will be displayed.
Measurement display
0.Scn 0 MON
1.Fine matching
NG 67ms
Judge
:NG
Quantity : 1
Area
:12
Gravity X :290.000
Gravity Y :280.000
Image 0 freeze
5.
Press the SHIFT+ Right or Left Key to switch between measurement display and position display.
Position display
0.Scn 0 MON
1.Fine matching
NG 67ms
Image 0 freeze
1-(61)
Section 1-7
Run Mode
1-7
1-7-1
Run Mode
Entering Run Mode
1.
Move the cursor to MON and press the ENT Key.
0.Scn 0
OK 67ms
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Image 0 freeze
The mode selections will be displayed.
2.
Select RUN to enter Run Mode.
Run Mode will be entered.
1-(62)
Section 1-7
Run Mode
1-7-2
Performing Measurement
Use the following procedure to execute measurement according to the conditions set for the scene currently displayed. The measurement results will be
output to external devices as well.
Press the TRIG Key on the Console or input the measurement command from
an external device.
Overall judgement
0.Scn 0
RUN
Measurement result
OK
67ms
Image 0 freeze
Measurement will be executed and the measurement results will be displayed
on the screen.
1-(63)
Section 1-8
Saving Settings and Shutting Down
1-8
Saving Settings and Shutting Down
Save settings to flash memory before turning the power OFF.
Precaution
Flash memory data is loaded each time the Controller is started. Therefore,
when settings have been changed, be sure to save then to flash memory
before turning OFF the power. If the power is turned OFF without saving new
settings, all of the setting changes will be lost.
Stored images cannot be saved to flash memory so all stored images will be
cleared when the power is turned OFF. If stored images are to be kept, backup
the images to a personal computer or Memory Card. Refer to SECTION 4
Other Functions.
1.
Display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
0.Scn 0
2.
MON
---- ---ms
Move the cursor to MON (or RUN) and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
3.
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
---- ---ms
Select SAVE.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Setting data will saved.
Execute
4.
Precaution
Cancel
Select Execute.
Do not turn OFF the power or input a RESET signal while a message is
being displayed in any save or load operation. Data in memory will be destroyed, and the Controller may not operate correctly the next time it is
started.
Once the setting data has been saved, the screen in (1.) return.
5.
CHECK
Turn OFF the power supply to the Controller to shut down.
Using the Scene Group Function
The scene data set to scene group 0 and the system data will be saved to the
Controller flash memory. If this save operation is executed, the settings data
for scene groups 1 to 31 will be saved to the Memory Card mounted to drive 1.
The Memory Card data will be overwritten.
1-(64)
SECTION 2
Processing Items Setting Procedures
This section describes the methods for setting processing items.
,QSXWWLQJ
,PDJHV
3RVLWLRQ
&RPSHQVDWLRQ
*HQHUDO
0HDVXUHPHQWV
0HDVXUHPHQW
6XSSRUW
%UDQFK
&RQWURO
2XWSXW
5HVXOWV
2XWSXW
5HVXOWV
'LVSOD\
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-30
2-31
2-32
2-33
2-34
2-35
2-36
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-41
2-42
2-43
2-44
2-45
2-46
2-47
2-48
2-49
Inputting Camera Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Filtering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering Again. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Binary Position Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EC Position Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edge Position Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model Position Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circle Position Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detecting Binary Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Density Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EC Defect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EC Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edge Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fine Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EC Circle Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QUEST Character Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ECM Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lot Number OCV 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edge Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Density Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Get Unit Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Unit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trend Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conditional Branching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DI Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Card Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO Judgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host Link Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Judgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Line, Display Box, Display Circle, and Display Cursor
2-1-(1)
2-2-(1)
2-3-(1)
2-4-(1)
2-5-(1)
2-6-(1)
2-7-(1)
2-8-(1)
2-9-(1)
2-10-(1)
2-11-(1)
2-12-(1)
2-13-(1)
2-14-(1)
2-15-(1)
2-16-(1)
2-17-(1)
2-18-(1)
2-19-(1)
2-20-(1)
2-21-(1)
2-22-(1)
2-23-(1)
2-24-(1)
2-25-(1)
2-26-(1)
2-27-(1)
2-28-(1)
2-29-(1)
2-30-(1)
2-31-(1)
2-32-(1)
2-33-(1)
2-34-(1)
2-35-(1)
2-36-(1)
2-37-(1)
2-38-(1)
2-39-(1)
2-40-(1)
2-41-(1)
2-42-(1)
2-43-(1)
2-44-(1)
2-45-(1)
2-46-(1)
2-47-(1)
2-48-(1)
2-49-(1)
2-(1)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
2-1
Inputting Camera Images
This section describes how to make the series of settings required when storing conditions for reading Camera images and storing measurement object
images to Image 0 or Image 1.
A Camera image must be read to perform measurements, and Camera image
is thus set for unit 0 by default. Do not delete Camera image from unit 0 or
change it to another processing item.
Inputting camera
image
Camera
settings
Camera
0
Camera
1
Image buffer
(for Camera 0)
Filtering
0
Image 0
Filtering
1
Image 1
Image buffer
(for Camera 1)
Camera
selection
2-1-(1)
Camera
2
Image buffer
(for Camera 2)
Camera
3
Image buffer
(for Camera 3)
Inputting Camera Images
2-1-1
Section 2-1
Camera Settings
2-1-1-1
Shutter Speed
Change the shutter speed when the object is moving quickly, causing the
image to be blurred.
The shutter speed can be changed from the menu for F150-S1A and F160-S1
Cameras only.
Refer to 6(&7,21 %DVLF 2SHUDWLQJ 3URFHGXUHV for information on shutter
speed operations.
2-1-1-2
Lighting Control
When using Cameras with Intelligent Lighting, the light level can be adjusted
from the Controller.
Refer to 6(&7,21 %DVLF 2SHUDWLQJ 3URFHGXUHV for information on lighting
control operations.
2-1-1-3
Calibration
Calibration can be set to output the measurement results in physical units.
There are four settings for calibration: Sampling, Specifying point, Specifying
coordinate axis, and Parameter input.
HELP
CHECK
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for information on calibration.
To output measurement results in physical units, set Coordinate mode/Calibration to ON for each processing item.
If Calibration remains set to OFF, the default settings will remain, and measurements using the Camera coordinates will be output.
Sampling
The sampling function is used to set calibration based on measurement
results. Register a model, and perform a sample measurement to obtain the
position. (The position will be obtained in sub-pixel units.) Enter the physical
coordinates of the position of the model. The calibration will be calculated
automatically. Sample measurements can be made in up to 3 places.
• When the magnifications are the same for the X and the Y directions,
make sample measurements in 2 places only.
• When the magnifications in the X and Y directions are different, perform
sampling measurement in 3 places.
2-1-(2)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
CHECK
The point measured by the Controller becomes the specified point for calibration, giving a higher degree of accuracy than when using Point specification.
1.
Select Camera settings.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
The initial Camera Settings Screen will be displayed.
Camera settings
Shutter speed(Cam0)
Light control(Cam0)
Calibration(Cam0)
Shutter speed(Cam1)
Light control(Cam1)
Calibration(Cam1)
Shutter speed(Cam2)
Light control(Cam2)
2.
Select calibration for the camera number to be used.
The initial Calibration Screen will be displayed.
Calibration(Camera0)
Sampling
inputregistration
Model
Specifying
point
Sampling
Specifying coordinate axis
Parameter input
Reference parameter
2-1-(3)
3.
Select Sampling.
4.
Select Model registration.
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
The Model Registration Settings Screen will be displayed.
Model registration
310,130
+
5.
Circumscribe one figure with a box and register the model image to be
used for sampling.
The screen for selecting the reference position settings for the model will
be displayed.
Reference position
Manual
Gravity
6.
+
Select Manual or Gravity.
Manual: Any reference position can be set.
Gravity: The image is converted to binary and the center of gravity is set
as the reference position.
When Manual is selected, the Reference Position Settings Screen will be
displayed. A display cursor will appear at the center of the model, as the
default position.
When Gravity is selected, the Gravity Settings Screen will be displayed.
7.
Set the reference position.
Manual:
Use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the cursor to the reference
position and press the ENT Key.
Reference position
Reference position
384,162
+
2-1-(4)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
Gravity:
Specify the binary level so that the reference figure will be white and select
OK.
Lower limit
Upper limit
Binary level
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
+ Reverse
Auto
OK
:Move
:Change
Auto
The Controller automatically
sets the binary level
Reverse
Reverses black and
white in the display
Move the cursor to the upper limit or lower limit and use the Left and Right
Keys to change the value.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
The model will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
Calibration(Camera0)
Sampling
inputregistration
Model
Specifying
point
Sampling
Specifying coordinate axis +
Parameter input
Reference parameter
8.
Select Sampling.
The first Sampling Screen will be displayed.
Sampling region
Sampling
Reference position
1time(s)
+
9.
2-1-(5)
Decide whether or not to change the sampling region.
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
When there are 2 or more figures with the same shape on the screen,
press the SHIFT+ENT Keys. Go to step 10.
When there are no similar-shaped objects on the screen, go to step 11.
The Change Sampling Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Sampling region
Change sampling region
481,283
+
Registered model
(The boundaries of the region will not
actually be displayed.)
10. Change the region.
CHECK
Draw the region so that there will not be 2 or more similar figures within the
sampling region.
Correct
Sampling region
Incorrect
Sampling region
The region will be set and the Sampling Screen will return.
Sampling region
Sampling
1time(s)
+
11. Press the TRIG Key to execute the first sampling.
2-1-(6)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
A frame and display cursor will appear where the model was found and the
screen for inputting physical coordinates will be displayed.
1time(s)
Sampling
+
X : [ 0.000]
Y : [ 0.000]
End
12. Input the coordinates for the model position (display cursor) and select
End.
CHECK
Correcting Mistakes
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys. The previous sampling can be corrected and reexecuted.
The first sampling will be confirmed, and the second screen will be displayed.
2time(s)
Sampling
+
13. Repeat steps 9 to 12 and perform sampling for at least two locations.
Adjust the sampling region so that only the target figure is enclosed.
Once sampling has been completed, a confirmation message will be displayed.
Registering calibration
Parameters.
Execute
Cancel
14. Select Execute.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
Specifying
Points
2-1-(7)
This function is used to specify and set any point in pixel units.
If the coordinates of the specified position are input, the calibration data is
automatically calculated. Up to 3 points can be specified.
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
• When the magnifications are the same for the X and the Y directions,
make sample measurements in 2 places only.
• When the magnifications in the X and Y directions are different, perform
sampling measurement in 3 places.
+
+
1.
+
Select Camera settings.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
The initial Camera Settings Screen will be displayed.
Camera settings
Shutter speed(Cam0)
Light control(Cam0)
Calibration(Cam0)
Shutter speed(Cam1)
Light control(Cam1)
Calibration(Cam1)
Shutter speed(Cam2)
Light control(Cam2)
2.
Select Calibration.
2-1-(8)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
The initial Calibration Screen will be displayed.
Calibration(Camera0)
Sampling input
Specifying point
Specifying coordinate axis
Parameter input
Reference parameter
3.
Select Specifying point.
The Specifying Point Screen for the 1st point and a cursor for specifying
the point will be displayed.
Specifying point
1st point
405,101
Specifying point
+
4.
Use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the cursor to the position
to be specified and press the ENT Key.
The screen for inputting coordinates will be displayed.
1st point
Specifying point
+
X : [ 0.000]
Y : [ 0.000]
End
5.
Input the coordinates for the point to be specified and select End.
The coordinates for the 1st point will be set and the Specifying Point
Screen for the 2nd point will be displayed.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 and specify 2 or more points.
Once point specification has been completed, a confirmation message will
be displayed.
Registering calibration
Parameters
Execute
7.
2-1-(9)
Select Execute.
Cancel
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
Specifying
Coordinate Axis
This method is used to specify the coordinate axis while monitoring the messages displayed on the screen. The coordinate system, the origin, the rotation
angle, and the magnification, are set in that order. The magnification for X and
Y directions is the same setting when specifying the coordinate axis.
Coordinate System
Select the coordinate system.
Left-handed sytem
0
Right-handed sytem
Y
Positive direction
X
0
Origin
Positive direction
X
Origin
Y
1.
Select Camera settings.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
The initial Camera Settings Screen will be displayed.
Camera settings
Shutter speed(Cam0)
Light control(Cam0)
Calibration(Cam0)
Shutter speed(Cam1)
Light control(Cam1)
Calibration(Cam1)
Shutter speed(Cam2)
Light control(Cam2)
2.
Select Calibration.
The initial Calibration Screen will be displayed.
Calibration(Camera0)
Sampling input
Specifying point
Specifying coordinate axis
Righthand
Parameter
input
Lefthand
Reference
parameter
3.
Select Specifying coordinate axis.
2-1-(10)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
4.
Select Righthand or Lefthand.
The screen for specifying the origin will be displayed.
Origin
X= 255
Y= 242
Coordinate axis
100.0
-100.0
0
100.0
X
-100.0
Y
5.
Use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the cursor to the position
to be specified and press the ENT Key.
Up/Down and Right/Left Keys: Moves the position one pixel at a time.
SHIFT+Up/Down and Right/Left Keys: Moves the position 10 pixels at a
time.
The origin will be set and the screen for setting the rotation angle will be
displayed.
100.0
Coordinate
axis
-100.0
0
Angle
=0.0
100.0
X
-100.0
Y
6.
Specify the angle for the axis and press the ENT Key.
Rotates the angle by 0.5° in the clockwise
direction.
SHIFT+Right and Down Keys:Rotates the angle by 5° in the clockwise direction.
Left and Up Keys:
Rotates the angle by 0.5° in the counterclockwise direction.
SHIFT+Left and Up Keys:
Rotates the angle by 5° in the counterclockwise direction.
Right and Down Keys:
The angle will be set and the screen for specifying magnification will be displayed.
10.0
Coordinate
axis
-100.0
0
-10.0
Y
2-1-(11)
Magnification
Magnification = 0.090
Sight = 50.714
10.0
X
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
7.
Specify the magnification.
Use the following procedure to specify the actual dimensions that correspond to one pixel.
Right and Down Keys:
Enlarges the image 10 gradations at a time.
SHIFT+Right and Down Keys: Enlarges the image 100 gradations at a
time.
CHECK
Left and Up Keys:
Reduces the image 10 gradations at a time.
SHIFT+Left and Up Keys:
Reduces the image 100 gradations at a
time.
Example: For a measurement object with actual length of 20 mm
Align the origin with the upper-left corner of the measurement object and
align the 20.0 gradation line with the upper-right corner of the measurement object.
0
10.0
-10.0
8.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
Parameter Input
Use the following procedure to directly input parameters to be used for calibration.
Origin
Specify the physical coordinates for the position of the origin as desired.
Upper-left
corner of
screen
Center of screen
Lower-left
corner of
screen
2-1-(12)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
Coordinate System
Select the coordinate system for the physical coordinates.
Left-handed System
Origin upper left
0
X
X
Positive direction
Positive direction
0
Origin lower left
Y
Right-handed System
Origin upper left
0
Y
0
Origin center
Y
X
Positive direction
Y
Y
Y
Positive direction
Positive direction
Positive direction
0
Origin lower left
X
0
X
Origin center
X
Magnification and Units
Set the physical unit that will correspond to one pixel. Set a value in the range
0.00100 to 9.99999 for the magnification.
Screen
20
m
m
200 pixels
1.
The magnification is 20(mm) / 200(pixels) = 0.1(mm/pix).
In other words, 1 pixel in camera coordinates will
correspond to 0.1 mm in physical units.
In the menu, pixel is denoted as "pix."
Select Camera settings.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
2-1-(13)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
The initial Camera Settings Screen will be displayed.
Camera settings
Shutter speed(Cam0)
Light control(Cam0)
Calibration(Cam0)
Shutter speed(Cam1)
Light control(Cam1)
Calibration(Cam1)
Shutter speed(Cam2)
Light control(Cam2)
2.
Select Calibration.
The initial Calibration Screen will be displayed.
Calibration(Camera0)
Sampling input
Specifying point
Specifying coordinate axis
Parameter input
Reference parameter
3.
Select Parameter input.
The Parameter Input Screen will be displayed.
Parameter input
:Upper left
Origin
Coordinate :Left hand
Magnification :[1.00000]
End
4.
5.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
Reference
Parameters
This screen is used to check data settings.
A= 1.00000
B= 0.00000
C=255.00000
D= 0.00000
E= 1.00000
F=241.00000
Sight= 512.000mm
OK
A to F represent the calibration conversion values. The camera
coordinates are converted to physical coordinates based on these
calibration conversion values. The formulae for conversion to
physical coordinates are as follows:
X' = A × X + B × Y + C
Y' = D × X + E × Y + F
(X,Y): measurement position (camera coordinates), unit: pixels
(X',Y'): conversion position (physical coordinates), units: mm
The physical unit for X direction on the screen
can be selected from m, mm, cm, and m.
2-1-(14)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
1.
Select Camera settings.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
The initial Camera Settings Screen will be displayed.
Camera settings
Shutter speed(Cam0)
Light control(Cam0)
Calibration(Cam0)
Shutter speed(Cam1)
Light control(Cam1)
Calibration(Cam1)
Shutter speed(Cam2)
Light control(Cam2)
2.
Select Calibration.
The initial Calibration Screen will be displayed.
Calibration(Camera0)
Sampling input
Specifying point
Specifying coordinate axis
Parameter input
Reference parameter
3.
Select Reference parameter.
The parameters will be displayed.
Parameter
A= 1.00000
B= 0.00000
C=255.00000
D= 0.00000
E= 1.00000
F=241.00000
Sight=512.000mm
OK
4.
Select OK to exit this screen.
The screen in (2.) will return.
2-1-(15)
Inputting Camera Images
2-1-2
Section 2-1
Camera Selection
Up to four Cameras can be connected. Select Camera is used to select which
Camera image will be used for measurement.
The Controller has two image memories that store two images called Image 0
and Image 1 for the Camera selected under Select Camera. Both images are
from the same Camera number but different filtering can be applied to each.
Whether Image 0 or Image 1 is used for measurement depends on the processing item, so refer to the explanation for each processing item for details.
Refer to 6(&7,21%DVLF2SHUDWLQJ3URFHGXUHV for information on Camera
selection operations.
2-1-(16)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
2-1-3
Filtering Order
The processing order for filtering and BGS levels can be selected. This processing order can be set separately for Image 0 and Image 1.
The cursor can be moved on the image to see the effects of filtering. Select the
order while confirming the results on the image.
1.
Select Filtering order.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
The settings screen for filtering order will be displayed.
Filtering order
Filtering
BGS levels
BGS levels
Filtering
2.
Select the filtering order while monitoring the image.
3.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-1-(17)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
2-1-4
Filtering
The image read by the Camera can be manipulated to create an image that is
easier to measure by using the 9 filtering methods: Weak smoothing, strong
smoothing, dilation, erosion, median, edge enhancement, vertical edge extraction, horizontal edge extraction, and edge extraction. The filtering can be set
separately for Image 0 and Image 1.
The cursor can be moved on the image to see the effects of filtering. Select filtering while confirming the results on the image.
Filtering
Function
Example
application
OFF
---
---
---
Weak
smoothing
Measurement objects
with slight surface irregularity
Reduces the irregularity
through smoothing.
Select either weak or
strong smoothing.
Stable
searches
Dilation
White measurement
objects with black noise
Increases white to eliminate black noise.
Removal of
noise from
measurement
objects
Erosion
Black measurement
objects with white noise
Reduces white to eliminate the white noise.
Removal of
noise from
measurement
objects
Median
Measurement objects
with slight surface irregularity
Reduces surface irregularities while maintaining
the contour.
Edge positioning (with no
reduction in
accuracy)
Edge
enhancement
Blurred measurement
objects (e.g., due to lighting changes)
Enhances edges between Edge positionbright and dark regions.
ing
Vertical edge
extraction
Measurement objects difficult to extract due to bad
image contrast
Extracts the vertical
edges (light and dark) of
an image.
Defect inspection (using
binary processing)
Horizontal
edge extraction
Measurement objects difficult to extract due to bad
image contrast
Extracts the horizontal
edges (light and dark) of
an image.
Defect inspection (using
binary processing)
Edge extraction
Measurement objects difficult to extract due to bad
image contrast
Extracts the vertical
edges (light and dark) of
an image.
Defect inspection (using
binary processing)
Strong
smoothing
CHECK
Target
Filter Size
The strength of the filtering can be selected if Frame/Field is set to Frame.
3×3
5×5
Weak
Strong
SHIFT + ENT The image changes each time these keys are pressed.
2-1-(18)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
1.
Select Filtering.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
The settings screen for filtering will be displayed.
If Frame/Field is set to Frame, the filter size will be displayed in the top
right-hand corner of the screen.
Filtering(Image 0)
OFF
Weak smoothing
Strong smoothing
Dilate
Erosion
Median
Enhance edges
Extract vertical edges
Size3 3
SFT+ENT:Filter size
2.
Select the filtering method while monitoring the image.
Press the SHIFT + ENT Keys to change the filter size.
3.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
When images are filtered, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting
the measurement region.
Filter size of 5 ™ 5
Screen size
512 pixels
-2 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3
-1 pixel
484
pixels
Valid range:
(0,0) to (511,483)
Valid range:
(2,2) to (509,481)
Valid range:
(1,1) to (510,482)
If the Filtering Again processing item is set to filter the image again, the range
of inaccurate pixels will be increased further. For example, if filtering is performed twice, the valid range will be reduced as follows:
Filter size of 5 ™ 5: -2 pixels ™ 2 = -4 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3: -1 pixel ™ 2 = -2 pixels
2-1-(19)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
2-1-5
Background Suppression
Background suppression (BGS) excludes the background of the measurement
object from the measurement process for easier measurement. BGS can be
set separately for Image 0 and Image 1.
Set the upper and lower limits of the BGS density while monitoring the image.
BGS changes image areas with densities below the lower limit to 0, and image
areas with densities above the upper limit to 255. Image areas with densities
between the lower and upper limits are graded from 0 to 255 so that only
images with densities between the lower and upper limits are measured.
Example: Lower limit set to 100 and upper limit set to 220
Measurement object
Measurement density
255
Upper limit: 220
Lower limit: 100
0
Background
Background density (cut)
• Images with densities set to less than 100 are not measured and the density becomes 0.
• Only images with densities between 100 and 220 are measured and the
images are graded between 0 and 255.
1.
Select BGS levels.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
The settings screen for BGS levels will be displayed.
BGS levels
Upper[255 ]
Lower[ 0 ]
OK
:Move
:Change
2-1-(20)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
2.
Move the cursor to the upper value and use the Left and Right Keys to adjust the value.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
3.
Use the same method to change the lower value.
4.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-1-(21)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
2-1-6
Frame/Field
Frame/Field is used to select the unit for one image.
Selection
Details
Frame*
Measures using frame images.
Field
Measures images in fields. The processing time can be reduced
but the accuracy of the measurement will be reduced because
the measurement is performed on an image with low resolution in
the vertical direction.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
This setting can only be made once for each scene. If Camera image is set for
more than one unit, the Frame/Field menu will be displayed under Camera
image only for the unit with the lowest number.
Field images
Even
Odd
Images showing alternate fields
Resolution: 512 × 242 (H × V)
Resolution: 512 × 242 (H × V)
One frame image is created when
two field images are combined.
Frame image
Resolution: 512 × 484 (H × V)
1.
Select Frame/Field.
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
2-1-(22)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
The Frame/Field Settings Screen will be displayed.
Frame/Field
Frame/Field : Frame
End
2.
3.
Make the setting.
Select End.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-1-(23)
Section 2-1
Inputting Camera Images
2-1-7
Additional Information
Setting Camera
Image after
Position
Displacement
Compensation
Scrolling for position displacement compensation will return to the original
position.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.Switch camera
4.
Unit 1 position displacement
compensation will be invalid
and scrolling will return to the
original position.
2-1-(24)
Section 2-2
Switching Cameras
2-2
Switching Cameras
The Switch Camera processing item is used to switch the Camera (image
buffer) from which images will be stored to Image 0 and Image 1. New images
are not read from the Camera for this processing item.
The filtering settings will be changed at the same time.
Switching
cameras
Camera
setting
Camera
0
Image buffer
(for Camera 0)
Camera
1
Image buffer
(for Camera 1)
Filtering
0
Image 0
Filtering
1
Image 1
Camera
selection
2-2-(1)
Camera
2
Image buffer
(for Camera 2)
Camera
3
Image buffer
(for Camera 3)
Section 2-2
Switching Cameras
2-2-1
Camera Selection
When Camera Image is executed, the images stored in the image buffers will
be read to Image 0 and Image 1. New images are not read to the image buffers.
1.
Select Switch camera.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.Switch camera
4.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial Switch Camera Screen will be displayed.
3.Switch camera
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
2.
Select Select camera.
A list of Camera numbers will be displayed.
Select camera
Camera 0
Camera 1
Camera 2
Camera 3
3.
Select the number of the Camera to be used.
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-2-(2)
Section 2-2
Switching Cameras
2-2-2
Filtering Order
The processing order for filtering and BGS levels can be selected. This processing order can be set separately for Image 0 and Image 1.
The cursor can be moved on the image to see the effects of filtering. Select the
order while confirming the results on the image.
1.
Select Filtering order.
3.Switch camera
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
The settings screen for filtering order will be displayed.
Filtering order(Image 0)
Filtering
BGS levels
BGS levels
Filtering
2.
Select the filtering order while monitoring the image.
3.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-2-(3)
Section 2-2
Switching Cameras
2-2-3
Filtering
The image read by the Camera can be manipulated to create an image that is
easier to measure by using the 9 filtering methods: weak smoothing, strong
smoothing, dilation, erosion, median, edge enhancement, vertical edge extraction, horizontal edge extraction, and edge extraction. The filtering can be set
separately for Image 0 and Image 1.
The cursor can be moved on the image to see the effects of filtering. Select filtering while confirming the results on the image.
Filtering
Function
Example
application
OFF
---
---
---
Weak
smoothing
Measurement objects
with slight surface irregularity
Reduces the irregularity
through smoothing.
Select either weak or
strong smoothing.
Stable
searches
Dilation
White measurement
objects with black noise
Increases white to eliminate black noise.
Removal of
noise from
measurement
objects
Erosion
Black measurement
objects with white noise
Reduces white to eliminate the white noise.
Removal of
noise from
measurement
objects
Median
Measurement objects
with slight surface irregularity
Reduces surface irregularities while maintaining
the contour.
Edge positioning (with no
reduction in
accuracy)
Edge
enhancement
Blurred measurement
objects (e.g., due to lighting changes)
Enhances edges between Edge positionbright and dark regions.
ing
Vertical edge
extraction
Measurement objects difficult to extract due to bad
image contrast
Extracts the vertical
edges (light and dark) of
an image.
Defect inspection (using
binary processing)
Horizontal
edge extraction
Measurement objects difficult to extract due to bad
image contrast
Extracts the horizontal
edges (light and dark) of
an image.
Defect inspection (using
binary processing)
Edge extraction
Measurement objects difficult to extract due to bad
image contrast
Extracts the vertical
edges (light and dark) of
an image.
Defect inspection (using
binary processing)
Strong
smoothing
CHECK
Target
Filter Size
The strength of the filtering can be selected if Frame/Field is set to Frame.
3×3
5×5
Weak
Strong
SHIFT + ENT The image changes each time these keys are pressed.
2-2-(4)
Section 2-2
Switching Cameras
1.
Select Filtering.
3.Swtich camera
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
The settings screen for filtering will be displayed.
If Frame/Field is set to Frame, the filter size will be displayed in the top
right-hand corner of the screen.
Filtering(Image 0)
OFF
Weak smoothing
Strong smoothing
Dilate
Erosion
Median
Enhance edges
Extract vertical edges
Size3 3
SFT+ENT:Filter size
2.
Select the filtering method while monitoring the image.
Press the SHIFT + ENT Keys to change the filter size.
3.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
When images are filtered, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting
the measurement region.
Filter size of 5 ™ 5
Screen size
512 pixels
-2 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3
-1 pixel
484
pixels
Valid range:
(0,0) to (511,483)
Valid range:
(2,2) to (509,481)
Valid range:
(1,1) to (510,482)
If the Filtering Again processing item is set to filter the image again, the range
of inaccurate pixels will be increased further. For example, if filtering is performed twice, the valid range will be reduced as follows:
Filter size of 5 ™ 5: -2 pixels ™ 2 = -4 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3: -1 pixel ™ 2 = -2 pixels
2-2-(5)
Section 2-2
Switching Cameras
2-2-4
Background Suppression
Background suppression (BGS) excludes the background of the measurement
object from the measurement process for easier measurement. BGS can be
set separately for Image 0 and Image 1.
Set the upper and lower limits of the BGS density while monitoring the image.
BGS changes image areas with densities below the lower limit to 0, and image
areas with densities above the upper limit to 255. Image areas with densities
between the lower and upper limits are graded from 0 to 255 so that only
images with densities between the lower and upper limits are measured.
Example: Lower limit set to 100 and upper limit set to 220
Measurement object
Measurement density
255
Upper limit: 220
Lower limit: 100
0
Background
Background density (cut)
• Images with densities set to less than 100 are not measured and the density becomes 0.
• Only images with densities between 100 and 220 are measured and the
images are graded between 0 and 255.
1.
Select BGS levels.
3.Switch camera
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
The settings screen for BGS levels will be displayed.
BGS levels
Upper[255 ]
Lower[ 0 ]
OK
:Move
2.
:Change
Move the cursor to the upper value and use the Left and Right Keys to adjust the value.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
2-2-(6)
Section 2-2
Switching Cameras
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
3.
4.
Use the same method to change the lower value.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-2-(7)
Section 2-2
Switching Cameras
2-2-5
Additional Information
Setting Switch
Camera after
Position
Displacement
Compensation
Scrolling for position displacement compensation will return to the original
position.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.Switch camera
4.
Unit 1 position displacement
compensation will be invalid
and scrolling will return to the
original position.
2-2-(8)
Section 2-3
Changing Filtering
2-3
Changing Filtering
The Change Filtering processing item is used to change only the filtering settings for Image 0 and Image 1. New images are not read from the Camera.
Camera
settings
Changing
Filtering
Camera
0
Image buffer
(for Camera 0)
Camera
1
Image buffer
(for Camera 1)
Camera
2
Image buffer
(for Camera 2)
Camera
3
Image buffer
(for Camera 3)
Filtering
0
Image 0
Filtering
1
Image 1
Camera
selection
2-3-(1)
Section 2-3
Changing Filtering
2-3-1
Filtering Order
The processing order for filtering and BGS levels can be selected. The settings can be made separately for Image 0 and Image 1.
The cursor can be moved on the image to see the effects of filtering. Select the
order while confirming the results on the image.
1.
Select Change filtering.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.Change Filtering
4.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The settings screen for changing filtering will be displayed.
3.Change Filtering
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
2.
Select Filtering order.
The settings screen for filtering order will be displayed.
Filtering order(Image 0)
Filtering
BGS levels
3.
4.
BGS levels
Filtering
Change the settings while monitoring the image.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-3-(2)
Section 2-3
Changing Filtering
2-3-2
Filtering
The image read by the Camera can be manipulated to create an image that is
easier to measure by using the 9 filtering methods: Weak smoothing, strong
smoothing, dilation, erosion, median, edge enhancement, vertical edge extraction, horizontal edge extraction, and edge extraction. The settings can be
made separately for Image 0 and Image 1.
The cursor can be moved on the image to see the effects of filtering. Select filtering while confirming the results on the image.
Filtering
Function
Example
application
OFF
---
---
Weak
smoothing
Measurement objects
with slight surface irregularity
Reduces the irregularity Stable searches
through smoothing.
Select either weak or
strong smoothing.
Dilation
White measurement
objects with black noise
Increases white to elim- Removal of noise
inate black noise.
from measurement objects
Erosion
Black measurement
objects with white noise
Reduces white to elimi- Removal of noise
nate the white noise.
from measurement objects
Median
Measurement objects
with slight surface irregularity
Reduces surface irreg- Edge positioning
ularities while maintain- (with no reduction
in accuracy)
ing the contour.
Edge
enhancement
Blurred measurement
objects (e.g., due to lighting changes)
Enhances edges
between bright and
dark regions.
Edge positioning
Vertical
edge
extraction
Measurement objects difficult to extract due to bad
image contrast
Extracts the vertical
edges (light and dark)
of an image.
Defect inspection
(using binary processing)
Horizontal
edge
extraction
Measurement objects difficult to extract due to bad
image contrast
Extracts the horizontal
edges (light and dark)
of an image.
Defect inspection
(using binary processing)
Edge
extraction
Measurement objects difficult to extract due to bad
image contrast
Extracts the vertical
edges (light and dark)
of an image.
Defect inspection
(using binary processing)
Strong
smoothing
CHECK
Target
---
The strength of the filtering can be selected if Frame/Field is set to Frame.
3×3
5×5
Weak
Strong
SHIFT + ENT The image changes each time these keys are pressed.
1.
Select Filtering.
3.Change Filtering
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
The settings screen for filtering will be displayed.
2-3-(3)
Section 2-3
Changing Filtering
If Frame/Field is set to Frame, the filter size will be displayed in the top
right-hand corner of the screen.
Filtering(Image 0)
OFF
Weak smoothing
Strong smoothing
Dilate
Erosion
Median
Enhance edges
Extract vertical edges
Size3 3
SFT+ENT:Filter size
2.
Select the filtering method while monitoring the image.
Press the SHIFT + ENT Keys to change the filter size.
3.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
When images are filtered, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting
the measurement region.
Filter size of 5 ™ 5
Screen size
512 pixels
-2 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3
-1 pixel
484
pixels
Valid range:
(0,0) to (511,483)
Valid range:
(2,2) to (509,481)
Valid range:
(1,1) to (510,482)
If the Filtering Again processing item is set to filter the image again, the range
of inaccurate pixels will be increased further. For example, if filtering is performed twice, the valid range will be reduced as follows:
Filter size of 5 ™ 5: -2 pixels ™ 2 = -4 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3: -1 pixel ™ 2 = -2 pixels
2-3-(4)
Section 2-3
Changing Filtering
2-3-3
Background Suppression
Background suppression (BGS) excludes the background of the measurement
object from the measurement process for easier measurement.
Set the upper and lower limits of the BGS density while monitoring the image.
BGS changes image areas with densities below the lower limit to 0, and image
areas with densities above the upper limit to 255. Image areas with densities
between the lower and upper limits are graded from 0 to 255 so that only
images with densities between the lower and upper limits are measured.
Example: Lower limit set to 100 and upper limit set to 220
Measurement object
Measurement density
255
Upper limit: 220
Lower limit: 100
0
Background
Background density (cut)
• Images with densities set to less than 100 are not measured and the density becomes 0.
• Only images with densities between 100 and 220 are measured and the
images are graded between 0 and 255.
1.
Select BGS levels.
3.Change Filtering
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
The settings screen for BGS levels will be displayed.
BGS levels
Upper[255 ]
Lower[ 0 ]
OK
:Move
2.
:Change
Move the cursor to the upper value and use the Left and Right Keys to adjust the value.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
2-3-(5)
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Section 2-3
Changing Filtering
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
3.
Use the same method to change the lower value.
4.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-3-(6)
Section 2-4
Filtering Again
2-4
Filtering Again
The Filtering Again processing item is used to add filtering to an image. This
processing item is useful if stronger smoothing is required to eliminate noise or
increase edge enhancement.
Camera
settings
Camera
0
Filtering again
Image buffer
(for Camera 0)
Filtering
0
Camera
1
Image buffer
(for Camera 1)
Second
filtering
Camera
selection
2-4-(1)
Image 0
Camera
2
Image buffer
(for Camera 2)
Camera
3
Image buffer
(for Camera 3)
Filtering
1
Image 1
Section 2-4
Filtering Again
2-4-1
Direction
Images can be sent from Image 0 to Image 1 or from Image 1 to Image 0 to
add filtering to the image when it is transferred. The direction function is used
to select the direction of the transfer. (Which image is used for measurement,
Image 0 or Image 1, depends on the processing item, so select the proper
transfer direction for the processing item.)
Camera
settings
Camera
0
First filtering
Image buffer
(for Camera 0)
Filtering
0
Camera
1
Filtering again
Image 0
Image buffer
(for Camera 1)
Camera
selection
Camera
2
Image buffer
(for Camera 2)
Camera
3
Image buffer
(for Camera 3)
Second
filtering
Filtering
1
Set second filtering
under Filtering again.
Image 1
First filtering
Example: To execute smoothing twice before measurement.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Filtering again
2.Fine matching
3.
1. Filtering again.
Image 0
Second
filtering
Filtering
1
Image 1
Image for which smoothing has been
performed twice is stored and this image used
for measurement under 2. Fine matching.
Set Filtering/Strong smoothing
Set Direction/Image 1 “ 0.
The image on which smoothing has been
performed will be stored.
Filtering 1/ Strong
smoothing set under 0.
Camera image.
2-4-(2)
Section 2-4
Filtering Again
1.
Select Filtering again.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.Change Filtering
4.Filtering again
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial Filtering Again Screen will be displayed.
4.Filtering again
Direction
Filtering order
Filtering
BGS levels
2.
Select Direction.
The Direction Selection Screen will be displayed.
Direction
Transfer mode : Image1
0
End
3.
Select the direction.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-4-(3)
Section 2-4
Filtering Again
2-4-2
Filtering Order
The processing order for filtering and BGS levels can be selected.
The cursor can be moved on the image to see the effects of filtering. Select the
order while confirming the results on the image.
1.
Select Filtering order.
4.Filtering again
Direction
Filtering order
Filtering
BGS levels
The settings screen for filtering order will be displayed.
Filtering order
Filtering
BGS levels
2.
3.
BGS levels
Filtering
Select the filtering order while monitoring the image.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-4-(4)
Section 2-4
Filtering Again
2-4-3
Filtering
The image read by the Camera can be manipulated to create an image that is
easier to measure by using the 9 filtering methods: Weak smoothing, strong
smoothing, dilation, erosion, median, edge enhancement, vertical edge extraction, horizontal edge extraction, and edge extraction.
The cursor can be moved on the image to see the effects of filtering. Select filtering while confirming the results on the image.
Filtering
Function
Example
application
OFF
---
---
---
Weak
smoothing
Measurement objects
with slight surface irregularity
Reduces the irregularity
through smoothing.
Select either weak or
strong smoothing.
Stable
searches
Dilation
White measurement
objects with black noise
Increases white to eliminate black noise.
Removal of
noise from
measurement
objects
Erosion
Black measurement
objects with white noise
Reduces white to eliminate the white noise.
Removal of
noise from
measurement
objects
Median
Measurement objects
with slight surface irregularity
Reduces surface irregularities while maintaining
the contour.
Edge positioning (with no
reduction in
accuracy)
Edge
enhancement
Blurred measurement
objects (e.g., due to lighting changes)
Enhances edges between Edge positionbright and dark regions.
ing
Vertical edge
extraction
Measurement objects difficult to extract due to bad
image contrast
Extracts the vertical
edges (light and dark) of
an image.
Defect inspection (using
binary processing)
Horizontal
edge extraction
Measurement objects difficult to extract due to bad
image contrast
Extracts the horizontal
edges (light and dark) of
an image.
Defect inspection (using
binary processing)
Edge extraction
Measurement objects difficult to extract due to bad
image contrast
Extracts the vertical
edges (light and dark) of
an image.
Defect inspection (using
binary processing)
Strong
smoothing
CHECK
Target
Filter Size
The strength of the filtering can be selected if Frame/Field is set to Frame.
3×3
5×5
Weak
Strong
SHIFT + ENT The image changes each time these keys are pressed.
2-4-(5)
Section 2-4
Filtering Again
1.
Select Filtering.
4.Filtering again
Direction
Filtering order
Filtering
BGS levels
The settings screen for filtering will be displayed.
If Frame/Field is set to Frame, the filter size will be displayed in the top
right-hand corner of the screen.
Filtering(Image 0)
OFF
Weak smoothing
Strong smoothing
Dilate
Erosion
Median
Enhance edges
Extract vertical edges
Size3 3
SFT+ENT:Filter size
2.
Select the filtering method while monitoring the image.
Press the SHIFT + ENT Keys to change the filter size.
3.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
If the Filtering Again processing item is set to filter the image again, the range
of inaccurate pixels will be doubled. Do not include the outer edges of the
screen when setting the measurement region.
For example:
Filter size of 5 ™ 5: -2 pixels ™ 2 = -4 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3: -1 pixel ™ 2 = -2 pixels
Filter size of 5 ™ 5
Screen size
512 pixels
-4 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3
-2 pixels
484
pixels
Valid range:
(0,0) to (511,483)
Valid range:
(4,4) to (507,479)
Valid range:
(2,2) to (509,481)
2-4-(6)
Section 2-4
Filtering Again
2-4-4
Background Suppression
Background suppression (BGS) excludes the background of the measurement
object from the measurement process for easier measurement.
Set the upper and lower limits of the BGS density while monitoring the image.
BGS changes image areas with densities below the lower limit to 0, and image
areas with densities above the upper limit to 255. Image areas with densities
between the lower and upper limits are graded from 0 to 255 so that only
images with densities between the lower and upper limits are measured.
Example: Lower limit set to 100 and upper limit set to 220
Measurement object
Measurement density
255
Upper limit: 220
Lower limit: 100
0
Background
Background density (cut)
• Images with densities set to less than 100 are not measured and the density becomes 0.
• Only images with densities between 100 and 220 are measured and the
images are graded between 0 and 255.
1.
Select BGS levels.
4.Filtering again
Direction
Filtering order
Filtering
BGS levels
The settings screen for BGS levels will be displayed.
BGS levels
Upper[255 ]
Lower[ 0 ]
OK
:Move
2.
:Change
Move the cursor to the upper value and use the Left and Right Keys to adjust the value.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
2-4-(7)
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
Section 2-4
Filtering Again
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
3.
4.
Use the same method to change the lower value.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-4-(8)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
2-5
Binary Position Compensation
The Binary Position Compensation processing item is used to convert an
image to binary, find the center of gravity of the measurement object, and
detect the position compensation amount.
Binary position compensation can be performed even for measurement
objects that are at an angle.
The image read by the Camera is a 256-gradation image. This is converted to
a binary image made up of black and white pixels. The center of gravity of the
white area is used to perform position compensation.
Center of gravity
Operational Flow
1
page 2-5-(2)
Select the
measurement image.
Gravity and area page 2-5-(3)
2
page 2-5-(3)
Set the position
displacement
compensation
region.
1
2
Set the
binary
level.
Use the fill
profile
function.
(As required)
3
4
Draw the
region.
Re-register
the
reference
values.
(As required)
5
6
Set the
judgement
conditions.
Change
pixel
skipping.
Gravity and axis page 2-5-(12)
3
1
2
3 (As required) 4
5 (As required)
Set the
binary
level.
Draw the
region.
Re-register
reference
values.
Change
pixel
skipping.
page 2-5-(16)
Set the displacement
direction.
4
page 2-5-(18)
Measurement
screens
2-5-(1)
Set the
judgement
conditions.
(As required)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
2-5-1
Selecting the Measurement Image
This section describes how to select an image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
1.
Select Binary pos. comp.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial Binary Position Compensation Screen will be displayed.
Measurement image
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
2.
Select Measurement image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
image1
3.
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-5-(2)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
2-5-2
Setting the Position Displacement Compensation Region
There are two methods for binary position compensation.
Method
CHECK
2-5-2-1
Details
Gravity and area
Finds the center of gravity for the white pixel area and corrects
the position displacement of the measurement object.
Gravity and axis
Finds the center of gravity and axis angle for the white pixel
area and corrects the position displacement of the measurement object.
In addition, two regions can be set and position compensation performed
using the center coordinates and angle connecting two points.
Position Compensation with Gravity and Area
Density images taken by the Camera are converted to binary images, made
up of black and white pixels. The size (area) and position (center of gravity) of
the area occupied by the white pixels are measured.
2-5-(3)
1
2 (As required) 3
4 (As required) 5
6
Set binary
level.
Use the fill
profile
function.
Re-register
reference
values.
Change
pixel
skipping.
Draw
region.
Set the
judgement
conditions.
(As required)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
STEP 1: Setting the Binary Level
Set the level for converting 256-gradation images into binary images. Measurements are performed for the white pixels. Therefore, make the settings so
that the measurement object is white.
1.
Select either Position compensation 0 or Position compensation 1.
1.Binary pos. comp
Measurement image
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
The screen for selecting the detection method will be displayed.
Gravity and area
Gravity and axis
2.
Select Gravity and area.
The selections will be displayed.
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
3.
Select Binary.
The settings screen for binary levels will be displayed.
Lower limit
Upper limit
Binary level
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
:Move
:Change
Auto
The Controller
automatically sets
the binary level.
Reverse
Reverses dark and clear
in the display.
2-5-(4)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
4.
Move the cursor to the upper limit and use the Left and Right Keys to
change the value.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
5.
CHECK
Use the same method to change the lower value.
Set the upper and lower limits to make the measurement object white.
Make the measurement object white.
Binary level
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
:Move
6.
:Change
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
CHECK
It is also possible to set the binary level so that measurement is performed
only for an intermediate density range.
STEP 2: Using the Fill Profile Function (Setting Judgement Conditions)
The fill profile function is set when the exterior of the measurement object is
being measured.
Turn ON the fill profile function to measure the whole area between the start
point (black pixels to white) and the end point (white pixels to black) in the
measurement region as white pixels. The default setting for this function is
OFF.
Measurement region
Start point End point
This area will be measured as white pixels.
Example
Input image
Measurement region
2-5-(5)
Fill profile: ON
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
When a White-pixel Section Encroaches on the Measurement Region
Input image
Fill profile: ON
Not recognized as start point because change from white to black.
Measuring Open-form Measurement Objects
The measurement result changes depending on the orientation of the measurement
object.
Input image
1.
Fill profile: ON
Select Measurement conditions.
Position0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The screen for setting the measurement conditions will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Fill profile : OFF
End
2.
Select either ON or OFF.
3.
Select End.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-5-(6)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
STEP 3: Drawing Regions
When a measurement region is drawn, measurement is performed for the displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values (area and
center of gravity). This position becomes the reference position, so be sure to
place the measurement object in the correct position before drawing the measurement region.
CHECK
Regions can be created by combining up to 3 different figures. Regions with
difficult shapes can be drawn and sections not to be measured can be left out
of the region by combining different figures.
1.
Select Region.
Position0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Region
New
Box
End
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
2.
Select New.
3.
Select the desired figure.
4.
Select the desired drawing mode (OR/NOT).
An arrow cursor will appear.
Up to three figures (0, 1, and 2)
can be drawn.
Region
2-5-(7)
[0]
425.421
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
5.
Draw the region with the selected figure.
The figure will be registered.
Region
Add
Figure0
End
Once three figures have been drawn,
Add will no longer be displayed.
6.
If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
7.
Repeat steps 3 to 5 as necessary to create the desired figure.
8.
After drawing is completed, select End.
The measurement region will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
The center of gravity (marked by an arrow cursor) and the measurement
region will be displayed.
CHECK
Figures drawn using OR mode are displayed with solid lines and figures drawn
using NOT mode are displayed with dotted lines.
Figure 1 (drawn using OR)
Figure 2 (drawn using NOT)
Figure 3 (drawn using OR)
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1. In the screen for step 5 above, select the figure to be changed or cleared
using the Up and Down Keys and press the ENT Key.
Figure 0 Figure 1
Region
Add
Figure0
Figure1
End
The figure for the figure number selected using the cursor will be displayed
with solid lines. The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed.
Correct
Clear
2-5-(8)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
2.
Select either Correct or Clear and press the ENT Key.
If Correct is selected, the cursor will be displayed. Correct the size and position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
STEP 4: Re-registering Reference Values
This operation is performed when only the reference values are to be re-registered.
When a measurement region is drawn, the measurement is performed for the
displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values. If the
re-registering function explained here is used, only the reference values for the
image currently displayed will be registered. The area and center of gravity are
registered for the reference values.
1.
Select Reference registration.
Position0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
A cursor will appear at the position of the center of gravity.
Measurement region
Reference registration
251,184
Reference position
ENT:Set
2.
3.
:Move
To change the position, use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move
the cursor.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 5: Setting the Judgement Conditions
Make settings for the area and center of gravity.
2-5-(9)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
CHECK
Position Compensation Judgement Results and Scrolling
OK: Scroll will be performed.
NG: Scroll will not be performed. The overall judgement will be NG, regardless of the measurement result.
Range for an OK judgement
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[
0.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[ 0.000 : 511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[ 0.000 : 483.000]
Area range (0 to 9,999,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the X direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the Y direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
End
: Measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Position0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[ 20.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[
0.000 :
511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[
0.000:
483.000]
End
2.
3.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 6: Changing Pixel Skipping
To shorten measurement processing time, change the number of pixels to be
skipped. The greater the skipping setting, the shorter the processing time.
However, the accuracy of the measurement will decrease.
Once the skipping setting has been changed, perform a measurement and
confirm that measurement can be performed correctly.
2-5-(10)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
Skipping X and Skipping Y
Set how many pixels to skip in the measurement region during measurement.
The default setting is 1, which means that all of the measurement region will
be measured.
Pixel
Skipping X
Skipping Y
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
Position0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Skipping X : [ 1]
Skipping Y : [ 1]
End
2.
3.
Set the number of pixels to skip.
Select End.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Changing to Gravity and Axis (Clearing)
Clear the settings first before changing to Gravity and axis.
1.
Select Clear.
Position0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2-5-(11)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Region will be cleared.
Execute
2.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The settings will be cleared and the initial screen for binary position compensation will be displayed.
1.Binary pos. comp
Measurement image
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
2-5-2-2
Position Compensation with Gravity and Axis
Density images taken by the Camera are converted into binary images made
up of black and white pixels and then measured. The size (area), position
(center of gravity), and axis angle of the white-pixel area is calculated.
(As required)
1
2
3
Set the
binary
level.
Draw the
region.
Re-register
the
reference
values.
4
5 (As required)
Set the
judgement
conditions.
Change
pixel
skipping.
STEP 1: Setting the Binary Level
Set the level for converting 256-gradation images into binary images. Measurements are performed for the white pixels. Therefore, make the settings so
that the measurement object is white.
1.
Select either Position compensation 0 or Position compensation 1.
1.Binary pos. comp
Measurement image
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
2-5-(12)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
The screen for selecting the detection method will be displayed.
Gravity and area
Gravity and axis
2.
Select Gravity and axis.
The initial screen for gravity and axis will be displayed.
Binary
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed
Clear
3.
Select Binary.
The settings screen for binary levels will be displayed.
Lower limit
Upper limit
Binary level
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
:Move
:Change
Auto
The Controller
automatically sets the
binary level.
4.
Reverse
Reverses dark and clear
in the display.
Move the cursor to the upper limit and use the Left and Right Keys to
change the value.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
5.
CHECK
Use the same method to change the lower value.
Set the upper and lower limits to make the measurement object white.
Make the measurement object white.
Binary level
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
:Move
2-5-(13)
:Change
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
6.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
CHECK
It is also possible to set the binary level so that measurement is performed
only for an intermediate density range.
STEP 2: Drawing Regions
When a measurement region is drawn, measurement is performed for the displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values (area,
center of gravity, and axis angle). This position becomes the reference position
for position compensation, so be sure to place the measurement object in the
correct position before drawing the measurement region.
The settings method is the same as for Gravity and area.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-5-(7).
STEP 3: Re-registering Reference Values
This operation is performed when only the reference values are to be re-registered.
When a measurement region is drawn, the measurement is performed for the
displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values. If the
re-registering function explained here is used, only the reference values for the
image currently displayed will be registered. The area, center of gravity, and
axis angle are registered for the reference values.
The settings method is the same as for Gravity and area.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-5-(9).
STEP 4: Setting the Judgement Conditions
Make settings for the area, center of gravity, and axis angle.
CHECK
Position Compensation Judgement Results and Scrolling
OK: Scroll will be performed.
NG: Scroll will not be performed. The overall judgement will be NG, regardless of the measurement result.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[
2000.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[
0.000 : 511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[
0.000 : 483.000]
Axis angle : 75.000
[ -180.000 : 180.000]
End
Range for an OK judgement
Area range (0 to 9,999,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the X direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the Y direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Rotation range of the measurement object (-180.000 to 180.000,
but only values between -90.000 and 90.000 will be output.)
: Measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
2-5-(14)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
Axis Angle
Measurement value
for axis angle: 10.000
-10.000
If this range is to be judged OK,
set to -10.000: 10.000.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Position0(Gravity and axis)
Binary
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[
0.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[
0.000 :
511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[
0.000:
483.000]
Axis angle : 75.000
[
0.000: 180.000]
End
2.
Change the settings.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 5: Changing Pixel Skipping
To shorten measurement processing time, change the number of pixels to be
skipped. The greater the skipping setting, the shorter the processing time.
However, the accuracy of the measurement will decrease.
Once the skipping setting has been changed, perform a measurement and
confirm that measurement can be performed correctly.
The settings method is the same as for Gravity and area.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-5-(10).
Changing to Gravity and Area (Clearing)
Clear the settings before changing to Gravity and area.
The settings method is the same as for Gravity and area.
SeeAlso
2-5-(15)
Refer to page 2-5-(11).
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
2-5-3
Setting the Displacement Direction
The direction function is used to select which region’s measurement results
will be used as the basis for position displacement compensation in the X, Y,
and q (rotation) directions.
Measurement Objects Not at An Angle (Example: Gravity and Area Set to Region 0)
Direction X :
Direction Y :
Direction :
Region 0
Region 0
None
End
Measurement Objects at an Angle (Example: Gravity and Axis Set to Region 0)
Direction X :
Direction Y :
Direction :
Region 0
Region 0
Region 0
End
For Precision Position Compensation Using Measurement Object Angles (Example: When
Region 0 and Region 1 Set)
Direction X :
Midpoint
Direction Y :
Midpoint
Direction : Relative angle
End
1.
Select Direction.
1.Binary pos. comp
Measurement image
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
The screen for setting direction conditions will be displayed.
Direction
Direction X :
Direction Y :
Direction :
Region 0
Region 0
None
End
2-5-(16)
Binary Position Compensation
2.
3.
Section 2-5
Set the conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-5-(17)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
2-5-4
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for binary
position displacement compensation.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which binary position compensation is set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the three
screens.
Scroll Amount
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Binary pos. comp
OK 45ms
Judge:OK
ScrollX:256.321
ScrollY:269.213
Scroll : 20.0
Detailed Display
The measurement values for each region will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Binary pos. comp
Region 0
Area :
1356.222
Grav. X:
256.321
Grav. Y:
269.213
OK 45ms
Region1
2-5-(18)
Section 2-5
Binary Position Compensation
Position Display
Only the region will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Binary pos. comp
0
2-5-(19)
OK 45ms
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
2-6
EC Position Compensation
The EC Position Compensation processing item finds marks for position displacement compensation using shape information such a “round,” “angular,”
etc. This allows position displacement compensation to be performed even if
the section used for position compensation is deformed or chipped.
Mark used for position displacement
compensation
Position displacement compensation can be performed
even under the following conditions:
Internally
altered
Chipped
Deformed
Low contrast
This function can be used for position displacement
compensation of a variety of shapes.
HELP
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for information on edge codes (EC).
2-6-(1)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
Operational Flow
1
page 2-6-(3)
Select measurement
image.
page 2-6-(4)
2
Extract the
edge.
For circular measurement objects page 2-6-(7)
3
page 2-6-(7)
Set the
position
compensation region.
(As required)
1
2
3
4
5
Set measurement
conditions.
Set search
region.
Register
circle size.
Register
reference
position.
Set
judgement
conditions.
For intersection points (cross points) page 2-6-(14)
1
Set measurement
conditions.
2 (As required) 3
Set
conditions
for
obtaining
Set search
region.
4
Register
reference
position.
For boxes page 2-6-(21)
2
1
Set measurement
conditions.
(As required)
Set
conditions
for obtaining
line.
3
4
5
Set search
region.
Register
box size.
Register
reference
position.
For multiple intersection points (cross points) page 2-6-(29)
(As required)
1
2
Set measurement
conditions.
Set conditions for
obtaining
lines.
Clear the
set region.
page 2-6-(34)
4
page 2-6-(35)
5
page 2-6-(37)
Set
displacement
compensation
direction.
Measurement
screens
2-6-(2)
3
Set search
region.
4
Register
reference
position.
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
2-6-1
Selecting Measurement Images
This section describes how to select an image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
CHECK
The edges are extracted for the image number selected here and this image is
then stored at the other image number. Set Change Filtering as the next processing item to use this image for measurement for units after the unit for
which EC Position Compensation was set. Then store the image stored in the
image buffer to Image 0 or Image 1.
Example: When Image 0 Is Selected as Measurement Image
0.Scn 0=SET=
Image
0
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Change Filtering
3.Binary defect
4.
Image 1 to be used for measurement
Edge extraction
Image
1
Edge-extracted image
stored to Image 1
Reads image again from image buffer
1.
Select EC pos. comp.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial screen for EC position compensation will be displayed.
Measurement image
Extract edges
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
2.
Select Measurement Image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
3.
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-6-(3)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
2-6-2
Extracting Edges
EC position compensation is performed for images for which the edges have
been extracted. Adjust the upper and lower levels for edge extraction if there is
low contrast between the measurement object and the background and to
remove noise.
Upper and Lower Limits
Set the level to which the background will be cut from the edge-extracted
image. The levels can be set between 10 and 255 (default 100:255).
Areas with a density above the lower limit will become the edge of the measurement object. Refer to the following examples and adjust the upper and
lower limits.
Example: Cannot Find Edges Due to Low Contrast
Edge-extracted image
Reduce lower
limit.
Cannot find edges
Example: To Remove Noise
Edge-extracted image
Increase lower
limit
Example: Other Edges Clearly Extracted But Cannot Find Desired Mark
Edge with Stability
Low contrast with background
Edge-extracted
image
Reduce upper
limit
The edges of low
contrast sections also
clearly extracted.
High contrast with background
CHECK
If the lower limit is too low, low-level noise may remain even if the image
appears noise-free on the screen. If measurements are not stable, use the following methods to see if unwanted edges have been extracted and eliminate
them.
• Checking Method
Lower the upper limit to the same value as the lower limit. If many
unwanted edges are displayed, then the lower limit is too low. Return the
upper limit to its original value after completing this check.
• Elimination Method
Increase the lower limit, or use smoothing or median filtering.
SeeAlso
2-6-(4)
Refer ,QSXWWLQJ&DPHUD,PDJHV and )LOWHULQJ$JDLQ (where smoothing
can be set to be executed twice).
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
Mask Size
The mask size function is used when searching for edges to judge edges
using peripheral information. Select how much peripheral pixel information to
use. The selections are 5 ™ 5 (default) or 3 ™ 3.
CHECK
This setting will be enabled only if Frame/Field under Camera image is set to
Frame. If set to Field, the effect will remain the same as if 5 ™ 5 is selected
even if 3 ™ 3 is selected.
Example: Select 3 ™ 3
Information from the surrounding
9 pixels is used to determine
whether or not the center pixel is
the edge. (1 square = 1 pixel)
The greater the mask size, the more the variations in surrounding pixels can
be absorbed. Select 5 ™ 5 to ignore uneven edges.
CHECK
SeeAlso
This function is even more effective if smoothing is used.
Refer to ,QSXWWLQJ&DPHUD,PDJHV, &KDQJLQJ)LOWHULQJ, and )LOWHU
LQJ$JDLQ (where smoothing can be set to be executed twice).
1.
Select Extract edges.
1.EC pos. comp
Measurement image
Extract edges
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
The screen for setting edge extraction levels will be displayed.
Lower limit
Upper limit
Extract edges
Upper[255]
Lower[100]
Mask:5x5
OK
:Change ENT:OK ESC:Back
2.
Set the upper and lower limits.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
2-6-(5)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
3.
Select the mask size.
4.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-6-(6)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
2-6-3
Setting Position Displacement Compensation Regions
The following four figures can be chosen for position displacement compensation regions, depending on the figure of the positioning mark.
Positioning mark
Figure
Details
Circular
Circle
Searches for a circle of a specified size and outputs the
position coordinates (center of the circle).
Box
Box
Searches for a rectangle of a specified size and outputs
position coordinates. The center or one of the four corners
can be selected for the position coordinates.
Cross
point
Outputs the position coordinates of the intersection of two
lines. If there are multiple lines, the following conditions can
be set:
Other figures
One angle used as a
mark
• Output the cross point only for an intersection at a certain
angle.
• Output the cross point only for an intersection of lines of a
certain length.
Several angles are
used to one set of
coordinates
2-6-3-1
Up to 20 cross point coordinates can be found.
Multiple
cross
points
The detection conditions can be changed to suit any purpose.
Circles
1
Set the
measurement conditions.
2
3
Set the
search
region.
Register
the size of
the circle.
4
Register
reference
position.
5 (As required)
Set
judgement
conditions.
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the conditions to search for the positioning mark.
Measurement conditions
Circle color :
:
Skipping
Circular value :
End
Black
ON
[ 0]%
Select whether the color of the circle that is the positioning
mark will be white or black compared to the background.
Select “white/black” if the circle color is not fixed to either
black or white. (Black*, white, white/black)
Select whether pixel skipping (1 pixel) will be used when
searching for the circle. (ON*, OFF)
Processing is faster if pixel skipping is turned ON, so
normally “ON” is appropriate. However, if the
measurement values are inconsistent, set to “OFF.”
Checks circle deformation. (0% to 100% (0%*))
The value drops if the circle is deformed or chipped. The object is not
extracted as a circle if the value is lower than the set value.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-6-(7)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
1.
Select Position compensation 0 or Position compensation 1.
1.EC pos. comp
Measurement image
Extract edges
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
The figure selections will be displayed.
Circle
Cross point
Box
Multi-points
2.
Select Circle.
The initial Circle Screen will be displayed.
Position0(Circle)
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
3.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Circle color :
:
Skipping
Circular value :
Black
ON
[ 0]%
End
4.
5.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
2-6-(8)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
STEP 2: Setting the Search Region
Set the region to search for the positioning mark.
Adjust the search region if there are areas that are not to be included in circle
searches.
CHECK
The search can be performed even if the whole circle is not within the search
region, as long as the center of the circle is within the region.
Search region
Circle center
Search region
CHECK
When edges are extracted, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be
processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting the search region.
Filter size of 5 ™ 5
Screen size
512 pixels
-2 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3
-1 pixel
484
pixels
Valid range:
(0,0) to (511,483)
Valid range:
(2,2) to (509,481)
Valid range:
(1,1) to (510,482)
Each time the image is filtered, the range of inaccurate pixels will be increased
further. For example, if filtering is performed twice, the valid range will be
reduced as follows:
Filter size of 5 ™ 5: -2 pixels ™ 3 = -6 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3: -1 pixel ™ 3 = -3 pixels
(Filtering is also performed once in edge extraction, so filtering is actually performed a total of three times.)
1.
Select Search region.
Position0(Circle)
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
2-6-(9)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
The screen for drawing search regions will be displayed.
Search region
251,365
2.
Draw a rectangular search region.
Specify the upper left and lower right coordinates.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the settings.
When the bottom right coordinates have been set, the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Registering the Size of the Circle
There are two methods for registering the size of the circle.
Registration
method
Details
Input figure
The measurement object is displayed on the screen, a circle is
drawn on the exterior edge of the object and the size of the circle
is registered.
Input parameter
The radius of the circle and the permissible range are entered as
parameters (in pixel units).
Inputting Figures
1. Select Radius.
Position0(Circle)
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
The registration selections will be displayed.
Input figure
Input parameter
2.
2-6-(10)
Select Input figure.
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
The screen for drawing figures will be displayed.
Input figure
251,365
3.
Specify the center position of the circle.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
The screen for setting the radius will be displayed.
Input figure
100
4.
Specify the radius (3 to 512 pixels).
Up/Right Keys:
Larger
Down/Left Keys: Smaller
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
The screen for setting the latitude of the radius will be displayed.
Input figure
20
5.
Specify the latitude the radius (1 to 64 pixels).
Up/Right Keys:
Larger
Down/Left Keys: Smaller
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-6-(11)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
Inputting Parameters
Input the parameters in pixel units for the radius and latitude of the search circle.
Radius (3 to 512)
1.
Radius width (1 to 64)
Select Radius.
Position0(Circle)
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
The registration selections will be displayed.
Input figure
Input parameter
2.
Select Input parameter.
The Input Parameter Settings Screen will be displayed.
Input parameter
Radius
: [ 50]
Latitude of radius : [20]
End
3.
4.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 4: Registering Reference Positions
Register the reference position for position displacement compensation. Place
the measurement object in the correct position before executing reference
position registration.
2-6-(12)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
1.
Select Reference registration.
Position0(Circle)
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
The circle will be found for the currently displayed image and a display cursor will be placed at the center of the circle.
Search region
Reference registration
248,152
Reference position
ENT:Set
2.
3.
:Move
Use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the cursor to change the
position.
Press the ENT Key to save the setting.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 5: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the conditions for judging whether or not a circle of the registered size has
been found. Set in pixel units the radius of circles to receive an OK judgement.
The setting range is 1.000 to 9,999.999. Any circles found of a different size
can be judged as NG.
Example: Only Circles Smaller than the Registered Size Displayed on
Screen
Registered circle
Measurement object
Tries to find the circle using the
edge of a different size circle.
The radius is too small and the circle does not
fit the judgement conditions so judged as NG.
CHECK
Position Compensation Judgement Results and Scrolling
OK: Scroll will be performed.
NG: Scroll will not be performed. The overall judgement will be NG, regardless of the measurement result.
2-6-(13)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Position0(Circle)
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
The Judgement Conditions Setting Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Radius : 72.000
[ 70.000: 75.000]
End
Measurement result for displayed image.
Use as a reference for upper and lower limits.
2.
Set the radius range for an OK circle.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-6-3-2
Cross Points
1
2
Set measurement
conditions.
(As required)
Set
conditions
for obtaining
lines.
3
Set search
region.
4
Register
reference
position.
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the conditions for searching for the positioning mark.
Measurement conditions
Target color
Specifying angle
Range of angle
Limits of angle
Specifying length
Length 1
Limits of length 1
Length 2
End
Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
Note
1.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
OFF
[ 90]
[10]
OFF
[100]
[ 80:120]%
[ 50]
Note 3
Limits of length 2
Note 4
Defined side of
:
Midline of corner
Select whether the color of the positioning mark will be white or black compared to the background. (Black*, white)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-6-(14)
:[ 80:120]%
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
2.
Angle
Use the following settings to set the angle of intersection and thus find the
coordinates of only the desired intersection even though many lines exist
on the screen.
Specifying angle: Set to ON.
Range of angle: Angle of the section in the target color (If the target color
changes, change the angle setting too.)
Limits of angle:
Set the permissible range for the angle.
Example: When the range of the angle is set to 90• and
the limits of angle set to 10•, the cross point of lines that
intersect at between 80• and 100• will be found.
Example: To find this point
of intersection
Set the Target color to black, the Specifying
angle to ON, and the Range of angle to 270•.
270°
To find the coordinates of the cross point of lines regardless of their angle, set
Specifying angle to OFF. The settings for the angle will be ignored.
Setting item
Selection
Specifying angle
ON, OFF*
Range of angle
0 to 359
Limits of angle
0 to 99 (10*)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
3.
Length of lines
Use the following settings to set the length and thus find the coordinates of
only the desired intersection even though many lines exist on the screen.
Specifying length: Set to ON.
Length @:
Set the line length in pixels.
Limits of length@: Set the permissible range for the length.
Example: To find this cross point
Set the Length 1 and Length 2 to the
lengths shown below.
Length 1
Length 2
To find the coordinates of the cross point of lines regardless of their length,
set Specifying length to OFF. The settings of the line lengths will be ignored.
Setting item
Specifying length
Selection
ON, OFF*
Length @
1 to 999
Limits of length @
1 to 200 (80:120*)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-6-(15)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
4.
Only one angle (q) will be output as the measurement results for the lines
that are found. Select which position q will be obtained.
Midline of Corner*
Obtained midline between
two sides.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Side 1 and Side 2
With the target color between the two sides, the side in the clockwise direction is side 1 and the side in the counterclockwise direction is side 2.
Side 2
Side 1
CHECK
If both the specifying angle and the specifying length are set to OFF and there
are multiple lines displayed on the screen, the cross point of the longest line
and the line that crosses it will be found.
1.
Display the figure selections using the same procedure as outlined under
steps (1.) and (2.) for Circle.
New registration(Position0)
Circle
Cross point
Box
Multi-points
2.
Select Cross point.
The initial screen for cross points will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
3.
2-6-(16)
Select Measurement conditions.
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Target color
Specifying angle
Range of angle
Limits of angle
Specifying length
Length 1
Limits of length 1
Length 2
End
4.
5.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
OFF
[ 90]
[10]
OFF
[100]
[ 80:120]%
[ 50]
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
2-6-(17)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
STEP 2: Setting Conditions for Obtaining Lines
Adjust the line conditions if the lines cannot be found easily or to extract only
lines at a particular angle.
Line conditions
Extract level
Line angle 0
Line angle 1
Line angle 2
Line angle 3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3
OFF
[ 0]
OFF
[ 90]
OFF
[180]
OFF
œ To extract lines regardless of the angle:
Line angle @: Set to OFF.
Ignores setting in square brackets on second line.
œ To extract only lines of a certain angle:
Up to four angles can be specified.
Line angle @: Set to ON.
Set angle for lines to be detected in square brackets on
second line.
End
Setting item
Selections
Line angle 0
ON, OFF*
LIne angle 1
ON, OFF*
LIne angle 2
ON, OFF*
LIne angle 3
ON, OFF*
0 to 359 (*0)
0 to 359 (*90)
0 to 359 (*180)
0 to 359 (*270)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
SeeAlso
Refer to Line Angles, below.
The level for extracting lines can be changed. There are 5 levels (1 to 5) and the default
setting is 3. Refer to the following examples and adjust the level as required.
To make a broken line into a single line
Change the
extraction level to
a larger value.
To ignore noise
2-6-(18)
Change the
extraction level to
a smaller value.
When the measurement object is small
and cannot be detected easily.
Change the extraction
level to a smaller
value.
HELP
To extract as separate lines
Change the extraction
level to a larger value.
Line Angles
The position where the brightness changes is extracted as an edge and the
direction of the change in brightness is found. This direction is called the edge
code and it indicates the direction of the edge. The way in which black and
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
white meet determines the direction of the edge code, and the angle is calculated as shown below.
180°
90°
0°
Example
270°
Use 180• to extract this edge.
Use 270• to extract this edge.
1.
Select Line conditions.
Position0(Cross point)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
The Line Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Line conditions
Extract level
Line angle 0
Line angle 1
Line angle 2
Line angle 3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3
OFF
[ 0]
OFF
[ 90]
OFF
[180]
OFF
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting the Search Region
Set the region to search for the positioning mark.
Adjust the search region if there are areas that are not to be included in cross
point searches.
CHECK
SeeAlso
When edges are extracted, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be
processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting the search region.
Refer to page 2-6-(9) under &LUFOHV.
2-6-(19)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
1.
Select Search region.
Position0(Cross point)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
The screen for drawing search regions will be displayed.
Search region
251,365
2.
Draw a rectangular search region.
Specify the upper left and lower right coordinates.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys:Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the settings.
When the bottom right coordinates have been set, the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 4: Registering Reference Positions
Register the reference position for position displacement compensation. Place
the measurement object in the correct position before executing reference
position registration.
1.
Select Reference registration.
Position0(Cross point)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
2-6-(20)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
The Controller will search for the cross point in the displayed image that
matches the conditions and a display cursor will appear at that position.
Search region
Reference registration
248,152
Reference position
ENT:Set
:Move
2.
Use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the cursor to change the
position.
3.
Press the ENT Key to save the setting.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-6-3-3
Boxes
1
2
Set measurement
conditions.
Set
conditions for
obtaining
lines.
(As required)
3
Set search
region.
4
Register the
box size.
5
Register the
reference
position.
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the conditions to search for the positioning mark.
Select whether the color of the positioning
mark will be white or black compared to the
background. (Black*, white)
Measurement conditions
Box color
: Black
Result coordinate :
Center
Defined side for :
All
Select which position coordinates will
be obtained.
Center* Upper Lower Upper
Lower
left
left
right
right
End
The angle of one side of the box can be output as a measurement result.
Select which side the angle will be obtained from.
All*
Upper
Lower
Left
Right
(Long axis)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-6-(21)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
1.
Display the figure selections using the same operations as outlined under
steps (1.) and (2.) for Circle described on page 2-6-(8).
New registration(Position0)
Circle
Cross point
Box
Multi-points
2.
Select Box.
The settings selections will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Box size
Reference registration
Clear
3.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Box color
: Black
Result coordinate :
Center
Defined side for :
All
End
4.
Make the settings for each item.
5.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
2-6-(22)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
STEP 2: Setting Conditions for Obtaining Lines
The Controller detects 4 lines and searches for a box. Adjust the conditions for
detecting the lines so that desired lines are detected.
Line conditions
Extract level
Specifying angle
Line angle 0
Line angle 1
Line angle 2
Line angle 3
:
:
:
:
:
:
3
OFF
[ 0]
[ 90]
[180]
[270]
End
Specify values if a lot of noise or
foreign matter results in boxes not
being detected with stability.
Specifying angle: Set to ON.
Line angle @:
Set the angles of the
lines to detect.
Setting item
Selections
Specifying angle
ON, OFF*
Line angle 0
0 to 359 (*0)
Line angle 1
0 to 359 (*90)
Line angle 2
0 to 359 (*180)
Line angle 3
0 to 359 (*270)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default
setting.
Note: Angles cannot be specified when
positioning mark may rotate.
Refer to the information about cross points for details (page 2-6-(18)).
HELP
Line Angles
The positions where the brightness changes are extracted as edges and the
directions of the changes in brightness are found. These directions are called
the edge codes and they indicate the directions of the edges. The way in which
black and white meet determines the direction of an edge code, and the angle
is calculated as shown below.
180°
90°
0°
CHECK
270°
Set the angles as a combination of the four sides of the box to be found
(angles 0 to 3).
Example: The following examples are for black boxes.
180°
270°
225°
135°
315°
45°
90°
0°
2-6-(23)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
1.
Select Line conditions.
Position0(Box)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Box size
Reference registration
Clear
The Line Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Line conditions
Extract level
Specifying angle
Line angle 0
Line angle 1
Line angle 2
Line angle 3
:
:
:
:
:
:
3
OFF
[ 0]
[ 90]
[180]
[270]
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting Search Regions
Set the region to search for the positioning mark.
Adjust the search region if there are areas that are not to be included in box
searches.
CHECK
SeeAlso
When edges are extracted, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be
processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting the search region.
Refer to page 2-6-(9) under &LUFOHV.
1.
Select Search region.
Position0(Box)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Box size
Reference registration
Clear
2-6-(24)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
The screen for drawing regions will be displayed.
Search region
251,365
2.
Draw a rectangular search region.
Specify the upper left and lower right coordinates.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the settings.
When the bottom right coordinates have been set, the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 4: Registering the Size of the Box
There are two methods for registering the size of the box.
Registration
method
Details
Input figure
The measurement object is displayed on the screen, a box is
drawn on the exterior edge of the object and the size of the box is
registered.
Input parameter
The lengths of sides of the box and the permissible range are
entered as parameters (in pixel units).
Adjust the permissible range by inputting parameters.
Inputting Figures
1. Select Box size.
Position0(Box)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Box size
Reference registration
Clear
The registration methods will be displayed.
Input figure
Input parameter
2-6-(25)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
2.
Select Input figure.
The Input Figure Screen will be displayed.
Input figure
251,365
3.
Specify the top left and bottom right coordinates of the box.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the settings.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
Figures can be input to make settings only for the Long size and Short size of
the box. Use the parameter input screen to make permissible size range and
other detailed settings.
Inputting Parameters
Set the size of the box and the permissible range using parameter input.
If the size of the box is entered using figure input, those parameters will be
reflected under Long size and Short size on the Input Parameter Screen.
Input parameter
Long side
Short side
Length of long side
[ 80:120]%
Length of Short side
[ 80:120]%
Long side distance
[ 80:120]%
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
: [100]
: [ 50]
:
*6
*7
Short side distance
[ 80:120]%
Line parallelism
:
: [20]
:
:
End
*1
*3
*5
*2
*4
CHECK
*6
Settings Ranges and Default Values*:
*1: 1 to 512
*2: 1 to 484
*3: 1 to 200 (default: 80:120)
*4: 1 to 200 (default: 80:120)
*5: 1 to 200 (default: 80:120)
*6: 1 to 200 (default: 80:120)
*7: Parallelism of long sides and short sides:
1 to 99 (default: 20)
• Increase the Length of long side and Length of short side.
• Increase the Long side distance and Short side distance.
2-6-(26)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
When a Box Is Chipped
• Reduce the lower limit of Length of long side and Length of short side.
1.
Select Box size.
Position0(Box)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Box size
Reference registration
Clear
The registration methods will be displayed.
Input figure
Input parameter
2.
Select Input parameter.
The Input Parameter Settings Screen will be displayed.
Input parameter
Long side
Short side
Length of long side
[ 80:120]%
Length of Short side
[ 80:120]%
Long side distance
[ 80:120]%
: [100]
: [ 50]
:
:
:
End
3.
Make the settings for each item.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-6-(27)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
STEP 5: Registering Reference Positions
Register the reference position for position displacement compensation. Place
the measurement object in the correct position before executing reference
position registration.
1.
Select Reference registration.
Position0(Box)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Box size
Reference registration
Clear
The Controller will search for the box in the displayed image that matches
the conditions and a display cursor will appear at that position.
Search region
Reference registration
248,152
Reference position
ENT:Set
:Move
2.
Use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the cursor to change the
position.
3.
Press the ENT Key to save the setting.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-6-(28)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
2-6-3-4
Multi-points
(As required)
1
2
Set measurement
conditions.
Set conditions for
obtaining
lines.
3
4
Set search
region.
Register
reference
position.
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the conditions for searching for the positioning mark.
Measurement conditions
Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
Target color
Specifying angle
Range of angle
Limits of angle
Specifying length
Length 1
Limits of length 1
Length 2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
OFF
[ 90]
[10]
OFF
[100]
[ 80:120]%
[ 50]
Note 3
Note 4
Note 5
: [ 80:120]%
Limits of length 2
:
Sorting method
X Ascending order
Defined side of θ
:
Midline of corner
End
Note
1.
Select whether the positioning mark color will be white or black compared
to the background. (Black*, white)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2.
Angles
Use the following settings to set the angle of intersection and thus find the
coordinates of only the desired intersection even though many lines exist
on the screen.
Specifying angle: Set to ON.
Range of angle: Angle of the section in the target color (If the target color
changes, change the angle setting too.)
Limits of angle:
Set the permissible range for the angle.
Example: When the range of the angle is set to 90• and
the limits of angle set to 10•, the cross point of lines that
intersect at between 80• and 100• will be found.
Example: To extract the 3
cross points shown in the
following diagram
Set the Target color to black,
the Specifying angle to ON,
and the Range of angle to 60•.
60°
To find the coordinates of the cross point of lines regardless of their angle,
set Specifying angle to OFF. The settings for the angle will be ignored.
Setting item
Selections
Specifying angle
ON, OFF*
Range of angle
0 to 359
Limits of angle
0 to 99 (10*)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-6-(29)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
3.
Length of lines
Use the following settings to set the length and thus find the coordinates of
only the desired intersection even though many lines exist on the screen.
Specifying length: Set to ON.
Length @:
Set the line length in pixels.
Limits of length@: Set the permissible range for the length.
Example: To extract the
3 cross points shown in
the following diagram
Set the Target color to black and
the Length 1 and Length 2 to the
lengths for the sides indicated in
the following diagram.
Length 1
Length 2
To find the coordinates of the cross point of lines regardless of their length,
set Specifying length to OFF. The settings of the line lengths and the limits
of the lengths will be ignored.
Setting item
Selections
Specifying length
ON, OFF*
Length @
1 to 999
Limits of length @ 1 to 200 (80:120*)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
4.
Select the sorting conditions for determining which cross point coordinates
will be output. Up to 20 points can be obtained. The coordinates for the first
point matching the selected conditions will be output. (X ascending order*,
X descending order, Y ascending order, Y descending order)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
5.
Only one angle (q) will be output as the measurement results for the lines
that are found. Select the position for which the angle will be obtained. (The
lines that are considered are the two lines meeting at the intersection
point.)
Example: To extract the cross point shown in the following diagram, set target color to black and sorting condition to X ascending order.
Midline of the Corner*
Obtained midline
between two sides.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Output intersection
Side 1 and Side 2
With the target color between the two
sides, the side in the clockwise
direction is side 1 and the side in the
counterclockwise direction is side 2.
Side 2
Side 1
2-6-(30)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
1.
Display the figure selections using the same operations as outlined under
steps (1.) and (2.) for Circle. Refer to page 2-6-(8).
New registration(Position0)
Circle
Cross point
Box
Multi-points
2.
Select Multi-points.
The selections for setting conditions will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
3.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Target color
Specifying angle
Range of angle
Limits of angle
Specifying length
Length 1
Limits of length 1
Length 2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
OFF
[ 90]
[10]
OFF
[100]
[ 80:120]%
[ 50]
End
4.
Make the settings for each item.
5.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
2-6-(31)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
STEP 2: Setting Conditions for Obtaining Lines
Adjust the line conditions if the lines cannot be found easily or to extract only
lines of a particular angle.
Refer to Cross Points for an outline (page 2-6-(18)).
1.
Select Line conditions.
Position0(Multi-points)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
The Line Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Line conditions
Extract level
Line angle 0
Line angle 1
Line angle 2
Line angle 3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3
OFF
[ 0]
OFF
[ 90]
OFF
[180]
OFF
End
2.
Make the settings for each item.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting the Search Region
Set the region to search for the positioning mark.
Adjust the search region if there are areas that are not to be included in multipoint searches.
CHECK
SeeAlso
When edges are extracted, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be
processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting the search region.
Refer to page 2-6-(9) under &LUFOHV.
1.
Select Search region.
Position0(Multi-points)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
2-6-(32)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
The screen for drawing search regions will be displayed.
Search region
391,436
2.
Draw a rectangular search region.
Specify the upper left and lower right coordinates.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys:Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the settings.
When the bottom right coordinates have been set, the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 4: Registering Reference Positions
Register the reference position for position displacement compensation. Place
the measurement object in the correct position before executing reference
position registration.
1.
Select Reference registration.
Position0(Multi-points)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
The Controller will search for the cross point in the displayed image that
matches the conditions and a display cursor will appear at that position.
Search region
Reference registration
248,152
Reference position
ENT:Set
2.
:Move
Use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the cursor to change the
position.
2-6-(33)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
3.
Press the ENT Key to save the setting.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Clearing Set Regions
The clear operation is executed for each region.
1.
Select the region number to be cleared.
1.EC pos. comp
Measurement image
Extract edges
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
The selections will be displayed.
Example: For circles
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
This region will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The region will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-6-(34)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
2-6-4
Setting Displacement Direction
The direction function is used to select which region’s measurement results
will be used as the basis for position displacement compensation in the X, Y,
and q (rotation) directions.
Measurement Objects Not On An Angle (Example: Region 0 Set to Box)
Direction X :
Direction Y :
Direction :
Region 0
Region 0
None
End
Measurement Objects On An Angle (Example: Region 0 Set to Cross Point)
Direction X :
Direction Y :
Direction :
Region 0
Region 0
Region 0
End
For Precision Position Compensation Using Measurement Object Angles (Example: Settings
Made for Both Region 0 and Region 1)
Direction X :
Midpoint
Direction Y :
Midpoint
Direction : Relative angle
End
1.
Select Direction.
1.EC pos. comp
Measurement image
Extract edges
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
The Direction Settings Screen will be displayed.
Direction
Direction X :
Direction Y :
Direction :
Region 0
Region 0
None
End
2-6-(35)
EC Position Compensation
2.
3.
Section 2-6
Set the conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-6-(36)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
2-6-5
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for EC position compensation.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which EC position compensation is set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the four
screens.
Scroll Amount
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC pos. comp
OK 45ms
Region number
0
Judge:OK
ScrollX:256.321
ScrollY:269.213
0.
Scroll : 20.0
Search region
Detailed Display
The measurement results for each region will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC pos. comp
OK 45ms
0
Pos.X
Pos.Y
Angle
Region0
295.667
315.675
0.000
Region1
Output coordinates
2-6-(37)
Section 2-6
EC Position Compensation
Position Display
Only the search region will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC pos. comp
OK 45ms
0
Display By Region
More detailed measurement results will be displayed for each region.
Each time the SHIFT+Right or SHIFT+Left Keys are pressed, the set regions
will be displayed in order.
• Circles
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC pos. comp
OK 45ms
Position0 (Circle)
Judge
PositionX
PositionY
Radius
Value
:OK
:213.124
:268.369
:150.236
:85
Outline of target figure
• Cross Points, Boxes, and Multi-points
After the measurement value for the region is displayed, a screen will be
displayed so the line extraction status can be confirmed.
Example: Cross point
Screen where line extraction
status can be confirmed
Measurement value display
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC pos. comp
Position0(Cross point)
OK 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC pos. comp
OK 45ms
Position0(Cross point)
:OK
Judge
PositionX :213.124
PositionY :268.369
: 90.236
Length 1 : 50.513
Length 2 : 51.368
All lines are displayed.
2-6-(38)
Section 2-7
Edge Position Compensation
2-7
Edge Position Compensation
The Edge Position Compensation processing item is used to detect the
amount of measurement object displacement by using the edge of the measurement region, where the density changes.
Position compensation is not possible if the measurement object is inclined.
The edge of the measurement region, where the density changes, is detected
and the position corrected.
Operational Flow
1
page 2-7-(2)
Select the
measurement image.
2
page 2-7-(3)
Set the
position
compensation region.
3
1
Set the
edge
detection
conditions.
2
Draw the
region.
3
(As required)
Re-register
the
reference
position.
4
5 (As required)
Set the
judgement
conditions.
Change the
detailed
conditions.
page 2-7-(10)
Set the displacement
direction.
4
page 2-7-(11)
Measurement
screens
2-7-(1)
Section 2-7
Edge Position Compensation
2-7-1
Selecting Measurement Images
This section describes how to select an image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
1.
Select Edge pos. comp.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Edge pos. comp
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial Edge Position Compensation Screen will be displayed.
Measurement image
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
2.
Select Measurement image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
3.
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-7-(2)
Section 2-7
Edge Position Compensation
2-7-2
Setting the Position Displacement Compensation Region
The edge is found using density changes within the measurement region.
The direction for edge detection and color change can be set to suit the measurement object.
2-7-2-1
1
2
Set the
edge
detection
conditions.
Draw the
region.
(As required)
3
Re-register
the
reference
position.
4
Set the
judgement
conditions.
5 (As required)
Change the
detailed
settings.
STEP 1: Setting Edge Detection Conditions
Set the direction for edge detection and the density changes.
Measurement conditions
Edge detection direction: →, ←, ↑, ↓
Direction : →
Color
: Light→Dark
End
Density change: Light→Dark, Dark→Light
Example: To detect the following position
Direction:→
Color: Light→Dark
1.
Select Position compensation 0 or Position compensation 1.
1.Edge pos. comp
Measurement image
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
The initial screen for edge position compensation will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2.
Select Measurement conditions.
2-7-(3)
Section 2-7
Edge Position Compensation
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Direction :
Color
:Light
dark
End
3.
4.
Select the edge detection conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-7-2-2
STEP 2: Drawing Regions
Draw a region to include the edge for detection.
When a measurement region is drawn, measurement is performed for the displayed image and the result is registered as the reference value (edge position). This position becomes the reference position, so be sure to place the
measurement object in the correct position before drawing the measurement
region.
CHECK
If the edge is not in the region, measurement will not be possible. Make a
region of a size and position that allows for movement of the range of the measurement object.
Correct
Correct
No edge within
the region.
For edge detection
in the X direction.
For edge detection
in the Y direction.
1.
Select Region.
Position compensation 0
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2-7-(4)
Incorrect
Section 2-7
Edge Position Compensation
The Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Region
270,230
2.
Draw a box-shaped region.
The region will be set and the screen in (1.) will return. The edge position
will be indicated by a display cursor.
2-7-2-3
STEP 3: Re-registering Reference Values
This operation is performed when only the reference value is to be re-registered.
When a measurement region is drawn, the measurement is performed for the
displayed image and the result is registered as the reference value. If the reregistering function explained here is used, only the reference value for the
image currently displayed will be registered. Edge position is registered for the
reference value.
CHECK
The reference value is also re-registered if the measurement region is
changed.
1.
Select Reference registration.
Position compensation 0
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
A display cursor will appear at the edge position.
Reference registration
105,243
ENT:Set
Reference position
:Move
Measurement region
2-7-(5)
Section 2-7
Edge Position Compensation
2.
To change the position, use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move
the cursor.
3.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-7-2-4
STEP 4: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the position ranges for an OK judgement.
CHECK
Position Compensation Judgement Results and Scrolling
OK: Scroll will be performed.
NG: Scroll will not be performed. The overall judgement will be NG, regardless
of the measurement result.
Judgement conditions
Position X :
[
0.000 :
95.000
511.000 ]
Position Y :
[
0.000 :
95.000
511.000 ]
Range for an OK judgement
Range for X coordinates
(-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range for Y coordinates
(-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
End
Measurement results for displayed image
CHECK
Position X and Position Y will change depending on the settings under Measurement/Direction.
X
The Y coordinate is set when ↑ and ↓ are selected.
Y The X coordinate is set when ← and → are selected.
The origin and coordinate system are determined by the calibration settings.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Position compensation 0
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2-7-(6)
Section 2-7
Edge Position Compensation
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Position X:
[
0.000:
95.000
511.000 ]
Position Y:
[
0.000:
95.000
483.000 ]
End
2.
3.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-7-2-5
STEP 5: Changing Detailed Conditions
Change the detailed conditions when the measurement results are unstable.
Normally, these conditions can be left on the default settings. After changing
the settings, perform an object measurement to check that measurement can
still be performed correctly.
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
Position compensation 0
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Edge level :[ 50]%
Noise level :[ 20]
Noise width:[ 0]pix
End
2.
3.
Change the settings.
Refer to the information on edge level, noise level, and noise width below
for details.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-7-(7)
Section 2-7
Edge Position Compensation
Edge Level
Set a density change level between 0 and 100 that will indicate the edge. Normally, the default setting of 50% will be fine.
The edge is normally detected as follows:
1.
The density distribution of the whole measurement region is calculated.
2.
The density difference between the lowest and highest density value becomes 100%.
3.
The point where the edge level density change is detected becomes the
edge.
Measurement region
Maximum density value
100%
50%
Edge level
0%
Noise Level
Minimum density value
Set a noise level between 0 and 255 to assist the determination of edges. The
maximum density and minimum density within the edge detection area is calculated and if the difference between the two values is less than the noise
level, then the Controller determines that there is no edge. Normally the
default setting of 20 is sufficient. Adjust this to a higher value, however, if noise
is causing false edges to be detected.
(Within the edge detection region)
Max. density - min. density < noise level “ no edge “ NG measurement
result
Max. density - min. density ˜ noise level “ Edge “ Used for measurement
Example: When noise level is set to 30
Edge
detection
region
Max. density 60
60 15 30
Edge detected so
Min. density 15
measurement performed
Edge
detection
region
Max. density 25
Min. density 10
2-7-(8)
25
10 30
Processed as no edge detected.
Measurement result: NG
Section 2-7
Edge Position Compensation
Noise Width
Set the noise width between 0 and 255 to evaluate noise.
If the density distribution from the position where the edge was first detected
falls to below the edge level within the noise width range, the detected point is
judged as noise. Normally the default noise width setting of 0 is sufficient. If
noise is causing incorrect detection, make this value higher.
Example
Edge detection point
Measurement
region
If the density falls below the
edge level within the set range,
the detected edge is
determined to be noise.
Noise width (pixel)
50%
Edge level
Clearing Settings
1.
Select Clear.
Position compensation 0
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Region will be cleared.
Execute
2.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The settings will be cleared and the initial screen for edge position compensation will return.
1.Edge pos. comp
Measurement image
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
2-7-(9)
Section 2-7
Edge Position Compensation
2-7-3
Setting Displacement Direction
The direction function is used to select which region’s measurement results
will be used as the basis for position displacement compensation in the X, Y,
and q (rotation) directions.
Direction X :
Direction Y :
Direction :
Position
compensation 0
Region 0
Region 1
None
End
Position compensation 1
1.
Select Direction.
1.Edge pos. comp
Measurement image
Position compensation 0
Position compensation 1
Direction
The Direction Settings Screen will be displayed.
Direction
Direction X :
Direction Y :
Direction :
Region 0
Region 1
None
End
2.
3.
Set the conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-7-(10)
Section 2-7
Edge Position Compensation
2-7-4
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for edge
position displacement compensation.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which edge position compensation is set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the three
screens.
Scroll Amount
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Edge pos. comp
OK 45ms
Judge:OK
ScrollX:256.321
ScrollY:269.213
Scroll : 20.0
Detailed Display
The measurement values for each region will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Edge pos. comp
OK 45ms
Region0
Region1
Direc.:
Color : Light Dark Light Dark
Pos.X: 156.321
216.361
Pos.Y: 269.213
316.576
2-7-(11)
Section 2-7
Edge Position Compensation
Position Display
Only the region will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Edge pos. comp
0
1
2-7-(12)
OK 45ms
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation
2-8
Model Position Compensation
The Model Position Compensation processing item is used to detect features
(called a model) of the measurement object on the screen and perform position compensation. This processing item is suitable for position compensation
of measurement objects with marks, protruding portions, or other characteristic features.
Position compensation can be performed on measurement objects on an
angle.
Model
Operational Flow
1
(As required) page 2-8-(3)
Change the
measurement conditions.
2
page 2-8-(5)
Set the
position
compensation region.
3
1
Register
the model.
2
Set the
search
region.
3
Set the
judgement
conditions.
4
(As required)
Reference
the model.
page 2-8-(10)
Set the displacement
direction.
4
(As required) page 2-8-(12)
Set the
detailed
conditions.
5
page 2-8-(14)
Measurement
regions.
2-8-(1)
Model Position Compensation
CHECK
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation uses the image stored at Image 0 as the measurement image; there is no menu for selecting the measurement image.
The result of the position displacement compensation (scrolling) is executed
for both Image 0 and Image 1.
2-8-(2)
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation
2-8-1
Changing Measurement Conditions
Change the measurement conditions if position displacement compensation is
required in the rotation direction.
The searches using a model that rotates in skipping angle (*2) increments
within the rotation range (*1).
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-8-(12) for information on search processing.
Rotation range:
*1
None
Skipping angle:
5
End
Setting
item
Rotation
range
Selections
None*
*2
Details
Select the range
for model rotation.
– 5•
– 15•
– 30•
– 45•
0 – 15•, 180 – 15•
0 – 30•, 180 – 30•
Example: Rotation range: – 30•, Skipping angle: 15•
Creates a model that rotates 15• at a time between -30•
and 30•.
(Coordinate system: Left-hand)
Image
+30°
+15°
0°
−15°
−30°
All angles
Skipping
angle
1•
10•
2•
15•
3•
20•
Select the skipping angle for the
model. The
smaller the angle,
the more precise
the search. Processing time,
however, will be
longer.
5•* 30•
6•
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Model pos. comp.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Model pos. comp
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial screen for model position compensation will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Positions compensation 0
Positions compensation 1
Direction
Detailed conditions
2.
Select Measurement conditions.
2-8-(3)
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Rotation range:
None
Skipping angle:
5
End
3.
4.
Set the conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
2-8-(4)
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation
2-8-2
Setting Position Displacement Compensation Regions
Register an image pattern (called a model) in advance. The part of an input
image that is most similar to the model is found, the position is calculated in
pixel units, and the degree of similarity is expressed with a correlation value.
Perform processing directly on the density image taken by the Camera.
1
Register a
model.
2-8-2-1
2
Set the
search
region.
3
Set the
judgement
conditions.
4
(As required)
Reference
the model.
STEP 1: Registering the Model
Register a characteristic portion as the model for position displacement compensation.
When a model is registered, the center position of the model is registered as
the search coordinates. This position becomes the reference position, so
make sure the measurement object is in the correct position before registering
the model.
CHECK
The size of the model that can be registered depends on the search verification setting under Detailed conditions.
No search verification (default): 15 ™ 9 to 70 ™ 66 pixels
With search verification: No limit
To register large models, change the detailed conditions before registering the
model. Refer to page 2-8-(12).
1.
Select Position compensation 0 or Position compensation 1.
1.Model pos. comp
Measurement conditions
Positions compensation 0
Positions compensation 1
Direction
Detailed conditions
The setting selections will be displayed.
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
2.
Select Model registration.
2-8-(5)
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation
The Model Registration Screen will be displayed.
Model registration
465,241
3.
Draw a box to show the region that the model can be registered.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-8-2-2
STEP 2: Setting the Search Region
Set the region in which the model is to be searched for.
1.
Select Search region.
Position compensation 0
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
An arrow cursor will appear.
The model will be displayed in solid lines.
Model
Search region
2.
500,356
Draw a box-shaped search region.
The search region will be set and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-8-2-3
STEP 3: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the judgement conditions for the correlation with the model and for the
position (X, Y) and angle where the object was detected.
CHECK
Position Compensation Judgement Results and Scrolling
OK: Scroll will be performed.
2-8-(6)
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation
NG: Scroll will not be performed. The overall judgement will be NG, regardless
of the measurement result.
Range for an OK judgement.
Judgement conditions
Correlation range (OK if above this value) (0 to 100)
Correlation :79 [ 0]
Position X : 180.000
[
0.000: 511.000]
Position Y : 250.000
[
0.000: 483.000]
Angle
: 15.000
[ -180.000: 180.000]
End
Range of movement of the measurement object in
the X direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object in
the Y direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Angle range for measurement object (-360.000 to
360.000) (The measurement value, however, is
output in the range of -180• to 180•.)
: The measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as references in setting the upper and lower limits.
CHECK
Correlation
When OK condition for correlation is 60:
Image 0 Image 1 Image 2 Image 3
Correlation: 96
Judgement: OK
CHECK
55
NG
50
NG
65
OK
Position X and Position Y
Movement range in X direction
Movement range in Y direction
OK NG
CHECK
Angle
Two values between -360• and 360• can be set. The value on the right, however, must be higher than the value on the left. (Default: -180• to 180•)
Example: For OK judgements in the A region (Right-hand coordinate system)
190°
or
−170°
−
A
170°
or
−190°
B
Angle :[
170: 190]
OK
[−190: −170]
OK
[ 170: −170]
The value on the right is smaller.
[ −170: 170]
Setting within the B range.
(Give the same result.)
0°
+
The measurement value is output between -180• and 180•, so a measurement
value of 190• becomes -170•.
2-8-(7)
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Position compensation 0
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Correlation :79 [ 0]
Position X : 180.000
[
0.000: 511.000]
Position Y : 250.000
[
0.000: 483.000]
Angle
: 15.000
[ -180.000: 180.000]
End
2.
3.
Make the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-8-2-4
Referencing Models
Models can be displayed on screen to check what kind of images are registered as models.
1.
Select Model reference.
Position compensation 0
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
2-8-(8)
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation
The image that is registered as the model will be displayed.
Model reference
ESC:END
2.
Press the ESC Key.
The screen in (1.) will return.
Clearing Regions
1.
Select Clear.
Position compensation 0
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Region will be cleared.
Execute
2.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The region will be cleared and the initial model position compensation
screen will return.
1.Model pos. comp
Measurement conditions
Positions compensation 0
Positions compensation 1
Direction
Detailed conditions
2-8-(9)
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation
2-8-3
Setting Displacement Direction
The direction function is used to select which region’s measurement results
will be used as the basis for position displacement compensation in the X, Y,
and q (rotation) directions.
Measurement Objects Not On An Angle (Example: When Only Region 0 Is Set)
Direction X :
Direction Y :
Direction :
Region 0
Region 0
None
End
Measurement Objects On An Angle (Example: When Only Region 0 Is Set)
Direction X :
Direction Y :
Direction :
Region 0
Region 0
Region 0
End
For Precision Position Compensation Using Measurement Object Angles (Example: When
Region 0 and Region 1 Are Set)
Direction X :
Midpoint
Direction Y :
Midpoint
Direction : Relative angle
End
1.
Select Direction.
1.Model pos. comp
Measurement conditions
Positions compensation 0
Positions compensation 1
Direction
Detailed conditions
The Direction Settings Screen will be displayed.
Direction
Direction X :
Direction Y :
Direction :
Region 0
Region 0
None
End
2-8-(10)
Model Position Compensation
2.
3.
Section 2-8
Set the conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-8-(11)
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation
2-8-4
Setting Detailed Conditions
Change the detailed conditions if the detection of the registered model is
unstable. Once the settings have been changed, check that actual measurement is performed correctly.
Detailed conditions
Verification
:
Candidate level :
Select whether or not to perform further detailed
verification near the position where the model
was found. (OFF*, ON)
OFF
[ 60]
End
If Verification is set to ON, the following two levels of search processing will be executed.
For rough searches, set the reference level for searching for the model. (0 to 99 (60*))
1 Rough Search
Using a rough search model, the Controller
searches for images with a correlation
equal to or greater than the candidate level.
2 Detailed Search
The Controller uses a detailed search model and
re-measures the images near the area that was
equal to or greater than the candidate level.
Search
Search
Area with correlation greater
than candidate level.
Rough search model
CHECK
Detailed search model
The size of the model that can be registered depends on whether or not
search verification is selected.
No search verification (default):15 ™ 9 to 70 ™ 66 pixels
With search verification:No limit
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
1.Model pos. comp
Measurement conditions
Positions compensation 0
Positions compensation 1
Direction
Detailed conditions
2-8-(12)
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Verification
:
Candidate level :
OFF
[ 60]
End
2.
3.
Set the conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-8-(13)
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation
2-8-5
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for model
position compensation.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which model position compensation is set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the three
screens.
Scroll Amount
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Model pos. comp
OK 45ms
0
Judge:OK
ScrollX:256.321
ScrollY:269.213
Scroll : 20.0
Detailed Display
The measurement values for each region will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Model pos. comp
OK 45ms
0
Corr. : 93
Pos.X : 256.321
Pos.Y : 269.213
Angle θ: 2.236
Cand. :
1
2-8-(14)
Position above candidate level. Displayed
only when search verification set to ON.
Section 2-8
Model Position Compensation
Position Display
Only the region will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Model pos. comp
0
OK 45ms
2-8-(15)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
2-9
Circle Position Compensation
The Circle Position Compensation processing item is useful for circular measurement objects (workpieces). Four points on the circumference of the circle
are registered as the model, the position displacement of the measurement
object is found using this model, and position compensation is performed.
Position compensation can be performed even if the measurement object is at
an angle.
Model (4 points)
2-9-(1)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
Operational Flow
For no rotation, see page 2-9-(4)
1
page 2-9-(3)
Set the position
displacement
compensation
region.
1
2
3
Register
the model.
Set the
search
region.
Set the
judgement
conditions.
For 1 model, refer to page 2-9-(9).
1
2
Set the
measurement conditions.
Register
the model.
3
Set the
search
region.
4
Set the
judgement
conditions.
For circular and arc defects, refer to page 2-9-(13).
2
1
Set the
measurement conditions.
Register
the model.
3
4
5
(As required)
Set the
judgement
conditions.
Set the
detailed
judgement
conditions.
3
4
5
Set the
search
region.
Set the
judgement
conditions.
Set the
search
region.
For circular angles, refer to page 2-9-(19).
1
2
Set the
measurement conditions.
(As required) page 2-9-(28)
2
Register
the model.
(As required)
Set the
detailed
judgement
conditions.
Set the
detailed
conditions.
3
page 2-9-(30)
Reference
the model.
4
page 2-9-(31)
Measurement
screens
CHECK
Circle position compensation uses the image stored at Image 0 as the measurement image; there is no menu for selecting the measurement image.
The results of the position displacement compensation (scrolling) are executed for both Image 0 and Image 1.
2-9-(2)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
2-9-1
Setting Position Displacement Compensation Regions
There are five methods available for circle position compensation.
Method
Details
Not rotate
Registers four points on the circumference as the model, performs a search using this model, and detects and compensates
the position displacement of the measurement object.
1 model
Registers a characteristic feature of the measurement object for
rotation positioning, which enables position compensation in the
rotation direction.
A
Model for rotation positioning.
Reference angle
Defect (circle)
Detects a characteristic feature on the circumference using
defect algorithms, which also enables position compensation in
the rotation direction to be performed. The circumference (360•)
will be the search region for defects.
Characteristic feature
Reference angle
Defect (arc)
Detects a characteristic feature on the circumference using
defect algorithms, which also enables position compensation in
the rotation direction to be performed. The angle range to
search for defects can be specified.
Characteristic feature
Reference angle
Circular angle
Another circle is drawn, in addition to the circle for external positioning. A characteristic feature on the circumference of the
drawn circle is used to perform position compensation in the
rotation direction.
Characteristic mark is the
reference position.
2-9-(3)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
2-9-1-1
Not Rotate
A model is registered using four points on the circumference. Using this model,
the position displacement is detected and compensation performed.
Model 3
Model 0
Model 2
Model 1
1
2
3
Register
the model.
Set the
search
range.
Set the
judgement
conditions.
STEP 1: Registering Models
Register four points on the circumference as the model.
1.
Select Position compensation.
1.Circle pos. comp
Position compensation
Detailed conditions
Model reference
A list of compensation modes will be displayed.
Not rotate
1 model
Defect(Circle)
Defect(Arc)
Circular angle
2.
Select Not rotate.
The initial screen for Not Rotate Mode will be displayed.
Model registration
Search Region
Judgement conditions
Clear
3.
Select Model registration.
2-9-(4)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
The Model Registration Screen will be displayed.
Model registration
255,241
4.
Specify the coordinates for the center of the circle.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the display cursor.
5.
Press the ENT Key.
The screen for specifying the radius will be displayed.
Model registration
70
6.
Specify the size of the circle.
Left Key:
Decreases the size.
Right Key: Increases the size.
7.
Press the ENT Key.
The screen for registering the size of the model will be displayed.
Model registration
39,39
8.
Adjust the size of the model.
Right Key: Increases the size horizontally.
Left Key:
Decreases the size horizontally.
Down Key: Increases the size vertically.
Up Key:
Decreases the size vertically.
When the size of model 0 is adjusted, models 1 to 3 will also change to the
same size.
2-9-(5)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
9.
Press the ENT Key.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
Model registration
ENT:Register ESC:Cancel
10. Check that an appropriate position has been registered as the model.
11. Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
STEP 2: Setting Search Regions
Set the search region for each model.
1.
Select Search region.
Position(Not rotate)
Model registration
Search Region
Judgement conditions
Clear
The Search Region Settings Screen for model 0 will be displayed.
Search region
20,30
+
2.
CHECK
Draw a box to indicate the search region.
Boxes are the only figure that can be drawn.
2-9-(6)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
The Search Region Settings Screen for model 1 will be displayed.
Search region
30,251
+
3.
Use the same method as for model 0 and set the search regions for each
model.
Once the search regions have been set for all models, a registration confirmation screen will be displayed.
Search region
ENT:Register ESC:Cancel
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the conditions for judging the correlation of the measurement object to the
model. The judgement conditions will be shared by all 4 models.
Set the range between 0 and 100, with 100 for objects that perfectly match the
model. If the correlation is equal to or above the judgement condition set here,
the judgement result will be OK.
CHECK
Position Compensation Judgement Results and Scrolling
OK: Scroll will be performed.
NG: Scroll will not be performed. The overall judgement will be NG, regardless
of the measurement result.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Position(Not rotate)
Model registration
Search Region
Judgement conditions
Clear
2-9-(7)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement result for displayed image
Use as a reference for judgement conditions.
Judgement conditions
Correlation : 82 [ 0]
End
2.
Change the setting.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Changing to Other Modes (Clearing Settings)
The settings must be cleared before changing to other modes.
1.
Select Clear.
Position(Not rotate)
Model registration
Search Region
Judgement conditions
Clear
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Region will be cleared.
Execute
2.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The settings will be cleared and the initial screen for circle position compensation will be displayed.
1.Circle pos. comp
Position compensation
Detailed conditions
Model reference
2-9-(8)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
2-9-1-2
1 Model
Position displacement compensation can be performed in the rotation direction
by registering a characteristic feature as the rotation positioning model.
Model 4
Model 3
Rotation positioning
model
Model 0
Reference angle
Model 2
Model 1
1
2
3
4
Set
measurem
ent
conditions.
Register
models.
Set search
region.
Set
judgement
conditions.
Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the conditions for searching for the rotation positioning model.
A search is performed using a model that rotates in skipping angle (*2) increments within the rotation range (*1).
Rotation range:
*1
None
Skipping angle:
6
End
Setting
item
Rotation
range
Selections
None*
*2
Details
Select the range
for model rotation.
– 5•
– 15•
– 30•
– 45•
0 – 15•, 180 – 15•
0 – 30•, 180 – 30•
Example: Rotation range: – 30•, Skipping angle: 15•
Creates a model that rotates 15• at a time between -30•
and 30•.
(Coordinate system: Left-hand)
Image
+30°
+15°
All angles
Skipping
angle
1•
10•
2•
15•
3•
20•
5•
30•
6• *
Select the skipping angle for the
model. The
smaller the angle,
the more precise
the search. Processing time,
however, will be
longer.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-9-(9)
0°
−15°
−30°
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
1.
Select Position compensation.
1.Circle pos. comp
Position compensation
Detailed conditions
Model reference
A
A list of compensation modes will be displayed.
Not rotate
1 model
Defect(Circle)
Defect(Arc)
Circular angle
2.
Select 1 model.
The initial screen for 1 model will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search Region
Judgement conditions
Clear
3.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Rotation range:
None
Skipping angle:
6
End
4.
5.
Set the conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
2-9-(10)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
STEP 2: Registering Models
Register four points on the circumference and the rotation positioning model.
1.
Select Model registration.
Position(1 model)
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search Region
A
Judgement conditions
Clear
The Model Registration Screen will be displayed.
Model registration
255,241
A
2.
Specify the center position of the circle.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the cursor.
3.
Press the ENT Key.
The screen for setting the radius will be displayed.
Model registration
70
A
4.
Specify the size of the circle.
Left Key:
Decreases the size.
Right Key: Increases the size.
5.
2-9-(11)
Press the ENT Key.
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
The screen for registering the size of the model will be displayed.
Model registration
39,39
A
6.
Adjust the size of the model.
Right Key: Increases the size horizontally.
Left Key:
Decreases the size horizontally.
Down Key: Increases the size vertically.
Up Key:
Decreases the size vertically.
When the size of model 0 is adjusted, models 1 to 3 will also change to the
same size.
7.
Press the ENT Key.
The registration frame for model 4 will be displayed.
Model registration
333,209
A
8.
Enclose the rotation positioning mark.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
Model registration
A
ENT:Register ESC:Cancel
9.
Check that an appropriate position has been registered as the model.
10. Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-9-(12)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
STEP 3: Setting Search Regions
Set the search region for each model.
The settings method is the same as for Not Rotate. Refer to page 2-9-(6).
STEP 4: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the conditions for judging the correlation of the measurement object to the
model. The judgement conditions will be shared by all 5 models.
Set the range between 0 and 100, with 100 for objects that perfectly match the
model. If the correlation is equal to or above the judgement condition set here,
the judgement result will be OK.
CHECK
Position Compensation Judgement Results and Scrolling
OK: Scroll will be performed.
NG: Scroll will not be performed. The overall judgement will be NG, regardless
of the measurement result.
The settings method is the same as for Not Rotate. Refer to page 2-9-(7).
Changing to Other Modes (Clearing Settings)
The settings must be cleared before changing to another mode.
The settings method is the same as for Not Rotate. Refer to page 2-9-(8).
2-9-1-3
Defect (Circle) and Defect (Arc)
Position compensation can also be performed in the rotation direction by
searching for characteristic features on the circumference using defect algorythms.
The difference between defect (circle) and defect (arc) is the search region.
For circles, the circumference (360•) is searched and for arcs, an angle range
is specified.
Defect (circle)
Defect (arc)
Model 3
Characteristic
feature
Model 2
Model 0
Characteristic
feature
Reference
angle
Reference
angle
Model 1
2-9-(13)
1
2
3
4
Set the
measurement conditions.
Register
models.
Set the
search
region.
Set
judgement
conditions.
5
(As required)
Set
detailed
conditions.
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
Select the color of the rotation positioning tag (the section to be detected as a
defect).
Measurement conditions
Defect color:
Black: For defects that appear black
compared to the background.
White: For defects that appear
white compared to the background.
Both: For defects not necessarily
white or black (default setting).
Color of defect : Both
End
1.
Select Position compensation.
1.Circle pos. comp
Position compensation
Detailed conditions
Model reference
A list of compensation modes will be displayed.
Not rotate
1 model
Defect(Circle)
Defect(Arc)
Circular angle
2.
Select Defect (Circle) or Defect (Arc).
The initial screen for defects will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
3.
Select Measurement conditions.
2-9-(14)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Color of defect : Both
End
4.
5.
Select the defect color.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
STEP 2: Registering Models
Register 4 points on the circumference and the region in which to search for
the rotation positioning tag.
1.
Select Model registration.
Position(Defect(Circle))
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Model Registration Screen will be displayed.
Model registration
255,241
2.
Specify the coordinates for the center of the circle.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the display cursor.
3.
2-9-(15)
Press the ENT Key.
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
The screen for specifying the radius will be displayed.
Model registration
70
4.
Specify the size of the circle.
Left Key:
Decreases the size.
Right Key: Increases the size.
5.
Press the ENT Key.
The screen for registering the size of the model will be displayed.
Model registration
39,39
6.
Adjust the size of the model.
Right Key: Increases the size horizontally.
Left Key:
Decreases the size horizontally.
Down Key: Increases the size vertically.
Up Key:
Decreases the size vertically.
When the size of model 0 is adjusted, models 1 to 3 will also change to the
same size.
7.
Press the ENT Key.
A settings screen for the rotation positioning range will be displayed.
Model registration
100
2-9-(16)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
8.
Specify the size of the circle.
Left Key:
Decreases the size.
Right Key: Increases the size.
9.
Press the ENT Key.
The screen for registering the width will be displayed.
Model registration
20
10. Specify the width.
Right/Up Keys:
Increase the width.
Left/Down Keys:
Decrease the width.
11. Press the ENT Key.
If Defect (Arc) has been selected, a screen for specifying the start and end
points of the arc will be displayed.
If Defect (Circle) has been selected, move to (13.).
Model registration
0,0
12. Specify the start and end points of the arc, keeping in mind the rotation angle.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
CHECK
A display cursor will appear at the position where the defect has been
detected.
Model registration
ENT:Register ESC:Cancel
13. Check that an appropriate position has been registered as the model.
2-9-(17)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
14. Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting Search Regions
Set the search region for each model.
The settings method is the same as for Not Rotate. Refer to page 2-9-(6).
STEP 4: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the conditions for judging the correlation of the measurement object to the
model. The judgement conditions will be shared by all 4 models.
Set the range between 0 and 100, with 100 for objects that perfectly match the
model. If the correlation is equal to or above the judgement condition set here,
the judgement result will be OK.
CHECK
Position Compensation Judgement Results and Scrolling
OK: Scroll will be performed.
NG: Scroll will not be performed. The overall judgement will be NG, regardless
of the measurement result.
The settings method is the same as for Not Rotate. Refer to page 2-9-(7).
STEP 5: Setting Detailed Conditions
Adjust the detailed conditions if detection of the rotation positioning tag is
unstable.
CHECK
Re-register the model if the detailed conditions have been changed.
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
Position(Defect(Circle))
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Element size
: [10]
Comparing pitch : [4]
End
2.
Set the detailed conditions.
Refer to the page 2-9-(19) for details.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-9-(18)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
Element Sizes and Comparing Pitch
When a region is drawn on the circumference, a box (element) is automatically
drawn inside the region. The density of each element is calculated and the
position of defects is detected by comparing the element with surrounding elements and looking at differences in densities.
Comparisons
Element
The densities of neighboring elements are compared
and the difference in density becomes the element
defect value for the element with the greater density.
The element with the largest defect value is recognized
as the characteristic portion for rotation positioning.
Element size (4 to 80) (Default: 10)
Comparing pitch (1 to 6) (Default: 4)
Changing to Other Modes (Clearing Settings)
The settings must be cleared before changing to another mode.
The settings method is the same as for Not Rotate. Refer to page 2-9-(8).
2-9-1-4
Circular Angles
Another circle is drawn in addition to the circle for external positioning. A characteristic feature on the circumference of the new circle can be used for position compensation in the rotation direction.
Characteristic
feature is the
reference
position.
2-9-(19)
1
2
3
Set measurement
conditions.
Register
model.
Set search
region.
4
Set
judgement
conditions.
5
(As required)
Set
detailed
conditions.
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
Select the degree of the characteristic feature in the point extractions to use
for comparison.
Set the conditions for detecting
the feature on the circumference.
Mode
Details
Black *
Uses the low density (black) points.
White
Uses the high density (white) points.
Black defect
Compares the density with surrounding pixels and uses the
point with the largest difference (where the density decreases
suddenly).
White defect
Compares the density with surrounding pixels and uses the
point with the largest difference (where the density increases
suddenly).
Edge
Compares the density with surrounding pixels and uses the
point with the largest difference (where the density decreases/
increases suddenly).
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Position compensation.
1.Circle pos. comp
Position compensation
Detailed conditions
Model reference
2-9-(20)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
A list of compensation modes will be displayed.
Not rotate
1 model
Defect(Circle)
Defect(Arc)
Circular angle
2.
Select Circular angle.
The initial screen for circular angles will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
3.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Mode
: Black
End
4.
5.
Select the mode.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
STEP 2: Registering Models
Register 4 points on the circumference and a circle for detecting the characteristic feature.
Model 3
Model 0
Model 2
Model 1
2-9-(21)
Circumference region for
detecting characteristic feature
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
1.
Select Model registration.
Position(Circular angle)
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Model Registration Screen will be displayed.
Model registration
255,241
2.
Specify the coordinates for the center of the circle.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the display cursor.
3.
Press the ENT Key.
The screen for specifying the radius will be displayed.
Model registration
70
4.
Specify the size of the circle.
Left Key:
Decreases the size.
Right Key: Increases the size.
2-9-(22)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
5.
Press the ENT Key.
The screen for registering the size of the model will be displayed.
Model registration
39,39
6.
Adjust the size of the model.
Right Key: Increases the size horizontally.
Left Key:
Decreases the size horizontally.
Down Key: Increases the size vertically.
Up Key:
Decreases the size vertically.
When the size of model 0 is adjusted, models 1 to 3 will also change to the
same size.
7.
Press the ENT Key.
A screen for setting the circle for rotation positioning will be displayed.
Model registration
70
8.
Specify the size of the circle.
Right Key: Increases the size.
Left Key:
9.
CHECK
2-9-(23)
Decreases the size.
Press the ENT Key.
If the number of circles is set to 2 under Detailed conditions, the screen for
drawing another circle will be displayed.
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
Model registration
ENT:Register ESC:Cancel
10. Check that an appropriate position has been registered as the model.
11. Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting Search Regions
Set the search region for each model.
The settings method is the same as for Not Rotate. Refer to page 2-9-(6).
STEP 4: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the conditions for judging the correlation of the measurement object to the
model. The judgement conditions will be shared by all 4 models.
Set the range between 0 and 100, with 100 for objects that perfectly match the
model. If the correlation is equal to or above the judgement condition set here,
the judgement result will be OK.
CHECK
Position Compensation Judgement Results and Scrolling
OK: Scroll will be performed.
NG: Scroll will not be performed. The overall judgement will be NG, regardless
of the measurement result.
The settings method is the same as for Not Rotate. Refer to page 2-9-(7).
STEP 5: Setting Detailed Conditions
Adjust the detailed conditions if detection of the rotation positioning tag is
unstable.
CHECK
Re-register the model if the detailed conditions have been changed.
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
Position(Circular angle)
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2-9-(24)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Skipping angle
:
Comparing pitch :
Necessary element :
Edge pitch
:
[1](Edge/Defect)
Num. of circle
:
[1.0]
[1]
[20]pix
[1]
End
2.
Change the settings.
Refer to page 2-9-(25) for details.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Skipping Angle
Set the angle to skip between point extractions.
The density of all points on the circumference corresponding to the skipping
angle will be measured. The most suitable value for the radius of the circle that
was drawn will be set automatically.
The larger the setting, the fewer points will be extracted. This will increase processing speed, but decrease detection and rotation accuracy. (0.4 to 2.0
(1.0*))
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the skipping angle has been changed, it cannot return to the automatically
set values even if the model is re-registered. To automatically set the most
suitable value for the radius after the skipping angle has been changed, clear
the settings first and then re-register the model.
Example for Skipping Angles of 0.6•
A total of 600 points are detected on this line.
360• (600 points)
1 2 3
The density is determined for each point.
2-9-(25)
600
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
Comparing Pitch
Select the number of registered detection points on the input image that are to
be compared to the reference image.
The larger the setting, the larger the detection interval. This will increase processing speed, but decrease detection accuracy. (1 to 9 (1*))
Example:Mode: Black defect
Skipping angle: 60 (0.6•)
Comparing pitch: 2
The characteristic points (here, black points) on the reference image are
compared to those on the input image shifting two points at a time.
Reference image
Input image
Comparison is started from the reference image characteristic features with
the lowest number.
Reference Image Characteristic Points
1 2 3 45 6
Input Image Characteristic Points
600
1 2 3 45 6
600
Compared
The points are moved by two and then compared again.
8
6
Compared
Necessary Elements
Set how many points (pixels) out of the characteristic feature detected using
the mode set under Measurement conditions will be registered for comparison.
The smaller the setting, the fewer points will be compared. This will increase
processing speed, but decrease detection accuracy. (1 to 99 (20*))
Mode
Details
Black
Registered points in order from the lowest density until the set
number of points is reached.
White
Registered points in order from the highest density until the set
number of points is reached.
Black defect
Registered points in order from the point with the highest density difference from the surrounding pixels until the set number
of points is reached.
White defect
Edge
2-9-(26)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
Edge Pitch
The edge pitch setting is enabled only when black defect, white defect, or edge
are selected as the mode under Measurement conditions.
Set the pitch to obtain the density difference. (1 to 9 (1*))
Example:Mode: Black defect,
Edge pitch: 2
Compares the density with a point two pixels away.
Number of Circles
Select the number of circles for detecting the rotation positioning tag. (1 or 2
(1*)) The number of circles that can be drawn on the Model Registration
Screen will be limited to the number set here.
If the number is set to 2, the detection accuracy will increase but processing
will take longer.
Changing to Other Modes (Clearing Settings)
The settings must be cleared before changing to another mode.
The settings method is the same as for Not Rotate. Refer to page 2-9-(8).
2-9-(27)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
2-9-2
Setting Detailed Conditions
Change the detailed conditions if detection of the registered model is unstable.
Detailed conditions
Verification
:
Candidate level :
OFF
[ 60]
Select whether or not to perform further
detailed verification near the position
where the model was found. (OFF*, ON)
End
If Verification is set to ON, the following two levels of search processing will be executed.
For rough searches, set the reference level for searching for the model. (0 to 99 (60*))
1. Rough search
Uses a rough search model to search
for an image with a correlation at the
candidate level or higher.
2. Detailed search
Measures again using the detailed
search model to compare to the
images surrounding the section at
the candidate level or higher.
Search
Search
Rough search model Section with correlation at
candidate level or higher
1.
Detailed search model
Select Detailed conditions.
1.Circle pos. comp
Position compensation
Detailed conditions
Model reference
2-9-(28)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Verification
:
Candidate level :
OFF
[ 60]
End
2.
3.
Make the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-9-(29)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
2-9-3
Referencing Models
Models can be displayed on screen to check what kind of images are registered as models.
1.
Select Model reference.
1.Circle pos. comp
Position compensation
Detailed conditions
Model reference
The images registered as models will be displayed.
Model reference
ESC:END
2.
Press the ESC Key.
The screen in (1.) will return.
2-9-(30)
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
2-9-4
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for Circle
Position Compensation.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which circle position compensation is set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the three
screens.
Scroll Amount
OK 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Circle pos. comp
3
Judge:OK
ScrollX:256.321
ScrollY:269.213
Scroll : 20.0
2
1
Detailed Display
The correlation values for each model will be displayed.
If search verification is set to ON, the number of points detected as candidates
will be displayed.
OK 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Circle pos. comp
3
Model0
Model1
Model2
Model3
Corr. Cand.
92
2
0 96
1
97
2
93
1
1
2-9-(31)
2
Section 2-9
Circle Position Compensation
Position Display
Only the model frame will be displayed.
If search verification is set to ON, a display cursor will indicate the candidates.
OK 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Circle pos. comp
3
0
2
1
2-9-(32)
Section 2-10
Reset Scroll
2-10
Reset Scroll
The Reset Scroll processing item is used to return images that were scrolled
using position displacement compensation to their original position (the position when read to the image buffer).
This processing item is added to the flowchart but no condition settings or
other operations are required.
Example: To perform position displacement compensation separately on two
measurement objects within the same field of vision.
0.
Camera image input
1.
EC position compensation
2.
Fine matching
3.
Scroll reset
Returns to original position the
image that was scrolled using
1. EC position compensation.
4.
EC position compensation
5.
Performs position compensation
for another measurement object,
with the image returned to the
original position.
Fine matching
CHECK
2-10-(1)
The scroll is reset for all Camera image input processing items, including
Camera Image and Switch Camera.
Section 2-11
Scroll
2-11
Scroll
The Scroll processing item scrolls an image based on the measured values
from other units. It can be used in combination with other general measurement processing items when the required results cannot be achieved with
position compensation processing items.
Example: Position Compensation without Being Affected by Noise.
Measurement object
(largest area)
Noise
0.
Camera image input
1.
Labeling
Areas are assigned label
numbers in descending
order of area.
Scroll
Scrolling is performed
using the center of gravity
X and Y of label 0.
2.
2-11-(1)
Section 2-11
Scroll
Operational Flow
1
page 2-11-(3)
Set the reference.
2
page 2-11-(6)
Set judgement
conditions.
3
page 2-11-(7)
Measurement
screens
2-11-(2)
Section 2-11
Scroll
2-11-1
Setting the Reference
Set expressions to specify the units and measured values to be used as the
reference for scrolling.
2.Scroll
Measure X :
Measure Y :
:
Measure
Reference X :
Reference Y :
Reference :
Judgement conditions
Image scrolled in X direction for difference between reference X and value of this expression.
Image scrolled in Y direction for difference between reference Y and value of this expression.
Image scrolled rotationally for difference between reference and value of this expression.
q
Value of this expression is reference position for scrolling in X direction.
Value of this expression is reference position for scrolling in Y direction.
Value of this expression is reference position for scrolling rotationally.
Example: Scrolling Using Labeling in Unit 1 as the Reference
2.Scroll
Measure X :
Measure Y :
:
Measure
Reference X :
Reference Y :
Reference :
Judgement conditions
Gravity X of Unit 1
Gravity Y of Unit 1
Reference X of Unit 1
Reference Y of Unit 1
Label 0 (largest area)
Noise
0.
Camera image
1.
Labeling
2.
Scroll
Areas are assigned label
numbers in descending order of
area. Label 0 is set for output.
Scrolling is performed
using the center of gravity
X and Y of label 0.
2-11-(3)
Section 2-11
Scroll
The following example shows the procedure for using “measure X” for scrolling. This procedure can be adapted for setting expressions for other items.
1.
Select Scroll.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Labeling
2.Scroll
3.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial screen for scrolling will be displayed.
Measure X :
Measure Y :
:
Measure
Reference X :
Reference Y :
Reference :
Judgement conditions
2.
Select Measure X.
A screen to input the expression will be displayed.
Measure X
Measurement:
ENT:Change
3.
Place the cursor inside the square brackets for the expression and press
the ENT Key.
A list of expression items will be displayed.
Measure X
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
4.
SeeAlso
Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ.
5.
2-11-(4)
Select the items to be set in the expression.
Once the expression has been set, select OK.
Section 2-11
Scroll
The expression will be saved and the screen in (2.) will return.
Measure X
U1.X
Measurement:
305.312
ENT:Change
A line will be displayed at the
position that corresponds to
the measured value.
6.
Press the Esc Key.
The expression will be saved and the screen in (1.) will return.
Measure X : U1.X
Measure Y :
:
Measure
Reference X :
Reference Y :
Reference :
Judgement conditions
2-11-(5)
Section 2-11
Scroll
2-11-2
Setting Judgement Conditions
Judgement conditions are set for the scroll amount.
CHECK
Scroll Judgement Results and Scrolling
OK: Image is scrolled.
NG: Image is not scrolled and the overall judgement will be NG regardless of
measurement results.
Ranges for an OK judgement
Judgement conditions
X-direction scroll amount
(-1,024 to 1,024)
Scroll X : [-1024: 1024]
Scroll Y : [-1024: 1024]
Scroll : [-180.00: 180.00]
Y-direction scroll amount
(-1,024 to 1,024)
Rotational scroll amount
(-180.00 to 180.00)
End
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
2.Scroll
Measure X : U1.X
Measure Y : U1.Y
:
Measure
Reference X : U1.SX
Reference Y : U1.SY
Reference :
Judgement conditions
The setting screen for judgement conditions will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Scroll X : [-1024: 1024]
Scroll Y : [-1024: 1024]
Scroll : [-180.00: 180.00]
End
2.
Set the conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-11-(6)
Section 2-11
Scroll
2-11-3
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for scrolling.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which the Scroll processing
item is set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
2.Scroll
RUN
Judge : OK
Scroll X :
23
Scroll Y : 251
Scroll : 23.01
OK 45ms
Judgement result for this Unit
Scroll amount
2-11-(7)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
The 256-gradation images read by the Camera are converted into binary
black-and-white images and measurement is performed on the white pixels.
The size (area), position (center of gravity), and orientation (angle) of the measurement object can be detected.
Example: Detecting the Presence of Tablets
The image is converted into binary.
OK product
The image is converted into binary,
showing the tablets in white.
NG product
The area of the white pixels is insufficient,
indicating that a tablet is missing.
2-12-(1)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
Operational Flow
1
page 2-12-(3)
Select measurement
image.
2
page 2-12-(4)
Set binary
level.
3
Gravity and area page 2-12-(7)
page 2-12-(6)
1
Set measurement
region.
(As required)
Change
binary level
for each
region.
2
(As required)
Set measurement
conditions.
(As required)
3
4
Draw measurement
region.
Re-register
reference
position.
3
4
Draw measurement
region.
Re-register
reference
position.
(As required)
5
6
Set judgement conditions.
Change
pixel
skipping.
5
6
Set judgement conditions.
Change
pixel
skipping.
Gravity and axis page 2-12-(16)
1
(As required)
Change
binary level
for each
region.
2
(As required)
Set measurement
conditions.
(As required)
(As required)
Area (var. box) page 2-12-(23)
1 (As required) 2 (As required) 3
Change
binary level
for each
region.
Clear set
region.
4
Set measurement
conditions.
Set measurement
region.
4 (As required) 5
6 (As required)
Register
reference
position.
Change
pixel
skipping.
Set judgement conditions.
page 2-12-(36)
page 2-12-(38)
Set coordinate
mode.
5
page 2-12-(39)
Measurement
screens
2-12-(2)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
2-12-1
Selecting Measurement Images
This section describes how to select an image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
1.
Select Binary defect.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary defect
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial screen for binary defects will be displayed.
1.Binary defect
Measurement image
Binary(Common)
Select region
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Measurement image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
3.
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-12-(3)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
2-12-2
Setting the Binary Level
Set the level for converting 256-gradation images into binary images. Measurements are performed for the white pixels. Therefore, make the settings so
that the measurement object is white.
The binary level set here is used for all of the measurement regions.
CHECK
The binary levels can be set for each measurement region.
1.
Select Binary defect.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary defect
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The setting selections will be displayed.
1.Binary defect
Measurement image
Binary(Common)
Select region
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Binary (Common).
The settings screen for binary levels will be displayed.
Upper limit
Lower limit
Binary level
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
:Move
:Change
Auto
The Controller
automatically
determines binary level.
Reverse
Reverses black and white display.
2-12-(4)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
3.
Move the cursor to the upper limit and use the Left and Right Keys to
change the value.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
4.
CHECK
Use the same method to change the lower value.
Set the upper and lower limits to make the measurement object white.
Make the measurement object white.
Binary level
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
:Move
5.
:Change
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
2-12-(5)
It is also possible to set the binary level so that measurement is performed
only for an intermediate density range.
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
2-12-3
Setting Measurement Regions
Up to eight measurement regions can be set.
There are three measurement methods for binary defect detection: Gravity
and area, gravity and axis, and area (variable box). Different measurement
methods can be set for each region. Select the measurement method suitable
for the objects to be inspected.
Gravity and Area
Use a gravity and area measurement to find the size and position (center of
gravity) of a measurement object.
Measurement region
Center of gravity of the white pixels
No. of white pixels = area
Area
The area is the number of white pixels in the measurement region.
Center of Gravity
The center of gravity is the center of the area of white pixel. When the white
pixel area of the region forms a square, the center of gravity is the intersection
of the lines from diagonal corners.
CHECK
If the number of white pixels is the same, the measurement result will be OK
even if the shape of the measurement object is different. Use pattern detection
to distinguish between measurement object shapes.
CHECK
Use an area (var. box) measurement for measurement objects with varying
measurement region sizes or positions.
Gravity and Axis
Use a gravity and axis measurement to find the angle of a measurement
object.
This measurement method also calculates the axis angle, in addition to the
binary center of gravity and area calculations described previously.
Measurement region
Axis angle
q
Center of gravity of white pixels
No. of white pixels = area
2-12-(6)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
Axis Angle
The axis angle is the angle of the major axis of an ellipse that is diagrammatically equivalent to the area occupied by the white pixels.
CHECK
More processing time is required to calculate the axis angle. To simply find the
area and center of gravity, use a gravity and area measurement.
Area (Var. Box)
Use an area (variable box) measurement to adjust the measurement region (a
box) for measurement objects with varying sizes or positions and find their size
and center of gravity.
The upper, lower, left, and right edges of the measurement object are found.
The measurement region will be on the inside of the edges that were found.
Upper edge
Measurement region
Right edge
Left edge
Lower edge
With the edges detected, the Controller can determine where the measurement object is. Even if the size and position of the measurement object
changes, the Controller can move the measurement region appropriately.
Measurement region
Measurement region
Once the edges have been found, the image is converted to a binary image
and the area and center of gravity of the measurement region are found.
2-12-3-1
Gravity and Area
Density images taken by the Camera are converted to binary images, made
up of black and white pixels. The size (area) and position (center of gravity) of
the area occupied by the white pixels are measured. Refer to page 2-12-(6).
1
(As required)
Change
binary level
for each
region.
2
(As required)
Set measurement
conditions.
(As required)
3
4
Draw measurement
region.
Re-register
reference
values.
5
Set
judgement
conditions.
6
(As required)
Change
pixel
skipping.
STEP 1: Changing Binary Level for Each Region
Perform this operation to change the binary level for each region.
Set the level for converting 256-gradation images into binary images. Measurements are performed for the white pixels. Therefore, make the settings so
that the measurement object is white.
2-12-(7)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
CHECK
If Binary defect/Binary (Common) are changed after the binary levels are
changed for each region, the settings for each region are disabled and the setting levels under Binary defect/Binary (Common) are enabled.
1.
Select Binary defect.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary defect
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The setting selections will be displayed.
1.Binary defect
Measurement image
Binary(Common)
Select region
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Select region.
The region numbers will be displayed.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
3.
Select the region number.
A list of measurement methods will be displayed.
New registration(Region0)
Gravity and area
Gravity and axis
Area(var.box)
2-12-(8)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
4.
Select Gravity and area.
The initial Gravity and Area Screen will be displayed.
Region0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
5.
Select Binary.
The Binary Levels Settings Screen will be displayed.
The rest of the procedure is the same as outlined under 6HWWLQJWKH
%LQDU\/HYHO.
STEP 2: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set measurement conditions to measure the exterior of a measurement object
or to make the binary levels track the brightness of the measurement image.
The default for all settings is OFF.
1.
Select Measurement conditions.
Region0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Fill profile
: OFF
Binary tracking : OFF
End
2.
3.
Select ON or OFF.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-12-(9)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
Fill Profile Function
The fill profile function is set when the exterior of the measurement object is
being measured.
Turn ON the fill profile function to measure the whole area between the start
point (black pixels to white) and the end point (white pixels to black) in the
measurement region as white pixels.
Measurement region
Start point End point
This area will be measured as white pixels.
Example
Input image
Fill profile: ON
Measurement region
When a White-pixel Section Encroaches on the Measurement Region
Input image
Fill profile: ON
Not recognized as start point because change from white to black.
Measuring Open-form Measurement Objects
The measurement result changes depending on the orientation of the measurement
object.
Input image
Fill profile: ON
2-12-(10)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
Binary Tracking Function
Set the binary tracking function when the variations in measurement object
color or other factors prevent correct measurement with stable binary levels. If
the binary tracking function is set to ON, the Controller will automatically adjust
the binary levels in line with the brightness of the input image.
STEP 3: Drawing Measurement Regions
When a measurement region is drawn, measurement is performed for the displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values (area and
center of gravity).
CHECK
Regions can be created by combining up to 3 different figures. Regions with
difficult shapes can be drawn and sections not to be measured can be left out
of the region by combining different figures.
1.
Select Region.
Region0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Region
New
Box
End
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
2.
Select New.
3.
Select the desired figure.
4.
Select the desired drawing mode (OR/NOT).
An arrow cursor will appear.
Up to three figures (0, 1, and 2)
can be drawn.
Region
2-12-(11)
[0]
375.341
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
5.
Draw the region with the selected figure.
The figure will be registered.
Region
Add
Figure0
End
Once three figures have been drawn,
Add will no longer be displayed.
6.
If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
7.
Repeat steps 3 to 5 as necessary to create the desired shape.
8.
After drawing is completed, select End.
The measurement region will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
The center of gravity (marked by an arrow cursor) and the measurement
region will be displayed.
CHECK
Figures drawn using OR mode are displayed with solid lines and figures drawn
using NOT mode are displayed with dotted lines.
Figure 1 (drawn using OR)
Figure 2 (drawn using NOT)
Figure 3 (drawn using OR)
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1. In the screen for step 5 above, select the figure to be changed or cleared
using the Up and Down Keys and press the ENT Key.
Figure 0
Figure 1
Region
Add
Figure0
Figure1
End
The selections will be displayed.
Correct
Clear
2-12-(12)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
2.
Select either Correct or Clear and press the ENT Key.
If Correct is selected, the cursor will be displayed. Correct the size and position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
STEP 4: Re-registering Reference Values
This operation is performed when only the reference values are to be re-registered.
When a measurement region is drawn, the measurement is performed for the
displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values. If the
re-registering function explained here is used, only the reference values for the
image currently displayed will be registered. The area and center of gravity are
registered for the reference values.
CHECK
Reference positions can also be changed, facilitating the following application.
Inspecting Positions from a Specified Point
Once the reference values (area and center of gravity) have been obtained for
the image currently displayed, the reference position is changed to an suitable
point. Position inspection can be performed by calculating the difference
between this reference position and the measurement position.
Measurement position (gravity)
Reference position
changed to suitable point
CHECK
When the measurement region is changed, the reference values return to the
default settings.
1.
Select Reference registration.
Region0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2-12-(13)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
A cursor will appear at the position of the center of gravity.
Reference position
Measurement region
Reference registration
251,184
+
ENT:Set
2.
3.
:Move
To change the position, use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move
the cursor.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 5: Setting the Judgement Conditions
Make settings for the area and center of gravity.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[
0.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[ 0.000 : 511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[ 0.000 : 483.000]
Range for an OK judgement
Area range (0 to 9,999,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the X direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the Y direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
End
: Measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Region0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2-12-(14)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[ 2000.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[
0.000 :
511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[
0.000:
483.000]
End
2.
3.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 6: Changing Pixel Skipping
To shorten measurement processing time, change the number of pixels to be
skipped. The greater the skipping setting, the shorter the processing time.
However, the accuracy of the measurement will decrease.
Once the skipping setting has been changed, perform a measurement and
confirm that measurement can be performed correctly.
Skipping X and Skipping Y
Set how many pixels to skip in the measurement region during measurement.
The default setting is 1, which means that all of the measurement region will
be measured.
Pixel
Skipping X
Skipping Y
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
Region0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2-12-(15)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Skipping X : [ 1]
Skipping Y : [ 1]
End
2.
3.
Set the number of pixels to skip.
Select End.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-12-3-2
Gravity and Axis
Density images taken by the Camera are converted into binary images made
up of black and white pixels and then measured. The size (area), position
(center of gravity), and axis angle of the white-pixel area is calculated.
SeeAlso
1
(As required)
Change
binary level
for each
region.
Refer to page 2-12-(6).
2
(As required)
Set measurement
conditions.
3
4
Draw measurement
region.
(As required)
Re-register
reference
value.
5
Set
judgement
conditions.
6 (As required)
Change
pixel
skipping.
STEP 1: Changing Binary Level for Each Region
Use this function to change the binary level settings for each region.
Set the level for converting 256-gradation images into binary images. Measurements are performed for the white pixels. Therefore, make the settings so
that the measurement object is white.
CHECK
If Binary defect/Binary (Common) are changed after the binary levels are
changed for each region, the settings for each region are disabled and the setting levels under Binary defect/Binary (Common) are enabled.
1.
Select Binary defect.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary defect
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
2-12-(16)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
The Binary Defect Settings Screen will be displayed.
1.Binary defect
Measurement image
Binary(Common)
Select region
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Select region.
A list of region numbers will be displayed.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
3.
Select the region number.
The selection of measurement methods will be displayed.
New registration(Region0)
Gravity and area
Gravity and axis
Area(var.box)
4.
Select Gravity and axis.
The initial Gravity and Axis Screen will be displayed.
Region0(Gravity and axis)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2-12-(17)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
5.
Select Binary.
The Binary Levels Settings Screen will be displayed.
The rest of the procedure is the same as outlined under 6HWWLQJWKH
%LQDU\/HYHO.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-12-(4).
STEP 2: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the binary tracking function when the variations in measurement object
color or other factors prevent correct measurement with stable binary levels. If
the binary tracking function is set to ON, the Controller will automatically adjust
the binary levels in line with the brightness of the input image. The default setting is OFF.
1.
Select Measurement conditions.
Region0(Gravity and axis)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Binary tracking : OFF
End
2.
3.
Select either ON or OFF.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Drawing Measurement Regions
When a measurement region is drawn, measurement is performed for the displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values (area,
center of gravity, and axis).
CHECK
Regions can be created by combining up to 3 different figures. Regions with
difficult shapes can be drawn and sections not to be measured can be left out
of the region by combining different figures.
2-12-(18)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
1.
Select Region.
Region0(Gravity and axis)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Region
New
Box
End
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
2.
Select New.
3.
Select the desired figure.
4.
Select the desired drawing mode (OR/NOT).
An arrow cursor will appear.
Up to three figures (0, 1, and 2)
can be drawn.
Region
5.
2-12-(19)
Draw the region with the selected figure.
[0]
375,341
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
The figure will be registered.
Region
Add
Figure0
End
Once three figures have been drawn,
Add will no longer be displayed.
6.
If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
7.
Repeat steps 3 to 5 as necessary to create the desired shape.
8.
After drawing is completed, select End.
The measurement region will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
The center of gravity (marked by an arrow cursor) and the measurement
region will be displayed.
CHECK
Figures drawn using OR mode are displayed with solid lines and figures drawn
using NOT mode are displayed with dotted lines.
Figure 1 (drawn using OR)
Figure 2 (drawn using NOT)
Figure 3 (drawn using OR)
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1. In the screen for step 5 above, select the figure to be changed or cleared
using the Up and Down Keys and press the ENT Key.
Figure 0
Figure 1
Region
Add
Figure0
Figure1
End
The figure for the figure number selected using the cursor will be displayed
with solid lines. The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed.
Correct
Clear
2-12-(20)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
2.
Select either Correct or Clear and press the ENT Key.
If Correct is selected, the cursor will be displayed. Correct the size and position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
STEP 4: Re-registering Reference Values
This operation is performed when only the reference values are to be re-registered.
When a measurement region is drawn, the measurement is performed for the
displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values. If the
re-registering function explained here is used, only the reference values for the
image currently displayed will be registered. The area, center of gravity, and
axis are registered for the reference values.
CHECK
The reference values can be changed to enable the following function.
Inspecting Positions from a Specified Point
Once the reference values (area, center of gravity, and axis) have been
obtained for the image currently displayed, the reference position is changed
to an suitable point. Position inspection can be performed by calculating the
difference between this reference position and the measurement position.
Measurement position (gravity)
Reference position
changed to suitable point
CHECK
When the measurement region is changed, the reference values return to the
default settings.
1.
Select Reference registration.
Region0(Gravity and axis)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
A cursor will appear at the position of the center of gravity.
Measurement region
Reference registration
+
ENT:Set
2-12-(21)
:Move
251,184
Reference position
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
2.
To change the position, use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move
the cursor.
3.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 5: Setting the Judgement Conditions
Make settings for the area, center of gravity, and axis.
Range for an OK judgement
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[
2000.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[
0.000 : 511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[
0.000 : 483.000]
Axis angle : 75.000
[ -180.000 : 180.000]
Area range (0 to 9,999,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the X direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the Y direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Rotation range of the measurement object (-180.000 to 180.000,
but only values between -90.000 and 90.000 will be output.)
End
: Measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
Axis Angle
Measurement value
for axis angle: 10.000
-10.000
If this range is to be judged OK,
set to -10.000: 10.000.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Region0(Gravity and axis)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[ 2000.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[
0.000 :
511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[
0.000:
483.000]
Axis angle : 75.000
[ -180.000: 180.000]
End
2.
Change the settings.
3.
Select End.
2-12-(22)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 6: Changing Pixel Skipping
To shorten measurement processing time, change the number of pixels to be
skipped. The greater the skipping setting, the shorter the processing time.
However, the accuracy of the measurement will decrease.
Once the skipping setting has been changed, perform a measurement and
confirm that measurement can be performed correctly.
Skipping X and Skipping Y
Set how many pixels to skip in the measurement region during measurement.
The default setting is 1, which means that all of the measurement region will
be measured.
Skipping X
Pixel
Skipping Y
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
Region0(Gravity and axis)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Skipping X : [ 1]
Skipping Y : [ 1]
End
2.
3.
Set the number of pixels to skip.
Select End.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-12-3-3
Area (Variable Box)
The area (variable box) measurement method measures the area and center
of gravity while following the measurement region to suit measurement objects
with inconsistent sizes and positions.
First, the upper, lower, left, and right edges of the measurement object are
located. The area within the edges becomes the measurement region. The
2-12-(23)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
location of the measurement object can be determined using the edge detection points so the measurement region can be adapted to suit if the size or
position of the measurement object changes.
Once the edges have been located, the image is converted to binary and the
area and center of gravity of the measurement region is measured.
SeeAlso
1
(As required)
Change
binary level
for each
region.
Refer to page 2-12-(7).
2
(As required)
Set measurement
conditions.
3
4
Set measurement
region.
(As required)
Register
reference
value.
5
Set
judgement
conditions.
6
(As required)
Change
pixel
skipping.
STEP 1: Changing Binary Level for Each Region
Perform this operation to change the binary level for each region.
Set the level for converting 256-gradation images into binary images. Measurements are performed for the white pixels. Therefore, make the settings so
that the measurement object is white.
CHECK
If Binary defect/Binary (Common) are changed after the binary levels are
changed for each region, the settings for each region are disabled and the setting levels under Binary defect/Binary (Common) are enabled.
1.
Select Binary defect.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary defect
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The setting selections will be displayed.
1.Binary defect
Measurement image
Binary(Common)
Select region
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Select region.
2-12-(24)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
A list of region numbers will be displayed.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
3.
Select the region number.
The selection of measurement methods will be displayed.
New registration(Region0)
Gravity and area
Gravity and axis
Area(var.box)
4.
Select Area (var. box).
The initial Area Var. Box Screen will be displayed.
Region0(Area(var.box))
Binary
Measurement conditions
Left edge
Upper edge
Right edge
Lower edge
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
5.
Select Binary.
The Binary Levels Settings Screen will be displayed.
The rest of the procedure is the same as outlined under 6HWWLQJWKH
%LQDU\/HYHO.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-12-(4).
STEP 2: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set measurement conditions to measure the exterior of a measurement object
or to make the binary levels track the brightness of the measurement image.
The default for all settings is OFF.
SeeAlso
2-12-(25)
Refer to page 2-12-(10) for information on the fill profile and binary tracking
functions.
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
1.
Select Measurement conditions.
Region0(Area(var.box))
Binary
Measurement conditions
Left edge
Upper edge
Right edge
Lower edge
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Fill profile
: OFF
Binary tracking : OFF
End
2.
3.
Select ON or OFF.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Drawing the Measurement Region
The measurement region is drawn by specifying the upper, lower, left, and
right edges of the measurement object. If even one of the edges cannot be
located, the judgement result will be NG.
Upper edge
Left edge
Measurement region
Right edge
Lower edge
When one of the edges is selected, the settings for the conditions for the
selected edge will be displayed. In this example, the settings for the left edge
will be explained. Make adjustments as necessary when setting conditions for
the upper, lower, and right edges.
2-12-(26)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
1.
Set the edge detection conditions.
Set the direction for the edge search and the density changes.
Left edge
Direction for edge detection: →, ←, ↑, ↓
Direction :
→
Color
: Light→Dark
Density change: Light→Dark, Dark→Light
End
CHECK
Combining Edge Detection Directions
Set a combination of upper, lower, right, and left edge detection directions
that surround the area to be measured.
Incorrect
Correct
Upper edge
Left edge
Upper edge
Right edge
Left edge
Lower edge
a)
Right edge
Lower edge
Select Left edge.
Region0(Area(var.box))
Binary
Measurement conditions
Left edge
Upper edge
Right edge
Lower edge
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
The initial screen for the left edge will be displayed.
Left edge
Measurement conditions
Region
Detailed conditions
b)
2-12-(27)
Select Measurement conditions.
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Left edge
Direction :
:Light
Color
Dark
End
c)
d)
Select the detection conditions for the left edge.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2.
Drawing the Edge Detection Region
Draw a region that includes the edge.
Incorrect
Correct
Edge
Edge
The edge is not in the region.
a)
Select Region.
Left edge
Measurement conditions
Region
Detailed conditions
The Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Left edge
b)
CHECK
230,256
Draw a box-shaped region.
The only figure that can be drawn is a box.
2-12-(28)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
When the bottom right coordinates are specified, the region will be set
and the screen in (a) will return.
CHECK
Use the following procedure to fix the region.
Measurement Objects with Variable Widths Only
Draw the edge detection region so that the measurement region Y coordinates
will remain the same for both the upper and lower edges. The upper and lower
edges will always have these edge points.
Upper edge region
100,100
300,100
Right edge region
Left edge region
100,410
300,410
Lower edge region
The measurement region will adjust to the right
and left edges only before measurement is performed.
2-12-(29)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
Measurement Objects with Variable Heights Only
Draw the edge detection region so that the measurement region X coordinates
will remain the same for both the left and right edges. The left and right edges
will always have these edge points.
Upper edge region
450,100
20,100
Left edge region
Right edge region
450,410
20,410
Lower edge region
The measurement region will adjust to the upper
and lower edges only before measurement is performed.
3.
Changing Detailed Conditions as Required
Change the detailed conditions when the measurement results are unstable. Change and set the edge level, noise level, noise width, and offset
width as required. (Normally, these four conditions can be left on the default settings.) After changing the settings, perform an object measurement
to check that measurement can still be performed correctly.
a)
Select Detailed conditions.
Left edge
Measurement conditions
Region
Detailed conditions
2-12-(30)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Left edge
Edge level : [ 50]%
Noise level : [ 20]
Noise width: [ 0]pix
Offset width: [ 0]pix
End
b)
Move the cursor to the condition to be changed and change the setting.
c)
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (a) will return.
Press the ESC Key to return to the initial screen for Area (var. box).
Edge Level
Set a density change level between 0 and 100 that will indicate the edge. Normally, the default setting of 50% will be fine.
The edge is normally detected as follows:
1.
The density distribution of the whole measurement region is calculated.
2.
The density difference between the lowest and highest density value becomes 100%.
3.
The point where the edge level density change is detected becomes the
edge.
Measurement region
100%
50%
0%
Maximum density value
Edge level
Minimum density value
Noise Level
Set a noise level between 0 and 255 to assist the determination of edges. The
maximum density and minimum density within the edge detection area is calculated and if the difference between the two values is less than the noise
level, then the Controller determines that there is no edge. Normally the
default setting of 20 is sufficient. Adjust this to a higher value, however, if noise
is causing false edges to be detected.
(Within the edge detection region)
Max. density - min. density < noise level “ no edge “ NG measurement
result
Max. density - min. density ˜ noise level “ Edge “ Used for measurement
2-12-(31)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
Example: When noise level is set to 30
Edge
detection
region
Max. density 60
60 15 30
Edge detected so
Min. density 15
measurement performed
Edge
detection
region
Max. density 25
Min. density 10
25
10 30
Processed as no edge detected.
Measurement result: NG
Noise Width
Set the noise width between 0 and 255 to evaluate noise.
If the density distribution from the position where the edge was first detected
falls to below the edge level within the noise width range, the detected point is
judged as noise. Normally the default noise width setting of 0 is sufficient. If
noise is causing incorrect detection, make this value higher.
Example
Edge detection point
Measurement
region
If the density falls below the
edge level within the set range,
the detected edge is
determined to be noise.
Noise width (pixel)
50%
Edge level
Offset Width
Set the adjustment width (in pixel units) for the detected edge position. Set a
value between -511 and 511.
The default setting is 0, which means measurement will start from position
where the edge is detected.
Offset width
Edge detection point
Left and right edges: Set the offset width on the X axis.
2-12-(32)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
Upper and lower edges: Set the offset width on the Y axis.
X axis
-
+
Y axis
+
Example: To Measure from 2 Pixel-widths Inside the Edge Detection Point
The value inside the brackets is the offset width.
Upper edge (2)
Measurement region
Right edge (-2)
Left edge (2)
Lower edge (-2)
CHECK
The display cursor, which indicates the edge detection point, will also appear
at the set offset width position.
STEP 4: Registering Reference Values
When detecting differences from an acceptable product, reference values
must be registered. Place the acceptable product in the correct position and
register the reference values.
The area and center of gravity are registered for the reference values.
CHECK
The reference values can be changed to enable the following function.
Inspecting Positions from a Specified Point
Once the reference values (area and center of gravity) have been obtained for
the image currently displayed, the reference position is changed to an suitable
point. Position inspection can be performed by calculating the difference
between this reference position and the measurement position.
Measurement position (gravity)
Reference position
changed to a suitable point
2-12-(33)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
1.
Select Reference registration.
Region0(Area(var.box))
Binary
Measurement conditions
Left edge
Upper edge
Right edge
Lower edge
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
A cursor will appear at the position of the center of gravity.
Measurement object
Reference registration
251,184
Reference position
ENT:Set
2.
3.
:Move
To change the position, use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move
the cursor.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 5: Setting the Judgement Conditions
Make settings for the area and center of gravity.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[
0.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[ 0.000 : 511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[ 0.000 : 483.000]
Range for an OK judgement
Area range (0 to 9,999,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the X direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the Y direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
End
: Measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
2-12-(34)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Region0(Area(var.box))
Binary
Measurement conditions
Left edge
Upper edge
Right edge
Lower edge
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[ 2000.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[
0.000 :
511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[
0.000:
483.000]
End
2.
3.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 6: Changing Pixel Skipping
To shorten measurement processing time, change the number of pixels to be
skipped. The greater the skipping setting, the shorter the processing time.
However, the accuracy of the measurement will decrease.
Once the skipping setting has been changed, perform a measurement and
confirm that measurement can be performed correctly.
Skipping X and Skipping Y
Set how many pixels to skip in the measurement region during measurement.
The default setting is 1, which means that all of the measurement region will
be measured.
Pixel
Skipping Y
2-12-(35)
Skipping X
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
Region0(Area(var.box))
Measurement conditions
Left edge
Upper edge
Right edge
Lower edge
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Skipping X : [ 1]
Skipping Y : [ 1]
End
2.
3.
Set the number of pixels to skip.
Select End.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-12-3-4
Clearing Set Regions
The clear operation is performed separately for each region.
1.
Select the number of the region to be cleared.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
A list of selections will be displayed.
Example: For gravity and
area measurement regions
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
2-12-(36)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Region will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The region will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-12-(37)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
2-12-4
Setting the Coordinate Mode
Select the type of coordinate values.
Before scroll:Output made using the coordinate values
before position displacement compensation.
After scroll*:Output made using the coordinate values
after position displacement compensation.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for differences between
output coordinates.
End
ON:
Output made using coordinate values set using calibration.
OFF*: Output made using Camera coordinate values.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the coordinate mode is changed after the judgement conditions have been
set, the measurement results will change also. Change the judgement conditions to enable correct measurement.
1.
Select Binary defect.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary defect
2.
The setting selections will be displayed.
1.Binary defect
Measurement image
Binary(Common)
Select region
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Coordinate mode.
The Coordinate Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
3.
4.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-12-(38)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
2-12-5
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for binary
defect detection.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which binary defect detection is set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the four
screens.
Judgement Result
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Binary defect
Judge: NG
0
NG 45ms
Judgement result for this unit
Inspection region displayed in OK color for OK result and
displayed in NG color for NG result.
(Figures drawn in OR mode are displayed in solid lines and
figures drawn in NOT mode are displayed in dotted lines.)
Center of gravity
Region number
2-12-(39)
Section 2-12
Detecting Binary Defects
List of Positions
A list of the center of gravity positions for each region is displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Binary defect
Pos.X
0. 90.785
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NG 45ms
Pos.Y
125.251
NG regions highlighted.
Region number
CHECK
If the font size is set to small, the list of positions and area and axis screens
will be listed.
If the font size is set to normal, these two screens will be displayed consecutively.
Area and Axis
A list of the area and axis for each region is displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Binary defect
Area
Angle
125.251
0. 2490.785
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NG 45ms
NG regions highlighted.
Region number
Individual Region Display
More detailed measurement results are displayed for each region.
Press the SHIFT+ Right or Left Keys to display the set regions in order.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Binary defect
NG 45ms
Region0(Gravity and axis)
Judge : NG
Area
: 1281.000
Gravity X: 105.123
Gravity Y:
98.351
Axis angle: 83.970
Center of gravity
Inspection region displayed in OK color for OK result and
displayed in NG color for NG result.
(Figures drawn in OR mode are displayed in solid lines and
figures drawn in NOT mode are displayed in dotted lines.)
2-12-(40)
Section 2-13
Classification
2-13
Classification
With the Classification processing item, products are classified or differentiated between when there are many types of products being handled on the
same production line.
Sections that will serve as classification references are registered as models
beforehand.
Registered to 0.
Registered to 1.
Registered to 2.
B
A
C
The number of the model that is most similar to the input image is output. If
this data is retrieved by an external device, the products can be classified at
the next stage of the process. If there is no model that matches the image, the
output will be NG (-1).
A
B
C
Camera
1
2
0
The number of the most similar model is output.
Example: Distinguishing between Grades of Mandarin Boxes
AA
B
D
2-13-(1)
Section 2-13
Classification
Operational Flow
1
page 2-13-(3)
Register models.
2
Clear
models.
page 2-13-(6)
Reference
models.
page 2-13-(7)
page 2-13-(8)
Set search region.
3
page 2-13-(9)
Set judgement
conditions.
4
(As required) page 2-13-(11)
Set detailed
judgement
5
page 2-13-(14)
Set coordinate
mode.
6
page 2-13-(15)
Measurement
screens
CHECK
The Classification processing item uses the image stored at Image 0 as the
measurement image; there is no menu for selecting the measurement image.
2-13-(2)
Section 2-13
Classification
2-13-1
Registering Models
A section that will serve as the classification reference is registered as the
model. Up to 36 versions of a model can be registered with index numbers 0 to
35.
When the model has variations in printing quality or shape, register multiple
models to the same index number. Up to 5 models can be registered to the
same index number. When a model is registered, the center of the model is
registered as the search coordinates.
CHECK
Models can be created by combining up to 3 different figures. Regions with difficult shapes can be drawn and sections not to be measured can be left out of
the model region by combining different figures.
CHECK
When multiple models are registered to the same index number, the Controller
automatically creates auxiliary models between the models that are registered. If the auxiliary models are added to the registered models when
searches are performed, stable searches are possible even if there are variations between the registered models. Select whether or not to use auxiliary
models in searches under Detailed settings. Refer to page 2-13-(12) for information on auxiliary models.
1.
Select Classification.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Classification
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The settings selections will be displayed.
1.Classification
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
2-13-(3)
Section 2-13
Classification
2.
Select Model registration.
The Model Registration Screen for index numbers 0 to 7 will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Up/Down Keys to switch the index number.
Model registration
0 Registration
1 Delete
2 Reference
3
4
5
6
7
SFT+
:Switch
ESC:End SFT+ESC:Input image
Index
3.
Move the cursor to the index number for the model to be registered and
press the ENT Key. In this example, index 0 will be used.
4.
Select Registration.
The selections will be displayed.
Model registration
New
Box
End
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
A
5.
Select New.
6.
Select the desired figure.
7.
Select the desired drawing mode (OR/NOT).
An arrow cursor will appear.
Up to three figures (0, 1, and 2)
can be drawn.
Model registration
[0]
329,300
A
2-13-(4)
Section 2-13
Classification
8.
Draw the region to be registered as the model with the selected figure.
The figure will be registered.
Once three figures have been drawn,
Add will no longer be displayed.
Model registration
Add
Figure0
End
A
9.
If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
10. Repeat steps 6 to 8 as necessary to create the desired shape.
11. After drawing is completed, select End.
The model will be registered.
The registered model is displayed as a thumbnail.
Registered model
Model registration
0 A
1
2
3
4
12. To register the next model, change the measurement object and press the
SHIFT+ESC Keys.
The Input Image Screen will be displayed.
Input image
B
ESC:End TRG:Input image
13. Press the TRIG Key to refresh the image.
14. Press the ESC Key.
The screen in (11.) will return.
15. Repeat steps 3 to 11 to register further models.
2-13-(5)
Section 2-13
Classification
CHECK
To add models to the same index number, use the Right Key to move the cursor.
Model registration
Cursor
0 A
1
2
3
16. When all models have been registered, press the ESC Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1.
In the screen for step 8 above, select the figure to be changed or cleared
using the Up and Down Keys and press the ENT Key.
Figure 0
Figure 1
Model registration
Add
Figure0
Figure1
End
A
The figure for the figure number selected using the cursor will be displayed
with solid lines. The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed.
Correct
Clear
2.
Select either Correct or Clear and press the ENT Key.
If Correct is selected, the cursor will be displayed. Correct the size and position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
2-13-1-1
Deleting Models
Use this operation to delete registered models.
1.
Select the model to be deleted from among the thumbnails and press the
ENT Key.
Model registration
0 A A A A
1 B B B B
2 C C C
3
4
5
6
7
Cursor
SFT+
:Switch
ESC:End SFT+ESC:Input image
2-13-(6)
Section 2-13
Classification
A list of operations will be displayed.
Registration
Delete
Reference
2.
Select Delete and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Model will be deleted.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The model will be deleted and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-13-1-2
Referencing Models
Use this operation to confirm registered models.
1.
Select the model to be checked from among the thumbnails and press the
ENT Key.
Model registration
0 A A A A
1 B B B B
2 C C C
3
4
5
6
7
Cursor
SFT+
:Switch
ESC:End SFT+ESC:Input image
A list of operations will be displayed.
Registration
Delete
Reference
2.
Select Reference.
The model will be displayed at the position where registered.
Reference
A
ESC:End
3.
Press the ESC Key to exit this screen.
The screen in (1.) will return.
2-13-(7)
Section 2-13
Classification
2-13-2
Setting Search Regions
Set the region for searching for the model. The whole area of the input image
can be searched; however, accuracy can be increased by limiting the search
region.
1.
Select Search region.
1.Classification
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
An arrow cursor will appear.
Search region
80,66
A
2.
Draw a box-shaped search region.
When the bottom right coordinates are specified, the region will be set, and
the screen in (1.) will return.
2-13-(8)
Section 2-13
Classification
2-13-3
Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the judgement conditions for the correlation between the measurement
object and the models and the position (X, Y) where the object was detected.
Judgement conditions
Range for an OK judgement
Correlation : 79 [ 60 : 100 ]
Position X : 180.000
[
0.000 : 511.000]
Position Y : 250.000
[
0.000 : 483.000]
End
Correlation range (0 to 100)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the X direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the Y direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
: Measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
CHECK
Correlation
When OK condition for correlation is set between 60 and 100:
Image 0 Image 1 Image 2 Image 3
Correlation: 96
Judgement: OK
CHECK
55
NG
50
NG
65
OK
Position X and Position Y
Movement range in X direction
A
Movement range in Y direction
A
OK NG
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
1.Classification
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
2-13-(9)
Section 2-13
Classification
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Correlation :79 [ 60:100]
Position X : 180.000
[
0.000: 511.000]
Position Y : 250.000
[
0.000: 483.000]
End
2.
3.
Make the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-13-(10)
Section 2-13
Classification
2-13-4
Changing Detailed Conditions
Use this operation to change the search-related settings. Change the conditions if the measurement results are unstable. Normally, however, the default
settings are sufficient.
After the settings have been changed, check that actual measurement is performed correctly.
1.
Select Classification.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Classification
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
A list of settings selections will be displayed.
1.Classification
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Detailed conditions.
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Interpolation
: ON
Verification
: OFF
Candidate level : [ 60]
End
3.
Change the settings.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-13-(11)
Section 2-13
Classification
CHECK
The Controller performs the following 2-stage processing internally.
Detailed Search
Measures again using the detailed search model to
compare to the images surrounding the section with
the highest correlation.
Rough Search
Searches all of the measurement
region using a rough search model.
Search
Section with the highest
correlation
Search
Detailed search model
Rough search model
Interpolation Mode
When 2 or more models are registered to in the same index, set whether or
not to search using an auxiliary model.
Selection
Meaning
ON*
The registered models and auxiliary models will be used in
searches. The measurement will be more stable. Processing time,
however, will be longer.
OFF
The searches will be performed with registered models only.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
HELP
Auxiliary model
Auxiliary models are models created between the registered models.
Auxiliary models are automatically created by the Controller when multiple
models have been registered to the same index number.
Number of
registered models
Number of
auxiliary models
Total number of
models (See note.)
2
1
3
3
3
6
4
6
10
5
10
15
Note Indicates the number of models when interpolation mode is set to ON.
2-13-(12)
Section 2-13
Classification
Search Verification and Candidate Levels
Select whether or not to perform detailed searches on models at the candidate
level or higher. If model searches are unstable, set search verification to ON
and adjust the candidate level.
Setting item
Search verification
Candidate
level
Selection/
Setting range
Details
OFF*
Performs a detailed search only on the image with
the highest rough correlation within the measurement region.
ON
Performs a detailed search on all images at the candidate level or higher within the measurement
region. The measurements are more stable in comparison to when search verification is set to OFF.
Processing time, however, will be longer.
0 to 99 (60*)
Set the correlation value for detailed search target
images. Reduce the correlation level if the model
searches are unstable. A detailed search will be performed on all images above this level in the rough.
This setting item is enabled only when search verification is set to ON.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-13-(13)
Section 2-13
Classification
2-13-5
Setting the Coordinate Mode
Select the type of coordinate values.
Before scroll:Output made using the coordinate values
before position displacement compensation.
After scroll*:Output made using the coordinate values
after position displacement compensation.
Coordinate mode
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for differences between
output coordinates.
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
ON:
Output made using coordinate values set using calibration.
OFF*: Output made using Camera coordinate values.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the coordinate mode is changed after the judgement conditions have been
set, the measurement results will change also. Change the judgement conditions to enable correct measurement.
1.
Select Coordinate mode.
1.Classification
Model registration
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The Coordinate Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
2.
Make the settings for each item.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-13-(14)
Section 2-13
Classification
2-13-6
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for classification.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which classification is set
and the following detailed screen will be displayed.
Judgement Result
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Classification
Judge
:OK
Correlation :89
Position X :258.000
+
Position Y :243.000
Index No. : 0
OK 45ms
Judgement result for this unit
Inspection region displayed in OK color for OK result and
displayed in NG color for NG result.
(Figures drawn in OR mode are displayed in solid lines and
figures drawn in NOT mode are displayed in dotted lines.)
Search coordinates
Position at candidate level or above
(Enabled only when search verification set to ON.)
2-13-(15)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
2-14
Density Defects
The Density Defect processing item is used to inspect measurement objects
using differences in density (brightness) in the measurement region.
This processing item is suitable for external inspections for defects or dirt on
unbuttoned measurement objects and defects or burrs on parts.
Example 1: Checking for Stains on Sheets
Defect found using density changes within measurement region.
Defect
Measurement region
Example 2: Inspecting for Defects or Burrs in O Rings
2-14-(1)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
Operational Flow
1
page 2-14-(3)
* Select
measurement image.
* The measurement image can be selected only when Defect (Line), (Circum), (Arc),
(Region), (Var. box) are registered under 6HWWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW5HJLRQV .
Defect (line, circumference, arc, region) page 2-14-(6)
2
page 2-14-(4)
Set measurement
region.
2
1
Set measurement
conditions.
3
Draw measurement
region.
(As required)
Re-register
reference
values.
4
Set
judgement
conditions.
5
(As required)
Change
detection
conditions.
Defect (var. box) page 2-14-(13)
2
1
Set measurement conditions.
3 (As required) 4
Set measurement
region.
Register
reference
values.
Defect (deviation) page 2-14-(26)
2
1
Draw measurement
region.
(As required)
Re-register
reference
values.
Clear set
region.
page 2-14-(31)
3
page 2-14-(33)
Set
coordinate
mode.
4
page 2-14-(34)
Measurement
screens
2-14-(2)
3
Set
judgement
conditions.
Set
judgement
conditions.
5 (As required)
Change
detection
conditions.
Section 2-14
Density Defects
2-14-1
Selecting Measurement Images
When Defect (Line), (Circum), (Arc), (Region), (Var. box) is set for the inspection region, select which image will be used for measurement, the image
stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
CHECK
Select Image 0 if any one of the 8 regions has Defect (deviation) registered.
Defect (deviation) uses the image stored at Image 0 for measurement.
1.
Select Density defect.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Density defect
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial Density Defect Screen will be displayed.
1.Density defect
Measurement image
Select region
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Measurement image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
3.
4.
Select Image 0 or Image 1 to use either of the images stored at these locations for measurement.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-14-(3)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
2-14-2
Setting Measurement Regions
Up to 8 regions can be set.
There are 6 measurement methods for density defect inspections and different
methods can be set for each region. Select the best method for the inspection.
Defect (Line, Circumference, Arc, Region)
Use this function to inspect for defects, blemishes, chips, or burrs on unpatterned measurement objects.
Select either line, circumference, arc, or region depending on the shape of the
measurement object and the inspection details.
Line
Select line searches when inspecting for chips or burrs on a measurement
object.
Measurement region
Circumference
and Arc
Use circumference or arc searches when inspecting for chips or burrs on a circular measurement object.
Measurement
region
Region
Select region when inspecting the whole measurement object for defects or
blemishes. Up to 3 figures can be combined when drawing the measurement
region (box, ellipse, circle, circumference, or polygon).
Measurement region
CHECK
Inspections cannot be performed correctly on measurement objects that are
patterned or marked.
The inspection is performed using changes in density and any pattern or mark
in the measurement region will be detected as a surface defect. Use the Fine
Matching inspection item to inspect regions with patterns or marks.
CHECK
Use the Defect (Var. Box) processing item for measurement objects with varying measurement region sizes or positions.
Defect (Variable Box)
Use the Defect (Var. Box) processing item to adjust the measurement region
(a box) for measurement objects with varying sizes or positions to inspect for
defects.
2-14-(4)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
The upper, lower, left, and right edges of the measurement object are found.
The region inside the edges that are found will be the measurement region.
Upper edge
Measurement region
Right edge
Left edge
Lower edge
With the edges detected, the Controller can determine where the measurement object is. Even if the size and position of the measurement object
changes, the Controller can move the measurement region appropriately.
Measurement region
Measurement region
Defect (Deviation)
Use a Defect (Deviation) measurement to quickly measure multiple regions.
Defect (Deviation) measurement can measure other regions on the same unit
in parallel, making the total processing time shorter when multiple regions are
registered to the same unit and measured.
Example: Inspecting for Chips, Burrs, or Defects on Caps
Chips and burrs on caps are measured using a Defect (Circumference)
inspection and defects are measured using Defect (Deviation)/Circle Proximity.
Region 0
Chips and burrs inspected using a
Defect (Circumference) inspection.
Region 1
Internal cap defects inspected
using Defect (Deviation)/Circle
Proximity.
2-14-(5)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
2-14-2-1
Defect (Line, Circumference, Arc, and Region)
The Defect processing items are explained in this section using the Defect
(Line) processing item as an example. The same procedure can be used
for Defect (Circum, Arc, Region).
1
2
Set measurement
region.
Draw measurement
region.
3
(As required)
4
Re-register
reference
values.
Set
judgement
conditions.
5
(As required)
Change
detection
conditions.
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
The Controller detects defect positions using density variations in the measurement region.
Set the conditions for calculating density variations in measurement regions.
Setting item
Selections
Details
Large defect inspections
ON*
OFF
Set to ON when inspecting for large defects
(defects, blemishes, chips, burrs).
Small defect inspections
ON*
OFF
Set to ON when inspecting for small defects
(defects, blemishes, chips, burrs).
Inspection of small defects will be more stable
than if the large defect inspection setting is
used.
Small defect color
Density
White
Select the color of the defect to be inspected.
Black
Both*
This setting is enabled only when small defect
inspection is set to ON.
ON*
OFF
Set to ON to measure for the existence of a
measurement object.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Density defect.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Density defect
2.
The setting selections will be displayed.
1.Density defect
Measurement image
Select region
Coordinate mode
2-14-(6)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
2.
Select Select region.
A list of region numbers will be displayed.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
3.
Select the region number.
A list of measurement methods will be displayed.
New registration(Region0)
Defect(Line)
Defect(Circum)
Defect(Arc)
Defect(Region)
Defect(var.box)
Defect(Deviation)
4.
Select the measurement method.
In this example, Defect (line) will be selected.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-14-(4) for a guide on selecting figures.
The initial Defect (Line) Screen will be displayed.
Region0(Defect(Line))
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
5.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Large defect
Small defect
Small defect color
Density
: ON
: ON
: Both
: ON
End
6.
7.
Make the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (4.) will return.
2-14-(7)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
STEP 2: Drawing Measurement Regions
Draw a figure in the section to be inspected.
CHECK
Do not include areas with marks and patterns in the measurement region. It
will not be possible to distinguish them from surface detects, and measurement will not be performed properly.
CHECK
Position detection can be performed using algorithms for detecting defects.
When a measurement region is drawn, measurement is performed for the displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values (X and Y
coordinates of the position where the defect was found). This position
becomes the reference position, so be sure to place the measurement object
in the correct position before drawing the measurement region.
1.
Select Inspected region.
Region0(Defect(Line))
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Inspected Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Inspected region
New
End
2.
Select New.
A display cursor will appear.
Inspected region
New
End
3.
CHECK
[0]
64
Draw a figure in the region to be measured.
Up to 3 figures can be drawn to create a region if Defect (region) has been
selected.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
The measurement region and the positions where defects were located will
be displayed. The defects will be indicated by a display cursor.
2-14-(8)
Density Defects
Section 2-14
STEP 3: Re-registering Reference Values
Position detection can also be performed using algorithms for detecting
defects. When a measurement region is drawn, measurement is performed for
the displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values (X
and Y coordinates of the position where both large and small defects were
found). If this function is used, however, the reference value alone can be reregistered based on the currently displayed image.
CHECK
Reference values for 2 positions can be registered, regardless of the settings
for large and small defect inspections under Measurement conditions.
Example: Inspecting Whether or Not the Measurement Object Is Always
in the Same Position
Display a measurement object in the correct position, detect a mark, and register that position as the reference position.
Register the detected mark as the reference position.
CHECK
The reference value can be changed to enable the following function.
Inspecting Positions from a Specified Point
Once a mark has been detected in the image currently displayed, the reference position is changed to an suitable point. Position inspection can be performed by calculating the difference between this reference position and the
measurement position.
Measurement position
(mark detected as a defect)
Reference position (changed to a suitable point)
CHECK
If the measurement region is changed, the reference values return to the
default setting.
2-14-(9)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
1.
Select Reference registration.
Region0(Defect(Line))
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
A display cursor will appear at the position where a large defect was found.
Reference position for large defect
Reference registration
251,184
Measurement region
ENT:Set
:Move
2.
Use the Up/Down/Left/Right Keys to move the cursor to change the reference position.
3.
Press the ENT Key.
A display cursor will appear at the position where a small defect was found.
Reference position for small defect
Reference registration
ENT:Set
4.
251,200
:Move
Use the Up/Down/Left/Right Keys to move the cursor to change the reference position and Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-14-(10)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
STEP 4: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the conditions for determining defects. Set a value between 0 and 255 as
the OK judgement value for the measurement conditions set in step 1. The
defect value will be higher the clearer the defect. Measure several samples
and set the judgement conditions while referring to the measurement results.
Judgement conditions
Large defect
Small defect
Density Max.
Density Min.
:
:
:
:
Set the upper limit for an OK judgement.
(The lower limit is fixed to 0.)
Example: When judgement value set to 30:
Measurement results in the range 0 to 30
will give an OK judgement.
128[ 30 ]
128[ 30 ]
250[255 ]
180[ 0 ]
End
: Measurement result for the displayed image
Use as a reference for setting conditions.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Region0(Defect(Line))
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Judgement Conditions Setting Screen will be displayed.
Large defect
Small defect
Density Max.
Density Min.
:
:
:
:
128[ 30 ]
128[ 30 ]
250[255 ]
180[ 0 ]
End
2.
Make the settings.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 5: Changing Detection Conditions
To shorten measurement processing time, change the conditions for detecting
defects. The greater the element size and comparing pitch, the shorter the
processing time. However, the accuracy of the measurement will decrease.
Once the element size or comparing pitch setting has been changed, perform
measurements to check that they can be performed correctly.
2-14-(11)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
Region0(Defect(Line))
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Element size
: [10]
Comparing pitch : [ 1 ]
End
2.
3.
Set the element size and comparing pitch.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
Method for Judging Defects
When a measurement region is drawn, rectangular areas called elements
are created automatically. The average densities in these elements are
calculated and compared to the average densities of surrounding elements
as the elements are moved across the measurement region. The differences in the average densities of the elements are called the defect values.
The defect values for all elements are calculated, and if the largest defect
value is equal to or greater than the judgement condition, a defect will be
detected for the measurement region.
Example: Defect (Line)
Element size (4 to 80)
Default setting is 10.
Element
Measurement region
Compared
Compared
Comparing pitch (1 to 6)
Default setting is 1.
The largest difference is taken as
the defect value for the element.
HELP
2-14-(12)
Element Size
Determine the element size according to the size of the defect to be detected. Detection will be more sensitive (and the processing time longer) if the
Section 2-14
Density Defects
element size is reduced and less sensitive (and the processing time shorter) if the element size is increased.
Example
(1)
(2)
Element
Defect
Sensitivity Strong
Processing
time
Weak
Long
Short
If density that is not part of the defect is included in the calculations as
shown in (2), the differences with areas that are not part of the defect will
be reduced. In other words, the more the background is included in the element, the weaker the sensitivity will be.
HELP
Comparing Pitch
Determine the comparing pitch based on the size of the defects and the
size of the elements. The larger the comparing pitch, the shorter the processing time will be.
• If the element size is larger than the defect size, set a smaller comparing pitch. To find line-shaped defects, set it to about 1 or 2.
• If the defect size is larger than the element size, set a somewhat larger
comparing pitch. If the comparing pitch is too small, comparisons will
be made for elements on the edges of defects, reducing the defect value.
CHECK
Differences That Depend on the Shape of the Region
Shape of region
Line, circumference, or arc
defects
Element size
Element
size
Comparing direction
Left, right
Depends on
measurement
region size
Region defects
Up, down, left, right
Element
size
Element size
2-14-2-2
Defect (Variable Box)
The Defect (Variable Box) measurement method measures defects while
adapting the measurement region to suit measurement objects with inconsistent sizes and positions.
First, the upper, lower, left, and right edges of the measurement object are
located. The area within the edges becomes the measurement region.The
location of the measurement object can be determined using the edge detec-
2-14-(13)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
tion points so the measurement region can be adapted to suit if the size or
position of the measurement object changes.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-14-(4).
1
2
Set measurement
conditions.
Set measurement
region.
3
(As required)
4
Register
reference
values.
5
Set
judgement
conditions.
(As required)
Change
detection
conditions.
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the conditions for calculating density changes in measurement regions.
The settings are the same as for Defect (Line, Circum, Arc, and Region),
except for the measurement direction.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-14-(6).
Measurement
direction
Application
Box
Measurement region
Select to detect the defects for
the whole measurement region.
Calculates the variation in density in the X direction and Y
direction.
+
+
+
+
X line
Measurement region
Select to detect defects or burrs
in the upper or lower section of
the measurement region.
Refer to page 2-14-(19).
+
+
+
+
Calculates the variation in density in the X direction.
Y line
Select to detect defects or burrs
in the right or left section of the
measurement region.
Refer to page 2-14-(20).
Calculates the variation in density in the Y direction.
+
+ +
+
2-14-(14)
Measurement region
Section 2-14
Density Defects
1.
Select Density defect.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Density defect
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The settings selections will be displayed.
1.Density defect
Measurement image
Select region
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Select region.
A list of regions will be displayed.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
3.
Select the region number.
A list of measurement methods will be displayed.
New registration(Region0)
Defect(Line)
Defect(Circum)
Defect(Arc)
Defect(Region)
Defect(var.box)
Defect(Deviation)
4.
Select Defect (var. box).
2-14-(15)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
The initial Defect (var. box) screen will be displayed.
Region0(Defect(var.box))
Measurement conditions
Left edge
Upper edge
Right edge
Lower edge
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
5.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Direction
Large defect
Small defect
Small defect color
Density
: Box
: ON
: ON
: Both
: ON
End
6.
Make the settings.
7.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (4.) will return.
STEP 2: Drawing the Measurement Region
The measurement region is drawn by specifying the upper, lower, left, and
right edges of the measurement object. If even one of the edges cannot be
located, the judgement result will be NG.
Upper edge
Left edge
Measurement
Right edge
Lower edge
When one of the edges is selected, the settings for the conditions for the
selected edge will be displayed. In this example, the settings for the left edge
will be explained. Make adjustments as necessary when setting conditions for
the upper, lower, and right edges.
2-14-(16)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
1.
Set the edge detection conditions.
Set the direction for the edge search and the density changes.
Left edge
Direction for edge detection: →, ←, ↑, ↓
Direction :
→
Color
: Light→Dark
Density change: Light→Dark, Dark→Light
End
CHECK
Combining Edge Detection Directions
Set a combination of upper, lower, right, and left edge detection directions
that surround the area to be measured.
Incorrect
Correct
Upper edge
Left edge
Upper edge
Right edge
Left edge
Lower edge
a)
Right edge
Lower edge
Select Left edge.
Region0(Defect(var.box))
Measurement conditions
Left edge
Upper edge
Right edge
Lower edge
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The initial setting screen for the left edge will be displayed.
Left edge
Measurement conditions
Region
Detailed conditions
b)
Select Measurement conditions.
2-14-(17)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Left edge
Direction :
Color
: Light
Dark
End
c)
d)
Select the detection conditions for the left edge.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (a) will return.
2.
Drawing the Edge Detection Region
Draw a region that includes the edge.
Incorrect
Correct
Edge
Edge
The edge is not in the region.
a)
Select Region.
Left edge
Measurement conditions
Region
Detailed conditions
The Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Left edge
b)
CHECK
2-14-(18)
230,256
Draw a box-shaped region.
The only figure that can be drawn is a box.
Section 2-14
Density Defects
When the bottom right coordinates are specified, the region will be set,
and the screen in (a) will return.
CHECK
Use the following procedure to fix the measurement region.
• To measure defects in measurement objects with variable widths only:
Draw the edge detection region so that the measurement region Y coordinates will remain the same for both the upper and lower edges.
The upper and lower edges will always have these edge points.
Upper edge region
100,100
300,100
Right edge region
Left edge region
100,410
300,410
Lower edge region
The measurement region will adjust to the right
and left edges only before measurement is performed.
2-14-(19)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
• To measure defects in measurement objects with variable heights
only:
Draw the edge detection region so that the measurement region X coordinates will remain the same for both the left and right edges. The
left and right edges will always have these edge points.
Upper edge region
450,100
20,100
Left edge region
Right edge region
450,410
20,410
Lower edge region
The measurement region will adjust to the upper
and lower edges only before measurement is performed.
• To Measure Defects and Burrs in the Upper Section of Measurement
Regions with Variable Widths Only:
Draw the edge detection region so that the measurement region Y coordinates will remain the same for both the upper and lower edges.
The upper and lower edges will always have these edge points.
Note Specify X line under Measurement conditions/measurement direction.
Upper edge region
100, 95
Lower edge region
100, 245
Left edge region
470, 95
Defect or burr
470, 245
Right edge region
• To Measure Defects and Burrs in the Left Section of Measurement Regions with Variable Heights Only:
Draw the edge detection region so that the measurement region X coordinates will remain the same for both the left and right edges. The
left and right edges will always have these edge points.
2-14-(20)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
Note Specify Y line under Measurement conditions/measurement direction.
Left edge region
Right edge region
200, 100
70, 100
Upper edge region
Lower edge region
200, 390
70, 390
Defect or burr
3.
Changing Detailed Conditions as Required
Change the detailed conditions when the measurement results are unstable. (Normally, these conditions can be left on the default settings.) After
changing the settings, perform an object measurement to check that measurement can still be performed correctly.
a)
Select Detailed conditions.
Left edge
Measurement conditions
Region
Detailed conditions
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Left edge
Edge level : [ 50]%
Noise level : [ 20]
Noise width: [ 0]pix
Offset width: [ 0]pix
End
b)
c)
Move the cursor to the condition to be changed and change the setting.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (a) will return.
Press the ESC Key to return to the initial screen for Defect (var. box).
Edge Level
Set a density change level between 0 and 100 that will indicate the edge. Normally, the default setting of 50% will be fine.
The edge is normally detected as follows:
2-14-(21)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
1.
The density distribution of the whole measurement region is calculated.
2.
The density difference between the lowest and highest density value becomes 100%.
3.
The point where the edge level density change is detected becomes the
edge.
Measurement region
Maximum density value
100%
50%
Edge level
0%
Minimum density value
Noise Level
Set a noise level between 0 and 255 to assist the determination of edges. The
maximum density and minimum density within the edge detection area is calculated and if the difference between the two values is less than the noise
level, then the Controller determines that there is no edge. Normally the
default setting of 20 is sufficient. Adjust this to a higher value, however, if noise
is causing false edges to be detected.
(Within the edge detection region)
Max. density - min. density < noise level “ no edge “ NG measurement
result
Max. density - min. density ˜ noise level “ Edge “ Used for measurement
Example: When noise level is set to 30
Edge
detection
region
Max. density 60
60 15 30
Edge detected so
Min. density 15
measurement performed
Edge
detection
region
Max. density 25
Min. density 10
25
10 30
Processed as no edge detected.
Measurement result: NG
Noise Width
Set the noise width between 0 and 255 to evaluate noise.
If the density distribution from the position where the edge was first detected
falls to below the edge level within the noise width range, the detected point is
judged as noise. Normally the default noise width setting of 0 is sufficient. If
noise is causing incorrect detection, make this value higher.
2-14-(22)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
Example
Edge detection point
Measurement
region
If the density falls below the
edge level within the set range,
the detected edge is
determined to be noise.
Noise width (pixel)
50%
Edge level
Offset Width
Set the adjustment width (in pixel units) for the detected edge position. Set a
value between -511 and 511.
The default setting is 0, which means measurement will start from position
where the edge is detected.
Offset width
Edge detection point
Left and right edges: Set the offset width on the X axis.
Upper and lower edges: Set the offset width on the Y axis.
X axis
−
+
Y axis
+
Example: To Measure from 2 Pixel-widths Inside the Edge Detection Point
The value inside the brackets is the offset width.
Upper edge (2)
Measurement region
Right edge (-2)
Left edge (2)
Lower edge (-2)
CHECK
The display cursor, which indicates the edge detection point, will also appear
at the set offset width position.
STEP 3: Registering Reference Values
Position detection can also be performed using algorithms for detecting
defects. Register the reference values when performing position detection.
The following reference values must be registered:
The X and Y coordinates of the position found as the large defect
The X and Y coordinates of the position found as the small defect
CHECK
Reference values for 2 positions can be registered, regardless of the settings
for large and small defect inspections under Measurement conditions.
2-14-(23)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
Example: Inspecting Whether or Not the Measurement Object Is Always
in the Same Position
Display a measurement object in the correct position, detect a mark, and register that position as the reference position.
Register the detected mark as the reference position.
CHECK
The reference value can be changed to enable the following function.
Inspecting Positions from a Specified Point
Once a mark has been detected in the image currently displayed, the reference position is changed to an suitable point. Position inspection can be performed by calculating the difference between this reference position and the
measurement position.
Measurement position
(mark detected as a defect)
Reference position (changed to a suitable point)
1.
Select Reference registration.
Region0(Defect(var.box))
Measurement conditions
Left edge
Upper edge
Right edge
Lower edge
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
A display cursor will appear at the position where a large defect was found.
Reference position for large defect
Reference registration
251,184
Measurement region
ENT:Set
2-14-(24)
:Move
Section 2-14
Density Defects
2.
Use the Up/Down/Left/Right Keys to move the cursor to change the reference position.
3.
Press the ENT Key.
A display cursor will appear at the position where a small defect was found.
Reference position for small defect
Reference registration
251,200
ENT:Set
4.
:Move
Use the Up/Down/Left/Right Keys to move the cursor to change the reference position as for large defects and Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 4: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the conditions for determining defects. Set a value between 0 and 255 as
the OK judgement value. Measure several samples and set the judgement
conditions while referring to the measurement results.
Judgement conditions
Large defect
Small defect
Density Max.
Density Min.
:
:
:
:
End
128[ 30 ]
128[ 30 ]
250[255 ]
180[ 0 ]
Set the upper limit for an OK judgement.
(The lower limit is fixed to 0.)
Example: When judgement value set to 30:
Measurement results in the range 0 to 30 will
give an OK judgement.
: Measurement result for the displayed image
Use as a reference for setting conditions.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Region0(Defect(var.box))
Measurement conditions
Left edge
Upper edge
Right edge
Lower edge
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2-14-(25)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Large defect
Small defect
Density Max.
Density Min.
:
:
:
:
128[ 30 ]
128[ 30 ]
250[255 ]
180[ 0 ]
End
2.
Change the settings.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 5: Changing Detection Conditions
To shorten measurement processing time, change the conditions for detecting
defects. The greater the element size and comparing pitch, the shorter the
processing time. However, the accuracy of the measurement will decrease.
Once the element size or comparing pitch setting has been changed, perform
measurements to check that they can be performed correctly.
SeeAlso
Refer to Element Size and Comparing Pitch on page 2-14-(12).
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
Region0(Defect(var.box))
Measurement conditions
Left edge
Upper edge
Right edge
Lower edge
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Element size
: [10]
Comparing pitch : [ 1 ]
End
2.
3.
Set the element size and comparing pitch.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-14-2-3
Defect (Deviation)
1
Draw measurement
region.
2-14-(26)
2 (As required) 3
Re-register
reference
values.
Set
judgement
conditions.
Section 2-14
Density Defects
STEP 1: Drawing Measurement Regions
Draw a figure in the section to be inspected.
CHECK
Do not include areas with marks and patterns in the measurement region. It
will not be possible to distinguish them from surface detects, and measurement will not be performed properly.
CHECK
Position detection can be also performed using algorithms for detecting
defects.
When a measurement region is drawn, measurement is performed for the displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values (X and Y
coordinates of the position where the defect was found). This position
becomes the reference position, so be sure to place the measurement object
in the correct position before drawing the measurement region.
1.
Select Density defect.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Density defect
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The settings selections will be displayed.
1.Density defect
Measurement image
Select region
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Select region.
A list of region numbers will be displayed.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
3.
Select the region number.
2-14-(27)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
A list of measurement methods will be displayed.
New registration(Region0)
Defect(Line)
Defect(Circum)
Defect(Arc)
Defect(Region)
Defect(var.box)
Defect(Deviation)
4.
Select Defect (Deviation).
The initial Defect (Deviation) Screen will be displayed.
Region0(Defect(Deviation))
Inspected region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
5.
Select Inspected region.
The selections will be displayed.
Inspected region
Box
Circle proximity
6.
Select Box or Circle proximity.
In this example, Circle proximity is selected.
The Inspected Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Inspected region
New
End
2-14-(28)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
7.
Select New.
A display cursor will appear.
Inspected region
[0]
255,241
New
End
+
8.
Draw a figure in the region to be measured.
9.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (4.) will return.
The measurement region and the positions where defects were located will
be displayed. The defects will be indicated by a display cursor.
STEP 2: Re-registering Reference Values
Position detection can also be performed using algorithms for detecting
defects. When a measurement region is drawn, measurement is performed for
the displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values (X
and Y coordinates of the position where the defect was found). If this function
is used, however, the reference value alone can be re-registered based on the
currently displayed image.
Example: Inspecting Whether or Not the Measurement Object Is Always
in the Same Position
Display a measurement object in the correct position, detect a mark, and register that position as the reference position.
Register the detected mark as the reference position.
CHECK
The reference value can be changed to enable the following function.
Inspecting Positions from a Specified Point
Once a mark has been detected in the image currently displayed, the reference position is changed to an suitable point. Position inspection can be per-
2-14-(29)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
formed by calculating the difference between this reference position and the
measurement position.
Measurement position
(mark detected as a defect)
Reference position (changed to a suitable point)
CHECK
If the measurement region is changed, the reference values return to the
default setting.
1.
Select Reference registration.
Region0(Defect(Deviation))
Inspected region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
A cursor will appear at the position of the defect.
Measurement Reference position
region
Reference registration
ENT:Set
2.
3.
251,184
:Move
To change the position, use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move
the cursor.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting Judgement Conditions
The Controller uses the density deviation of each element in the measurement
region to determine if a defect exists. Set a deviation value between 0 and 127
for an OK judgement.
If the density deviation of all elements is at or below the set value, the judgement result will be OK. If even one of the elements exceeds the value, the
judgement result will be NG.
Measure several samples and use those measurement results as a reference
for setting the judgement conditions.
2-14-(30)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-14-(12) for information on elements.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Region0(Defect(Deviation))
Inspected region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Density deviation : 64 [127]
End
: Measurement result for the displayed image.
Use as reference for setting conditions.
2.
3.
Set a density deviation value.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-14-2-4
Clearing Set Regions
The clear operation is performed separately for each region.
1.
Select the number of the region to be cleared.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
A list of selections will be displayed.
Example: Clearing region for Defect (line) measurement
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2-14-(31)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Region will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The region will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-14-(32)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
2-14-3
Setting the Coordinate Mode
Select the type of coordinate values.
Before scroll:Output made using the coordinate values
before position displacement compensation.
After scroll*:Output made using the coordinate values after
position displacement compensation.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for differences between
output coordinates.
End
ON:
Output made using coordinate values set using calibration.
OFF*: Output made using Camera coordinate values.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the coordinate mode is changed after the judgement conditions have been
set, the measurement results will change also. Change the judgement conditions to enable correct measurement.
1.
Select Density defect.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Density defect
2.
The settings selections will be displayed.
1.Density defect
Measurement image
Select region
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Coordinate mode.
The Coordinate Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
3.
4.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
2-14-(33)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
2-14-4
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for density
defect inspections.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which density defect inspection is set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the two
screens.
Measurement Region and Position Display
NG 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Density defect
Judge:NG
0
Judgement result for this region
+
Inspection region displayed in OK
color for OK result and displayed in
NG color for NG result.
Defect position
Region number
2-14-(34)
Section 2-14
Density Defects
Numeric Display
The measurement values for each region are displayed in a list.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Density defect
Large Small
0. 255
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NG 45ms
Min.
52
Max. Devi
254
100
Large:
Small:
Min.:
Max.:
Devi:
Large defect
Small defect
Minimum density
Maximum density
Density deviation
NG regions are highlighted.
Region number
2-14-(35)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
2-15
EC Defect
The EC Defect processing item enable detecting with great accuracy minute
defects or defects with low contrast on circle- or line-shaped measurement
objects.
Rubber packing or other items that may have distorted shapes can be stably
detected.
Example: Detecting defects or burrs on O rings
Edge-extracted image
Circles
Defect
These images are recognized as circles,
even if they are slightly out of shape.
HELP
2-15-(1)
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for information on echo codes (EC).
Section 2-15
EC Defect
Operational Flow
1
page 2-15-(3)
Select measurement
image.
2
page 2-15-(5)
Extract
edges.
3
page 2-15(8)
Set
removal
regions.
Removing circles page 2-15-(10)
(As required)
1
2
Set the
circle color.
Select
search ON
or search
OFF.
3
4
Set
removal
region.
Set circle
radius.
5
(As required)
Change
the latitude
of angle.
Removing lines page 2-15-(19)
(As required)
1
2
Set the
removal
region.
Set the conditions for
extracting
lines.
Removing lines with line angle specified page 2-15-(23)
4
1
2
Set the
removal
region.
Set the
direction.
Clear the
removal
region.
page 2-15-(28)
(As required) page 2-15-(30)
Check the
removal
image.
page 2-15(31)
Set the
inspection
regions.
5
When defect detection is selected page 2-15-(32)
1
Set the
measurement conditions.
2
Set the
inspection
region.
Clear the
inspection
region.
page 2-15-(46)
With labeling selected page 2-15-(35)
1
Set binary
levels.
2
Set the
measurement conditions.
3
4
Set
inspection
region.
Set
judgement
conditions.
When gravity and area is selected page 2-15-(40)
1
6
page 2-15(47)
Set binary
levels.
2
Set the
measurement conditions.
3
4
5 (As required)
Set
inspection
region.
Set
judgement
conditions.
Change
pixel
skipping.
Set coordinates
mode.
7
page 2-15-(48)
Measurement
screens
2-15-(2)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
2-15-1
Selecting Measurement Images
This section describes how to select the image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
CHECK
The edges are extracted for the image number selected here and this image is
then stored at the other image number. Set Change Filtering as the next processing item to use this image for measurement for units after the unit for
which EC defect inspection was set. Then store the image stored in the image
buffer to Image 0 or Image 1.
When Image 0 Is Selected as Measurement Image
Image
0
0.Scn 0=SET=
Edge extracting
Image
1
1.
Edge-extracted image
stored to Image 1.
0.Camera image
1.ECM search
2.Change filtering
3.Binary defect
4.
Image 1 to be used for
measurement
Reads image again from image buffer.
Select EC defect.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC defect
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial screen for EC defect inspection will be displayed.
Measurement image
Extract edges
Removal regions
Removal image
Inspected regions
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Measurement Image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
3.
2-15-(3)
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
Section 2-15
EC Defect
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-(4)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
2-15-2
Extracting Edges
EC defect inspection is performed for images for which the edges have been
extracted.
Adjust the upper and lower levels for edge extracting if there is low contrast
between the measurement object and the background and to remove noise.
Upper and Lower Limits
Set the level to which the background will be cut from the edge-extracted
image. The levels can be set between 10 and 255 (default 100:255).
Areas with a density above the lower limit will become the edge of the measurement object. Refer to the following examples and adjust the upper and
lower limits.
Example: Cannot Find Edges Due to Low Contrast
Edge-extracted image
Reduce lower limit.
Cannot find edges
Example: To Remove Noise
Edge-extracted image
Increase lower limit.
Example: Other Edges Clearly Extracted But Cannot Find Desired Mark
Edge with Stability
Low contrast with background
Edge-extracted image
Reduce upper limit.
The edges of low
contrast sections also
clearly extracted.
High contrast with background
Mask Size
The mask size function is used when searching for edges to judge edges
using peripheral information. Select how much peripheral pixel information to
use. The selections are 5 ™ 5 (default) or 3 ™ 3.
2-15-(5)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
CHECK
This setting will be enabled only if Frame/Field under Camera image is set to
Frame. If set to Field, the effect will remain the same as if 5 ™ 5 is selected
even if 3 ™ 3 is selected.
Example: Select 3 ™ 3
Information from the surrounding 9 pixels is
used to determine whether or not the
center pixel is the edge. (1 square = 1 pixel)
The greater the mask size, the more the variations in surrounding pixels can
be absorbed. Select 5 ™ 5 to ignore uneven edges.
CHECK
SeeAlso
This function is even more effective if smoothing is used.
Refer to ,QSXWWLQJ&DPHUD,PDJHV and )LOWHULQJ$JDLQ (where smoothing can be set to be executed twice).
Select 3 ™ 3 to detect small defects or burrs. If 5 ™ 5 is selected, the edges
might be absorbed as uneven edges and defects may not be detected.
1.
Select Extract edges.
1.EC defect
Measurement image
Extract edges
Removal regions
Removal image
Inspected regions
Coordinate mode
2-15-(6)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
The screen for setting edge extracting levels will be displayed.
Lower limit
Upper limit
Extract edges
Upper[255]
Lower[100]
Mask:5x5
OK
:Change ENT:OK ESC:Back
2.
Set the upper and lower limits.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
3.
Select the mask size.
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-(7)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
2-15-3
Setting Removal Regions
Set the figures to be removed. The figures can be chosen separately for each
region.
The inspection target can be limited to the defect if the outline of the measurement object or other regions are set to be removed.
Original image
Defect
Set the figures to be removed. Removal
processing is set for an edge-extracted image.
Removal region 0
Remove top edge.
Removal region 1
Removal region 2
Remove left edge.
Remove right edge.
Removal region 4
A circle of this size will
be removed.
Removal region 3
Remove bottom edge.
Inspection is performed for inspection regions 0
to 7 for the “removal image,” i.e., the image from
which the set shapes have been removed.
See &KHFNLQJ
WKH5HPRYDO,PDJH to
check the results.
2-15-(8)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
The following 3 types of figures can be set for removal.
Up to 8 regions can be set and figures can be chosen separately for each
region.
Figure
Circle
Details
Removes only circles of the specified size from the edgeextracted image.
With EC algorithms, removal processing is not affected if the
shape of the circles differs slightly.
Areas different to
circles are detected
as defects.
Circles are removed.
Line
Lines with the most common edge code (direction) are removed
from the edge-extracted image.
Lines with same edge
code are removed.
Lines with difference edge
codes are detected as
defects.
Oriented line
The line direction and the permissible range are set and only lines
within the permissible range are removed from the edgeextracted image.
Example: Removing straight lines at 180• –10•
180°
+10°
−10°
Lines with edge codes in
permissible range removed.
Section outside permissible
range detected as defects.
2-15-(9)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
2-15-3-1
Removing Circles
Circles are detected using edge codes. To remove circles of a different size,
set the removal region for each size.
HELP
(As required)
1
2
Set the
circle color.
Select
search ON
or search
OFF.
3
Set
removal
region.
(As required)
4
5
Set circle
radius.
Set the
latitude of
angle.
Circle Extracting Algorithms Using Edge Codes
Original image
Circle: Black
Background:
White
1.
An edge code image is found.
Edge codes indicate the edge directions (arrows in the diagram).
If the circle is white and the background is black, the arrows will be in the
opposite direction.
2.
The center of the circle is found.
The center of the circle is calculated using the points of intersection from
lines running at right angles to the left of the direction indicated by the edge
code.
The center of the circle is determined by using the most common point of
intersection from the edge codes. This means that the approximate center
of a circle can be found even if the shape is not a perfect circle, e.g., an
ellipse or a circle with a defect.
2-15-(10)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
3.
Edge points on the circumference are found.
Points that fulfill the following two conditions are detected as edge points.
• The point is within a fixed distance range from the center.
• The edge code is at 90• from a vector from the center.
Edge code
Vector from the center
4.
The points detected as edges on the circumference are removed.
Figure That Was Removed
STEP 1: Setting the Circle Color
Set the color of the circle to be removed.
Circle color
Select whether the circle color is white or
black compared to the background.
(Black*, white, both)
Circle color
: Black
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
End
1.
Select Removal regions.
1.EC defect
Measurement image
Extract edges
Removal regions
Removal image
Inspected regions
Coordinate mode
2-15-(11)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
A list of regions will be displayed.
Removal regions
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
2.
Select the number of the region to be removed.
A list of figures will be displayed.
Circle
Line
Oriented line
3.
Select Circle.
The initial screen for circle removal regions will be displayed.
Circle color
Search conditions
Removal region
Radius
Latitude of angle
Clear
4.
Select Circle color.
The initial Removal Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Circle color
Circle color
: Black
End
5.
Set the circle color.
6.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (3.) will return.
STEP 2: Selecting Search ON or Search OFF
Change the circle search to ON (execute) if the position of the circle is not
fixed. Circles that fit the conditions can be searched for and removed from the
removal region.
Set the circle search to OFF (default) if the position of the measurement object
is fixed or if position displacement compensation is set and the circle is compensated to a fixed position. If circle search is set to OFF, specify the center
position of the circle under Radius.
2-15-(12)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
SeeAlso
Refer to 67(36HWWLQJWKH5DGLXVRIWKH&LUFOH on page 2-15-(16) for information on setting the radius.
1.
Select Search conditions.
Removal region0(Circle)
Circle color
Search conditions
Removal region
Radius
Latitude of angle
Clear
The Search Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
2.
Select whether or not to execute a circle search.
ON:
Execute
OFF: Not execute
Search conditions
Circle Search : OFF
End
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting Removal Regions
Circles that match the removal conditions within the removal region set here
will be removed.
CHECK
When edges are extracted, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be
processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting the removal region.
Screen size
512 pixels
Filter size of 5 ™ 5
Filter size of 3 ™ 3
-2 pixels
-1 pixel
484
pixels
Valid range:
(0,0) to (511,483)
Valid range:
(2,2) to (509,481)
Valid range:
(1,1) to (510,482)
Each time the image is filtered, the range of inaccurate pixels will be increased
further. For example, if filtering is performed twice, the valid range will be
reduced as follows:
Filter size of 5 ™ 5: -2 pixels ™ 3 = -6 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3: -1 pixel ™ 3 = -3 pixels
2-15-(13)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
(Filtering is also performed once in edge extraction, so filtering is actually performed a total of three times.)
1.
Select Removal region.
Removal region0(Circle)
Circle color
Search conditions
Removal region
Radius
Latitude of angle
Clear
The Removal Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Removal region
New
Box
End
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
2.
Select New.
3.
Select the desired figure.
4.
Select the desired drawing mode (OR/NOT).
An arrow cursor will appear.
Up to three figures (0, 1, and 2)
can be drawn.
Removal region
5.
[0]
436,385
Draw the figure in the circle removal region.
2-15-(14)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
The figure will be registered.
Removal region
Add
Figure0
End
Once three figures have been drawn,
Add will no longer be displayed.
6.
If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
7.
Repeat steps 3 to 5 as necessary to create the desired shape.
8.
After drawing is completed, select End.
The measurement region will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
Figures drawn using OR mode are displayed with solid lines and figures drawn
using NOT mode are displayed with dotted lines.
Figure 1 (drawn using OR)
Figure 2 (drawn using NOT)
Figure 3 (drawn using OR)
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1. In the screen for step 5 above, select the figure to be changed or cleared
using the Up and Down Keys and press the ENT Key.
Figure 0
Figure 1
Removal region
Add
Figure0
Figure1
End
The figure for the figure number selected using the cursor will be displayed
with solid lines. The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed.
Correct
Clear
2.
Select either Correct or Clear and press the ENT Key.
If Correct is selected, the cursor will be displayed. Correct the size and position of the figure as desired.
2-15-(15)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
STEP 4: Setting the Radius of the Circle
Set the radius and the permissible radius range for the circle to be removed.
If the circle search is set to OFF, the center of the circle will be the position
specified here.
1.
Select Radius.
Removal region0(Circle)
Circle color
Search conditions
Removal region
Radius
Latitude of angle
Clear
The Input Figure Screen will be displayed.
Input figure
251,365
2.
Specify the center of the circle.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys:
Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
The Radius Settings Screen will be displayed.
Input figure
100
3.
Set the radius of the circle.
Up/Right Keys:
Increase the radius.
Down/Left Keys:
Decrease the radius.
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
2-15-(16)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
The screen for setting the permissible radius range will be displayed.
Input figure
20
4.
Set the permissible radius range.
Up/Right Keys:
Increase the radius.
Down/Left Keys:
Decrease the radius.
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-(17)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
STEP 5: Changing the Latitude of the Angles
If circles are deformed, interfering with removal or causing removal of incorrect
elements, the latitude of the angles of the edge codes judged to be a circle can
be changed. The latitude can be set between 0 and 99 (default: 20).
Latitude of angle
Latitude of angle:[ 20]
OK
The latitude of angle is set for the 90• angle between the edge code
arrow and a vector from the center of the circle. (0 to 99, default: 20)
If, for example, the latitude is set to 15•, points at 75• to 105• will be
judged to be edge points on the circumference.
Edge code
arrow
Vector from
center
As shown below, the angle of the edge code changes when there is
an irregularity on the circumference of the circle.
Set the latitude of angle to remove circles that are not required.
1.
Select Latitude of angle.
Removal region0(Circle)
Circle color
Search conditions
Removal region
Radius
Latitude of angle
Clear
2-15-(18)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
The setting screen will be displayed.
Latitude of angle
Latitude of angle:[ 20]
OK
2.
CHECK
Set the latitude of angle to remove circles that are not required.
• Set the latitude of angle to a small value to detect even small irregularities
in the circle.
• Set the latitude of angle to a large value to ignore small irregularities in
the circle and detect only large defects. The following functions can be
used simultaneously to increase efficiency.
• Use a mask size of 5x5 to extract edges.
See ([WUDFWLQJ(GJHV.
SeeAlso
• Set smoothing for filtering the image.
See ,QSXWWLQJ&DPHUD,PDJHV:
Camera Image
Filter Again (To perform smoothing twice)
SeeAlso
3.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-3-2
Removing Lines
Lines are detected using edge codes.
The lines with the most common edge code (direction) will be deleted from the
edge-extracted image so this function can be used even if the measurement
object is at a different orientation.
1
Set the
removal
region.
Example
Measurement object
2
(As required)
Change
the line
extracting
conditions.
If removal regions 0 to 3 are drawn at the same size
(whole screen)
Removal in removal
region 2
Removal in removal
region 1
Removal in removal
region 3
Defect
2-15-(19)
Removal in removal region 0
Section 2-15
EC Defect
HELP
Line Extracting Algorithm Using Edge Codes
Original image
Black
White
1.
An edge code image is created.
The edge codes indicate the directions of the edges (arrows in the diagram).
If black and white are reversed, the arrows will be in the opposite direction.
2.
The section with the most common edge codes is removed from the image.
Figure That Was Removed
STEP 1: Setting Removal Region
Lines that match the removal conditions will be removed from the range set
here.
CHECK
SeeAlso
When edges are extracted, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be
processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting the removal region.
Refer to page 2-15-(13) under 5HPRYLQJ&LUFOHV.
1.
Display the figure selections using the same steps 1 to 3 as outlined under
Circle.
2-15-(20)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-15-(11).
New registration (Removal R1)
Circle
Line
Oriented line
2.
Select Line.
The initial screen for lines will be displayed.
Removal region
Extracting level
Clear
3.
Select Removal region.
The Removal Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Removal region
New
Box
End
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
The rest of the procedure is the same as for circles.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-15-(13).
STEP 2: Changing Line Extracting Conditions
The level for line extracting can be changed. There are 5 levels, 1 to 5. The
default setting is 3. Adjust the level as required.
To detect this kind of small defect as a defect
Example
Reduce the line extracting level.
To detect this kind of uneven edge as a line and remove it.
Increase the line extracting level.
2-15-(21)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
1.
Select Extracting level.
Removal region0(Line)
Removal region
Extracting level
Clear
The setting screen will be displayed.
Extracting level
[3]
OK
2.
Set the line extracting level so that the lines that are not required are removed.
3.
Select End.
The extracting level will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-(22)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
2-15-3-3
Removing Lines with Line Angle Specified
The direction of the line and the permissible range are set and only the lines
within that range are removed.
Correct measurement cannot be performed if the measurement object has
rotated. Therefore, if position displacement occurs, set position displacement
compensation earlier than the unit for which EC defect inspection is set.
1
2
Set the
removal
region.
Set the
direction.
Example
Outline of measurement object
(This line to be removed.)
Set the direction and permissible range.
+10°
180°
−10°
Lines with edge codes
within the permissible
range will be removed.
The defect is not within
the range and will,
therefore, remain.
Defect
(Only this is to be detected.)
HELP
Oriented Line Extracting Algorithm Using Edge Codes
Original image
1.
An edge code image is created.
Points with edge codes within the permissible range are detected as edges
on the line.
Set permissible range.
2-15-(23)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
2.
The section detected as a line with a uniform direction is removed.
Figure That Was Removed
STEP 1: Setting Removal Ranges
1. Display the figure selections using the same steps 1 to 3 as outlined under
Circle.
CHECK
When edges are extracted, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be
processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when
setting the removal region.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-15-(13) under 5HPRYLQJ&LUFOHV.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-15-(11).
New registration(Removal R0)
Circle
Line
Oriented line
2.
Select Oriented line.
The initial screen for oriented line processing will be displayed.
Removal region
Direction
Clear
3.
Select Removal region.
The Removal Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Removal region
New
Box
End
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
The rest of the procedure is the same as for circles.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-15-(13).
2-15-(24)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
STEP 2: Setting the Direction
Set the line direction and the permissible range for oriented lines to be
detected and removed.
Example
Set line direction and
permissible range.
Only this edge direction is outside the
permissible range and is, therefore,
detected as a defect.
There are two methods to register the settings.
Method
HELP
Contents
Input figure
The measurement object is displayed and arrows are placed on it
to set the direction and latitude of angle.
Input parameter
The direction and latitude of angle are input numerically. In the
background, an image with lines removed corresponding to the
angle settings is displayed.
Line Directions and Angles
Locations where the brightness changes are detected as edges and the direction of the change in brightness is found. This is called the edge code and it
indicates the direction of the line. The arrangement of black and white determines the edge code direction, and angles are calculated as shown below.
0°
Expressed as 0• or 360•.
90°
180°
270°
2-15-(25)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
Input Figure
1.
Select Direction.
Removal region0(Oriented line)
Removal region
Direction
Clear
The selections for the registration method will be displayed.
Input figure
Input parameter
2.
Select Input figure.
An arrow will appear in the center of the screen.
Direction
3.
Press the TRIG Key.
The arrow will point in the direction that indicates the edge code for the displayed image.
Direction
4.
Move the arrow to on top of the line to be removed.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the line up, down, left, and right.
5.
Press the ENT Key.
2-15-(26)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
The screen for setting the angle of the arrow will be displayed.
Direction
Angle:180
6.
Align the arrow with the angle of the line.
Down/Right Keys:
Move the arrow clockwise.
Up/Left Keys:
Move the arrow counterclockwise.
Example
CHECK
The line will not be extracted correctly if the arrow is rotated so that it is the
reverse of the arrow direction shown in step 3. Press the TRIG Key to return the arrow to the correct direction if the arrow direction has become unclear.
HELP
Arrow directions (edge codes) and angles: See page 2-15-(27).
7.
Press the ENT Key.
The screen for setting the permissible range will be displayed.
Direction
Latitude angle: 15
8.
9.
Set the permissible angle range. The maximum setting is –45•.
Up/Left Keys:
Increase the range.
Down/Right Keys:
Decrease the range.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-(27)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
Input Parameter
1.
Select Direction.
Removal region0(Oriented line)
Removal region
Direction
Clear
The selections for the registration method will be displayed.
Input figure
Input parameter
2.
Select Input parameter.
The setting screen will be displayed.
Latitude angle:[ 15]
Angle:[180]
OK
3.
HELP
Set the parameters so that the lines that are not needed are removed.
Angles: See page 2-15-(27).
CHECK
The latitude of angle is set on both sizes of the angle. For example, if the
angle is set to 180• and the latitude is set to 15•, lines at 165• to 195• will
be removed.
4.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-3-4
Clearing Removal Regions
The clear operation is performed separately for each region.
2-15-(28)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
1.
Select the number of the region to be cleared.
Removal regions
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
A list of setting selections will be displayed.
When removing circular regions
Circle color
Search conditions
Removal region
Radius
Latitude of angle
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Region will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The region will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-(29)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
2-15-4
Checking the Removal Image
The removal image with the settings for removal regions 0 to 7 can be displayed on the screen for checking.
Removal region 0: Removes circle.
Original image
(edge-extracted image)
Removal image
Removal region 1: Removes line.
1.
Select Removal image.
1.EC defect
Measurement image
Extract edges
Removal regions
Removal image
Inspected regions
Coordinate mode
The removal image will be displayed.
Removal image
ESC:End
2.
Press the ESC Key.
The screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-(30)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
2-15-5
Setting Inspection Regions
There are 3 inspection methods available for selection.
Up to 8 regions can be set and separate inspection methods can be chosen
for each region.
Inspection method
Defect
Details
Detects line defects for the removal image produced from the settings for removal
regions 0 to 7. Only the 2 parallel lines in the edge-extracted image are detected as
defects.
Original image
Removal image
Circle
removed
Inspection
region
Line defect
Labeling
Performs labeling on the removal image produced from the settings for removal
regions 0 to 7. The number of defects and the size of each defect can be found.
Original image
Removal image
1 label
Circle
removed
Inspection
region
Defects
Gravity and area
1 label
Performs gravity and area processing on the removal image produced from the settings for removal regions 0 to 7. The total white pixel area can be found.
Original image
Removal image
Circle
removed
Inspection
region
Defects
2-15-(31)
Finds total area
Section 2-15
EC Defect
2-15-5-1
Defect
This defect inspection operation detects line defects on a removal image.
Only the 2 parallel lines in the edge-extracted image are detected as defects.
Original image
Removal image
Circle
removed
Inspection region
Line defect
1
2
Set
measureme
nt
Set
inspection
region.
CHECK
Any lines in the measurement object that are detected as only single lines,
such as the exterior, are ignored. In this case, it is not necessary to set
removal regions.
Original image
Removal image
Inspection region
Lines detected as only single
lines are not detected as defects.
Line defect
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the conditions for detecting lines as defects.
Reduce this number if the lines to be detected as defects are
broken and detected as multiple lines. Increase this number if
defect lines are not found. (1 to 5, 3*)
Measurement conditions
Extracting level :
Defect color
:
Defect width : [
Defect length : [
End
3
Black
1:10]pix
1:50]pix
Parallel lines are detected as defects. Set the edge widths of
defects in pixel units between 0 and 100 (1*:10*) so that two
quite separate lines are not detected as defects.
Set the length of lines to be detected as defects
in pixel units. (0 to 999, 1:50*)
Edge-extracted image
Defect width
Black*, white
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Defect length
2-15-(32)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
CHECK
Only parallel lines that match the set defect width and length will be detected
as defects. Width and length conditions can be set to exclude measurement
outlines from being detected as defects, even if the outline is box-shaped and
the edges are parallel.
1.
Select Inspected regions.
1.EC defect
Measurement image
Extract edges
Removal regions
Removal image
Inspected regions
Coordinate mode
A list of inspected regions will be displayed.
Inspected regions
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
2.
Select a region number.
The measurement method selections will be displayed.
Defect
Labeling
Gravity and area
3.
Select Defect.
The initial Defect Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Clear
4.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Extracting level :
3
Defect color
:
Black
Defect width : [ 1:10]pix
Defect length : [ 1:50]pix
End
2-15-(33)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
5.
6.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (3.) will return.
STEP 2: Setting Inspected Regions
1. Select Inspected region.
Inspected R0(Defect)
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Clear
The Inspected Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Inspected region
New
Box
End
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
2.
Set the region.
The method for drawing the region is the same as for removal regions.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-15-(13).
Once the region has been drawn, the screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-(34)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
2-15-5-2
Labeling
Labeling is performed on the removal image. One group of white pixels is
detected as one label. The Controller will judge whether or not labels that
match the set conditions are defects.
Original image
Removal image
Circle
removed
1 label
Inspection region
Defects
1 label
1
2
Set binary
levels.
Set
measurem
ent
3
4
Set
inspection
region.
Set
judgement
conditions.
STEP 1: Setting Binary Levels
Adjust the binary levels so that the area to be measured appears as white pixels.
1.
SeeAlso
Display the measurement method selections using the same steps 1 to 3
as outlined under Defect.
Refer to page 2-15-(32).
New registration(Inspected R0)
Defect
Labeling
Gravity and area
2.
Select Labeling.
The initial Labeling Screen will be displayed.
Binary
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Clear
3.
Select Binary.
The settings screen for binary levels will be displayed.
CHECK
2-15-(35)
An edge-extracted image (the original image with edge extraction) is displayed. When Switch image is selected, the removal image will be
Section 2-15
EC Defect
switched to. If a NG image is shown, display the removal image and adjust
the binary level.
Binary level
Edge image
4.
Upper [255]
Lower [128]
Reverse
Auto
Switch image
OK
Image
switched.
Binary level
Removal image
Upper [255]
Lower [128]
Reverse
Auto
Switch image
OK
Move the cursor to the upper limit and press the Left and Right Keys to
change the value.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
Lower limit
Binary level
Edge image
:Move
Auto
The Controller
automatically
determines
binary level.
5.
CHECK
Upper limit
Upper [255]
Lower [128]
Reverse
Auto
Switch image
OK
:Change
Switch image
Switches between edgeextracted and removal images.
Reverse
Reverses black and white display.
Use the same method to change the lower value.
Set the upper and lower limits to make the measurement object white.
Binary level
Edge image
6.
Upper [255]
Lower [128]
Reverse
Auto
Switch image
OK
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
2-15-(36)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
STEP 2: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the area and sort conditions and label number for measuring labels.
Set the other conditions as required.
Area range for labels (0 to 9,999,999.999 (0*))
Measurement conditions
Output conditions for measurement value:
OFF*:Measures the binary image.
ON: Measures all pixels outside the inspected
region as white pixels.
:
Area
[
0.000 : 247808.000 ]
OFF
Outside trimming :
OFF
Filling up holes :
:
Sort
Area descending order
: [ 0]
Label No.
Simple
Defect display :
Output conditions for measurement value:
OFF*:Outputs area and center of gravity coordinates
before filling holes.
ON: Outputs area and center of gravity coordinates
after filling holes.
Label number (0 to 2499 (0*)) for defect evaluation.
End
Defect display method on measurement screen (regions displayed separately):
Simple*: A display cursor indicates defects.
Detail: Defects shown in NG color. Longer processing time required than for simple display.
Refer to page 2-15-(42).
Conditions for reassigning label numbers
Area descending order*:Sorts in descending order by area.
Area ascending: Sorts in ascending order by area.
Gravity X descending:Sorts in descending order by center of gravity X coordinate. (See note.)
Gravity X ascending:Sorts in ascending order by center of gravity X coordinate. (See note.)
Gravity Y descending:Sorts in descending order by center of gravity Y coordinate. (See note.)
Gravity Y ascending:Sorts in ascending order by center of gravity Y coordinate. (See note.)
Note When X and Y center of gravity are sorted, the upper left corner of the measurement region
is the origin.
X
0
Y
Label numbers in
descending order
by area
Sort example:
Labeling result
Label numbers in
ascending order by
X center of gravity
Label numbers in
descending order by
Y center of gravity
2
1
0
1
CHECK
2
0
1 2
The coordinates set using calibration are not affected by labeling.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Measurement conditions.
Inspected R0(Labeling)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Clear
2-15-(37)
0
Section 2-15
EC Defect
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
:
Area
[
0.000 : 247808.000 ]
OFF
Outside trimming :
OFF
Filling up holes :
:
Sort
Area descending order
: [ 0]
Label No.
Simple
Defect display :
End
2.
Change the settings.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
Outside Trimming
Select Outside trimming when there is a white-pixel area inside the inspected region that is not to be measured.
Outside triming: ON
Input image
Inspected
region
Goal: To find the position
and area of this label
The area outside the inspected
region changes to white pixels.
(The whole input image area is used
for measurement.)
The position and the size of the middle label
will be found if the following conditions are set:
Sort conditions: Area, ascending order
Label number: 1
CHECK
Filling Up Holes
Use the Filling up holes setting to specify how areas of black pixels contained inside donut-shaped areas of white pixels are processed. If selected, the black pixels will be processed as white pixels.
Input image
Hole filling: ON
Measurement target
2-15-(38)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
STEP 3: Setting Inspected Regions
1. Select Inspected region.
Inspected R0(Labeling)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Clear
The Inspected Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Inspected region
New
Box
End
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
2.
Set the region.
The method for drawing the region is the same as for removal regions.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-15-(13).
Once the region has been drawn, the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 4: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the ranges for the number of labels, area and center of gravity for an OK
judgement.
Judgement conditions
Number of labels : 8
[
0: 2500]
: 2035.000
Judge area
[ 0.000:247808.000 ]
: 26.000
Gravity X
[ 0.000: 511.000]
: 157.000
Gravity Y
[ 0.000: 483.000]
End
Ranges for an OK judgement
Range for number of labels in measurement region (0 to 2,500)
Range for specified label number area (0 to 9,999,999.999)
Range of movement in X direction for specified label number
(-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement in Y direction for specified label number
(-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
: Measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
2-15-(39)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Inspected R0(Labeling)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Clear
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Number of labels : 8
[
0: 2500]
: 2035.000
Judge area
[ 0.000:247808.000 ]
: 26.000
Gravity X
[ 0.000: 511.000]
: 157.000
Gravity Y
[ 0.000: 483.000]
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-5-3
Gravity and Area
Gravity and area processing is performed on the removal image. The total
white pixel area is found and evaluated for defects.
Original image
Removal image
Circle
removed
Inspection region
Finds total area.
Defects
1
2
Set binary
level.
Set
measurem
ent
3
Set
inspection
region.
4
Set
judgement
conditions.
5
(As required)
Change
pixel
skipping.
2-15-(40)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
STEP 1: Setting Binary Levels
Adjust the binary levels so that the area to be measured appears as white pixels.
1.
SeeAlso
Display the measurement method selections using the same steps 1 to 3
as outlined under Defect.
Refer to page 2-15-(32).
New registration(Inspected R0)
Defect
Labeling
Gravity and area
2.
Select Gravity and area.
The initial Gravity and Area Screen will be displayed.
Binary
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
3.
Select Binary.
The rest of the procedure is the same as for labeling.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-15-(35).
STEP 2: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the measurement conditions if using fill profile or defect display functions.
Fill Profile
Turn ON the fill profile function to measure the whole area between the start
point (black pixels to white) and the end point (white pixels to black) in the
measurement region as white pixels. The default setting is OFF.
Measurement region
Start point End point
This area will be measured as white pixels.
2-15-(41)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
Example
Input image
Fill profile: ON
Inspection region
When a White-pixel Section Encroaches on the Inspected Region
Input image
Fill profile: ON
Not recognized as start point because change from white to black.
Measuring Open-form Measurement Objects
The measurement result changes depending on the orientation of the measurement
object.
Input image
Fill profile: ON
Defect Display
Select the method for displaying defects on the measurement screen (where
regions are displayed separately).
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-16-(20).
Simple
A display cursor will appear at the defect position. This is the default setting.
Defect
CHECK
When there are defects at multiple positions, the display cursor will appear at
the center of gravity of the total white pixel area and may not, therefore, appear
exactly at the defect position.
2-15-(42)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
Detail
Defects will appear in the NG color. This option requires longer processing
time than simple display.
Defect (displayed in NG color)
1.
Select Measurement conditions.
Inspected R0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Fill profile
: OFF
Defect display : Simple
End
2.
3.
Make the fill profile and defect display settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting Inspection Regions
1. Select Inspected region.
Inspected R0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2-15-(43)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
The Inspected Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Inspected region
New
Box
End
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
2.
Set the region.
The method for drawing the region is the same as for removal regions.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-16-(20).
Once the region has been drawn, the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 4: Setting the Judgement Conditions
Make settings for the area and center of gravity.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[
0.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[ 0.000 : 511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[ 0.000 : 483.000]
Range for an OK judgement
Area range (0 to 9,999,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the X direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the Y direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
End
: Measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Inspected R0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2-15-(44)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Area
: 2035.000
[ 200.000 : 247808.000]
Gravity X : 180.000
[
0.000 :
511.000]
Gravity Y : 250.000
[
0.000:
483.000]
End
2.
3.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 5: Changing Pixel Skipping
To shorten measurement processing time, change the number of pixels to be
skipped. The greater the skipping setting, the shorter the processing time.
However, the accuracy of the measurement will decrease.
Once the skipping setting has been changed, perform a measurement and
confirm that measurement can be performed correctly.
Skipping X and Skipping Y
Set how many pixels to skip in the inspected region during measurement. The
default setting is 1, which means that all of the measurement region will be
measured.
Pixel
Skipping X
Skipping Y
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
Inspected R0(Gravity and area)
Binary
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2-15-(45)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Skipping X : [ 1]
Skipping Y : [ 1]
End
2.
3.
Set the number of pixels to skip.
Select End.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-5-4
Clearing Inspection Regions
The clear operation is performed separately for each region.
1.
Select the number of the region to be cleared.
Inspected regions
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
The setting selections will be displayed.
Example: For labeling inspected regions
Binary
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Region will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The region will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-(46)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
2-15-6
Setting the Coordinate Mode
Select the type of coordinate values.
Before scroll:Output made using the coordinate values
before position displacement compensation.
After scroll*:Output made using the coordinate values
after position displacement compensation.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for differences between
output coordinates.
End
ON:
Output made using coordinate values set using calibration.
OFF*: Output made using Camera coordinate values.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the coordinate mode is changed after the judgement conditions have been
set, the measurement results will change also. Change the judgement conditions to enable correct measurement.
1.
Select Coordinate mode.
1.EC defect
Measurement image
Extract edges
Removal regions
Removal image
Inspected regions
Coordinate mode
The Coordinate Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-15-(47)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
2-15-7
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for EC defect
inspections.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Press the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which EC defect inspection is set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Press the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the five
screens.
Judgement Result
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC defect
0
Judge:NG
NG 45ms
Judgement result for this unit
Inspection region displayed in OK color
for OK result and displayed in NG color
for NG result.
(Figures drawn in OR mode are
displayed in solid lines and figures
drawn in NOT mode are displayed in
dotted lines.)
Region number
Defect Area
A list of the area of defects will be displayed for each region.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC defect
Area
0. 105.123
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NG 45ms
NG regions will be highlighted.
Region number
2-15-(48)
Section 2-15
EC Defect
CHECK
If the font size is set to small, the list of positions and defect area and defect
position and defect width and length screens will be listed together.
If the font size is set to normal, the defect area, defect position, and defect
width and length screens will be displayed consecutively.
Defect Position
A list of defect positions for each region will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC defect
Pos.X
Pos.Y
0. 98.351 212.356
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NG 45ms
NG regions will be highlighted.
Region number
Defect Width and Length
A list of defect widths and lengths for each region will be displayed.
This screen will be displayed even if defect inspection has not been set.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC defect
Width
Length
0.
2.213 129.345
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NG 45ms
NG regions will be highlighted.
Region number
Individual Region Display
More detailed measurement results are displayed for each region.
Press the SHIFT+ Right or Left Keys to display the set regions in order.
When defect display is set to Detail, the measurement values will be displayed
followed by the image minus the measurement values.
SeeAlso
2-15-(49)
Refer to page 2-15-(37) and page 2-15-(42).
Section 2-15
EC Defect
Defect, Labeling, and Gravity and Area
Example: Labeling
Measurement values displayed
Defect position confirmation screen
(with measurement values removed)
NG 60ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC defect
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC defect
Region0(Labeling)
NG 60ms
Region0(Labeling)
: NG
Judge
Num. label : 1
: : 105.123
Area
98.351
GravityX :
GravityY : 212.356
Only when
display set
to Detail.
Inspection region displayed in OK color for OK
judgements. Both inspection region and defects
displayed in NG color for NG judgements.
CHECK
Detailed measurement result information
removed, making it easier to confirm the
defect position.
When individual region display is selected, the position of defects can be confirmed on screen but the processing time is longer than other display screens.
The processing time is shown in the upper right corner of the screen.
2-15-(50)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
2-16
EC Positioning
The EC Positioning processing item finds positioning marks using shape information, such as “round” or “angular.” High precision positioning is possible
even if the measurement object is deformed or chipped.
This processing item can also be used with low contrast images.
Positioning Marks
Positioning marks can be found even
under the following conditions.
Internally
deformed
Chipped
Deformed
Low
contrast
This function can be used for positioning
of a variety of shapes.
HELP
2-16-(1)
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for information on edge codes (EC).
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
Operational Flow
1
page 2-16-(3)
Select measurement
image.
2
page 2-16-(4)
Extract
edges.
3
For circular measurement objects page 2-16-(7)
page 2-16-(7)
Set measurement
region.
1
2
Set measurement
conditions.
Set search
region.
3
Register
circle size.
4 (As required) 5
Register
reference
position.
(As required)
Set
judgement
conditions.
For cross points page 2-16-(15)
2 (As required) 3
1
Set measurement
conditions.
Set
conditions
for obtaining
line.
Set search
region.
4
(As required)
Register
reference
position.
For boxes page 2-16-(22)
1
2 (As required) 3
Set measurement
conditions.
Set conditions
for obtaining
line.
Set search
region.
4
Register
box size.
5
(As required)
Register
reference
position.
For multiple cross points page 2-16-(29)
1
2 (As required) 3
Set measurement
conditions.
Set
conditions
for obtaining
line.
Set search
region.
4 (As required)
Register
reference
position.
Clear the
set region.
page 2-16-(35)
4
page 2-16-(36)
Set coordinates
mode.
5
page 2-16-(37)
Measurement
screens
2-16-(2)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
2-16-1
Selecting Measurement Images
This section describes how to select an image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
CHECK
The edges are extracted for the image number selected here and this image is
then stored at the other image number. Set Change Filtering as the next processing item to use this image for measurement for units after the unit for
which EC position compensation was set. Then store the image stored in the
image buffer to Image 0 or Image 1.
Example: When Image 0 Is Selected as Measurement Image
0.Scn 0=SET=
Image
0
0.Camera image
1.EC circle count
2.Change Filtering
3.Binary defect
Edge extraction
Image
1
Edge-extracted image
stored to Image 1.
Image 1 to be used for measurement
Reads image again from image buffer.
1.
Select EC position.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC position
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial EC Positioning Screen will be displayed.
Measurement image
Extract edges
Select region
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Measurement Image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
3.
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-16-(3)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
2-16-2
Extracting Edges
EC positioning is performed for images for which the edges have been
extracted.
Adjust the upper and lower levels for edge extraction if there is low contrast
between the measurement object and the background and to remove noise.
Upper and Lower Limits for Edge Extraction Image
Set the level to which the background will be cut from the edge-extracted
image. The levels can be set between 10 and 255 (default 100:255).
Areas with a density above the lower limit will become the edge of the measurement object. Refer to the following examples and adjust the upper and
lower limits.
Example: Cannot Find Edges Due to Low Contrast
Edge-extracted image
Reduce lower
limit.
Cannot find edges
Example: To Remove Noise
Edge-extracted image
Increase lower
limit.
Example: Other Edges Clearly Extracted But Cannot Find Desired Mark
Edge with Stability
Low contrast with background
Edge-extracted image
Reduce upper limit.
The edges of low contrast
sections also clearly
extracted.
High contrast with background
CHECK
If the lower limit is too low, low-level noise may remain even if the image
appears noise-free on the screen. If measurements are not stable, use the following methods to see if unwanted edges have been extracted and eliminate
them.
• Checking Method
Lower the upper limit to the same value as the lower limit. If unwanted
edges are displayed, then the lower limit is too low. Return the upper limit
to its original value after completing this check.
• Elimination Method
Increase the lower limit, or use smoothing or median filtering.
SeeAlso
Refer to ,QSXWWLQJ&DPHUD,PDJHV and )LOWHULQJ$JDLQ (where smoothing can be set to be executed twice).
2-16-(4)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
Mask Size
The mask size function is used when searching for edges to judge edges
using peripheral information. Select how much peripheral pixel information to
use. The selections are 5 ™ 5 (default) or 3 ™ 3.
CHECK
This setting will be enabled only if Frame/Field under Camera image is set to
Frame. If set to Field, the effect will remain the same as if 5 ™ 5 is selected
even if 3 ™ 3 is selected.
Example: Select 3 ™ 3
Information from the surrounding
9 pixels is used to determine
whether or not the center pixel is
the edge. (1 square = 1 pixel)
The greater the mask size, the more the variations in surrounding pixels can
be absorbed. Select 5 ™ 5 to ignore uneven edges.
CHECK
SeeAlso
This function is even more effective if smoothing is used.
Refer to ,QSXWWLQJ&DPHUD,PDJHV, &KDQJLQJ)LOWHULQJ, and )LOWHU
LQJ$JDLQ (where smoothing can be set to be executed twice).
1.
Select Extract edges.
1. EC position
Measurement image
Extract edges
Select region
Coordinate mode
The screen for setting edge extraction levels will be displayed.
Lower limit
Upper limit
Extract edges
Upper[255]
Lower[100]
Mask:5x5
OK
:Change ENT:OK ESC:Back
2.
Set the upper and lower limits.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
2-16-(5)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
3.
Select the mask size.
4.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-16-(6)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
2-16-3
Setting Measurement Regions
The following four figures can be chosen for measurement regions, depending
on the shape of the positioning mark. Up to 8 regions can be set, and figures
can be selected independently for each region.
Positioning mark
Figure
Details
Circular
Circle
Searches for a circle of a specified size and can output the position coordinates (center of the circle).
Box
Box
Searches for a rectangle of a specified size and can
output the position coordinates. The center or one
of the four corners can be selected for the position
coordinates.
Cross point
Outputs the position coordinates for the intersection
of two lines.
Other figures
One angle used as a
mark
If there are multiple lines, the following conditions
can be set:
œ Output the cross point only for intersections at a
certain angle.
œ Output the cross point only for intersections of
lines of a certain length.
Several angles are
used to one set of
coordinates
2-16-3-1
Multiple cross
points
Up to 20 cross point coordinates can be found.
The detection conditions can be changed to suit any
purpose.
Circles
(As required)
1
2
3
4
Set the
measurement conditions.
Set the
search
region.
Register
the size of
the circle.
Register
reference
position.
5
(As required)
Set
judgement
conditions.
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the conditions to search for the positioning mark.
Measurement conditions
Circle color :
:
Skipping
Circular value :
End
Black
ON
[ 0]%
Select whether the color of the circle that is the
positioning mark will be white or black compared to the
background.
Select “white/black” if circle color not fixed to either
black or white. (Black*, white, white/black)
Select whether pixel skipping (1 pixel) will be used
when searching for the circle. (ON*, OFF)
Processing is faster if pixel skipping is ON so normally it
is appropriate to set pixel skipping to ON. However, if
the measurement values vary, set to OFF.
Checks circle deformation. (0% to 100% (0%*))
The value drops if the circle is deformed or chipped. The object is not
extracted as a circle if the value is lower than the set value.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-16-(7)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
1.
Select Select region.
1. EC position
Measurement image
Extract edges
Select region
Coordinate mode
A list of regions will be displayed.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
2.
Select a region number.
The figure selections will be displayed.
Circle
Cross point
Box
Multi-points
3.
Select Circle.
The initial Circle Screen will be displayed.
Position0(Circle)
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
4.
Select Measurement conditions.
2-16-(8)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Circle color :
:
Skipping
Circular value :
Black
ON
[ 0]%
End
5.
6.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (3.) will return.
STEP 2: Setting the Search Region
Set the region to search for the positioning mark.
Adjust the search region if there are areas not to be included in circle
searches.
CHECK
When edges are extracted, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be
processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting the search region.
Filter size of 5 ™ 5
Screen size
512 pixels
-2 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3
-1 pixel
484
pixels
Valid range:
(2,2) to (509,481)
Valid range:
(0,0) to (511,483)
Valid range:
(1,1) to (510,482)
Each time the image is filtered, the range of inaccurate pixels will be increased
further. For example, if filtering is performed twice, the valid range will be
reduced as follows:
Filter size of 5 ™ 5: -2 pixels ™ 3 = -6 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3: -1 pixel ™ 3 = -3 pixels
(Filtering is also performed once in edge extraction, so filtering is actually performed a total of three times.)
CHECK
The search can be performed even if the whole circle is not within the search
region, as long as the center of the circle is within the region.
Search region
Circle center
Search region
2-16-(9)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
1.
Select Search region.
Region0(Circle)
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
The screen for drawing search regions will be displayed.
Search region
251,365
2.
Draw a rectangular search region.
Specify the upper left and lower right coordinates.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the settings.
When the bottom right coordinates have been set, the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Registering the Size of the Circle
There are two methods for registering the size of the circle.
Registration
method
Details
Input figure
The measurement object is displayed on the screen, a circle is
drawn on the exterior edge of the object and the size of the circle
is registered.
Input parameter
The radius of the circle and the permissible range are entered as
parameters (in pixel units).
2-16-(10)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
Inputting Figures
1. Select Radius.
Region0(Circle)
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
The registration selections will be displayed.
Input figure
Input parameter
2.
Select Input figure.
The screen for drawing figures will be displayed.
Input figure
251,365
3.
Specify the center position of the circle.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
The screen for setting the radius will be displayed.
Input figure
100
4.
2-16-(11)
Specify the radius (3 to 512 pixels).
Up/Right Keys:
Larger
Down/Left Keys:
Smaller
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
The screen for setting the latitude of the radius will be displayed.
Input figure
20
5.
Specify the latitude of the radius (1 to 64 pixels).
Up/Right Keys:
Larger
Down/Left Keys:
Smaller
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Inputting Parameters
Input the parameters in pixel units for the radius and latitude of the search circle.
Radius (3 to 512)
1.
Radius width (1 to 64)
Select Radius.
Region0(Circle)
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
The registration selections will be displayed.
Input figure
Input parameter
2.
Select Input parameter.
2-16-(12)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
The Input Parameter Settings Screen will be displayed.
Input parameter
Radius
: [ 50]
Latitude of radius : [20]
End
3.
4.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
STEP 4: Registering Reference Positions
Register reference positions here to detect position displacement. Positions
can be inspected if the difference between the reference position and the measurement position is obtained using a calculation.
Example 1: Inspections to Detect If the Measurement Object is in the
Same Position
Place the measurement object in the correct position and register that position
as the reference position.
Reference position
Example 2: Inspecting Position from a Specified Position
Change the reference position to a suitable position.
Measurement position
Reference position (changed to suitable position)
2-16-(13)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
1.
Select Reference registration.
Region0(Circle)
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
The circle will be found for the currently displayed image and a display cursor will be placed at the center of the circle.
Search region
Reference registration
248,152
Reference position
ENT:Set
:Move
2.
Press the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the cursor to change the
position.
3.
Press the ENT Key to save the setting.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 5: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the conditions for judging whether or not a circle of the registered size has
been found. Set in pixel units the radius of circles to receive an OK judgement.
The setting range is 1.000 to 9,999.999. Any circles found of a different size
can be judged as NG.
Example: Only Circles Smaller than the Registered Size Displayed on
Screen
Registered circle
Measurement object
Tries to find the circle using the
edge of a different size circle.
The radius is too small and the circle does not fit
the judgement conditions so judged as NG.
2-16-(14)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Region0(Circle)
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
The Judgement Conditions Setting Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Radius : 72.000
[ 70.000: 75.000]
End
Measurement result for displayed image.
Use as a reference for upper and lower limits.
2.
3.
Set the radius range for an OK circle.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-16-3-2
Cross Points
1
2 (As required) 3
Set measurement
conditions.
Set
conditions
for obtaining
lines.
Set search
region.
4 (As required)
Register
reference
position.
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the conditions for searching for the positioning mark.
Measurement conditions
Target color
Specifying angle
Range of angle
Limits of angle
Specifying length
Length 1
Limits of length 1
Length 2
End
Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
Note
1.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
OFF
[ 90]
[10]
OFF
[100]
[ 80:120]%
[ 50]
Note 3
Limits of length 2
Note 4
Defined side of
:
Midline of corner
Select whether the color of the positioning mark will be white or black compared to the background. (Black*, white)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-16-(15)
:[ 80:120]%
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
2.
Angle
Use the following settings to set the angle of intersection and thus find the
coordinates of only the desired intersection even though many lines exist
on the screen.
Specifying angle: Set to ON.
Range of angle: Angle of the section in the target color (If the target color
changes, change the angle setting too.)
Limits of angle:
Set the permissible range for the angle.
Example: When the range of the angle is set to 90• and
the limits of angle set to 10•, the cross point of lines that
intersect at between 80• and 100• will be found.
Example: To find this intersection
Set the Target color to black, the
Specifying angle to ON, and the
Range of angle to 270•.
270°
To find the coordinates of the cross point of lines regardless of their angle, set
Specifying angle to OFF. The settings for the range of the angle and the limits
of the angle will be ignored.
Setting item
Selection
Specifying angle
ON, OFF*
Range of angle
0 to 359
Limits of angle
0 to 99 (10*)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
3.
Length of lines
Use the following settings to set the length and thus find the coordinates of
only the desired intersection even though many lines exist on the screen.
Specifying length: Set to ON.
Length @:
Set the line length in pixels.
Limits of length@: Set the permissible range for the length.
Example: To find this cross point
Set the Target color to black and the Length 1 and
Length 2 to the lengths shown in the diagram.
Length 1
Length 2
To find the coordinates of the cross point of lines regardless of their length,
set Specifying length to OFF. The settings of the line lengths will be ignored.
Setting item
Specifying length
Selection
ON, OFF*
Length @
1 to 999
Limits of length @
1 to 200 (80:120*)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-16-(16)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
4.
Only one angle (q) will be output as the measurement results for the lines
that are found. Select which position q will be obtained.
Midline of Corner*
Obtained midline
between two sides.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Side 1 and Side 2
With the target color between the two sides, the side in the clockwise direction is side 1 and the side in the counterclockwise direction is side 2.
Side 2
Side 1
CHECK
If both specifying angle and specifying length are set to OFF and there are
multiple lines displayed on the screen, the cross point of the longest line and
the line that crosses it will be found.
1.
SeeAlso
Display the figure selections using the same procedure as outlined in steps
1 to 3 for Circle.
Refer to page 2-16-(25).
New registration(Region0)
Circle
Cross point
Box
Multi-points
2.
Select Cross point.
The settings selections will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
2-16-(17)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
3.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Target color
Specifying angle
Range of angle
Limits of angle
Specifying length
Length 1
Limits of length 1
Length 2
End
4.
Make the settings for each item.
5.
Select End.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
OFF
[ 90]
[10]
OFF
[100]
[ 80:120]%
[ 50]
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
2-16-(18)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
STEP 2: Setting Conditions for Obtaining Lines
Adjust the line conditions if the lines cannot be found easily or to extract only
lines of a particular angle.
Line conditions
Extract level
Line angle 0
Line angle 1
Line angle 2
Line angle 3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
End
3
OFF
[ 0]
OFF
[ 90]
OFF
[180]
OFF
To extract lines regardless of the angle:
Line angle @: Set to OFF.
(Ignore the setting in square brackets on the second line.)
To extract only lines at specific angles:
Up to four angles can be specified.
Line angle @: Set to ON.
Set the angle for the lines to be detected in the square
brackets on the second line.
Setting item
Line angle 0
Selections
ON, OFF*
0 to 359 (*0)
LIne angle 1
ON, OFF*
0 to 359 (*90)
LIne angle 2
ON, OFF*
0 to 359 (*180)
LIne angle 3
ON, OFF*
0 to 359 (*270)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
SeeAlso
Refer to Line Angles on page 2-15-(1).
The level for extracting lines can be changed. There are 5 levels (1 to 5) and the default
setting is 3. Refer to the following examples and adjust the level as required.
To make a broken line into a single line
Change the extraction
level to a larger value.
Change the extraction
level to a smaller value.
2-16-(19)
Change the extraction
level to a smaller value.
When the measurement object is small
and cannot be detected easily
To ignore noise
HELP
To extract as separate lines
Change the extraction
level to a larger value.
Line Angles
The position where the brightness changes is extracted as an edge and the
direction of the change in brightness is found. This direction is called the edge
code and it indicates the direction of the edge. The way in which black and
white meet determines the direction of the edge code, and the angle is calculated as shown below.
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
180°
90°
0°
270°
Example
Use 180• to extract this edge.
Use 270• to extract this edge.
1.
Select Line conditions.
Region0(Cross point)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
The Line Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Line conditions
Extract level
Line angle 0
Line angle 1
Line angle 2
Line angle 3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3
OFF
[ 0]
OFF
[ 90]
OFF
[180]
OFF
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting the Search Region
Set the region to search for the positioning mark.
Adjust the search region if there are areas not to be included in cross point
searches.
CHECK
SeeAlso
When edges are extracted, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be
processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting the search region.
Refer to page 2-16-(7) under &LUFOHV.
2-16-(20)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
1.
Select Search region.
Region0(Cross point)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
The screen for drawing search regions will be displayed.
Search region
251,365
2.
Draw a rectangular search region.
Specify the upper left and lower right coordinates.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys:
Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the settings.
When the bottom right coordinates have been set, the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 4: Registering Reference Positions
Register reference positions here to detect position displacement. Positions
can be inspected if the difference between the reference position and the measurement position is obtained from a calculation.
SeeAlso
Refer to &LUFOHV for an outline.
1.
Select Reference registration.
Region0(Cross point)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
2-16-(21)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
The Controller will search for the cross point in the displayed image that
matches the conditions and a display cursor will appear at that position.
Search region
Reference registration
248,152
Reference position
ENT:Set
2.
:Move
Press the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the cursor to change the
position.
3.
Press the ENT Key to save the setting.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-16-3-3
Boxes
1
Set measurement
conditions.
2 (As required) 3
Set
conditions for
obtaining
lines.
Set search
region.
4
Register the
box size.
5 (As required)
Register the
reference
position.
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the conditions to search for the positioning mark.
Measurement conditions
Select whether the color of the positioning
mark will be white or black compared to the
background. (Black*, white)
Box color
: Black
Result coordinate :
Center
Defined side for :
All
End
Select which position coordinates will be obtained.
Center*
Upper Lower
left
left
Upper
right
Lower
right
The angle of one side of the box can be output as a measurement result.
Select which side the angle will be obtained from.
All*
Upper Lower
Left
Right
(Long axis)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Display the figure selections using the same procedure as outlined in steps
1 to 3 for Circle.
2-16-(22)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
Refer to &LUFOHV.
SeeAlso
New registration(Region0)
Circle
Cross point
Box
Multi-points
2.
Select Box.
The settings selections will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Box size
Reference registration
Clear
3.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Box color
: Black
Result coordinate :
Center
Defined side for :
All
End
4.
5.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
2-16-(23)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
STEP 2: Setting Conditions for Obtaining Lines
The Controller detects 4 lines and searches for a box. Adjust the conditions for
detecting the lines so that desired lines are detected.
Line conditions
Extract level
Specifying angle
Line angle 0
Line angle 1
Line angle 2
Line angle 3
:
:
:
:
:
:
3
OFF
[ 0]
[ 90]
[180]
[270]
End
Specify values if a lot of noise or
foreign matter results in boxes not
being detected with stability.
Specifying angle: Set to ON.
Line angle @:
Set the angles of the
lines to detect.
Setting item
Selections
Specifying angle
ON, OFF*
Line angle 0
0 to 359 (*0)
Line angle 1
0 to 359 (*90)
Line angle 2
0 to 359 (*180)
Line angle 3
0 to 359 (*270)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default
setting.
Note: Angles cannot be specified when
positioning mark may rotate.
Refer to the information about cross points for details (page 2-16-(19)).
HELP
Line Angles
The positions where the brightness changes are extracted as edges and the
directions of the changes in brightness are found. These directions are called
the edge codes and they indicate the directions of the edges. The way in which
black and white meet determines the direction of an edge code, and the angle
is calculated as shown below.
180°
90°
0°
CHECK
270°
Set the angles as a combination of the four sides of the box to be found
(angles 0 to 3).
Example: The following examples are for black boxes.
180°
270°
225°
135°
315°
45°
90°
0°
2-16-(24)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
1.
Select Line conditions.
Region0(Box)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Box size
Reference registration
Clear
The Line Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Line conditions
Extract level
Specifying angle
Line angle 0
Line angle 1
Line angle 2
Line angle 3
:
:
:
:
:
:
3
OFF
[ 0]
[ 90]
[180]
[270]
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting Search Regions
Set the region to search for the positioning mark.
Adjust the search region if there are areas not to be included in box searches.
CHECK
SeeAlso
When edges are extracted, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be
processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting the search region.
Refer to page 2-16-(7) under &LUFOHV.
1.
Select Search region.
Region0(Box)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Box size
Reference registration
Clear
2-16-(25)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
The screen for drawing regions will be displayed.
Search region
251,365
.
2.
Draw a rectangular search region.
Specify the upper left and lower right coordinates.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys:
Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the settings.
When the bottom right coordinates have been set, the screen in (1.) will return
STEP 4: Registering the Size of the Box
There are two methods for registering the size of the box.
Registration
method
Details
Input figure
The measurement object is displayed on the screen, a box is
drawn on the exterior edge of the object and the size of the box is
registered.
Input parameter
The lengths of sides of the box and the permissible range are
entered as parameters (in pixel units).
Adjust the permissible range by inputting parameters.
Inputting Figures
1. Select Box size.
Region0(Box)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Box size
Reference registration
Clear
The registration methods will be displayed.
Input figure
Input parameter
2-16-(26)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
2.
Select Input figure.
The Input Figure Screen will be displayed.
Input figure
251,365
3.
Specify the top left and bottom right coordinates of the box.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the settings.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
Figures can be input to make settings only for the Long size and Short size of
the box. Use the parameter input screen to make permissible size range and
other detailed settings.
Inputting Parameters
Set the size of the box and the permissible range using parameter input.
If the size of the box is entered using figure input, those parameters will be
reflected under Long size and Short size on the Input Parameter Screen.
Input parameter
Long side
Short side
Length of long side
[ 80:120]%
Length of Short side
[ 80:120]%
Long side distance
[ 80:120]%
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
: [100]
: [ 50]
:
*6
*7
Short side distance
[ 80:120]%
Line parallelism
:
: [20]
:
:
End
*1
*3
*5
*2
2-16-(27)
*4
*6
Settings ranges and Default Values*:
*1: 1 to 512
*2: 1 to 484
*3: 1 to 200 (default: 80:120)
*4: 1 to 200 (default: 80:120)
*5: 1 to 200 (default: 80:120)
*6: 1 to 200 (default: 80:120)
*7: Parallelism of long sides and short
sides: 1 to 99 (default: 20)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
CHECK
To Change Box Sizes:
• Increase the Length of long side and Length of short side.
• Increase the Long side distance and Short side distance.
When Box Is Chipped
• Reduce the lower limit of Length of long side and Length of short side.
1.
Select Box size.
Region0(Box)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Box size
Reference registration
Clear
The registration methods will be displayed.
Input figure
Input parameter
2.
Select Input parameter.
The Input Parameter Settings Screen will be displayed.
Input parameter
Long side
Short side
Length of long side
[ 80:120]%
Length of short side
[ 80:120]%
Long side distance
[ 80:120]%
: [100]
: [ 50]
:
:
:
End
3.
4.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 5: Registering Reference Positions
Register reference positions here to detect position displacement. Positions
can be inspected if the difference between the reference position and the measurement position is obtained from a calculation.
SeeAlso
Refer to &LUFOHV for an outline.
2-16-(28)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
1.
Select Reference registration.
Position0(Box)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Box size
Reference registration
Clear
The Controller will search for the box in the displayed image and a display
cursor will appear at that position.
Search region
Reference registration
248,152
Reference position
ENT:Set
2.
3.
:Move
Press the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the cursor to change the
position.
Press the ENT Key to save the setting.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-16-3-4
Multi-points
(As required)
1
2
Set measurement
conditions.
Set conditions for
obtaining
lines.
3
Set search
region.
4
(As required)
Register
reference
position.
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the conditions for searching for the positioning mark.
Measurement conditions
Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
Target color
Specifying angle
Range of angle
Limits of angle
Specifying length
Length 1
Limits of length 1
Length 2
End
2-16-(29)
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
OFF
[ 90]
[10]
OFF
[100]
[ 80:120]%
[ 50]
Note 3
Note 4
Note 5
: [ 80:120]%
Limits of length 2
:
Sorting method
X Ascending order
Defined side of θ
:
Midline of corner
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
Note
1.
Select whether the positioning mark color will be white or black compared
to the background. (Black*, white)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2.
Angles
Use the following settings to set the angle of intersection and thus find the
coordinates of only the desired intersection even though many lines exist
on the screen.
Specifying angle: Set to ON.
Range of angle: Angle of the section in the target color (If the target color
changes, change the angle setting too.)
Limits of angle:
Set the permissible range for the angle.
Example: When the range of the angle is set to 90• and
the limits of angle set to 10•, the cross point of lines that
intersect at between 80• and 100• will be found.
Example: When Range of angle set to 90• and Limits of angle set to 10•.
The cross point of lines that intersect at 80• to 100• will be found.
Example: To extract the
following 3 cross points
Set the Target color to black, the
Specifying angle to ON, and the
Range of angle to 60•.
60°
Set the Target color to black, the
Specifying angle to ON, and the
Range of angle to 270•.
Example: To extract the
following 4 cross points
270°
To find the coordinates of the cross point of lines regardless of their angle,
set Specifying angle to OFF. The settings for the range of the angle and the
limits of the angle will be ignored.
Setting item
Selections
Specifying angle
ON, OFF*
Range of angle
0 to 359
Limits of angle
0 to 99 (10*)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
3.
Lengths
Use the following settings to set the length and thus find the coordinates of
only the desired intersection even though many lines exist on the screen.
Specifying length: Set to ON.
Length @:
Set the line length in pixels.
2-16-(30)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
Limits of length@: Set the permissible range for the length.
Example: To extract the 4
cross points shown below
Set the Length 1 and Length 2 to the
lengths for the areas indicated in the
following diagram.
Length 2
Length 1
To find the coordinates of the cross point of lines regardless of their length,
set Specifying length to OFF. The settings of the line lengths and the limits
of the length will be ignored.
Setting item
Selections
Specifying length
ON, OFF*
Length @
1 to 999
Limits of length @ 1 to 200 (80:120*)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
4.
Select the sorting conditions for determining which cross point coordinates
will be output. Up to 20 points can be obtained. The coordinates for the first
point matching the selected conditions will be output. (X ascending*, X descending, Y ascending, Y descending)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
To output the coordinates for the second and subsequent points or to output the center, use Calculation or other processing items and set the formula.
Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ.
SeeAlso
Example: Find the average of 4 points to output the center point.
Center
5.
2-16-(31)
Only one angle (q) will be output as the measurement results for the lines
that are found. Select which position q will be obtained. (The lines that are
considered are the two lines meeting the intersection point.)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
Example: To extract the cross point shown in the following diagram, set target color to black and sorting condition to X ascending order.
Midline of the Corner*
Obtained midline
between two sides.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Output intersection
Side 1 and Side 2
With the target color between the two
sides, the side in the clockwise
direction is side 1 and the side in the
counterclockwise direction is side 2.
Side 2
Side 1
1.
Display the figure selections using the same operations as outlined under
steps (1.) to steps (3.) for Circle. Refer to page 2-16-(20).
New registration(Region0)
Circle
Cross point
Box
Multi-points
2.
Select Multi-points.
The selections for setting conditions will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
3.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Target color
Specifying angle
Range of angle
Limits of angle
Specifying length
Length 1
Limits of length 1
Length 2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Black
OFF
[ 90]
[10]
OFF
[100]
[ 80:120]%
[ 50]
End
4.
Make the settings for each item.
5.
Select End.
2-16-(32)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
STEP 2: Setting Conditions for Obtaining Lines
Adjust the line conditions if the lines cannot be found easily or to extract only
lines of a particular angle.
Refer to page 2-16-(19) for an outline.
1.
Select Line conditions.
Position0(Multi-points)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
The Line Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Line conditions
Extract level
Line angle 0
Line angle 1
Line angle 2
Line angle 3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3
OFF
[ 0]
OFF
[ 90]
OFF
[180]
OFF
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting Search Region
Set the region to search for the positioning mark.
Adjust the search region if there are areas not to be included in multi-point
searches.
CHECK
SeeAlso
2-16-(33)
When edges are extracted, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be
processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting the search region.
Refer to page 2-16-(7) under &LUFOHV.
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
1.
Select Search region.
Region0(Multi-points)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
The screen for drawing search regions will be displayed.
Search region
391,436
2.
Draw a rectangular search region.
Specify the upper left and lower right coordinates.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the settings.
When the bottom right coordinates have been set, the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 4: Registering Reference Positions
Register reference positions here to detect position displacement. Positions
can be inspected if the difference between the reference position and the measurement position is obtained from a calculation.
SeeAlso
Refer to &LUFOHV for an outline.
1.
Select Reference registration.
Region0(Multi-points)
Measurement conditions
Line conditions
Search region
Reference registration
Clear
2-16-(34)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
The Controller will search for the cross point in the displayed image that
matches the conditions and a display cursor will appear at that position.
Search region
Reference position
Reference registration
248,152
ENT:Set
:Move
2.
Press the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the cursor to change the
position.
3.
Press the ENT Key to save the setting.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Clearing Set Regions
The clear operation is executed for each region.
1.
Select the region number to be cleared.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
The selections will be displayed.
Example: For circles
Measurement conditions
Search region
Radius
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Region will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The region will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-16-(35)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
2-16-4
Setting the Coordinate Mode
Select the type of coordinate values.
Before scroll:Output made using the coordinate values
before position displacement compensation.
After scroll*: Output made using the coordinate values
after position displacement compensation.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for differences between
output coordinates.
End
ON:
Output made using coordinate values set using calibration.
OFF*: Output made using Camera coordinate values.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the coordinate mode is changed after the judgement conditions have been
set, the measurement results will change also. Change the judgement conditions to enable correct measurement.
1.
Select Coordinate mode.
1. EC position
Measurement image
Extract edges
Select region
Coordinate mode
The Coordinate Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
2.
Make the settings for each item.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-16-(36)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
2-16-5
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for EC positioning.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Press the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which EC positioning is set
and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Press the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the three
screens.
Judgement Result
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC position
OK 45ms
Region number
0
Judge : OK
Search region
Output coordinates
Detailed Display
The measurement values for each region will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC position
X
0. 1234.567
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
OK 45ms
Y
234.689
209.256
Region number
2-16-(37)
Section 2-16
EC Positioning
Individual Region Display
More detailed measurement results are displayed for each region.
Press the SHIFT+ Right or Left Keys to display the set regions in order.
• Circle
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC position
OK 45ms
Region0(Circle)
:OK
Judge
PositionX :213.124
PositionY :268.369
:150.236
Radius
Circ. value :85
Outline of target figure
• Cross points, boxes, and multiple cross points
Once the measurement values for the region have been displayed, the
screen for confirming the line extraction status will be displayed.
Example: Cross points
Measurement values display
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC position
Region0(Cross point)
Judge
PositionX
PositionY
Angle
Length 1
Length 2
Screen for confirming extracted line status
OK 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC position
OK 45ms
Region0(Cross point)
:OK
:213.124
:268.369
: 90.236
: 50.513
: 51.368
All lines are displayed.
2-16-(38)
Section 2-17
Edge Position
2-17
Edge Position
The Edge Position processing item uses the density (brightness) in the measurement region to find the position of the measurement object.
Use this processing item to find the edge coordinates or width of the measurement object.
The edge is found using density changes in the measurement region.
Measurement region
To find the X coordinate of this edge
The width can be found if multiple regions are registered.
Width*
* The width is found using Calculation.
Region 0
Region 1
Example: Finding the size of a molded product.
2-17-(1)
Section 2-17
Edge Position
Operational Flow
1
page 2-17-(3)
Select measurement
image.
2
page 2-17-(4)
Set measurement
region.
(As required)
1
2
3
Set edge
detection
conditions.
Draw measurement
region.
Re-register
reference
value.
4
Set
judgement
conditions.
5 (As required)
Change
detailed
conditions.
Clear set
region.
page 2-17-(11)
3
page 2-17-(12)
Set
coordinates
mode.
4
page 2-17-(13)
Measurement
screens
2-17-(2)
Section 2-17
Edge Position
2-17-1
Selecting Measurement Images
This section describes how to select an image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
1.
Select Edge position.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Edge position
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The setting selections will be displayed.
1.Edge position
Measurement image
Select region
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Measurement Image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
3.
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-17-(3)
Section 2-17
Edge Position
2-17-2
Setting Measurement Regions
Up to 8 regions can be set.
(As required)
1
2
3
Set edge
detection
conditions.
Draw measurement
region.
Re-register
reference
value.
4
5 (As required)
Set
judgement
conditions.
Change
detailed
conditions.
STEP 1: Setting Edge Detection Conditions
Set the direction for edge detection and the density changes.
Measurement conditions
Edge detection direction: →, ←, ↑, ↓
Direction : →
Color
: Light→Dark
End
Density change: Light→Dark, Dark→Light
Example: To detect the following position
Direction:→
Color: Light→Dark
1.
Select Edge position.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Edge position
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The settings selections will be displayed.
1.Edge position
Measurement image
Select region
Coordinate mode
2-17-(4)
Section 2-17
Edge Position
2.
Select Select region.
The region numbers will be displayed.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
3.
Select a region number.
The initial Edge Position Screen will be displayed.
Region0
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
4.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement condition
Direction :
Color
:Light
dark
End
5.
Select the edge detection conditions.
6.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (3.) will return.
2-17-(5)
Section 2-17
Edge Position
STEP 2: Drawing Measurement Regions
Draw a measurement region to include all the edges for detection.
When a measurement region is drawn, measurement is performed for the displayed image and the result is registered as the reference value (edge position).
CHECK
If the edge is not in the measurement region, measurement will not be possible. Make a region of a size and position that allows for movement of the range
of the measurement object.
Correct
Correct
Incorrect
Edge detection
in X direction
No edge in
measurement
region
Edge detection
in Y direction
1.
Select Region.
Region0
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Region
270,230
2.
CHECK
Draw a box-shaped region.
The only figure that can be drawn is a box.
The region will be set and the screen in (1.) will return. The edge position
(display cursor) and the measurement region will be displayed.
2-17-(6)
Section 2-17
Edge Position
STEP 3: Re-registering Reference Values
This operation is performed when only the reference value is to be re-registered.
When a measurement region is drawn, the measurement is performed for the
displayed image and the result is registered as the reference value. If the reregistering function explained here is used, only the reference value for the
image currently displayed will be registered. Edge position is registered for the
reference value.
CHECK
The reference position can be changed to enable the following function.
Inspecting Positions from a Specified Point
Once the reference value (edge position) has been obtained for the image currently displayed, the reference position is changed to an suitable point. Position inspection can be performed by calculating the difference between this
reference position and the measurement position.
Measurement position (edge position)
Reference position
(changed to suitable point)
CHECK
When the measurement region is changed, the reference value returns to the
default setting.
1.
Select Reference registration.
Region0
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
A cursor will appear at the edge position.
Reference registration
95,211
Reference position
ENT:Set
:Move
Measurement region
2.
2-17-(7)
To change the position, use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move
the cursor.
Section 2-17
Edge Position
3.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 4: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the position ranges for an OK judgement.
Range for an OK judgement
Judgement conditions
Position X :
[
0.000 :
95.000
511.000 ]
Position Y :
[
0.000 :
95.000
511.000 ]
Range for X coordinates
(-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range for Y coordinates
(-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
End
Measurement results for displayed image
CHECK
Position X and Position Y will change depending on the settings under Measurement/Direction.
X
The Y coordinate is set when ↑ and ↓ are selected.
Y The X coordinate is set when ← and → are selected.
The origin and coordinate system are determined by the calibration settings.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Region0
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Position X:
[ 0.000 :
95.000
511.000 ]
Position Y:
[ 0.000 :
95.000
511.000 ]
End
2.
Change the settings.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-17-(8)
Section 2-17
Edge Position
STEP 5: Changing Detailed Conditions
Change the detailed conditions when the measurement results are unstable.
Normally, these conditions can be left on the default settings. After changing
the settings, perform an object measurement to check that measurement can
still be performed correctly.
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
Region0
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Edge level : [ 50]%
Noise level : [ 20]
Noise width : [ 0]pix
End
2.
3.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Edge Level
Set a density change level between 0 and 100 that will indicate the edge. Normally, the default setting of 50% will be fine.
The edge is normally detected as follows:
1.
The density distribution of the whole measurement region is calculated.
2.
The density difference between the lowest and highest density value becomes 100%.
3.
The point where the edge level density change is detected becomes the
edge.
Measurement region
100%
50%
0%
2-17-(9)
Maximum density value
Edge level
Minimum density value
Section 2-17
Edge Position
Noise Level
Set a noise level between 0 and 255 to assist the determination of edges. The
maximum density and minimum density within the edge detection area is calculated and if the difference between the two values is less than the noise
level, then the Controller determines that there is no edge. Normally the
default setting of 20 is sufficient. Adjust this to a higher value, however, if noise
is causing false edges to be detected.
(Within the edge detection region)
Max. density - min. density < noise level “ no edge “ NG measurement
result
Max. density - min. density ˜ noise level “ Edge “ Used for measurement
Example: When noise level is set to 30
Edge
detection
region
Max. density 60
60 15 30
Edge detected so
Min. density 15
measurement performed
Edge
detection
region
Max. density 25
25
Min. density 10
10 30
Processed as no edge detected.
Measurement result: NG
Noise Width
Set the noise width between 0 and 255 to evaluate noise.
If the density distribution from the position where the edge was first detected
falls to below the edge level within the noise width range, the detected point is
judged as noise. Normally the default noise width setting of 0 is sufficient. If
noise is causing incorrect detection, make this value higher.
Example
Edge detection point
Measurement
region
If the density falls below the
edge level within the set range,
the detected edge is
determined to be noise.
Noise width (pixel)
50%
Edge level
2-17-(10)
Section 2-17
Edge Position
Clearing Set Regions
The clear operation is executed for each region.
1.
Select the region number to be cleared.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Region will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The region will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-17-(11)
Section 2-17
Edge Position
2-17-3
Setting the Coordinate Mode
Select the type of coordinate values.
Before scroll:Output made using the coordinate values
before position displacement compensation.
After scroll*: Output made using the coordinate values
after position displacement compensation.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for differences between
output coordinates.
End
ON:
Output made using coordinate values set using calibration.
OFF*: Output made using Camera coordinate values.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the coordinate mode is changed after the judgement conditions have been
set, the measurement results will change also. Change the judgement conditions to enable correct measurement.
1.
Select Edge position.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Edge position
2.
3.
4.
5.
The settings selections will be displayed.
1.Edge position
Measurement image
Select region
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Coordinate mode.
The Coordinate Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
3.
Make the settings for each item.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-17-(12)
Section 2-17
Edge Position
2-17-4
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for edge
positioning.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which edge positioning is
set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the two
screens.
Judgement Result
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Edge position
OK 45ms
Judgement result for this unit
Judge:OK
0
+
Inspection region displayed in OK
color for OK result and displayed in
NG color for NG result.
Edge position
Region number
List of Positions
A list of edge positions for each region will be displayed.
NG 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Edge position
Pos.X
Pos.Y
125.251
0. 90.785
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NG regions will be highlighted.
Region number
2-17-(13)
Section 2-18
Fine Matching
2-18
Fine Matching
The registered image for an acceptable product and the input image are overlaid (matched) and the differences are detected quickly and accurately. This
enables small defects in the pattern and writing on the measurement object to
be detected with a high level of accuracy.
Example: Label Defect Inspection
Acceptable product
image (registered)
Inspection image
Matched
Defects are shown in NG color. Judgment is made based
on area of difference from acceptable product image.
0.Scn 0
RUN
NG
Pattern defect
Slight defect
Printing error
Edge defect
Refer to 6(&7,21%DVLF2SHUDWLQJ3URFHGXUHV for details.
2-18-(1)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
2-19
EC Circle Count
The EC Circle Count processing item counts the number of circles of a specified size. Circles are extracted using “round” shape information and the process is not affected even if the circles are deformed or there are internal
defects.
Example: Counting Number of Circles
Circles are recognized and counted even if they are deformed or if there are
internal defects. The permissible range for defects can be changed.
0.Scn 0
RUN
NG
Deformed
Internal defect
Missing
No. of circles:
5
HELP
2-19-(1)
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for information on edge codes (EC).
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
Operational Flow
1
page 2-19-(3)
Select measurement
image.
2
page 2-19-(4)
Extract edges.
3
page 2-19-(6)
Select circle color.
4
page 2-19-(7)
Set inspection
region.
5
page 2-19-(10)
Register circle size.
6
page 2-19-(13)
Set judgement
conditions.
7
(As required)
page 2-19-(14)
Set detailed
conditions.
8
(As required)
page 2-19-(16)
Set coordinate
mode.
9
page 2-19-(17)
Measurement
screens
2-19-(2)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
2-19-1
Selecting Measurement Images
This section describes how to select an image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
CHECK
The edges are extracted for the image number selected here and this image is
then stored at the other image number. Set Change Filtering as the next processing item to use this image for measurement for units after the unit for
which EC circle count was set. Then store the image stored in the image buffer
to Image 0 or Image 1.
Example: When Image 0 Is Selected as Measurement Image
0.Scn 0=SET=
Image
0
0.Camera image
1.EC circle count
2.Change Filtering
3.Binary defect
Edge extraction
Image
1
Edge-extracted image
stored to Image 1.
Image 1 to be used for measurement
Reads image again from image buffer.
1.
Select EC circle count.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC circle count
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial EC Circle Count Screen will be displayed.
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Candidate radius
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Measurement Image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
3.
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-19-(3)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
2-19-2
Extracting Edges
EC circle count is performed for images for which the edges have been
extracted.
Adjust the upper and lower levels for edge extraction if there is low contrast
between the measurement object and the background and to remove noise.
Upper and Lower Limits
Set the level to which the background will be cut. The levels can be set
between 10 and 255 (default 100:255).
Areas with a density above the lower limit will become the edge of the measurement object. Refer to the following examples and adjust the upper and
lower limits.
Example: Cannot Find Edges Due to Low Contrast
Edge-extracted image
Reduce lower limit.
Cannot find edges
Example: To Remove Noise
Edge-extracted image
Increase lower limit.
Example: Other Edges Clearly Extracted But Cannot Find Desired Mark
Edge with Stability
Low contrast with background
Edge-extracted image
Reduce upper limit.
The edges of low
contrast sections also
clearly extracted.
High contrast with background
Mask Size
The mask size function is used when searching for edges to judge edges
using peripheral information. Select how much peripheral pixel information to
use. The selections are 5 ™ 5 (default) or 3 ™ 3.
CHECK
This setting will be enabled only if Frame/Field under Camera image is set to
Frame. If set to Field, the effect will remain the same as if 5 ™ 5 is selected
even if 3 ™ 3 is selected.
Example: Select to 3 ™ 3
Information from the surrounding
9 pixels is used to determine
whether or not the center pixel is
the edge. (1 square = 1 pixel)
2-19-(4)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
The greater the mask size, the more the variations in surrounding pixels can
be absorbed. Select 5 ™ 5 to ignore uneven edges.
CHECK
SeeAlso
This function is even more effective if smoothing is used.
Refer to ,QSXWWLQJ&DPHUD,PDJHV and )LOWHULQJ$JDLQ (where smoothing can be set to be executed twice).
1.
Select Extract edges.
1.EC circle count
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Candidate radius
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The screen for setting edge extraction levels will be displayed.
Lower limit
Upper limit
Extract edges
Upper[255]
Lower[100]
Mask:5x5
OK
:Change ENT:OK ESC:Back
2.
Set the upper and lower limits.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
3.
Select the mask size.
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-19-(5)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
2-19-3
Selecting Circle Color
Select the color of the circles to be inspected.
Measurement conditions
Circle color : Black
End
Select whether the circle color is white or black
compared to the background.
Select Both for circles not necessarily white or black.
(Black*, white, both)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Measurement conditions.
1.EC circle count
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Candidate radius
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Circle color : Black
End
2.
3.
Select the circle color.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-19-(6)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
2-19-4
Setting Inspection Regions
Circles that meet the set conditions will be found from the inspection region set
here.
CHECK
When edges are extracted, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be
processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting the inspection region.
Filter size of 5 ™ 5
Screen size
512 pixels
-2 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3
-1 pixel
484
pixels
Valid range:
(0,0) to (511,483)
Valid range:
(2,2) to (509,481)
Valid range:
(1,1) to (510,482)
Each time the image is filtered, the range of inaccurate pixels will be increased
further. For example, if filtering is performed twice, the valid range will be
reduced as follows:
Filter size of 5 ™ 5: -2 pixels ™ 3 = -6 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3: -1 pixel ™ 3 = -3 pixels
(Filtering is also performed once in edge extraction, so filtering is actually performed a total of three times.)
CHECK
Regions can be created by combining up to 3 different figures. Regions with
difficult shapes can be drawn and sections not to be measured can be left out
of the region by combining different figures.
1.
Select Inspected region.
1.EC circle count
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Candidate radius
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The screen for drawing regions will be displayed.
Inspected region
New
Box
End
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
2-19-(7)
2.
Select New.
3.
Select the desired figure.
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
4.
Select the desired drawing mode (OR/NOT).
An arrow cursor will appear.
Up to three figures (0, 1, and 2)
can be drawn.
Inspected region
5.
[0]
492,405
Draw the figure for the inspection region.
The figure will be registered.
Once three figures have been drawn,
Add will no longer be displayed.
Inspected region
Add
Figure0
End
6.
If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
7.
Repeat steps 3 to 5 as necessary to create the desired shape.
8.
After drawing is completed, select End.
The measurement region will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
Figures drawn in OR mode are displayed in solid lines. Figures drawn in
NOT mode are displayed in dotted lines.
Figure 1 (drawn using OR)
Figure 2 (drawn using NOT)
Figure 3 (drawn using OR)
2-19-(8)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1. In the screen for step 6 above, select the figure to be changed or cleared
using the Up and Down Keys and press the ENT Key.
Figure 1
Figure 0
Inspected region
Add
Figure0
Figure1
End
The figure for the figure number selected using the cursor will be displayed
with solid lines. The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed.
Correct
Clear
2.
Select either Correct or Clear and press the ENT Key.
If Correct is selected, the cursor will be displayed. Correct the size and position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
2-19-(9)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
2-19-5
Registering Circle Sizes
There are two methods for registering the size of the circle.
Registration
method
CHECK
Details
Input figure
The measurement object is displayed on the screen, a circle is
drawn on the exterior edge of the object and the size of the circle
is registered.
Input parameter
The radius of the circle and the permissible range are entered as
parameters (in pixel units).
The size of the circle registered here is used to find circle candidates.
If circles of different sizes are found or if the inspection is otherwise unstable,
set the radius (radius of circles to be counted) under detailed conditions.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-19-(14).
Inputting Figures
1. Select Candidate radius.
1.EC circle count
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Candidate radius
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The registration selections will be displayed.
Input figure
Input parameter
2.
Select Input figure.
The screen for drawing figures will be displayed.
Input figure
136,172
3.
Specify the center position of the circle.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys:
Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
2-19-(10)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
The screen for setting the radius will be displayed.
Input figure
50
4.
Specify the radius (3 to 512 pixels).
Up/Right Keys:
Larger
Down/Left Keys: Smaller
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
The screen for setting the latitude of the radius will be displayed.
Input figure
5
5.
Specify the latitude of the radius (1 to 64 pixels).
Up/Right Keys:
Larger
Down/Left Keys: Smaller
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Inputting Parameters
Input the parameters in pixel units for the radius and latitude of the circle.
Candidate radius (3 to 512)
2-19-(11)
Latitude of radius (1 to 64)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
1.
Select Candidate radius.
1.EC circle count
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Candidate radius
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The registration selections will be displayed.
Input figure
Input parameter
2.
Select Input parameter.
The Input Parameter Settings Screen will be displayed.
Input parameter
Candidate radius: : [ 50]
Latitude of radius: : [ 5]
End
3.
4.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-19-(12)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
2-19-6
Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the number of circles for an OK judgement.
Judgement conditions
No. of circles for an OK
judgement (0 to 64)
Measurement result for
displayed image. Use as
reference for setting upper
and lower limits.
Quantity : 6 [ 6: 6]
End
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
1.EC circle count
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Candidate radius
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Quantity : 6 [ 6: 6]
End
2.
Set the conditions for an OK judgement.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-19-(13)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
2-19-7
Setting Detailed Conditions
Adjust the detailed conditions if the circle detection is unstable or if circles of
different sizes are counted.
CHECK
Finding Circles
1.
Extracting Circle Candidates
Size: Set under Candidate radius.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-19-(10).
Extraction: Performed based on pixel skipping setting.
2.
Judging Whether or Not Candidate Circle Should Be Counted
Deformity check: Is the circle within the circular value range?
Size check:
Detailed conditions
Skipping
: ON
Circular value : [ 0]%
Radius
:
[ 1.000:512.000]
End
Is the circle within the radius range?
Select whether pixel skipping (1 pixel) will be used
when searching for circle candidates. (ON*, OFF)
Processing is faster if pixel skipping is ON and normally
it is appropriate to set pixel skipping to ON. However, if
the measurement values vary, set to OFF.
Circle deformity check (0 to 100 (0*))
If the circle is deformed or chipped, the evaluation is
lower. Any figure with an evaluation lower than the setting
here will not be counted as a circle.
Set the radius for circles to be counted. (1.000 to 9999.999 (1.000 to 512.000*))
Candidate circles that do not fall within this radius range are not counted.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
1.EC circle count
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Candidate radius
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Skipping
: ON
Circular value : [ 0]%
Radius
:
[ 1.000:512.000]
End
2-19-(14)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-19-(15)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
2-19-8
Setting the Coordinate Mode
Select the type of coordinate values if the center coordinates of circles are to
be output.
Before scroll:Output made using the coordinate values
before position displacement compensation.
After scroll*: Output made using the coordinate values
after position displacement compensation.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for differences between
output coordinates.
End
ON:
Output made using coordinate values set using calibration.
OFF*: Output made using Camera coordinate values.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Coordinate mode.
1.EC circle count
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Inspected region
Candidate radius
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The Coordinate Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-19-(16)
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
2-19-9
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for EC circle
count.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which EC circle count
inspection is set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the three
screens.
Judgement Result
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC circle count
NG 45ms
Judge :NG
Quantity:4
The measurement result for this unit (In
this example, when number of circles set to
6 under Judgement conditions.)
No. of circles found.
NG radius
The display cursor is shown in NG color.
NG circular value
The circumference is shown in NG color.
Circle Information (Center Position and Radius)
NG 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC circle count
CenterX CenterY Radius
0. 81.263 253.120 21.021
1.198.962 254.612 20.946
2.392.861 251.961 20.634
3. 81.263 435.564 11.021
4.198.962 435.612 20.986
5.392.861 434.961 20.634
2-19-(17)
Displays detailed information
for candidate circles.
Use the center X and center Y
information to determine which
circle the information is for.
Section 2-19
EC Circle Count
Circle Information (Circular Value)
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.EC circle count
Value
0. 85
1. 84
2. 80
3. 85
4. 84
5. 35
CHECK
NG 45ms
Displays the circular values for
candidate circles.
If the font size is set to small the circle information screens will be shown
together.
2-19-(18)
Section 2-20
Pattern
2-20
Pattern
Use the Pattern processing item to distinguish between measurement object
shapes or positions.
The part of the input image that most corresponds to the special characteristics of the measurement image (model) is found and the correlation (degree of
similarity) and position are detected. Up to 64 regions can be registered to 1
unit and search processing can be executed simultaneously for these regions.
Example: Detecting for Mixed Varieties of Packaging
Model
When judgement value (correlation) set to 70
Correlation: 80
2-20-(1)
Correlation: 20
Section 2-20
Pattern
Operational Flow
1
(As required) page 2-20-(3)
Change
measurement conditions.
2
page 2-20-(4)
Set measurement
region.
1
2 (As required) 3
4
Register
model.
Change
search
coordinates.
Set
judgement
conditions.
Set search
region.
Reference
the model.
page 2-20-(10)
Clear set
region.
page 2-20-(11)
3
(As required) page 2-20-(12)
Change
detailed
conditions.
4
page 2-20-(14)
Set
coordinate
mode.
5
page 2-20-(15)
Measurement
screens
CHECK
Pattern inspection uses the image stored at Image 0 as the measurement
image; there is no menu for selecting the measurement image.
2-20-(2)
Section 2-20
Pattern
2-20-1
Changing Measurement Conditions
Change the settings for searches common to all measurement regions.
Change these conditions for high-precision model position detection. Normally, these conditions can be left on the default settings. After changing the
settings, perform an object measurement to check that measurement can still
be performed correctly.
Accuracy
Select the degree of precision when searching for model positions.
Accuracy setting
Normal*
Precise
Details
Finds the position in pixel units.
Finds the position in sub-pixel units.
The measurement is performed with greater precision than the
normal search, but processing time is longer.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Pattern.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Pattern
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The selects for pattern inspections will be displayed.
1.Pattern
Measurement conditions
Select region
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Accuracy : Normal
End
3.
4.
Change the accuracy setting.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-20-(3)
Section 2-20
Pattern
2-20-2
Setting Measurement Regions
Up to 64 regions can be set.
1
Register
model.
2
(As required)
Change
search
coordinates.
3
Set search
region.
4
Set
judgement
conditions.
STEP 1: Registering the Model
The area of the image to be inspected is registered as a model.
When a model is registered, the center position of the model is registered as
the search coordinates. When several figures have been combined in the
drawing, the center coordinates of circumscribing rectangle becomes the
search coordinates.
CHECK
Regions can be created by combining up to 3 different figures. Regions with
difficult shapes can be drawn and sections not to be measured can be left out
of the region by combining different figures.
1.
Select Pattern.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Pattern
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The settings selections will be displayed.
1.Pattern
Measurement conditions
Select region
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
2-20-(4)
Section 2-20
Pattern
2.
Select Select region.
A list of regions will be displayed.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
3.
CHECK
Select a region number.
Use the Up and Down Keys to display regions 8 to 63.
The selections for that region will be displayed.
Region0
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
4.
Select Model registration.
The Model Registration Screen will be displayed.
Model registration
New
Box
End
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
5.
Select New.
6.
Select the desired figure.
7.
Select the desired drawing mode (OR/NOT).
An arrow cursor will appear.
Up to three figures (0, 1, and 2)
can be drawn.
Model registration
2-20-(5)
[0]
465,241
Section 2-20
Pattern
8.
Draw the region to be registered as the model with the selected figure.
The figure will be registered.
Once three figures have been drawn,
Add will no longer be displayed.
Model registration
Add
Figure0
End
9.
If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
10. Repeat steps 6 to 8 as necessary to create the desired shape.
11. After drawing is completed, select End.
The measurement region will be registered and the screen in (3.) will return. The search coordinates (display cursor) and the model region will be
displayed.
CHECK
Figures drawn using OR mode are displayed with solid lines and figures
drawn using NOT mode are displayed with dotted lines.
Figure 1 (drawn using OR)
Figure 2 (drawn using NOT)
Figure 3 (drawn using OR)
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1. In the screen for step 8 above, select the figure to be changed or cleared
using the Up and Down Keys and press the ENT Key.
FIgure 1 FIgure 0
Model registration
Add
Figure0
Figure1
End
The figure for the figure number selected using the cursor will be displayed
with solid lines. The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed.
Correct
Clear
2.
Select either Correct or Clear and press the ENT Key.
If Correct is selected, the cursor will be displayed. Correct the size and position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
2-20-(6)
Section 2-20
Pattern
CHECK
To re-register a model, repeat the procedure from step 4 of Step 1: Registering the Model.
STEP 2: Changing the Search Coordinates
Use this function to change the search coordinates only.
When a model is registered, the center position of the model is registered as
the search coordinates. This function can be used to register a point other
than the center of the model as the search coordinates.
CHECK
The search coordinates are used for the point output as the measurement
value. The search coordinates can be changed to any point inside the model.
If multiple figures have been combined to create the model, the search coordinates will be limited to the circumscribing rectangle.
Changing the Point Output as the Measurement Value
Search coordinate
changed to a suitable position
(center of model is the default)
Model
CHECK
If the model is re-registered, the search coordinates are changed to the center
position of the new model.
1.
Select Search coordinates.
Region0
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
A cursor will appear in the center position.
Search coordinate
Search coordinate
403,171
2.
To change the position, use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move
the cursor.
3.
Press the ENT Key.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-20-(7)
Section 2-20
Pattern
STEP 3: Setting the Search Region
Set the region in which the model is to be searched for. It is possible to perform a search for the entire input image but accuracy can be increased by setting limits on the search region.
1.
Select Search region.
Region0
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
An arrow cursor will appear.
The model will be displayed in solid lines.
Model
Search region
2.
CHECK
500,356
Draw a box-shaped search region.
The only figure that can be drawn is a box.
The search region will be set and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 4: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the judgement conditions for the correlation with the model and for the
position (X, Y) where the object was detected.
Judgement conditions
Correlation : 79 [ 60 : 100 ]
Position X : 180.000
[
0.000 : 511.000]
Position Y : 250.000
[
0.000 : 483.000]
End
Range for an OK judgement
Correlation range (0 to 100)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the X direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the Y direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
The measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as references in setting the upper and lower limits.
2-20-(8)
Section 2-20
Pattern
CHECK
Correlation
When OK condition for correlation is 60:
Image 0 Image 1 Image 2 Image 3
Correlation: 96
Judgement: OK
CHECK
55
NG
50
NG
65
OK
Position X and Position Y
Movement range in X direction
Movement range in Y direction
OK NG
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Region0
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Correlation : 79 [ 60:100 ]
Position X : 180.000
[ 0.000: 511.000]
Position Y : 250.000
[ 0.000: 483.000]
End
2.
3.
Make the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-20-(9)
Section 2-20
Pattern
2-20-2-1
Referencing Models
Use this operation to confirm registered models.
1.
Select the region number for the model to be checked.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
A list of selections will be displayed.
Region0
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
2.
Select Model Reference.
The model will be displayed at the position where registered.
Model reference
ESC:END
3.
Press the ESC Key to exit this screen.
The screen in (1.) will return.
2-20-(10)
Section 2-20
Pattern
2-20-2-2
Clearing Set Regions
The clear operation is performed separately for each region.
1.
Select the number of the region to be cleared.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
A list of selections will be displayed.
Region0
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Region will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The region will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-20-(11)
Section 2-20
Pattern
2-20-3
Setting Detailed Conditions
The search settings can be changed here. Change the conditions if the measurement results are unstable. Normally, these conditions can be left on the
default settings. After changing the settings, perform an object measurement
to check that measurement can still be performed correctly.
1.
Select Pattern.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Pattern
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
A list of settings selections will be displayed.
1.Pattern
Measurement conditions
Select region
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Detailed conditions.
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Verification
:OFF
Candidate level: [ 60]
End
3.
4.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-20-(12)
Section 2-20
Pattern
CHECK
The Controller performs the following 2-stage processing internally.
Detailed search
Measures again using the detailed search model
to compare to the images surrounding the
section with the highest correlation.
Rough search
Uses a rough search model
for all of the measurement
region.
Search
Section with the highest
correlation
Search
Detailed search model
Rough search model
Search Verification and Candidate Levels
Select whether or not to perform detailed searches on models at the candidate
level or higher. If model searches are unstable, set search verification to ON
and adjust the candidate level.
Setting item
Search verification
Candidate
level
Selection/
Setting range
Details
OFF*
Performs a detailed search only on the image with
the highest rough correlation within the measurement region.
ON
Performs a detailed search on all images at the candidate level or higher within the measurement
region. The measurements are more stable in comparison to when search verification is set to OFF.
Processing time, however, will be longer.
0 to 99 (60*)
Set the correlation value for detailed search target
images. Reduce the correlation level if the model
searches are unstable. A detailed search will be performed on all images above this level in the rough.
This setting item is enabled only when search verification is set to ON.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-20-(13)
Section 2-20
Pattern
2-20-4
Setting the Coordinate Mode
Select the type of coordinate values.
Before scroll:Output made using the coordinate values
before position displacement compensation.
After scroll*: Output made using the coordinate values
after position displacement compensation.
Coordinate mode
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for differences between
output coordinates.
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
ON:
Output made using coordinate values set using calibration.
OFF*: Output made using Camera coordinate values.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the coordinate mode is changed after the judgement conditions have been
set, the measurement results will change also. Change the judgement conditions to enable correct measurement.
1.
Select Pattern.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Pattern
2.
The settings selections will be displayed.
1.Pattern
Measurement conditions
Select region
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Coordinate mode.
The Coordinate Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
3.
4.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-20-(14)
Section 2-20
Pattern
2-20-5
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for pattern
inspections.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
NG 67ms
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which pattern inspection is
set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the two
screens.
Measurement Region and Position Display
NG 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Pattern
Judge : NG
The judgement result for this unit.
0
+
++
Inspection region displayed in OK color for OK
result and displayed in NG color for NG result.
(Figures drawn in OR mode are displayed in solid
lines and figures drawn in NOT mode are displayed
in dotted lines.)
Search coordinates
Position at or above candidate level. Displayed
only when search verification set to ON.
Region number
2-20-(15)
Section 2-20
Pattern
Measurement Value Display
The measurement values for each region are displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Pattern
Corr. Pos.X
0. 65
330.000
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NG 45ms
Pos.Y
250.000
NG regions are highlighted.
Region number
Use the SHIFT+Right Keys to switch
between regions 8 to 63, if these
regions are registered.
CHECK
If the font size is set to small, regions 0 to 31 will be shown together.
2-20-(16)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
2-21
QUEST Character Verification
The QUEST Character Verification processing item (QUEST OCV) is used to
recognize alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Expiration dates, lot numbers, and other characters can be found (in a process
called a “quest”) without being affected by variations or deformities.
Standards characters do not need to be registered because the shape characteristics of many character fonts are registered in the internal dictionary.
Example: Recognition and Verification of Printed Characters
The following character variations are handled by the QUEST OCV.
Size
Character
width
Blurring
Breaks
Line width
Italics
Performance
Item
Fonts
Details
Ink jet printers
Hitachi, Marconi, Domino, Linx, Willet,
Imaje, KGK (Kishu Giken Kogyo), EDM
Laser printers
Gothic, OCRA, OCRB, SEMI
Stamps
Gothic, Ming-style, OCRA, OCRB
Characters
,
Uppercase letters (A to Z), numerals (0 to 9), symbols (- . / :)
No. of characters
Up to 2 rows per region with 20 characters max. per row. Up to 4
regions can be set.
Background
Must be uniform in color.
Background cut and shading are available as optional functions.
2-21-(1)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
Operational Flow
1
page 2-21-(3)
Select measurement image.
page 2-21-(4)
2
Set the character extract conditions.
(As required)
1
2
Select character color
and rotation.
Removing
lighting
variations.
3
Set
binary
levels.
page 2-21-(15)
3
1
Set character
conditions.
4
Select
font.
2
(As required)
Define
symbol
position.
(As required)
3
4
5
6
Set the
number of
dilations.
Set the
noise
removal
conditions.
Only for auto
Only for auto
Only for auto
extraction mode extraction mode extraction mode
(As required)
(As required)
Set date.
Change
extract
method.
For dilated
extraction
4
For slender characters.
page 2-21-(20)
Set measurement
conditions.
page 2-21-(22)
5
1
Set region.
6
Select character extract
method.
2
Set
inspection
region.
3
Set
character
string.
Clear set
region.
page 2-21-(29)
page 2-21-(30)
Set judgement
conditions.
7
page 2-21-(32)
Check set
character string.
8
page 2-21-(33)
Measurement
screens
2-21-(2)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
2-21-1
Selecting Measurement Images
This section describes how to select an image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
1.
Select QUEST OCV.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.QUEST OCV
2.
KB-65762
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial QUEST OCV Screen will be displayed.
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Character conditions
Measurement conditions
Select region
Judgement conditions
Refer string
2.
Select Measurement image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
KB-65762
3.
4.
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
If Shading is set under Extract conditions (i.e., the shading level has been set
to 1 or higher), the image selected here will be dilated or eroded and stored at
the other image number. Set Change Filtering as the next processing item to
use this image for measurement for units after the unit for which QUEST OCV
was set. Then store the image stored in the image buffer to Image 0 or Image
1.
Example: Image 0 Selected as Measurement Image and Shading Set
0.Scn 0=SET=
Image
0
Image dilated or eroded.
Image
1
Dilated or eroded
image stored.
0.Camera image
1.QUEST OCV
2.Change filtering
3.Binary defect
4.
Image 1 used as measurement image.
Image read from image buffer again.
2-21-(3)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
2-21-2
Setting Extract Conditions
Operational Flow
1
Select
character
color and
rotation.
2
(As required)
Remove
lighting
variation.
3 (As required) 4
Set binary
level.
5
Change
extract
method.
Only for auto
extraction mode
For dilation
extraction
Set
number of
dilations.
6
Set noise
removal
conditions.
Only for auto
Only for auto
extraction mode extraction mode
STEP 1: Selecting Character Color and Rotation
Set the character color and whether or not to use rotation compensation.
Compensate image
Color
Rotation
Inclination
Binary
: Black
: OFF
: OFF
: Auto
Character color
Black*: Characters darker than background
White: Characters lighter than background
Total rotation of character string:
OFF*: No rotation compensation
ON: -15• to 15• compensation
End
Character inclination:
OFF*: No compensation
ON: -20• to 20• compensation
Select the method for setting binary levels for extraction.
Automatic*: Threshold is automatically set from density histogram for whole image.
Manual: Binary level is adjusted while referring to image.
Select manual when the characters are not extracted well using the automatic setting.
Refer to page 2-21-(6).
Note The rotation and inclination settings are enabled only for regions for which
automatic extraction is selected under Select region/Region/Mode.
1.
Select Extract conditions.
1.QUEST OCV
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Character conditions
Measurement
K B -conditions
65762
Select region
Judgement
0 1conditions
. 1 1. 0 7
Refer string
The settings selections will be displayed.
Compensate image
Shading
Binary
Extract method
Dilate level
Noise conditions
2-21-(4)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
2.
Select Compensate image.
The Compensate Image Settings Screen will be displayed.
Compensate image
: Black
: OFF
: OFF
: Auto
Color
Rotation
Inclination
Binary
End
3.
Change the settings.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 2: Removing Lighting Variations
Characters cannot be extracted accurately if lighting variations cause the characters to become illegible.
Original image
Shaded image
Image with shading removed
KB - 6 5 7 6 2
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
KB - 6 5 7 6 2
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
1.
Select Shading.
Extract conditions
Compensate image
Shading
Binary
B-65762
Extract K
method
Dilate level
Noise conditions
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
The Shading Levels Settings Screen will be displayed.
Shading
Level:[ 0]
OK
KB - 6 5 7 6 2
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
2-21-(5)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
2.
CHECK
Place the cursor on the level and use the Left and Right Keys to change
the level to between 0 and 10.
Right Key:
Increases the value by one.
Left Key:
Decreases the value by one.
The higher the level, the narrower the character lines in the image. Adjust
the level until the lines start to disappear. The higher the level, the longer
the processing time.
Shading
Level:[ 8]
OK
3.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting Binary Levels
The QUEST OCV processing item converts density images to binary images
and performs extraction on the binary images. The binary level set here is
enabled only when the binary method is set to manual. Adjust the binary level
so that the characters for verification are displayed as white pixels.
CHECK
When Binary Method Is Set to Automatic
Once measurement has been performed, enter this screen to display and
check the image that was converted to binary using the automatically set
binary levels.
1.
Select Binary.
Extract conditions
Compensate image
Shading
Binary
B-65762
Extract K
method
Dilate level
Noise conditions
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
2-21-(6)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
The settings screen for binary levels will be displayed.
Lower limit
Upper limit
Binary level
KB-657
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
62
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
:Move
:Change
Auto
The Controller automatically
sets the binary level.
2.
Reverse
Reverses dark and clear in
the display.
Move the cursor to the upper limit and use the Left and Right Keys to
change the value.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys:
Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
3.
CHECK
Use the same method to change the lower value.
Set the upper and lower limits so that the characters are displayed as white
pixels.
Binary level
KB-657
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
62
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
:Move
4.
:Change
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
It is also possible to set the binary level so that measurement is performed
only for an intermediate density range.
STEP 4: Changing Extract Methods
Change the extract method if the characters are not extracted accurately. Normally, the method can be left on the default setting. After changing the setting,
perform a measurement to check that the characters can still be extracted correctly.
CHECK
2-21-(7)
The extract method setting is enabled only for regions for which automatic
extraction is selected under Select region/Region/Mode.
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
1.
Select Extract method.
Extract conditions
Compensate image
Shading
Binary
B-65762
Extract K
method
Dilate level
Noise conditions
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
The Extract Method Settings Screen will be displayed.
Extract method
: Gap search
Method
OFF
Forced extraction:
:
From left
Direction
End
2.
3.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-21-(8)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
Guide to Setting Conditions
Start
Don’t read
characters on left
or right end?
Setting item
YES
Left edge
NO
Right edge
Extract direction: From
right
Characters made
of dotted or
broken lines.
Extract direction: From
left
YES
NO
Characters
touching each
other?
NO
YES
YES
Dot Gap < Gap
between characters
(See note.)
Part NO
Extract method: Dilate
extraction
All NO
No. of dilations: (Any
suitable number)
Even?
NO
Refer to
page 2-21-(11)
Forced extraction: ON
Forced extraction: ON
Forced extraction: OFF
Extract method: Gap search
YES
Try Fixed Region Mode.
Refer to page 2-21-(22)
Extract method: Even
extraction
Note Select the extract methods according to the relationship between the dot gap
and the gap between characters as follows:
• If there are only portions where the dot gap is larger than the gap between
characters, set dilation extraction.
Dot gap
Gap between
characters
2-21-(9)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
• If without exception the dot gap is larger than the gap between characters,
set even extraction.
Dot gap
Gap between
characters
In the following descriptions, the asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Extract Methods
Gap Search*
Finds the gap between characters and extracts the characters.
Select this method for most applications.
Extracted characters
Gap between characters
Dilate Extraction
With dot characters, the gap search may not extract correctly if the gap
between dots is greater than the gap between characters. In such cases,
select dilation extraction. The characters are dilated, the dot gaps joined, and
then the characters are extracted.
Set the number of dilations under Extract conditions/Dilate level.
SeeAlso
CHECK
Refer to page 2-21-(11).
Use in conjunction with forced extraction because the gap between characters
are also joined when the characters are dilated.
Characters dilated, dots joined,
and characters extracted.
2-21-(10)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
Even Extraction
The character string is divided into a specified number of characters and
extracted at even intervals.
3 characters
Region divided into 3 character
lots and extracted
Forced Extraction
If the set number of characters cannot be extracted, select whether or not to
use forced extraction. The settings are OFF* or ON.
The forced extraction function extracts characters that are joined due to printing errors or because they are inclined.
Forced extraction is enabled only when Gap search or Dilate extraction are
selected as the extract method.
Extract Direction
The direction setting is enabled only when Dilate extraction is selected as the
extract method. The direction choices are from left* or from right.
Character extraction is performed only until the set number of characters have
been extracted. If there are extra characters in the extracting region, these
characters can be ignored (excluded from the extracting process) by starting
extracting from the opposite direction.
Extract region
Expiration date 01. 11. 07
Direction: From right
No. of characters; 8
Extraction is performed on 8 characters starting from the right, so final “e” in
“Expiration date” is ignored.
STEP 5: Setting Number of Dilations
Set the number of dilations between 0 and 9 if dilate extraction has been chosen as the extract method.
1.
Select Dilate level.
Extract conditions
Compensate image
Shading
Binary
B-65762
Extract K
method
Dilate level
Noise conditions
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
2-21-(11)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
The Dilate Level Settings Screen will be displayed.
Dilate level
Level:[ 0 ]
OK
KB-65762
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
2.
Move the cursor to the level value and use the Left and Right Keys to
change the value (0 to 9).
Right Key: Increases the level by 1.
Left Key:
3.
Decreases the level by 1.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 6: Setting Noise Removal Conditions
Set the conditions for ignoring noise when executing character extraction.
CHECK
The noise removal settings are enabled only for regions for which automatic
extraction is selected under Select region/Region/Mode.
1.
Select Noise conditions.
Extract conditions
Compensate image
Shading
Binary
B-65762
Extract K
method
Dilate level
Noise conditions
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
The Noise Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Noise conditions
:
Leave
Horizontal noise : [
: [
Noise height
Vertical noise : [
: [
Noise width
End
End image
2.
Change the conditions.
3.
Select End.
5]
0]
2]
0]
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-21-(12)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
In the following descriptions, the asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
End Images
Select whether to leave or remove the area adjacent to the extracting region.
(Leave*, Erase (horizontal), Erase (vertical))
For Measurement Objects that Move Vertically
Select Erase (vertical).
If edge has shifted downwards
KB-65767
KB-65767
01.11.07
Edge section that overlaps
extraction region is removed
before extraction executed.
01.11.07
Extracting region
For Measurement Objects that Move Horizontally
Select Erase (horizontal).
If the edge has shifted to the right
KB-65767
KB-65767
01.11.07
01.11.07
Edge section that overlaps
extracting region is removed
before extraction executed.
Extracting region
For Measurement Objects That May Move Vertically or Horizontally
Only edges that overlap either vertically or horizontally can be removed. If the
edges overlap both vertically and horizontally, the characters cannot be
extracted correctly. If the possibility exists of overlap in both directions, adjust
the position and size of the extracting region so that only the characters to be
extracted fall within the extracting region.
Adjust size of extracting region.
Incorrect
2-21-(13)
Correct
KB-65767
KB-65767
01.11.07
01.11.07
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
In the following descriptions, the asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Horizontal Noise and Noise Height
To extract lines, a projected image in the horizontal direction must be created.
Set the size to be removed as noise from this projected image.
Projected image in horizontal direction
Noise under the noise height will be
removed. (0 to 484 (0*))
Noise smaller than the horizontal noise will
be removed. (0 to 512 (5*))
Noise is removed.
Vertical Noise and Noise Width
To extract characters in an image after lines have been extracted, a projected
image must be created in the vertical direction.
Set the size to be removed as noise from this projected image.
Noise is removed.
Projected image in
vertical direction
Noise smaller than the vertical noise will be
removed. (0 to 484 (2*))
Noise under the noise width will be
removed. (0 to 512 (0*))
2-21-(14)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
2-21-3
Setting Character Conditions
Operational Flow
(As required)
1
2
Select font.
Define
symbol
position.
3
(As required)
Set date.
4 (As required)
For slender
characters.
STEP 1: Selecting Fonts
Select the font for the characters to be verified.
If the font is unknown, change IJP font, laser font, and stamp font settings to
All.
Printer type:
IJP* (ink jet printer), Laser (laser printer), or stamp
Font
Printer
IJP font
Laser font
Stamp font
:
:
:
:
IJP
All
All
All
Ink jet printer font sizes and manufacturer:
All*, 5 dot (Common), 5 dot (Hitachi), 5 dot (Marconi), 5
dot (Domino), 5 dot (Linx), 5 dot (Willet), 5 dot (Imaje), 5
dot (KGK (see note))
7 dot (Common), 7 dot (Hitachi), 7 dot (Marconi), 7 dot
(Domino), 7 dot (Linx), 7 dot (Willet), 7 dot (Imaje), 7 dot
(KGK (see note)), 7 dot (EDM)
9 to 12 dot, Over 14 dot.
End
Laser printer fonts:
All*, Gothic, OCRA, OCRB, SEMI
Stamp fonts:
All*, Gothic, Ming-style, OCRA, OCRB
Note: KGK: Kishu Giken Kogyo
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-21-(15)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
1.
Select Character conditions.
1.QUEST OCV
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Character conditions
Measurement
K B -conditions
65762
Select region
Judgement
0 1conditions
. 1 1. 0 7
Refer string
The settings selections will be displayed.
Font
Symbol
Date
Slender character
2.
Select Font.
The Font Settings Screen will be displayed.
Font
Printer
IJP font
Laser font
Stamp font
:
:
:
:
IJP
All
All
All
End
3.
Set the font conditions.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 2: Defining Symbol Positions
The meanings of the comma ( , ), dash (-), and period (.) differ depending on
their position. If the character string to be verified contains any of these symbols, the correct position of the whole character string must be set.
The lowest position in the character string is 100 and the highest position is 0.
Set the range within these limits for the symbols to be evaluated.
0
100
0
100
2000 11 1
70 to 100
40 to 70
2-21-(16)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
If the character string contains asterisks (*), underscores (_), or question
marks (?), set the reference value for the density deviation to evaluate these
symbols as spaces or symbols.
,
Comma ( ) position
0% to 100% (0:30*)
Symbol
,
.
:
:
:
:
[ 0: 30]%
[ 30: 70]%
[ 70:100]%
[10]tone
Dash (-) position:
0% to 100% (30:70*)
End
Period (.) position:
0% to 100% (70:100*)
Density deviation to evaluate asterisks (*),
underscores (_), and question marks (?) in
character strings as spaces or symbols:
0 to 127 (10*)
If the density deviation is lower than the
setting, it will be evaluated as a space.
The measurement value for density deviation can be checked under the
detailed results display on the measurement screen.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Symbol.
Character conditions
Font
Symbol
Date
B-6
SlenderK
character
5762
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
The Symbol Settings Screen will be displayed.
Symbol
,
.
:
:
:
:
[ 0: 30]%
[ 30: 70]%
[ 70:100]%
[10]tone
End
2.
Set the range for each symbol to be recognized.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-21-(17)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
STEP 3: Setting Dates
The Controller has a built in calendar. Character strings that are inspected in
accordance with this calendar can be updated automatically. The expiration
date from the production date can be set so that the expiration date can be
automatically updated.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,216\VWHP6HWWLQJV for information on setting the calendar.
Expiration date:
Year: 0 to 99 (0*)
Month: 0 to 99 (0*)
Day: 0 to 999 (0*)
Date
Term Year : [ 0]Y
Term Month : [ 0]M
Term Day : [ 0]D
Auto update : ON
0 suppress : OFF
Select whether or not to
automatically update inspection
dates based on built-in calendar.
(ON*, OFF)
Select whether or not to suppress “0”
before single digit months and days.
(OFF*, ON)
Example: Select OFF for “3” display.
Select ON for “03” display.
End
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Date.
Character conditions
Font
Symbol
Date
B-6
SlenderK
character
5762
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
The Date Settings Screen will be displayed.
Date
Term Year : [ 0]Y
Term Month : [ 0]M
Term Day : [ 0]D
Auto update : ON
0 suppress : OFF
End
2.
3.
Set the date conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-21-(18)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
STEP 4: Slender Characters
The frame size of the extracted characters is checked during QUEST character verification and if the horizontal to vertical aspect ratio is greater than the
set value, the verification will be performed using the “1”, “I”, “J”, “:”, and “/” dictionary models only.
If the font itself is slender, characters other than those listed above may be
above the set aspect ratio and verification will not, therefore, be performed correctly. Set this value, the guide for the aspect ratio, to a higher value for slender
fonts.
/
Aspect ratio (height  width)
Height
Width
Example:
2
40 ÷ 10 = 4
At the default aspect ratio setting of 3.0, the
slender character shown to the left will not be
verified against the “2” in the dictionary model.
Set the aspect ratio to a value higher than 4.
40
10
1.
Select Slender character.
Character conditions
Font
Symbol
Date
B-6
SlenderK
character
5762
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
The Slender Character Settings Screen will be displayed.
Slender character
Aspect ratio(Height/Width):
:
[ 3.0]
End
2.
Set the aspect ratio.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-21-(19)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
2-21-4
Setting Measurement Conditions
Change the conditions as required if the character verification is unstable or to
increase processing speed.
Select whether or not to distinguish between similar characters. (ON*, OFF)
Poor printing quality can cause an 8 to be read as a B. Characters like these are called similar characters. If only
one of the matching characters will exist, Matching similarity can be turned OFF to eliminate discrepancies in
verification results.
There are five sets of similar characters for the this function: B/8, O/D, 0/D, S/5, and I/1.
Example: Character string includes “8”
OFF: 8 will not be matched to the dictionary model for B, its similar character.
ON: Matching will be performed for both the dictionary models 8 and B and the one with the highest similarity
will be the 1st candidate.
Measurement conditions
Matching similarity :
ON
: Normal
Speed
Bar line character :
:
Ring character
0
Output results
: OFF
End
Select whether or not to decrease the number of matching
models and increase execution speed.
Normal*: Matching performed against all dictionary models.
High speed: No matching against dictionary models with
vastly different shapes.
Quickest: Matching only against dictionary model for target
character.
Note: This speed setting is ignored if “?” is set for the
characters (OCR mode).
If ? has been set in the character setting (OCR Mode),
select whether bar line characters will be evaluated as
an alphabet “l” or number “1”.
If ? has been set in the character setting (OCR Mode),
select whether ring characters will be evaluated as an
alphabet “O” or number “0”. (The slash zero, Ø, will be
read as the number 0 regardless of this setting.)
Select whether or not to output to a serial port the 1st candidate character strings. (OFF*, ON)
If QUEST verification results are output using the results output processing items, the character code is output.
If, however, output result is set to ON here, the character string itself will be output to the serial port.
Output format
<unit number>, <region number>, <line number>, <number of characters>, <1st candidate character
string>delimiter.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Measurement conditions.
1.QUEST OCV
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Character conditions
Measurement
K B -conditions
65762
Select region
Judgement
0 1conditions
. 1 1. 0 7
Refer string
2-21-(20)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Matching similarity :
ON
: Normal
Speed
Bar line character :
:
Ring character
0
Output results
: OFF
End
2.
3.
Make the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-21-(21)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
2-21-5
Setting Regions
Operational Flow
1
2
Select
character
extract
mode.
Set
inspection
region.
3
Set
character
string.
STEP 1: Selecting Character Extraction Mode
There are two character extraction modes: The Auto Extraction Mode, where
characters within the specified region are extracted automatically, and the
Fixed Region Mode, where regions are set with fixed positions for each character.
Up to 4 regions can be set. Select the extract mode for each region.
Mode
Mode:
Auto extraction
Type of 1st line :
Not specifying
Type of 2nd line :
Not specifying
End
Dictionary setting:
Specifying: Numerals are matched only with the
numeral dictionary models and letters are matched
only with the alphabet dictionary models.
Not specifying*: Characters are matched against all
dictionary models.
Auto Extraction
KB-657 6
01.11.07
Inspection region
Characters are extracted automatically from this region.
Two lines of up to 20 characters per line can be extracted.
Fixed region
KB - 6 5 7 6 2
Inspection region
The inspection region is set for each character. Up to 20 characters
can be set.
Verification can be performed to check if a particular character is at
a particular position.
2-21-(22)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
1.
Select Select region.
1.QUEST OCV
Measurement image
Extract conditionsconditions
Character conditions
Measurement
K B -conditions
65762
Select region
Judgement
0 1conditions
. 1 1. 0 7
Refer string
A list of region numbers will be displayed.
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
2.
Select a region number.
A list of operation selections will be displayed.
Mode
Inspected region
Set string
Clear
3.
Select Mode.
The screen for specifying the mode will be displayed.
Mode
Mode:
Auto extraction
Type of 1st line :
Not specifying
Type of 2nd line :
Not specifying
End
4.
5.
Select the mode.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
STEP 2: Setting Inspection Regions
When Automatic Extraction Mode Is Selected
Draw one region for extracting characters.
2-21-(23)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
1.
Select Inspected region.
Region0
Mode
Inspected region
Set string
Clear K B - 6
5762
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
An arrow cursor will appear.
Inspected region
412,190
KB-65762
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
2.
Draw a rectangular inspected region.
Specify the upper left and lower right coordinates.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
CHECK
SeeAlso
Confirms the settings.
Draw the region so that only the target characters fall within the region. Use
End Image to remove anything other than the target characters that overlap either vertically or horizontally on the inspection region.
Refer to page 2-21-(13).
Only edges that overlap either vertically or horizontally can be removed. If
the edges overlap both vertically and horizontally, the characters cannot be
extracted correctly. If the edges overlap in both directions, adjust the position and size of the extracting region so that only the characters to be extracted fall within the extracting region.
Adjust size of extracting region.
Incorrect
Correct
KB-65767
KB-65767
01.11.07
01.11.07
When the bottom right coordinates have been set, the screen in (1.) will return.
2-21-(24)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
When Fixed Region Mode Is Selected
Draw a region for each character. Up to 20 regions can be drawn.
1.
Select Inspected region.
Region0
Mode
Inspected region
Set string
Clear K B - 6
5 7 6 2
An arrow cursor will appear.
[ 0]
52,190
Inspected region
K B - 6 5 7 6 2
2.
Draw a rectangular search region.
Specify the upper left and lower right coordinates.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys: Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the settings.
When the bottom right coordinates have been set, a confirmation message
will appear.
More region will be added.
Yes
No
3.
Select Yes.
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to draw the remaining regions. Up to 20 regions can
be drawn.
Inspected region
[ 7]
412,190
K B - 6 5 7 6 2
2-21-(25)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
5.
When enough regions have been drawn, select No from the confirmation
message.
More region will be added.
Yes
No
The screen in (1.) will return.
Adding, Correcting, and Deleting Fixed Regions
1. Select Inspected region.
Region0
Mode
Inspected region
Set string
Clear K B - 6
5 7 6 2
An edit menu will be displayed.
Add
Correct
Delete
CHECK
If Add is selected, the screen for drawing inspection regions will be displayed. Repeat the steps outlined above to add inspection regions.
2.
Select Correct or Delete.
The screen for selecting regions will be displayed.
Inspected region
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
3.
0
1
2
3K
4
5
6
7
B - 6 5 7 6 2
Select the number of the region to be edited.
Correct: The screen for correcting the selected region will be displayed.
Delete: A confirmation message will be displayed.
STEP 3: Setting Characters Strings
Register the correct character string that will be the reference for verification.
2-21-(26)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
Character strings can be set as outlined below.
Input string
[
]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B CDE
F GH I J K L MN OP QRS T
- . : /
? U VWX Y Z
mYY
mYYYY
mHH
mMM
mDD
vYY
vYYYY
vHH
vMM
vDD
BS
DEL
: Evaluated (OK if detected)
_: Evaluated (OK if not detected)
?: Recognized by degree of similarity of
1st and 2nd candidates, without
character being specified (OCR mode).
OK
Line starting with “m”:
Manufacturing date
Line starting with “v”:
Expiration (valid) date
2-digit year
YY
YYYY 4-digit year
HH
Japanese year
(00 to 99)
MM
DD
1.
Characters in this group will be set as is.
Month (00 to 12)
Day (00 to 31)
Select Set string.
Region0
Mode
Inspected region
Set string
Clear K B - 6
5762
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
The Set String Settings Screen will be displayed.
Set string
1st line
[
2nd line
[
]
]
End
2.
2-21-(27)
Place the cursor in the square brackets for the character string and press
the ENT Key.
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
The software keyboard will be displayed.
Input string
[
]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B CDE
F GH I J K L MN OP QRS T
- . : /
? U VWX Y Z
3.
mYY
mYYYY
mHH
mMM
mDD
vYY
vYYYY
vHH
vMM
vDD
BS
DEL
OK
Set up to 20 characters for the character string.
The “m” and “v” of lines starting with these characters will not be counted
in the number of characters.
E.g., “mYY” will be counted as 2 characters.
4.
Select OK.
The screen in (1.) will return.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the character string for the second line.
Set string
1st line
[ KB-65762
2nd line
[
]
]
End
5.
CHECK
Select End.
For fixed region extraction, set all of the characters under 1st line, even if
the input runs over multiple lines. The characters will appear in the order
that the regions were drawn.
Example: 1st line: [KB656
]
K B
6 5 6
The character strings will be set and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-21-(28)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
Clearing Set Regions
1.
Select Select region.
1.QUEST OCV
Measurement image
Extract conditionsconditions
Character conditions
Measurement
K B -conditions
65762
Select region
Judgement
0 1conditions
. 1 1. 0 7
Refer string
A list of region numbers will be displayed.
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
2.
Select the number of the region to be cleared.
The operation selections will be displayed.
Mode
Inspected region
Set string
Clear
3.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Setting conditions
will be cleared.
Execute
4.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The region will be cleared and the screen in (2.) will return.
2-21-(29)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
2-21-6
Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the conditions for judging the 1st candidate character.
There are two types of judgement conditions: Common judgement and individual judgement. In normal circumstances, adjust the common judgement conditions. Set the individual judgement conditions to perform strict or lenient
judgement for a particular character.
Common Judgement Conditions
Use this function to set common judgement conditions for all models.
Common judgement
OK value (OK if at or above this value)
Similarity level for 1st candidate (0 to 100 (60*))
Difference level between 1st and 2nd candidates
(0 to 100 (10*))
Similarity level : [ 60]
Differential level : [ 10]
End
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
1.QUEST OCV
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Character conditions
Measurement
K B -conditions
65762
Select region
Judgement
0 1conditions
. 1 1. 0 7
Refer string
The screen for selecting common or individual judgement will be displayed.
Common judgement
Individual judgement
2.
Select Common judgement.
The Common Judgement Settings Screen will be displayed.
Common judgement
Similarity level : [ 60]
Differential level : [ 10]
End
3.
Set the conditions.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-21-(30)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
Individual Judgement Conditions
Use this function to set the similarity level for each model.
Use individual judgement to perform particularly strict or lenient inspections of
a particular character.
Target character
(0 to 9, A to Z, colon (:), forward
slash (/))
Individual judgement
0: [ -1]
1: [ -1]
2: [ -1]
3: [ -1]
4: [ -1]
5: [ -1]
6: [ -1]
7: [ -1]
Similarity level for OK result for 1st
candidate (-1*, 0 to 100)
-1: Judged based on common
judgement conditions.
End
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
1.QUEST OCV
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Character conditions
Measurement
K B -conditions
65762
Select region
Judgement
0 1conditions
. 1 1. 0 7
Refer string
The common and individual judgement selections will be displayed.
Common judgement
Individual judgement
2.
Select Individual judgement.
The Individual Judgement Settings Screen will be displayed.
Individual judgement
0: [ -1]
1: [ -1]
2: [ -1]
3: [ -1]
4: [ -1]
5: [ -1]
6: [ -1]
7: [ -1]
End
3.
Set the judgement conditions.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-21-(31)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
2-21-7
Checking Set Character Strings
Use this function to check what characters have been set as the reference for
verification.
1.
Select Refer string.
1.QUEST OCV
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Character conditions
Measurement
K B -conditions
65762
Select region
Judgement
0 1conditions
. 1 1. 0 7
Refer string
The characters strings set for each region will be displayed.
Refer string
Region0 : KB-65762
01.11.07
Region1:
Region2 :
Region3 :
ESC:END
2.
Press the ESC Key to close this screen.
The screen in (1.) will return.
2-21-(32)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
2-21-8
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for QUEST
character verification.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
NG 67ms
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Image 0 Freeze
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which QUEST character
verification is set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the three
screens.
Measurement Regions
The judgement result for this unit, the set regions, and the extraction frame for
each character will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.QUEST OCV
OK 45ms
47 ms
Judge : OK
0
KB - 6 5 7 6 2
0 1 . 1 1. 0 7
Region number
2-21-(33)
Judgement result for this unit
Region
The extraction frames will be displayed in
dotted lines for automatic extraction
mode.
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
Set Character Strings
A list of character strings set as the reference for verification will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.QUEST OCV
Region0: KB-65762
01.11.07
Region1:
OK 45ms
Characters displayed in OK color for
OK result and displayed in NG color
for NG result
Region2:
Region3:
2-21-(34)
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
Measurement Values for Each Region
The detailed measurement results for each region will be displayed.
Press the SHIFT+ Right or Left Keys to display the following four screens in
order: Similarity to set characters; similarity to 1st candidate; similarity to 2nd
candidate; and density deviation.
Similarity to set characters
1st line
OK 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.QUEST OCV
Region0 String
K B - 6 5 ? ? ?
82 79 100 88 73 99 73 86
Set characters
Similarity
2nd line
. 1 1 . 0 7
93 83 100 73 86 100 86 93
Set characters
Similarity
Similarity to 1st candidate
OK 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.QUEST OCV
Region0 1st candidate
K B - 6 5 7 6 2
82 79 100 88 73 99 73 86
1st candidate
Similarity
. 1 1 . 0 7
100 100 100 73 86 100 86 93
1st candidate
Similarity
Similarity to 2nd candidate
OK 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.QUEST OCV
Region0 2nd candidate
R D
0 2 9 0 3
12 23
15 14 8 12 21
.
0
2-21-(35)
0
7 7
11 12
.
6 1
13 23
2nd candidate
Similarity
2nd candidate
Similarity
Section 2-21
QUEST Character Verification
Density deviation (Only sections with , _, and ?
characters will be displayed.)
OK 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.QUEST OCV
Region0 Density deviation
K B - 6 5 ? ? ?
63 52 67
.
1
1
.
0
68 69
7
Set character
Density deviation
Set character
Density deviation
To next region number
CHECK
If the font size is set to small, regions 0 to 3 will be shown together.
2-21-(36)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
2-22
Rotation Positioning
The Rotation Positioning processing item detects the angle of inclination and
the position of the measurement object.
Register a reference image pattern as the model.
Model
A
The Controller detects the angle of inclination of the input image compared to
the reference image (model).
A
Angle
Example: Recognition of the position and angle of parts.
2-22-(1)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
Operational Flow
1
page 2-22-(3)
Set measurement
conditions.
2
page 2-22-(5)
Set measurement
region.
(As required)
1
2
Register
model.
Change
search
coordinates.
3
Set search
region.
4
Set
judgement
conditions.
Reference
model.
page 2-22-(16)
Clear set
region.
page 2-22-(17)
3
(As required) page 2-13-(11)
Change
detailed
conditions.
4
page 2-22-(20)
Set
coordinate
mode.
5
page 2-22-(21)
Measurement
screens
CHECK
Rotation positioning uses the image stored at Image 0 as the measurement
image; there is no menu for selecting the measurement image.
2-22-(2)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
2-22-1
Changing Measurement Conditions
Set the search conditions.
The Controller searches using a model that rotates in skipping angle (*2)
increments within the rotation range (*1).
The settings are used for all measurement regions.
Rotation range :
Skipping angle :
Accuracy
:
*1
*2
None
5
Normal
End
Setting item
Selections
Rotation range None*
– 2•
– 5•
– 8•
– 10•
– 15•
– 30•
– 45•
– 60•
– 90•
Details
Select the range for
model rotation.
Example: Rotation range: – 30•, Skipping angle: 15•
Creates a model that rotates 15• at a time between
-30• and 30•.
(Coordinate system: Left-hand)
Image
+30°
+15°
0°
−15°
−30°
All angles
Skipping angle 1•
10•
2•
15•
3•
20•
5• * 30•
6•
Accuracy
Precise
Select the skipping
angle for the model.
The smaller the
angle, the more precise the search. Processing time,
however, will be
longer.
Finds the measurement value in decimal point units. However, the processing
time is longer.
Position X and position Y: Subpixel units
Angle: 0.01• units.
Normal*
Finds the measurement value in integers.
Position X and position Y: Pixel units
Angle: 1• units.
CHECK
Coordinates and Rotation Angle Direction
Depending on whether a right-hand or left-hand coordinate system has
been set, the rotation angle direction changes. Check the rotation angle direction before making rotation search settings.
• When Rotation positioning/Coordinate mode/Calibration is set to OFF, the
coordinate system becomes a left-hand system.
• When Rotation positioning/Coordinate mode/Calibration is set to ON, the
coordinate system is determined by the Calibration setting.
Left-handed system
-
+
2-22-(3)
Right-handed system
+
-
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
SeeAlso
Refer to ,QSXWWLQJ&DPHUD,PDJHV for information on checking and changing the coordinate system.
1.
Select Rotate position.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Rotate position
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The settings selections will be displayed.
1.Rotate position
Measurement conditions
Select region
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
A
2.
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Rotation range :
Skipping angle :
Accuracy
:
None
5
Normal
End
3.
Change the settings.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-22-(4)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
2-22-2
Setting Measurement Regions
Up to 8 measurement regions can be set.
1
Register
model.
2
(As required)
Change
search
coordinates.
3
Set search
region.
4
Set
judgement
conditions.
STEP 1: Registering a Model
The area of the image to be inspected is registered as a model.
When a model is registered, that orientation becomes 0° and the center position of the model is registered as the search coordinates. When several figures
have been combined in the drawing, the center coordinates of the circumscribing rectangle become the search coordinates.
HELP
CHECK
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for information on models.
Models can be created by combining up to 3 different figures. Regions with difficult shapes can be drawn and sections not to be measured can be left out of
the region by combining different figures.
1.
Select Rotate position.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Rotate position
2.
The settings selections will be displayed.
1.Rotate position
Measurement conditions
Select region
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
A
2.
Select Select region.
The region numbers will be displayed.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
2-22-(5)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
3.
Select the region number.
The operation selections will be displayed.
Region0
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
A
4.
Select Model registration.
The Model Registration Screen will be displayed.
Model registration
New
End
Box
EllipseO R
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
A
5.
Select New.
6.
Select the desired figure.
7.
Select the desired drawing mode (OR/NOT).
An arrow cursor will appear.
Up to three figures (0, 1, and 2)
can be drawn.
[0]
329,300
Model registration
A
8.
Draw the region to be registered as the model with the selected figure.
The figure will be registered.
Add will not be displayed after
3 figures have been drawn.
Model registration
Add
Figure0
End
A
9.
If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
2-22-(6)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
10. Repeat steps 6 to 8 as necessary to create the desired shape.
11. After drawing is completed, select End.
The measurement region will be registered and the screen in (3.) will return.
The search coordinates (display cursor) and model region will be displayed.
CHECK
Figures drawn using OR mode are displayed with solid lines and figures
drawn using NOT mode are displayed with dotted lines.
Figure 1 (drawn using OR)
Figure 2 (drawn using NOT)
Figure 3 (drawn using OR)
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1. In the screen for step 8 above, select the figure to be changed or cleared
using the Up and Down Keys and press the ENT Key.
Figure 0 Figure 1
Model registration
Add
Figure0
Figure1
End
A
The figure for the figure number selected using the cursor will be displayed
with solid lines. The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed.
Correct
Clear
2.
Select either Correct or Clear and press the ENT Key.
If Correct is selected, the cursor will be displayed. Correct the size and position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
CHECK
To re-register models, repeat from step 4 under Step 1: Registering Models.
STEP 2: Changing the Search Coordinates
Use this function to change the search coordinates only.
When a model is registered, the center position of the model is registered as
the search coordinates. However, this function can be used to register a point
other than the center of the model as the search coordinates.
CHECK
2-22-(7)
The search coordinates are used for the point output as the measurement
value. The search coordinates can be changed to any point inside the model.
If multiple figures have been combined to create the model, the search coordinates will be limited to within the circumscribing rectangle.
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
Changing the Point Output as the Measurement Value
Search coordinate
changed to a suitable position
(center of model is the default)
Model
CHECK
If the model is re-registered, the search coordinates are changed to the center
position of the new model.
There are 3 registration methods available: Manual, gravity, and edge.
Registration
method
Details
Manual
Any position inside the model rectangle can be registered.
Gravity
The image is converted to binary and the center of gravity of the
white pixel area in the model rectangle is registered as the search
coordinates.
Select this method to use the center of gravity of the measurement object as the search coordinates.
Search coordinates
(center of gravity)
Edge
The edge position is used for registration. This method can be
used if the measurement object is rectangular.
Select this method to register the edge or corner of the measurement object as the search coordinates.
Search coordinates
(cross point of lines)
Manual
Any position in the model rectangle can be specified (in pixel units) as the
search coordinates.
1.
Select Search coordinates.
Region0
Model registrationn
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
A
2-22-(8)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
The registration selections will be displayed.
Search coordinate
Manual
Gravity
Edge
2.
A
Select Manual.
A cursor will appear at the center of the model.
Search coordinates.
Manual
280,251
A
3.
Use the Up/Down/Left/Right Keys to change the position if required.
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The search coordinates will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Gravity
The image will be converted to binary and the center of gravity of the white
pixel area in the model rectangle will be set as the search coordinates.
1.
Select Search coordinate.
Region0
Model registrationn
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
2-22-(9)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
The registration selections will be displayed.
Search coordinate
Manual
Gravity
Edge
2.
Select Gravity.
The Binary Level Settings Screen will be displayed.
Lower limit
Upper limit
Binary level
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
:Move
:Change
Auto
The Controller automatically
determines binary level.
3.
Reverse
Reverses black
and white display
Move the cursor to the upper limit and use the Left and Right Keys to
change the value.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
4.
CHECK
Use the same method to change the lower value.
Set the upper and lower limits to make the measurement object white pixels.
Binary level
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
:Move
5.
:Change
Select OK.
The search coordinates will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
A display cursor will appear at the center of gravity (search coordinates).
2-22-(10)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
CHECK
It is also possible to set the binary level so that measurement is performed
only for an intermediate density range.
Edge
The edge registration method can be used when the measurement object is
rectangular.
Draw 4 regions. One edge is detected from each region and that becomes the
reference position.
Region 2
Region 3
Line connecting edge points
found for regions 0 and 1.
Search coordinates (cross point of lines)
Cross point not registered as reference
position if outside the model region.
Region 0
1.
Region 1
Line connecting edge points
found for regions 2 and 3.
Setting Edge Detection Conditions
Set the direction to search for the 4 edges and the density change as the
measurement conditions.
Edge detection direction: ‘, “, ’, ”.
Edge
Measurement
conditions
Region0 direction
:
Region0
Region0 Color
: Light
Region1
Region1 direction :
Region2
Region1 Color
: Light
Region3
Region2 direction :
End
Region2 Color
: Light
Region3 direction :
Region3 Color
: Light
End
Dark
Dark
Density change:
Light “ dark, dark “ light.
Dark
Dark
Example: Finding this position in region 0.
Direction: ’
Color: Light “ dark
2-22-(11)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
a)
Select Search coordinate.
Region0
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
The registration selections will be displayed.
Search coordinate
Manual
Gravity
Edge
b)
Select Edge.
The Edge Measurement Screen will be displayed.
Edge
Measurement conditions
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
End
c)
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Edge
Measurement
conditions
Region0 direction
Region0
Region0 Color
Light
Region1
Region1 direction
Region2
Region1 Color
Light
Region3
Region2 direction
End
Region2 Color
Light
Region3 direction
Region3 Color
Light
End
d)
Set the conditions.
e)
Select End.
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
The settings will be registered and the screen in (b.) will return.
2.
Drawing Measurement Regions
Draw 4 regions to include all edges.
a)
Select Region 0.
2-22-(12)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
The region at the cursor position will be displayed in solid lines. The
model will also be displayed in solid lines.
Edge
Measurement conditions
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
End
Region 0
Model
The screen for drawing regions will be displayed.
Edge
24,182
+
b)
Draw a box-shaped region.
The region will be registered.
Edge
Measurement conditions
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
End
c)
Repeat steps (a) and (b) until the 4 regions are drawn.
d)
Once the 4 regions have been drawn, select End.
The search coordinates will be registered.
2-22-(13)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
STEP 3: Setting Search Regions
Set the region to search for the model. The whole region of the input image
can be searched. Accuracy improved, however, by limiting the search region.
1.
Select Search region.
Region0
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
A
An arrow cursor will appear.
The model will be displayed with solid lines.
Model
Search region
80,66
A
2.
CHECK
Draw a box-shaped search region.
The only figure that can be drawn is a box.
The search region will be set and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 4: Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the judgement conditions for the correlation between the measurement
object and the models, the position (X, Y) where the object was detected, and
the angle.
Judgement conditions
Correlation : 79 [ 60 : 100 ]
Position X : 180.000
[
0.000 : 511.000]
Position Y : 250.000
[
0.000 : 483.000]
Angle
: 15.000
[ -180.000 : 180.000]
End
Range for an OK judgement
Correlation range (0 to 100)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the X direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the Y direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of angles for the measurement object
(-360.000 to 360.000)
(However, the measurement value will be
output in the range -180.000 to 180.000.)
: Measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as references for setting upper and lower limits.
2-22-(14)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
CHECK
Correlation
When OK condition for correlation is set between 60 and 100:
Image 0 Image 1 Image 2 Image 3
Correlation: 96
Judgement: OK
CHECK
55
NG
50
NG
65
OK
Position X and Position Y
Movement range in X direction
A
Movement range in Y direction
A
OK NG
CHECK
Angle
Two values between -360• and 360• can be set. The value on the right, however, must be higher than the value on the left.
To set region A in the following diagram to give an OK result:
190°
or
-170°
-
[ 170 :
190]
OK
[-190 : -170]
OK
[ 170 : -170]
Value on right is
smaller.
[-170 :
Inside B range
0°
A
170°
or
-190°
B Angle
+
170]
Same result
obtained.
The measurement results are output in the range -180• to 180•, so the angle
190• will be output as -170•.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Region0
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
A
2-22-(15)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Correlation : 79 [ 60 : 100 ]
PositionX : 180.000
[
0.000 : 511.000]
PositionY : 50.000
[
0.000 : 483.000]
Angle
: 15.000
[ -180.000 : 180.000]
End
2.
3.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-22-2-1
Referencing Models
Use this operation to display and confirm registered models.
1.
Select the region number for the model to be checked.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
The operation selections will be displayed.
Region0
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
A
2-22-(16)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
2.
Select Model reference.
The model will be displayed at the registered position.
Model reference
A
ESC:End
3.
Press the ESC Key to close this screen.
The screen in (1.) will return.
2-22-2-2
Clearing Set Regions
The clear operation is performed separately for each region.
1.
Select the number of the region to be cleared.
Select region
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
Region4
Region5
Region6
Region7
A list of selections will be displayed.
Region0
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Model reference
Clear
A
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Region will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The region will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-22-(17)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
2-22-3
Changing Detailed Conditions
Use this operation to change the search-related settings. Change the conditions if the measurement results are unstable. Normally, however, the default
settings are sufficient.
Once the settings have been changed, check that actual measurement is performed correctly.
1.
Select Rotate position.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Rotate position
2.
A list of settings selections will be displayed.
1.Rotate position
Measurement conditions
Select region
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
A
2.
Select Detailed conditions.
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
: OFF
Verification
Candidate level: [ 60]
End
3.
4.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-22-(18)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
CHECK
The Controller performs the following 2-stage processing internally.
Rough search
Searches all of the measurement
region using the rough search model.
Detailed search
Measures again using the detailed search model
to compare to the images surrounding the section
with the highest correlation.
Search
Section with the highest
correlation
Search
Detailed search model
Rough search model
Search Verification and Candidate Levels
Select whether or not to perform detailed searches on models at the candidate
level or higher. If model searches are unstable, set search verification to ON
and adjust the candidate level.
Setting item
Search verification
Candidate
level
Selection/
Setting range
Details
OFF*
Performs a detailed search only on the image with
the highest rough correlation within the measurement region.
ON
Performs a detailed search on all images at the candidate level or higher within the measurement
region. The measurements are more stable in comparison to when search verification is set to OFF.
Processing time, however, will be longer.
0 to 99 (60*)
Set the correlation value for detailed search target
images. Reduce the correlation level if the model
searches are unstable. A detailed search will be performed on all images above this level in the rough.
This setting item is enabled only when search verification is set to ON.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-22-(19)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
2-22-4
Setting the Coordinate Mode
Select the type of coordinate values.
Before scroll:Output made using the coordinate values
before position displacement compensation.
After scroll*: Output made using the coordinate values
after position displacement compensation.
Coordinate mode
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for differences between
output coordinates.
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
ON:
Output made using coordinate values set using calibration.
OFF*: Output made using Camera coordinate values.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the coordinate mode is changed after the judgement conditions have been
set, the measurement results will change also. Change the judgement conditions to enable correct measurement.
1.
Select Rotate position.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Rotate position
2.
The settings selections will be displayed.
1.Rotate position
Measurement conditions
Select region
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
A
2.
Select Coordinate mode.
The Coordinate Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
3.
Make the settings for each item.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-22-(20)
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
2-22-5
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for rotation
positioning.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
NG 67ms
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Image 0 Freeze
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which rotation positioning is
set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the three
screens.
Judgement Result
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Rotate position
NG 45ms
Judgement result for this unit
Judge : NG
0
A
Region number
2-22-(21)
Position at or above candidate level.
Displayed only when search verification
set to ON.
Inspection region displayed in OK color
for OK result and displayed in NG color
for NG result.
(Figures drawn in OR mode are displayed
in solid lines and figures drawn in NOT
mode are displayed in dotted lines.)
Search coordinates
Section 2-22
Rotation Positioning
Position and Angle
A list of search positions and angles for each region will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
NG 45ms
1.Rotate position
Pos.X
Pos.Y
Angle
125.251
0.000
0.
90.785
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NG regions are highlighted.
A
Region number
CHECK
If the font size is set to small, the position and angle and correlation screens
will be shown together.
If the font size is set to normal, these two screens will be displayed consecutively.
Correlation
A list of correlations for each region will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.Rotate position
Corr.
0.
90
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NG 45ms
NG regions are highlighted.
A
Region number
2-22-(22)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
2-23
ECM Search
The Edge Code Model (ECM) Search processing item finds the section of the
input image that is closest to the mark to be found (model) and detects its correlation (similarity) and position.
This processing item can perform stable searches even for low contrast
images or images with a lot of noise.
Example: Finding Positioning Marks on Liquid Crystal Substrate
Positioning mark
Registered model
Positioning mark found even in the following
conditions.
A lot of noise
HELP
2-23-(1)
Chipped
Low contrast
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for information on edge codes (EC).
Section 2-23
ECM Search
Operational Flow
1
page 2-23-(3)
Select measurement
image.
2
page 2-23-(5)
Extract
edges.
3
page 2-23-(7)
Set measurement
conditions.
4
page 2-23-(8)
Register
model.
5
2 (As required)
1
Register
image.
Mask
sections not
required.
page 2-23-(12)
Change
search
coordinates.
6
page 2-23-(18)
Set search
region.
7
page 2-23-(20)
Set
judgement
conditions.
8
page 2-23-(22)
Set
detailed
conditions.
9
page 2-23-(25)
Set
coordinate
mode.
10
page 2-23-(26)
Measurement
screens
2-23-(2)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
2-23-1
Selecting Measurement Images
This section describes how to select an image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
CHECK
The edges are extracted for the image number selected here and this image is
then stored at the other image number. Set Change Filtering as the next processing item to use this image for measurement for all units after the unit for
which ECM search was set. Then store the image stored in the image buffer to
Image 0 or Image 1.
When Image 0 Is Selected as Measurement Image
0.Scn 0=SET=
Image
0
0.Camera image
1.ECM search
2.Change filtering
3.Binary defect
4.
Image 1 used for measurement.
Edge extraction
Image
1
Edge-extracted image
stored to Image 1.
Image read from image buffer again.
1.
Select ECM search.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.ECM search
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial ECM Search Screen will be displayed.
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Measurement Image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
3.
2-23-(3)
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
Section 2-23
ECM Search
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-23-(4)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
2-23-2
Extracting Edges
ECM search is performed for images for which the edges have been extracted.
Adjust the upper and lower levels so that the edges of the mark to be found are
extracted.
Upper and Lower Limits
Set the upper and lower limits so that the edges of the mark to be found are
extracted. The levels can be set between 10 and 255 (default 100:255).
Mask Size
The mask size function is used when searching for edges to judge edges
using peripheral information. Select how much peripheral pixel information to
use. The selections are 5 ™ 5 (default) or 3 ™ 3.
CHECK
This setting will be enabled only if Frame/Field under Camera image is set to
Frame. If set to Field, the effect will remain the same as if 5 ™ 5 is selected
even if 3 ™ 3 is selected.
Example: Select 3 ™ 3
Information from the surrounding 9
pixels is used to determine whether
or not the center pixel is the edge.
(1 square = 1 pixel)
[5 × 5]
The greater the mask size, the more the variations in
surrounding pixels can be absorbed. Select 5 ™ 5 to ignore
uneven edges.
The edges are thicker when 5 ™ 5 is selected. If the size of
the measurement object varies or if the measurement
objects are on an angle, thicker edges give greater
performance.
This function is even more effective if smoothing is used.
Refer to ,QSXWWLQJ&DPHUD,PDJHV and )LOWHULQJ
$JDLQ (where smoothing can be set to be executed twice).
[3 × 3]
Select 3 ™ 3 to detect minute
differences from the model.
1.
Select Extract edges.
1.ECM search
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
2-23-(5)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
The screen for setting edge extraction levels will be displayed.
Lower limit
Upper limit
Extract edges
Upper[255]
Lower[100]
Mask:5x5
OK
:Change ENT:OK ESC:Back
2.
Set the upper and lower limits.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
3.
4.
Select the mask size.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-23-(6)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
2-23-3
Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the conditions for searching for the model.
Measurement conditions
OFF*: Searches for the registered
model. The search is not performed if
black and white are reversed.
ON: Performs the search even if black
and white are reversed for the model.
Reverse : OFF
Accuracy : Normal
End
Normal*: Finds the measurement value in integers (pixel units).
Precise: Finds the measurement value in decimals (sub-pixel units).
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Measurement conditions.
1.ECM search
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Reverse : OFF
Accuracy : Normal
End
2.
Make the reverse and accuracy settings.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-23-(7)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
2-23-4
Registering Models
Register the mark to be found as a model.
(As required)
1
2
Register
image.
Mask
sections not
required.
STEP 1: Registering Images
Specify the region to be used for model registration by enclosing it in a box.
1.
Select Model registration.
1.ECM search
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The operation selections will be displayed.
Registration
Mask
2.
Select Registration.
The Registration Screen will be displayed.
Registration
312,413
3.
Draw a box that encloses the mark.
The image inside the box is registered.
Registration
Registration
Mask
2-23-(8)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
CHECK
The model is registered internally using the edge-extracted image.
Model
The model for the edgeextracted image can be
checked on the Mask Screen.
The section in the input image that is closest to the model is found. The
degree of similarity is expressed as the correlation, and the search coordinates (X, Y) are found.
Search
Only the edges of the model are used
for the search so noise does not affect
the correlation.
If, however, there is noise in the model itself, the correlation will be reduced
because noise becomes part of the search. In such cases, use the mask
function to remove noise from the model before registration.
Mask function used.
STEP 2: Masking Sections Not Required
Sections in the model that are not required can be masked and removed from
the model. The registered model image does not get cleared when using this
function so the image can be used repeatedly to try different model shapes to
find the most suitable one.
Use the NOT mode to draw figures
and mask sections that are not
required in the model.
CHECK
The box drawn using Registration is registered as Figure 0 and the position
and size of that box can be adjusted.
If a box figure is not suitable, clear the box and use OR mode to draw a circle
or polygon. Up to 8 figures can be drawn.
Draw a circle using OR mode
(The original box is cleared).
Draw figures in NOT mode to
exclude sections not required.
2-23-(9)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
1.
Select Mask.
Registration
Registration
Mask
The screen for drawing regions will be displayed.
The box drawn using Registration is registered as Figure 0.
Mask
Add
Box 0
Figure
EllipseO R
End
Circle N O T
Circumference
Polygon
CHECK
The model is registered using the edge-extracted image, so the edge-extracted image is displayed on this screen.
2.
Select Add.
3.
Select the desired figure.
4.
Select the drawing mode (OR or NOT).
CHECK
Select NOT to use the mask function.
Select OR to draw a different figure.
An arrow cursor will appear.
8 figures can be drawn.
(0 to 7)
Mask
5.
[1]
305,115
Draw the figure.
The figure will be registered.
2-23-(10)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
6.
Select Add to draw more figures. Up to 8 figures can be drawn.
Once 8 figures have been drawn,
Add will no longer be displayed.
Mask
Add
Figure0
Figure1
End
7.
8.
Repeat steps 3 to 5 as necessary to create the desired shape.
Select End to finish drawing.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1. In the screen for step 6 above, select the figure to be changed or cleared
using the Up and Down Keys and press the ENT Key.
Figure 0
Figure 1
Mask
Add
Figure0
Figure1
End
The figure for the figure number selected using the cursor will be displayed
with solid lines. The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed.
Correct
Clear
2.
Select either Correct or Clear and press the ENT Key.
If Correct is selected, the cursor will be displayed. Correct the size and position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
2-23-(11)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
2-23-5
Changing the Search Coordinates
Use this function to change the search coordinates only.
When a model is registered, the center position of the model is registered as
the search coordinates. However, this function can be used to register a point
other than the center of the model as the search coordinates.
CHECK
The search coordinates are used for the point output as the measurement
value. This point can be changed to any suitable point.
Changing the Point Output as the Measurement Value
Search coordinate changed to a suitable position.
(Center of model is the default.)
Model
There are 3 methods available for changing search coordinates.
Registration
method
Details
Manual
Any position can be specified for registration.
Gravity
The image is converted to binary and the center of gravity of the
white pixel area in the model is registered as the search coordinates.
Select this method to use the center of gravity of the measurement object as the search coordinates.
Search coordinates
(center of gravity)
Edge
The edge position is used for registration. This method can be
used if the measurement object is rectangular.
Select this method to register the edge or corner of the measurement object as the search coordinates.
Search coordinates
(cross point of lines)
CHECK
If the model image has been re-registered or the mask function used to
change the model shape, the search coordinates will return to the default position (center of the model).
Manual
Any position can be specified (in pixel units) for the search coordinates.
2-23-(12)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
1.
Select Search coordinates.
1.ECM search
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The registration methods will be displayed.
Manual
Gravity
Edge
2.
Select Manual.
A cursor will appear at the center of the model.
Search coordinates
Manual
214,235
3.
4.
Use the Up/Down/Left/Right Keys to change the position if required.
Press the ENT Key.
The search coordinates will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Gravity
The image will be converted to binary and the center of gravity of the white
pixel area in the model rectangle will be set as the search coordinates.
1.
Select Search coordinate.
1.ECM search
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
2-23-(13)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
The registration selections will be displayed.
Manual
Gravity
Edge
2.
Select Gravity.
The Binary Level Settings Screen will be displayed.
Lower limit
Upper limit
Binary level
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
:Move
:Change
Auto
The Controller automatically
determines binary level.
3.
Reverse
Reverses white and
black in the display.
Move the cursor to the upper limit and use the Left and Right Keys to
change the value.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys: Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
4.
CHECK
Use the same method to change the lower value.
Set the upper and lower limits so that the measurement object is displayed
as white pixels.
Binary level
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
:Move
5.
:Change
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
A display cursor will appear at the center of gravity (search coordinates).
CHECK
It is also possible to set the binary level so that measurement is performed
only for an intermediate density range.
2-23-(14)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
Edge
The edge registration method can be used when the measurement object is
rectangular.
Draw 4 regions. One edge is detected from each region and that becomes the
reference position.
Region 2
Region 3
Line connecting edge points
found for regions 0 and 1.
Search coordinates (cross point of lines)
Region 0
1.
Region 1
Line connecting edge points
found for regions 2 and 3.
Setting Edge Detection Conditions
Set the direction to search for the 4 edges and the density change as the
measurement conditions.
Edge detection direction: ‘, “, ’, ”.
Edge
Measurement
conditions
Region0 direction
:
Region0
Region0 Color
: Light
Region1
Region1 direction :
Region2
Region1 Color
: Light
Region3
Region2 direction :
End
Region2 Color
: Light
Region3 direction :
Region3 Color
: Light
End
Dark
Dark
Density change:
Light “ dark, dark “ light.
Dark
Dark
Example: Finding this position in region 0.
Direction: ’
Color: Light “ dark
2-23-(15)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
a)
Select Search coordinate.
1.ECM search
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The registration selections will be displayed.
Manual
Gravity
Edge
b)
Select Edge.
The Edge Measurement Screen will be displayed.
Edge
Measurement conditions
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
End
c)
Select Measurement conditions.
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Edge
Me Region0 direction :
Re Region0 color :
Light
Re Region1 direction :
Re Region1 color : Light
Re Region2 direct ion :
En Region2 color : Light
Region3 direction :
Region3 color : Light
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
End
d)
Set the conditions.
e)
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (b.) will return.
2.
Drawing Measurement Regions
Draw 4 regions to include all edges.
a)
Select Region 0.
2-23-(16)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
The region at the cursor position will be displayed in solid lines. The
model will also be displayed in solid lines.
Edge
Measurement conditions
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
End
Region 0
Model
The screen for drawing regions will be displayed.
Edge
24,182
+
b)
Draw a box-shaped region.
The region will be registered.
Edge
Measurement conditions
Region0
Region1
Region2
Region3
End
c)
Repeat steps a and b until the 4 regions are drawn.
d)
Once the 4 regions have been drawn, select End.
The search coordinates will be registered.
2-23-(17)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
2-23-6
Setting Search Regions
Set the region to search for the model. The whole region of the input image
can be searched. Processing time can be reduced and accuracy improve,
however, by limiting the search region.
CHECK
When edges are extracted, the pixels at the edges of the screen cannot be
processed accurately. Do not include the outer edges of the screen when setting the search region.
Filter size of 3 ™ 3
Filter size of 5 ™ 5
Screen size
512 pixels
-1 pixel
-2 pixels
484
pixels
Valid range:
(0,0) to (511,483)
Valid range:
(2,2) to (509,481)
Valid range:
(1,1) to (510,482)
Each time the image is filtered, the range of inaccurate pixels will be increased
further. For example, if filtering is performed twice, the valid range will be
reduced as follows:
Filter size of 5 ™ 5: -2 pixels ™ 3 = -6 pixels
Filter size of 3 ™ 3: -1 pixel ™ 3 = -3 pixels
(Filtering is also performed once in edge extraction, so filtering is actually performed a total of three times.)
1.
Select Search region.
1.ECM search
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
An arrow cursor will appear.
The model will be displayed with solid lines.
Model
Search region
2.
80,66
Draw a box-shaped search region.
2-23-(18)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
CHECK
The only figure that can be drawn is a box.
The search region will be set and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-23-(19)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
2-23-7
Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the judgement conditions for the correlation to the model and the position
to be found (X,Y).
Judgement conditions
Range for an OK judgement
EC Correlation :79 [ 70 : 100 ]
Position X
: 180.000
[
0.000 : 511.000]
Position Y
: 250.000
[
0.000 : 483.000]
Correlation range (0 to 100)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the X direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement of the measurement object
in the Y direction (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
End
: Measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
CHECK
EC Correlation
The edge-extracted image is used for matching with the model. The EC correlation value indicates the degree of similarity for the edge-extracted image.
Model
Image 0 Image 1 Image 2
For judgement values EC correlation 96
between 70 and 100
Judgement OK
CHECK
55
NG
90
OK
Position X and Position Y
Movement range in X direction
Movement range in Y direction
OK
1.
NG
Select Judgement conditions.
1.ECM search
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
2-23-(20)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
EC Correlation :79 [ 70 : 100 ]
Position X
: 180.000
[
0.000 : 511.000]
Position Y
: 250.000
[
0.000 : 483.000]
End
2.
3.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-23-(21)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
2-23-8
Setting Detailed Conditions
The search settings can be changed here. Change the conditions if the measurement results are unstable or if high-speed processing is required. Normally, these conditions can be left on the default settings. After changing the
settings, perform an object measurement to check that measurement can still
be performed correctly.
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
1.ECM search
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Candidate level
Reduction
Model skipping
Search skipping
Matching edges display
: [ 60]%
: [ 50]%
: [ 2]
: [ 2]
: OFF
End
2.
3.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Candidate Level, Reduction, Model Skipping, and Search Skipping
The Controller performs the following 2-stage processing internally.
1.
Rough Search
Searches for the model in the search region. Detailed searches are not
performed if the highest correlation is at or below the candidate level. The
result will be NG.
Searches while skipping the number of pixels set under
Search skipping.
Image reduced by the amount set under Reduction.
Model
œ Model reduced by the amount set under Reduction.
œ Model where number of pixels set under Model skipping have been skipped.
2-23-(22)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
2.
Detailed Search
Measurements are taken again in area of highest correlation.
Measures again in area of highest correlation.
Image reduced by the amount set under
Reduction.
Model
œ Model reduced by the amount set under Reduction.
œ Model where number of pixels set under Model skipping have been skipped.
CHECK
When Accuracy Set to Normal
The position found using detailed search will be the measurement value.
Reductions will be converted back to original size and output.
When Accuracy Set to Precise
The image and the model are returned to the original size and the detailed
search is executed again. The position is found in sub-pixel units. Model
skipping is not performed.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-23-(7) for information on setting Accuracy.
Range
Details
Candidate
level
Setting items
0 to 100 (60*)
Set the threshold for the correlation when executing
rough searches. If the highest correlation is at or
below the candidate level, detailed searches will not
be executed. The judgement result will be NG.
Reduce the candidate level if the model searches
are unstable. The processing speed, however, will
be slower.
Reduction
25 to 100 (50*) Set the percentage to reduce the input and model
images when search is executed. The processing
time is shorter the more the image is reduced. However, the searches may become unstable when the
model is small.
Model skipping 1 to 9 (2*)
Set the number of pixels to be skipped for the model.
Search skipping
Set the number of pixels to be skipped in the search
region when performing rough searches.
1 to 9 (2*)
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-23-(23)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
CHECK
The following parameters can be adjusted in line with the measurement object
to increase processing speed.
When the model is a line drawing
Increase the model skipping setting.
When the model is large
(1/4 of the screen or more)
Reduce the reduction setting.
When the model is small
(less than 1/4 of the screen)
Increase the model skipping setting.
Matching Edge Display
When the ECM search function is used, the edge codes are used to match the
model and the input image. Select whether or not to display matching edge
codes on the measurement screen when the edge codes of the model and the
input image match.
Settings
Details
ON
The sections where the edge codes match are
displayed in color. The processing time is longer
than when set to OFF.
OFF*
The matching edge codes are not displayed.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-23-(24)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
2-23-9
Setting the Coordinate Mode
Select the type of coordinate values.
Before scroll:Output made using the coordinate values
before position displacement compensation.
After scroll*: Output made using the coordinate values
after position displacement compensation.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for differences between
output coordinates.
End
ON:
Output made using coordinate values set using calibration.
OFF*: Output made using Camera coordinate values.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the coordinate mode is changed after the judgement conditions have been
set, the measurement results will change also. Change the judgement conditions to enable correct measurement.
1.
Select Coordinate mode.
1.ECM search
Measurement image
Extract edges
Measurement conditions
Model registration
Search coordinate
Search region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The Coordinate Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
2.
Make the settings for each item.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-23-(25)
Section 2-23
ECM Search
2-23-10 Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for ECM
searches.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
NG 67ms
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Image 0 Freeze
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which ECM search is set
and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the two
screens.
Measurement Values and Positions
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.ECM search
OK 45ms
Model frame and search coordinates
displayed in OK color for OK judgements
and displayed in NG color for NG
judgements.
Search coordinates
Judge :OK
EC corr. :86
Pos. X :236.000
Pos. Y :256.000
Search region
Matching Edges
If Detailed conditions/Matching edges is set to ON, the following screen will be
displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1.ECM search
OK 45ms
The matching edges will be shown in the
OK color for OK judgement results and in
the NG color for NG results.
2-23-(26)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
The Lot Number OCV 1 processing item verifies whether or not lot numbers
are printed correctly. Lot numbers can be used that change daily, weekly,
monthly, or yearly.
The Controller has a built-in calendar that is used to automatically increment
the numbers used in verification; settings do not need to be changed manually.
The Controller also has built-in dictionaries of the shape characteristics of various fonts so that basic characters do not need to be registered.
Example: Lot number that are incremented by 1 daily.
Basic numbers for verification
Verify
1 OCT 2001
Automatically
updated
2 OCT 2001
Verify
31 OCT 2001
Verify
1 NOV 2001
Verify
Performance
Item
Fonts
Details
Ink jet printers
Hitachi, Marconi, Domino, Linx, Willet,
Imaje, KGK (Kishu Giken Kogyo), EDM
Laser printers
Gothic, OCRA, OCRB, SEMI
Stamps
Gothic, Ming-style, OCRA, OCRB
Characters
Numerals (0 to 9) (Letters and symbols are not supported.)
Number of digits
1 to 4
Background
Must be uniform in color.
Background cut and shading are available as optional functions.
2-24-(1)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
Operational Flow
1
page 2-24-(3)
Select measurement image.
2
page 2-24-(5)
1
Set the number
extract
conditions.
3
Select
number color
and rotation.
2
(As required)
Removing
lighting
variations.
3
(As required)
Set binary
levels.
4
Change
extract
method.
Only for
auto extract
mode
page 2-24-(16)
5
For dilated
extraction
Set the
number of
dilations.
Only for
auto extract
mode
6
Set the
noise
removal
conditions.
Only for
auto extract
mode
Select the font.
4
page 2-24-(18)
Set the measurement conditions.
5
page 2-24-(22)
Set the reference
date.
6
page 2-24-(23)
Set the
inspection region.
7
page 2-24-(27)
Set judgement
conditions.
8
page 2-24-(28)
Check the lot
number.
9
page 2-24-(29)
Measurement
screens
2-24-(2)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
2-24-1
Selecting Measurement Images
This section describes how to select an image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
1.
Select Lot-No. OCV1.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Lot-No. OCV1
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The setting selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Font
Measurement conditions
Reference date
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Reference number
2.
Select Measurement image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
3.
4.
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
2-24-(3)
If Shading is set under Extract conditions (i.e., the shading level has been set
to 1 or higher), the image selected here will be dilated or eroded and stored at
the other image number. Set Change Filtering as the next processing item to
use this image for measurement for units after the unit for which Lot Number
OCV1 was set. Then store the image stored in the image buffer to Image 0 or
Image 1.
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
Example: Image 0 Selected as Measurement Image and Shading Set
0.Scn 0=SET=
Image
0
Image dilated or eroded
Image
1
Dilated or eroded
image stored.
0.Camera image
1.Lot-No. OCV1
2.Change filtering
3.Binary defect
4.
Image 1 used for measurement.
Image read from image buffer again
2-24-(4)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
2-24-2
Setting Number Extract Conditions
Operational Flow
1
2
Select
number
color and
rotation.
(As required)
Remove
lighting
variation.
3 (As required) 4
Set binary
level.
5
Change
extract
method.
Only for auto
extraction
For dilation
extraction
Set
number of
dilations.
Only for auto
extraction
6
Set noise
removal
conditions.
Only for auto
extraction
STEP 1: Selecting Number Color and Rotation
Set the color of the lot number and rotational corrections.
Compensate image
Color
Rotation
Inclination
Binary
: Black
: OFF
: OFF
: Auto
Number color
Black*: Numbers darker than background
White: Numbers lighter than background
Total rotation of number string:
OFF*: No rotation compensation
ON: -15• to 15• compensation
End
Number inclination:
OFF*: No compensation
ON: -20• to 20• compensation
Select the method for setting binary levels for extraction.
Automatic*: Threshold is automatically set from density histogram for whole image.
Manual: Binary level is adjusted while referring to image.
Select fixed when the numbers are not extracted well using the automatic setting. Refer
to page 2-24-(7).
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
The rotation and inclination settings are enabled only for regions for which
automatic extraction is selected under Measurement Conditions/Extract
method.
1.
Select Extract conditions.
1.Lot-No. OCV1
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Font
Measurement conditions
Reference date
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Reference number
2-24-(5)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
The settings selections will be displayed.
Compensate image
Shading
Binary
Extract method
Dilate level
Noise conditions
2.
Select Compensate image.
The Compensate Image Settings Screen will be displayed.
Compensate image
: Black
: OFF
: OFF
: Auto
Color
Rotation
Inclination
Binary
End
3.
4.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 2: Removing Lighting Variations
Numbers cannot be extracted accurately if lighting variations cause the numbers to become illegible. Adjustments can also be made for shaded images.
Original image
Shaded image
−
1.
Image with shading removed
=
Select Shading.
Extract conditions
Compensate image
Shading
Binary
Extract method
Dilate level
Noise conditions
2-24-(6)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
The Shading Levels Settings Screen will be displayed.
Shading
2.
CHECK
Level:[ 0]
OK
Place the cursor on the level and use the Left and Right Keys to change
the level to between 0 and 10.
Right Key:
Increases the value by one.
Left Key:
Decreases the value by one.
The higher the level, the narrower the number lines in the image. Adjust the
level until the lines start to disappear. The higher the level, the longer the
processing time.
Shading
Level:[ 8]
OK
3.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting Binary Levels
The Lot Number OCV1 processing item converts density images to binary
images and performs number extraction on the binary images. The binary
level set here is enabled only when the binary method is set to manual under
Extract conditions/Compensate image/Binary method. Adjust the binary level
so that the numbers for verification are displayed as white pixels.
CHECK
2-24-(7)
When Binary Method Is Set to Automatic under Extract conditions/Compensate image/Binary method
Once measurement has been performed, enter this screen to display and
check the image that was converted to binary using the automatically set
binary levels.
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
1.
Select Binary.
Extract conditions
Compensate image
Shading
Binary
Extract method
Dilate level
Noise conditions
The settings screen for binary levels will be displayed.
Lower limit
Upper limit
Binary level
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
:Move
:Change
Auto
The Controller automatically
sets the binary level.
2.
Reverse
Reverses white or black in
the display.
Move the cursor to the upper limit and use the Left and Right Keys to
change the value.
Right Key:
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Right Keys:
Increases the value 10 times faster.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT+Left Keys:
Decreases the value 10 times faster.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
3.
CHECK
Use the same method to change the lower value.
Set the upper and lower limits so that the numbers are displayed as white
pixels.
Binary level
Upper[255]
Lower[128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
:Move
4.
:Change
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
It is also possible to set the binary level so that measurement is performed
only for an intermediate density range.
2-24-(8)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
STEP 4: Changing Extract Methods
Change the extract method if the numbers are not extracted accurately. Normally, the method can be left on the default setting. After changing the setting,
perform a measurement to check that the numbers can still be extracted correctly.
CHECK
The extract method setting is enabled only for regions for which automatic
extraction is selected under Measurement conditions/Extract method.
1.
Select Extract method.
Trimming conditions
Compensate image
Shading
Binary
Extract method
Dilate level
Noise conditions
The Extract Method Settings Screen will be displayed.
Extract method
: Gap search
Method
OFF
Forced extraction :
: From left
Direction
End
2.
3.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-24-(9)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
Guide to Setting Conditions
Start
Don’t read
numbers on left
or right end?
Setting item
YES
Left edge
NO
Right edge
Extract direction: From
right
Numbers made
of broken or
dotted lines?
Extract direction: From
left
YES
NO
Numbers touching
each other?
NO
NO
YES
Dot gap < Gap
between numbers?
(See note.)
Part YES
Extract method: Dilate
extraction
All YES
No. of dilations: (Any
suitable number)
NO
Even?
Refer to
page 2-24-(12).
Forced extraction: ON
Forced extraction: ON
Forced extraction: OFF
Extract method: Gap search
Try Fixed Extraction.
Refer to page 2-24-(20).
Extract method: Even
extraction
Note Select the extract methods according to the relationship between the dot gap
and the gap between numbers as follows:
• If there are only portions where the dot gap is larger than the gap between
numbers, set dilation extraction.
Dot gap
Gap between
numbers
2-24-(10)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
• If without exception the dot gap is larger than the gap between numbers,
set even extraction.
Dot gap
Gap between
numbers
In the following descriptions, the asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Extract Methods
Gap Search*
Finds the gap between numbers and extracts the numbers.
Select this method for most applications.
Extracted numbers
Gap between numbers
Dilate Extraction
With dot numbers, the gap search may not extract correctly if the gap between
dots is greater than the gap between numbers. In such cases, select dilation
extraction. The numbers are dilated, the dot gaps joined, and then the numbers are extracted.
Set the number of dilations under Extract conditions/Dilate level.
SeeAlso
CHECK
Refer to 67(36HWWLQJ1XPEHURI'LODWLRQVRQSDJH .
Use in conjunction with forced extraction because the gap between numbers
are also joined when the numbers are dilated.
Dot gap
Numbers dilated, dots joined,
and numbers extracted.
0 0 1
Gap between
numbers
2-24-(11)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
Even Extraction
The number of digits in the lot number is specified and the numbers are
extracted at even intervals.
3 digits
Region divided into 3 number
lots and extracted
In the following descriptions, the asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Forced Extraction
If the set number of digits cannot be extracted, select whether or not to use
forced extraction. The settings are OFF* or ON.
The forced extraction function extracts numbers that are joined due to printing
errors or because they are inclined.
Forced extraction is enabled only when Gap search or Dilate Extraction are
selected as the extract method.
Extract Direction
The direction setting is enabled only when Dilate is selected as the extract
method. The direction choices are from left* or from right.
Number extraction is performed only until the set number of digits have been
extracted. If there are extra numbers in the extracting region, these numbers
can be ignored (excluded from the extraction process) by starting extraction
from the opposite direction.
Extracting region
Direction: From right
No. of digits: 3
Extraction is performed on 3 numbers starting from the right, so the “0” on the
left is ignored.
STEP 5: Setting Number of Dilations
Set the number of dilations between 0 and 9 if dilate extraction has been chosen as the extract method. Dilation is performed until the width between dots is
eliminated, and then the numbers are extracted.
CHECK
The Number of Dilations setting is enabled only for regions for which automatic
extraction is selected under Measurement conditions/Extract method.
1.
Select Dilate level.
Extract conditions
Compensate image
Shading
Binary
Extract method
Dilate level
Noise conditions
2-24-(12)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
The Dilate Level Settings Screen will be displayed.
Dilate level
Level:[ 0 ]
OK
2.
Move the cursor to the level value and use the Left and Right Keys to
change the value (0 to 9).
Right Key: Increases the level by one.
Left Key:
3.
Decreases the level by one.
After the dot have joined, select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 6: Setting Noise Removal Conditions
Set the conditions for ignoring noise when executing number extraction.
CHECK
The noise removal settings are enabled only for regions for which automatic
extraction is selected under Measurement conditions/Extract method.
1.
Select Noise conditions.
Extract conditions
Compensate image
Shading
Binary
Extract method
Dilate level
Noise conditions
The Noise Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Noise conditions
:
Leave
Horizontal noise : [
: [
Noise height
Vertical noise : [
: [
Noise width
End
End image
2.
Change the conditions.
3.
Select End.
5]
0]
2]
0]
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-24-(13)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
In the following descriptions, the asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
End Images
Select whether to leave or remove the area adjacent to the extracting region.
(Leave*, Erase (horizontal), Erase (vertical)
For Measurement Objects that Move Vertically
Select Erase (vertical).
If edge has shifted downwards
Edge section that overlaps
extracting region is removed
before extraction is executed.
Extraction region
For Measurement Objects that Move Horizontally
Select Erase (horizontal).
If the edge has shifted to the right
Extracting region
Edge section that overlaps
extracting region is removed
before extraction is executed.
For Measurement Objects That May Move Vertically or Horizontally
Only edges that overlap either vertically or horizontally can be removed. If the
edges overlap both vertically and horizontally, the numbers cannot be
extracted correctly. If the possibility exists of overlap in both directions, adjust
the position and size of the extracting region so that only the numbers to be
extracted fall within the extracting region.
Adjust size of extracting region.
Incorrect
Correct
2-24-(14)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
Horizontal Noise and Noise Height
To extract lines, a projected image in the horizontal direction must be created.
Set the size to be removed as noise from this projected image.
Projected image in horizontal direction
Lines under the noise height will be
removed. (0 to 484 (0*))
Noise smaller than the horizontal noise will
be removed. (0 to 512 (5*))
Noise is removed.
Vertical Noise and Noise Width
To extract numbers in an image after lines have been extracted, a projected
image must be created in the vertical direction.
Set the size to be removed as noise from this projected image.
Noise is removed.
Projected image in
vertical direction
Noise smaller than the vertical noise will be
removed. (0 to 484 (2*))
Lines under the noise width will be
removed. (0 to 512 (0*))
2-24-(15)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
2-24-3
Selecting Fonts
Select the font for the lot numbers to be verified.
If the font is unknown, change IJP font, laser font, and stamp font settings to
All.
Printer type:
IJP* (ink jet printer), Laser (laser printer), or stamp
Font
Printer
IJP font
Laser font
Stamp font
:
:
:
:
IJP
All
All
All
Ink jet printer font sizes and manufacturer:
All*, 5 dot (Common), 5 dot (Hitachi), 5 dot (Marconi), 5
dot (Domino), 5 dot (Linx), 5 dot (Willet), 5 dot (Imaje), 5
dot (KGK (see note))
7 dot (Common), 7 dot (Hitachi), 7 dot (Marconi), 7 dot
(Domino), 7 dot (Linx), 7 dot (Willet), 7 dot (Imaje), 7 dot
(KGK (see note)), 7 dot (EDM)
9 to 12 dot, Over 14 dot.
End
Laser printer fonts:
All*, Gothic, OCRA, OCRB, SEMI
Stamp fonts:
All*, Gothic, Ming-style, OCRA, OCRB
Note: KGK: Kishu Giken Kogyo
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Font.
1.Lot-No. OCV1
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Font
Measurement conditions
Reference date
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Reference number
2-24-(16)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
The Font Settings Screen will be displayed.
Font
Printer
IJP font
Laser font
Stamp font
:
:
:
:
IJP
All
All
All
End
2.
3.
Set the font conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-24-(17)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
2-24-4
Setting the Measurement Conditions
Set the initial value and incrementing method for the lot numbers.
CHECK
SeeAlso
CHECK
SeeAlso
Set the data information correctly; this information serves as the basic for
incrementing the lot numbers.
Refer to 6HWWLQJWKH&DOHQGDU'DWHDQG7LPH'DWH7LPH.
Set the initial date to be printed as the reference date. The lot number will be
calculated as the initial date plus the number of days that have elapsed since
the initial date was set.
Refer to 6HWWLQJWKH5HIHUHQFH'DWH.
Example:
Reference date:1 OCT 2001
Lot No. default:001
Lot No. add method:Day
Lot No. add value:10
Reference numbers
for verifications
Verify
1 OCT 2001
Updated
automatically
2 OCT 2001
Verify
A value of 10 is added when 1 day has elapsed from the reference date.
1.
Select Measurement conditions.
1.Lot-No. OCV1
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Font
Measurement conditions
Reference date
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Reference number
2-24-(18)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
The conditions setting screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Lot-No. digit
: [3]
Lot-No. default
:[
1]
Lot-No. max
: [ 365]
Lot-No. add value : [
1]
Lot-No. add method : Day
0 suppress
: OFF
Extract mode
: Auto
End
2.
3.
Set the conditions.
Select END.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-24-(19)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
Setting Items and Contents
Setting
Lot-No. digits
Contents
Set the number of digits in the lot number. (1 to 4, 3*)
Set to a value at least as large as the number of digits in the
maximum lot number. If a smaller value is set, it will be
increased automatically to the number of digits in the maximum
lot number.
Lot-No. default
Set the initial value of the lot number. The default will be set as
the numbers printed on the reference date and then incremented according to the add method. (0 to 9999, 1*)
Lot-No. max.
Set the maximum lot number. The lot number will be reset to the
default when the maximum value is exceeded and it will be
incremented again. (0 to 9999, 365*)
Lot-No. add value
Set the value to be added to the lot number each cycle defined
by the add method. (0 to 9999, 1*)
Lot-No. add method
Set the period at which to increment the lot number. Lot numbers will be calculated as follows based on the built-in calender.
(Day*, Week, Month, Year)
0 suppress
Day:
The lot number will be incremented every day.
Example: 1 OCT 2001 to 2 OCT 2001
Week:
The lot number will be incremented every week.
Example: 1 OCT 2001 to 8 OCT 2001
Month:
The lot number will be incremented every month.
Example: 8 OCT 2001 to 1 NOV 2001
(Days are ignored.)
Year:
The lot number will be incremented every year.
Example: 1 OCT 2001 to 1 JAN 2002
(Months and days are ignored.)
Set whether initial zeros are present or not when the lot number
does not require all of the digits. (OFF*, ON)
Example: If the number of digits is 3 and the lot number is 4,
turn OFF suppression when “4” is printed and turn ON suppression when only “004” is printed.
Extract mode
Set the mode to use to extract numbers. (Auto*, Fixed)
Auto: The number with the specified number of digits is automatically extracted from the inspection region.
Fixed: Inspected regions are drawn separately for each digit to
extract numbers. This enables verifying the position of individual
digits.
2-24-(20)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
Setting
Position
Contents
Positioning can be used only when fixed extraction and no 0
suppression are set. Set whether the numbers are left-aligned
or right-aligned when the lot number does not require all of the
digits. (Right*, Left)
Right
Left
Output
Set whether or not to output on serial communications the first
candidate lot number.
Output Format:
<unit number>,<1st candidate lot No.> DELIMITER
Example: If the first candidate lot number registered for Unit 1 is
123, the output is as follows: 1,123 DELIMITER
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-24-(21)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
2-24-5
Setting the Reference Date
Set the reference date, which specifies the data the initial lot number is
printed. The lot number will be calculated as the initial date plus the number of
days that have elapsed since the initial date was set.
Reference date
Year : [2001]
Month : [10]
Day : [ 1]
Set the reference date.
Year: 2001 to 2099 (2001*)
Month: 1 to 12 (10*)
Day:
1 to 31 (1*)
End
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select Reference date.
1.Lot-No. OCV1
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Font
Measurement conditions
Reference date
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Reference number
The setting screen will be displayed.
Reference date
Year : [2001]
Month : [10]
Day : [ 1]
End
2.
3.
Set the reference date.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-24-(22)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
2-24-6
Setting the Inspection Region
Set the region in which numbers are to be extracted.
The setting method depends on the extract mode (automatic/fixed) set as a
measurement condition.
Automatic Extraction Mode
Inspected region
Set one inspected region.
The numbers will be automatically extracted from
this region. The following settings are used when
extracting.
Extract conditions/Extraction method: page 2-24(9)
Extract conditions/Dilate level: page 2-24-(12)
Extract conditions/Noise conditions: page 2-24-(13)
1.
Select Inspected region.
1.Lot-No. OCV1
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Font
Measurement conditions
Reference date
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Reference number
An arrow cursor will be displayed.
Inspected region
2.
35,175
Draw the inspected region as a square block.
Specify the upper left and lower right coordinates.
CHECK
SeeAlso
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys:
Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
Draw the region so that only the target numbers fall within the region. Use
End Image to remove anything other than the target numbers that overlap
either vertically or horizontally on the inspected region.
Refer to page 2-24-(13).
If the edges overlap both vertically and horizontally, the numbers cannot be
extracted correctly. If the edges overlap in both directions, adjust the posi-
2-24-(23)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
tion and size of the inspected region so that only the numbers to be extracted fall within the inspected region.
Adjust size of inspected region.
Incorrect
Correct
When the bottom right coordinates have been set, the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
Repeat the procedure from (1.) to change the inspected region.
Fixed Extraction
Inspected region
An inspected region is set for each digit.
This enables verifying the position of
individual digits.
CHECK
SeeAlso
Set the number of digits under Measurement conditions/Lot-No. digits.
Refer to page 2-24-(18).
1.
Select Inspected region.
1.Lot-No. OCV1
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Font
Measurement conditions
Reference date
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Reference number
A digit selection screen will be displayed.
When 3 digits have been specified
Inspected region
1st digit
2st digit
3st digit
2-24-(24)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
2.
Select 1st digit.
The region setting screen will be displayed.
Inspected region
3.
271,225
Draw the inspected region for the first digit as a square block.
Specify the upper left and lower right coordinates.
Up/Down/Left/Right Keys:
Move the cursor.
ENT Key:
Confirms the setting.
When the lower right coordinates have been specified, the inspected region will be set and digit number selection screen will be displayed.
Inspected region
1st digit
2st digit
3st digit
4.
Draw inspected regions for the other digits in the same way as for the first.
5.
When regions have been drawn for all digits, press the Esc Key from the
digit selection screen.
The screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
If the number of digits set for the lot number in the measurement conditions
is changed, all of the inspected regions will be cleared. Repeat the settings
from (1.).
Correcting Fixed Regions
1. Select the digit for which the region is to be corrected.
The selected region will be displayed in solid lines.
Inspected region
1st digit
2st digit
3st digit
2-24-(25)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
An arrow cursor will be displayed at the upper left coordinates.
Inspected region
2.
271,225
Change the region.
When the lower right coordinates have been set, the screen in (1.) will return.
2-24-(26)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
2-24-7
Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the judgement conditions to determine if the first candidate matches a correct lot number.
Judgement conditions
Similarity to the first candidate lot number (0 to 100, 60*)
OK if the similarity is equal to or greater than this value.
Similarity level
: [ 60]
Differential level : [ 10]
Density deviation : [ 10]
Difference between the similarity of the first and second
candidates (0 to 100, 10*)
OK if the difference is equal to or greater than this value.
End
If fixed extraction and no zero suppression are used, then this
value is used to determine if the fixed region is blank or not when
the lot number does not require all of the digits. Set the value to 0
if the blank check is not to be performed.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
1.Lot-No. OCV1
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Font
Measurement conditions
Reference date
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Reference number
The judgement conditions setting screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Similarity level
: [ 60]
Differential level : [ 10]
Density deviation : [ 10]
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select END.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-24-(27)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
2-24-8
Checking the Lot Number
This function can be used to check the numbers that are being verified.
1.
Select Reference number.
1.Lot-No. OCV1
Measurement image
Extract conditions
Font
Measurement conditions
Reference date
Inspected region
Judgement conditions
Reference number
The set lot number will be displayed.
Reference number
Inspect Lot-No. : 001
ESC:End
2.
Press the ESC Key to end.
The screen in (1.) will return.
2-24-(28)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
2-24-9
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for the Lot
Number OCV1 processing item.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
NG 67ms
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Image 0 Freeze
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which Lot Number OCV1 is
set and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
Use the SHIFT+Right or Left Keys to switch in order between the two
screens.
Inspected Regions
The judgement result for this unit, the set lot number, the inspected regions,
and the extraction frame for each number will be displayed.
• Auto Extract Mode
0.Scn 0 RUN
1. Lot-No. OCV1
OK 45ms
Judgement result for this unit
Lot number that was set
Judge : OK
Lot-No. : 0123
Inspected region (solid lines)
Extraction frames (dotted lines)
• Fixed Extract Mode
0.Scn 0 RUN
1. Lot-No. OCV1
Judge : OK
Lot-No. : 0123
OK 45ms
Judgement result for this unit
Lot number that was set
Inspected region (solid lines)
Extraction frames (dotted lines)
2-24-(29)
Section 2-24
Lot Number OCV 1
Measurement Values
The first candidate similarity, second candidate similarity, and density deviation are displayed in list form.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1. Lot-No. OCV1
NG 45ms
1st Candidate 0 1 2 3
100 41 87 89
Similarity
2st Candidate 8 7 3 8
Similarity
21 15 18 51
Density
deviation
Numbers displayed in OK color for
OK result and displayed in NG color
for NG result
56 61 66 80
2-24-(30)
Section 2-25
Labeling
2-25
Labeling
The Labeling processing item counts how many labels there are in a measurement region and calculates the area and center of gravity for the specified
label number. Images read by the Camera are converted to binary images and
the white pixels are measured.
Images are converted to binary images so that the labels are white, and the
areas and centers of gravity of the labels are calculated.
Measurement region
The labels that are extracted are sorted according to area or position of their
center of gravity, and each label is assigned a number.
Sorted in descending areas
1
0
Example: Inspecting the Number of Labels
2-25-(1)
2
Section 2-25
Labeling
Operational Flow
1
page 2-25-(3)
Select measurement image.
2
page 2-25-(4)
Set binary
level.
3
page 2-25-(6)
Set
measurement
conditions.
4
page 2-25-(8)
Draw the
measurement
region.
5
(As required) page 2-25-(11)
Re-register
reference
values.
6
page 2-25-(13)
Set
judgement
conditions.
7
page 2-25-(14)
Set
coordinate
mode.
8
page 2-25-(15)
Measurement screens
2-25-(2)
Section 2-25
Labeling
2-25-1
Selecting the Measurement Image
This section describes how to select an image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
1.
Select Labeling.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Labeling
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial screen for Labeling will be displayed.
Measurement image
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Measurement image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
3.
4.
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-25-(3)
Section 2-25
Labeling
2-25-2
Setting the Binary Level
Set the level for converting 256-gradation images into binary images. The
Controller performs measurement for the white pixels. Therefore, make the
settings so that the label measurement areas are white.
In this explanation, 3 circles on a measurement object will be used as an
example.
1.
Select Binary.
Measurement image
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Coordinate mode
The screen for setting the binary level will be displayed.
2.
Move the cursor to the upper limit and use the Left and Right Keys to
change the value.
Lower limit
Upper limit
Binary level
Upper [255]
Lower [128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
↑ ↓:Move ←→:Change
Auto
The Controller automatically
sets the binary level
Right Key:
Reverse
Reverses dark and
white in the display
Increases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT + Right Keys: Increases the value in 10s.
Left Key:
Decreases the lowest digit by one.
SHIFT + Left Keys:
Decreases the value in 10s.
Up and Down Keys: Switches between setting items.
3.
CHECK
Use the same method to change the lower value.
Set the upper and lower limits to make the area to be measured for labels
white.
Incorrect
Binary level
Upper [255]
Lower [128]
Reverse
Auto
OK
↑ ↓:Move ←→:Change
4.
Select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-25-(4)
Labeling
CHECK
2-25-(5)
Section 2-25
It is also possible to set the binary level so that measurement is performed
only for an intermediate density range.
Section 2-25
Labeling
2-25-3
Setting Measurement Conditions
Set the Area, Sort, and Label No. as conditions for label measurement.
Change the other settings as well when necessary.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Area range for labels (0 to 9,999,999.999 (0*))
Measurement conditions
Output conditions for measurement value:
OFF*: Measures the binary image.
ON:
Measures all pixels outside the
measurement region as white pixels.
Area
:
[
0.000 : 247808.000 ]
Outside trimming :
OFF
Filling up holes :
OFF
Sort
:
Area descending order
Label No.
: [ 0]
End
Output conditions for measurement value:
OFF*: Outputs area and center of gravity
coordinates before filling holes.
ON:
Outputs area and center of gravity
coordinates after filling holes.
Label No. for data output (0 to 2,499 (0*))
Conditions for reassigning label numbers
Area descending order:*
Sorts in descending order by area.
Area ascending:
Sorts in ascending order by area.
X coordinate descending: Sorts in descending order by center of gravity X coordinate. (See note.)
X coordinate ascending:
Sorts in ascending order by center of gravity X coordinate. (See note.)
Y coordinate descending: Sorts in descending order by center of gravity Y coordinate. (See note.)
Y coordinate ascending:
Sorts in ascending order by center of gravity Y coordinate. (See note.)
Note When X and Y center of gravity are sorted, the upper left corner of the measurement region
is the origin.
X
0
Y
Sort example:
Labeling result
Label numbers in
descending order
by area
Label numbers in
ascending order by
X center of gravity
Label numbers in
descending order by
Y center of gravity
2
1
0
1
2
0
1 2
0
CHECK
The coordinates set using calibration are not affected by labeling.
CHECK
When Position compensation is set, the sort is performed on center of gravity
coordinates after position compensation.
1.
Select Measurement conditions.
Measurement image
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Coordinate mode
2-25-(6)
Section 2-25
Labeling
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Area
:
[
0.000 : 247808.000 ]
Outside trimming :
OFF
Filling up holes :
OFF
Sort
:
Area descending order
Label No.
: [ 0]
End
2.
Change the settings.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
CHECK
Outside Trimming
Select Outside trimming when there is a white-pixel area inside the measurement region that is not to be measured.
Outside triming: ON
Input image
Measurement
region Goal: To find the position
and area of this label
The area outside the measurement
region changes to white pixels.
(The whole input image area is used
for measurement.)
The position and the size of the middle label
will be found if the following conditions are set:
Sort conditions: Area, ascending order
Label number: 1
CHECK
Filling Up Holes
Use the Filling up holes setting to specify how areas of black pixels contained inside donut-shaped areas of white pixels are processed. If selected, the black pixels will be processed as white pixels.
Input image
Hole filling: ON
Measurement target
2-25-(7)
Section 2-25
Labeling
2-25-4
Drawing Measurement Regions
When a measurement region is drawn, measurement is performed for the displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values (area and
the position of center of gravity of the label number specified under Measurement conditions).
CHECK
Regions can be created by combining up to 3 different figures. Regions with
difficult shapes can be drawn and sections not to be measured can be left out
of the region by combining different figures.
1.
Select Region.
Measurement image
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Coordinate mode
The Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Region
New
EBox
Ellipse OR
Circle NOT
Circumference
Polygon
2.
Select New.
3.
Select the shape of the desired figure.
4.
Select the desired drawing mode (OR/NOT).
An arrow cursor will appear.
Up to three figures (0, 1, and 2) can be drawn.
Region
5.
[0]
375,341
Draw a figure in the region to be measured.
2-25-(8)
Section 2-25
Labeling
The figure will be registered.
Region
Add
Figure0
End
Once three figures have been drawn,
Add will no longer be displayed.
6.
If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
7.
Repeat steps 3 to 5 as necessary to create the desired shape.
8.
After drawing is completed, select End.
The measurement region will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return. The center of gravity (display cursor) and measurement region will be
displayed.
CHECK
Figures drawn using OR mode are displayed with solid lines and figures drawn
using NOT mode are displayed with dotted lines.
Figure 1 (drawn using OR)
Figure 2 (drawn using NOT)
Figure 3 (drawn using OR)
CHECK
Set the model region so that no more than three areas lie along any one
straight line.
INCORRECT
Rectangle (drawn using OR)
Circumference (drawn using NOT)
Circle (drawn using NOT)
1
2-25-(9)
2
3
4
Section 2-25
Labeling
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1. In the screen for step 6 above, select the number of the figure to be
changed or cleared using the Up and Down Keys and press the ENT Key.
Figure 0 Figure 1
Region
Add
Figure0
Figure1
End
The figure for the figure number selected using the cursor will be displayed
with solid lines. The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed.
Correct
Clear
2.
Select either Correct or Clear and press the ENT Key.
If Correct is selected, the cursor will be displayed. Correct the size and position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
2-25-(10)
Section 2-25
Labeling
2-25-5
Re-registering Reference Values
This operation is performed when only the reference values are to be re-registered.
When a measurement region is drawn, the measurement is performed for the
displayed image and the results are registered as the reference values. If the
re-registering function explained here is used, only the reference values for the
image currently displayed will be registered. The area and center of gravity of
the specified label number is registered for the reference value.
CHECK
The reference position can be changed to enable the following function when
Region is selected.
Inspecting Positions from a Specified Point
Once the reference values (area and center of gravity) have been obtained for
the image currently displayed, the reference position is changed to an suitable
point. Position inspection can be performed by calculating the difference
between this reference position and the measurement position.
Measurement position (center of gravity)
Reference position
changed to suitable point
CHECK
When the measurement region is changed, the reference values return to the
default setting.
1.
Select Reference registration.
Measurement image
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Coordinate mode
A cursor will appear at the center of gravity of the label number set under
measurement conditions.
If the following conditions are set, the screen shown in the following diagram will be displayed:
2-25-(11)
Section 2-25
Labeling
Sort conditions: X coordinate ascending
Label number: 0
Reference position
Measurement region
Reference registration
251,184
ENT:OK ↑ ↓←→:Move
2.
To change the position, use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move
the cursor.
3.
Press the ENT Key to confirm the setting.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-25-(12)
Section 2-25
Labeling
2-25-6
Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the ranges for the number of labels, area and center of gravity for an OK
judgement.
Ranges for an OK judgement
Judgement conditions
Range for number of labels in measurement region (0 to 2,500)
Number of labels : 8 [ 0: 2500]
Judge area
: 2035.000
[
0.000 : 247808.000 ]
Gravity X
: 26.000
[ 0.000 :
511.000]
Gravity Y
:157.000
[ 0.000 : 483.000]
End
Range for specified label number area (0 to 9,999,999.999)
Range of movement in X direction for
specified label number (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Range of movement in Y direction for
specified label number (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
: Measurement results for the displayed image.
Use these values as references for setting upper and lower limits.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Measurement image
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Coordinate mode
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Number of labels : 8 [ 0: 2500]
Judge area
: 2035.000
[ 2000.000 : 2300.000 ]
Gravity X
: 26.000
[ 0.000 : 511.000]
Gravity Y
:157.000
[ 0.000 : 483.000]
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-25-(13)
Section 2-25
Labeling
2-25-7
Setting the Coordinate Mode
Select the type of coordinates.
Before scroll: Output made using the coordinate values
before position displacement compensation.
After scroll*: Output made using the coordinate values
after position displacement compensation.
Coordinate mode
SeeAlso
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
Output Coordinates: Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\
for differences between output coordinates.
ON : Output made using coordinate values set using calibration.
OFF*: Output made using Camera coordinate values.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the coordinate mode is changed after the judgement conditions have been
set, the measurement results will change also. Change the judgement conditions to enable correct measurement.
1.
Select Coordinate mode.
Measurement image
Binary
Measurement conditions
Region
Reference registration
Judgement conditions
Coordinate mode
The Coordinate Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate :
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
2.
Make the settings for each item.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-25-(14)
Section 2-25
Labeling
2-25-8
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for labeling.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
NG 67ms
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Image 0 Freeze
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which labeling is set and the
following detailed screens will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1. Labeling
OK 45ms
Judge
: OK
Number of Labels : 3
Area
: 135
Gravity X
: 150.212
Gravity Y
: 250.533
Judgement result for this Unit
Display is inverted for NG.
The measurement region is displayed
in the OK color for an OK judgement;
in the NG color for an NG judgement.
A circle is displayed at the center
of gravity for an OK judgement; an
ex, for a NG judgement.
2-25-(15)
Section 2-26
Label Data
2-26
Label Data
The Label Data processing item can be used to get the data for a specified
label number from the measured values held by another unit. The referenced
processing item must be one of the following, all of which perform label processing.
• Labeling
• Fine matching
• EC Defect
Example: Getting the Position for Each Group
Label 0
Label 1
Label 2
0.
Camera image
1.
Labeling
Assigns label numbers.
Label data
Gets measured values for label 0.
Label data
Gets measured values for label 1.
2.
3.
4.
Label data
Gets measured values for label 2.
2-26-(1)
Section 2-26
Label Data
Operational Flow
1
page 2-26-(3)
Select reference
unit number.
2
page 2-26-(4)
Select label number.
3
page 2-26-(6)
Set judgement
conditions.
4
page 2-26-(7)
Set coordinate mode.
5
page 2-26-(8)
Measurement
screens
2-26-(2)
Section 2-26
Label Data
2-26-1
Selecting the Reference Unit Number
Select the unit number of the processing item to be referenced. The unit numbers for which the following processing items are set will be displayed as
selections.
• Labeling
• Fine matching (Select a unit for which label area is set as the defect
detection method.)
• EC Defect (Select a unit that is set for a labeling inspection region.)
CHECK
Do not allow units for the following processing items to come between the
label data unit and the unit that is being referenced.
Processing item
Camera image
Switch camera
Affect
Calibration will not be properly performed for the measurement results of the Label Data processing item.
Processing items for
The Label Data processing item will not be able to get the
position compensation data from before scrolling.
1.
Select Label data.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Labeling
2.Label data
3.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial display for Label Data will be displayed.
Label unit
Label No.
Judgement conditions
2.
Select Label unit.
A screen to select the unit number will be displayed.
3.
Select the unit number of the “labeling” processing item from which to get
the date.
Label unit
Label unit
: 1
End
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-26-(3)
Section 2-26
Label Data
2-26-2
Selecting the Label Number
Select the label number that is to be referenced. When an EC Defect processing item is being referenced, select the inspection region number as the label
number.
CHECK
Label numbers are assigned during the labeling process according to the sort
conditions.
Sorting Example
Labeling results
Label numbers in
descending area
Label numbers in
ascending X
centers of gravity
2
1
0
2
1
1.
0
1 2
Select Label No.
2.Label data
Label unit
Label No.
Judgement conditions
Coordinate mode
The initial screen for Label No. will be displayed.
Example for when Labeling or Fine
Matching is the reference unit
Label No.
Label No. : [ 0]
End
2.
2-26-(4)
Set the label number.
Label numbers in
descending Y
centers of gravity
0
Section 2-26
Label Data
CHECK
When the reference unit is EC Defect, a selection item will also be displayed
for the region number. Set the number of the inspection region for which labeling has been set.
Example for when EC Defect is the
reference unit
Label No.
Region No. : [ 0]
: [ 0]
Label No.
End
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-26-(5)
Section 2-26
Label Data
2-26-3
Setting the Judgement Conditions
Set the judgement conditions for the label data that was obtained (area and
center of gravity).
Ranges for an OK judgement
Judgement conditions
Area :
2035.000
[
0.000: 247808.000 ]
Gravity X : 26.000
[ 0.000:
511.000]
Gravity Y : 157.000
[ 0.000:
483.000]
Area range for specified label number
(0 to 9,999,999.999)
X direction movement range for specified
label number (0 to 9,999,999.999)
Y direction movement range for specified
label number (0 to 9,999,999.999)
End
The measurement results for the displayed image
Use these values as references in setting the upper and lower limits.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
2.Label data
Label unit
Label No.
Judgement conditions
Coordinate mode
A screen to input the judgement conditions will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Area :
2035.000
[
0.000: 247808.000 ]
Gravity X : 26.000
[ 0.000:
511.000]
Gravity Y : 157.000
[ 0.000:
483.000]
End
2.
3.
Set the judgement conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-26-(6)
Section 2-26
Label Data
2-26-4
Setting the Coordinate Mode
Select the type of coordinate values.
Before scroll: Output made using the coordinate values
before position displacement
compensation.
After scroll*: Output made using the coordinate values
after position displacement compensation.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for differences between
output coordinates.
End
ON:
Output made using coordinate values set using calibration.
OFF*: Output made using Camera coordinate values.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the coordinate mode is changed after the judgement conditions have been
set, the measurement results will change also. Change the judgement conditions to enable correct measurement.
1.
Select Coordinate mode.
2. Label data
Label unit
Label No.
Judgement conditions
Coordinate mode
A screen will be displayed to set the coordinate mode.
Coordinate mode
Output coordinate:
After scroll
Calibration
: OFF
End
2.
Make the settings for each item.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-26-(7)
Section 2-26
Label Data
2-26-5
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for label
data.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image : Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which label data is set and
the following detailed screens will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
2.Label data
Judge : OK
Label no. : 2
Area
:
561
Gravity X : 450.00
Gravity Y : 250.00
OK 45ms
Judgement result for this Unit
A circle is displayed at the center of
gravity of the specified label for an OK
judgement; an ex, for a NG judgement.
Display Image
Binary image for Labeling
reference unit
Gray image for Fine Matching
or EC Defect reference unit
2-26-(8)
Section 2-27
Edge Pitch
2-27
Edge Pitch
Use the Edge Pitch processing item to find edges through density variations.
This can be done, for example, to obtain the number of pins, the widths
between pins, or the pin pitch on ICs or connectors.
The number of pins can be obtained, along with the pitch and width.
Edges
Number
of pins
Pitch (difference
between center points)
Example: Inspection for the Number of IC Pins
2-27-(1)
Section 2-27
Edge Pitch
Operational Flow
1
page 2-27-(3)
Select measurement image.
2
page 2-27-(4)
Set edge
detection
conditions.
3
page 2-27-(5)
Draw the
measurement
region.
4
page 2-27-(6)
Set
judgement
conditions.
5
(As required)
page 2-27-(7)
Change
detailed
conditions.
6
page 2-27-(8)
Set
coordinate
mode.
7
page 2-27-(9)
Measurement
screens
‘
2-27-(2)
Section 2-27
Edge Pitch
2-27-1
Selecting the Measurement Image
This section describes how to select an image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
1.
Select Edge pitch.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Edge pitch
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial screen for Edge Pitch will be displayed.
Measurement image
Measurement conditions
Region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
2.
Select Measurement image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
3.
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
4.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-27-(3)
Section 2-27
Edge Pitch
2-27-2
Setting the Edge Detection Conditions
Set the conditions for the edge search.
Measurement conditions
Color to be counted: White or black
Target color : White
Mode
: Normal
Normal: Use when the pin width
and pitch are 2 pixels or more.
End
Fine: Use to stably detect the
number of pins for smaller widths
and pitches than for Normal.
1.
Select Measurement conditions.
Measurement image
Measurement conditions
Region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The Measurement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement conditions
Target color : White
Mode
: Normal
End
2.
3.
Select the edge detection conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-27-(4)
Section 2-27
Edge Pitch
2-27-3
Drawing Measurement Regions
Draw a region to include all the edges to be detected.
CHECK
Edges are detected in the direction of the long side of the measurement
region.
Incorrect
Correct
Measurement
region
5 edges
0 edges
Detection
direction
1.
Measurement
region
Detection
direction
Select Region.
Measurement image
Measurement conditions
Region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Region
450,373
2.
CHECK
Draw a box-shaped measurement region.
The only figure that can be drawn is a box.
When the bottom right coordinates have been set, the screen in (1.) will return.
2-27-(5)
Section 2-27
Edge Pitch
2-27-4
Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the ranges for an OK judgement.
Ranges for an OK judgement
Judgement conditions
Number of edges : 5 [ 0 : 255]
Average pitch
: 9.322
[ 0.000 : 9999.999 ]
Average width
: 3.234
[ 0.000 : 9999.999 ]
Range for number of edges (0 to 255)
Range for average pitch (0 to 9999.999)
Range for average width (0 to 9999.999)
End
: Measurement results for the displayed image.
Use these values as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
Pitch (difference
Width
between center points)
Number of pins
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Measurement image
Measurement conditions
Region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Number of edges : 5 [ 0 : 255]
Average pitch
: 9.322
[ 0.000 : 9999.999 ]
Average width : 3.234
[ 0.000 : 9999.999 ]
End
2.
Make the settings for each item.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-27-(6)
Section 2-27
Edge Pitch
2-27-5
Changing Detailed Conditions
Change the detailed conditions when the measurement results are unstable.
Normally, these conditions can be left on the default settings.
If any of the settings are changed, take actual measurements to confirm that
they are correct.
Detailed conditions
Edge level : [ 10 ]%
Min. level : [ 5 ]
End
To prevent incorrect detection due to noise (0 to 255).
(If the density variation is less than the minimum value,
it will be considered to be noise.)
Example
Threshold value for finding an edge (0 to 100).
If the measured number of objects is less than
the actual number of objects, set the edge
level (or the minimum level) to a smaller
value.If the measured number of objects is
greater than the actual number of objects,
set the edge level (or the minimum level)
to a larger value.
Edges are detected in the following way:
1. The density differentiation for the entire
measurement range is obtained.
2. The points corresponding to the maximums
and minimums that exceed the edge level
setting are detected as edges.
1.
Measurement region
100%
Edge level
20%
0%
20%
Edge level
100%
1 edge
Select Detailed conditions.
0.Edge pitch
Measurement conditions
Region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Edge level : [ 10 ]%
Min. level : [ 5 ]
End
2.
3.
Change the settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-27-(7)
Section 2-27
Edge Pitch
2-27-6
Setting the Coordinate Mode
Select the type of coordinates.
Coordinate mode
Calibration : OFF
ON:
Output made using coordinate values
set using calibration.
Output made using Camera coordinate values.
OFF*:
End
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
If the coordinate mode is changed after the judgement conditions have been
set, the measurement results will change also. Change the judgement conditions to enable correct measurement.
1.
Select Coordinate mode.
0.Edge pitch
Measurement conditions
Region
Judgement conditions
Detailed conditions
Coordinate mode
The Coordinate Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Coordinate mode
Calibration : OFF
End
2.
Make the settings for each item.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-27-(8)
Section 2-27
Edge Pitch
2-27-7
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for edge
pitch.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
NG 67ms
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Image 0 Freeze
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which edge pitch is set and
the following detailed screens will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1. Edge pitch
Judge
Number of edges
Average pitch
Average width
OK 45ms
: OK
:5
: 10.000
: 7.050
Judgement result for this Unit
Display is inverted for NG.
The measurement region is displayed
in the OK color for an OK judgement;
in the NG color for an NG judgement.
2-27-(9)
Section 2-28
Density Data
2-28
Density Data
The Density Data processing item can be used to inspect for the presence of
the measurement object.
The Density Data processing item detects the density of each pixel (0 to 255)
and calculates the density average and deviation to be used for inspection.
Because the density deviations are compared, the effects on inspection of
dark images can be reduced, e.g., when illumination deteriorates.
Example: Inspecting for the Presence of Electronic Components
Two measurement regions are set: One in the area where the electronic
component is and one on the background. The difference between these
regions is used to check for the presence of the component.
Good Product
Background
Component
Average density: 30 Average density: 200
Difference in density: 170
NG Product (Part Missing)
Component (missing) Background
Average density: 190 Average density: 200
Difference in density: 10
2-28-(1)
Section 2-28
Density Data
Operational Flow
1
page 2-28-(3)
Select measurement
image.
2
page 2-28-(4)
Draw the
measurement
region.
3
page 2-28-(6)
Set the
judgement
conditions.
4
page 2-28-(7)
Measurement
screens
2-28-(2)
Section 2-28
Density Data
2-28-1
Selecting the Measurement Image
This section describes how to select an image stored at either Image 0 or
Image 1 as the image for measurement.
1.
Select Density data.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Density data
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial screen for Density Data will be displayed.
Measurement image
Region
Judgement conditions
2.
Select Measurement image.
The selections will be displayed.
Measurement image
Image0
Image1
3.
4.
Select which image will be used for measurement, the image stored at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-28-(3)
Section 2-28
Density Data
2-28-2
Drawing Measurement Regions
Draw the region for which the density is to be found.
CHECK
Regions can be created by combining up to 3 different figures. Regions with
difficult shapes can be drawn and sections not to be measured can be left out
of the region by combining different figures.
1.
Select Region.
Measurement image
Region
Judgement conditions
The Region Settings Screen will be displayed.
Region
New
EBox
Ellipse OR
Circle NOT
Circumference
Polygon
2.
Select New.
3.
Select the shape of the desired figure.
4.
Select the desired drawing mode (OR/NOT).
An arrow cursor will appear.
Up to three figures (0, 1, and 2) can be drawn.
Region
5.
[0]
262,231
Draw a figure in the region to be used as the measurement region.
The figure will be registered.
Once three figures have been drawn,
Add will no longer be displayed.
Region
Add
Figure0
End
2-28-(4)
Section 2-28
Density Data
6.
If additional figures are to be drawn, select Add.
7.
Repeat steps 4 to 6 as necessary to create the desired shape.
8.
After drawing is completed, select End.
The measurement region will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return. The measurement region will be displayed with a + cursor at the center of gravity.
Figure 1 (drawn using OR)
Figure 2 (drawn using NOT)
Figure 3 (drawn using OR)
CHECK
Figures drawn using OR mode are displayed with solid lines and figures
drawn using NOT mode are displayed with dotted lines.
Correcting or Clearing Figures
1. In the screen for step 5 above, select the figure to be changed or cleared
using the Up and Down Keys and press the ENT Key.
Figure 0 Figure 1
Region
Add
Figure0
Figure1
End
The figure for the figure number selected using the cursor will be displayed
with solid lines. The selections Correct and Clear will be displayed.
Correct
Clear
2.
Select either Correct or Clear and press the ENT Key.
If Correct is selected, the cursor will be displayed. Correct the size and position of the figure as desired.
If Clear is selected, the selected figure will be cleared.
2-28-(5)
Section 2-28
Density Data
2-28-3
Setting Judgement Conditions
Set the average density and density deviation range for an OK judgement.
Judgement coordinate
Range for an OK judgement
Density average : 39.945
[ 0.000 : 255.000]
Density deviation : 31.376.
[ 0.000 : 127.000]
Average density range (0.000 to 255.000)
Density deviation range (0.000 to 127.000)
End
: Measurement results for the displayed image.
Use these values as a reference for setting upper and lower limits.
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
Measurement image
Region
Judgement conditions
The Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions
Density average : 39.945
[ 0.000 : 255.000]
Density deviation : 31.376.
[ 0.000 : 255.000]
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-28-(6)
Section 2-28
Density Data
2-28-4
Measurement Screens
Detailed measurement values can be displayed on the screen in Monitor and
Run modes. These values are useful when adjusting measurement conditions.
This section describes what kind of information can be displayed for density
data.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,210RQLWRU0RGHDQG5XQ0RGH for details on Monitor and
Run modes.
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the Run Screen to access the following screen
and change Display results to Details.
0.Scn 0
RUN
NG 67ms
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
Image 0 Freeze
Use the Up or Down Key to change to the unit for which density data is set
and the following detailed screens will be displayed.
0.Scn 0 RUN
1. Density data
OK 45ms
Judge
: OK
Density average : 100.000
Density deviation : 0.000
Judgement result for this Unit
Display is inverted for NG.
The measurement region is displayed
in the OK color for an OK judgement;
in the NG color for an NG judgement.
2-28-(7)
Section 2-29
Calculation
2-29
Calculation
The Calculation processing item is used to perform calculations using the
results and measurement values for the processing items registered to the
units.
Example: Finding the Width of a Measurement Object
Two edge positions are found beforehand. An expression for calculating the
difference between the two edge positions is set and this expression is used to
find the width.
Finding this width
Region 0
Region 1
Edge positions
Edge positions
Width = region 0 edge position - region 1 edge position.
If combined with conditional branching, the inspection conditions can be
changed based on the calculation result.
Edge position
Edge position
Set an expression to find the width.
Calculation
Conditional branch
Calculation result: NG
End
Calculation result: OK
Pattern inspection
2-29-(1)
Section 2-29
Calculation
2-29-1
Select Reflection in Overall Judgement
It is possible to select whether or not the judgement result of the calculation
will be reflected in the overall judgement output on the parallel interface OR
signal.
CHECK
The overall judgement is also displayed on the Monitor and Measurement
Screens.
The overall judgement can be set to not be displayed also by using the display
settings function.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6FUHHQ'LVSOD\DQG0RQLWRU.
0.Scn 0
1.
OK 67ms
MON
Select Calculation.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Edge position
4.Calculation
5.
The list of set expressions will be displayed.
4.Calculation
Conditions
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
Select Conditions.
The Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Conditions
Reflect in overall judge : OFF
End
3.
4.
Change the setting.
Select End.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-29-(2)
Section 2-29
Calculation
2-29-2
Setting Expressions
Up to 8 expressions (0 to 7) can be set for one unit.
Calculation number
Calculation 0 to 7
Calculation0.
U2.R00X-U2.R01X
Measurement :
Upper
: [
Lower
: [
Expression
Measurement result for the set expression
Refer to this when setting judgement conditions.
578908.965
600000.000]
550000.000]
Judgement conditions
Set the judgement conditions for the expression.
Set the OK range (-9999999.999 to 9999999.999).
ENT:Change
CHECK
The calculation result is not output to an external device. Select the result output processing items for results output if the calculation result needs to be output to an external device.
SeeAlso
Refer to 0HPRU\&DUG'DWD, '2'DWD, '2-XGJHPHQW, +RVW/LQN'DWD, and 1RUPDO'DWD.
CHECK
SeeAlso
The calculation results can be set to be reflected in the overall result.
Refer to page 2-29-(2).
1.
Select Calculation.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Edge position
4.Calculation
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The list of calculation settings will be displayed.
4.Calculation
Conditions
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
2-29-(3)
Section 2-29
Calculation
2.
Select the number to which the expression is to be set.
The Expression Settings Screen will be displayed.
Calculation0.
Measurement :
Upper
: [
Lower
: [
0.000]
0.000]
ENT:Change
3.
Place the cursor inside the square brackets for the formula and press the
ENT Key.
A list of items will be displayed.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-29-(7) for the list of items.
Calculation0.
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
4.
Select the item to be set.
(This explanation will be based on the selection of unit.)
The units set to the scene currently displayed will be displayed.
Calculation0.
ABS SIN
0. Camera
COS
MOD
image
1. BinaryMAX
ANGL
pos. comp
2. Edge MIN
ATAN
position
3. Edge SQRT
DIST
position
Const 4. Calculation
DEL BS
Unit
AND
OR
NOT
OK
ENT:Select
5.
Select the unit to be set.
A submenu will be displayed.
The submenu will depend on the unit that was selected.
2-29-(4)
Section 2-29
Calculation
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-29-(9) for information on submenus.
Calculation0.
Judge
JG
Judge0
SIN
ABS R00JG
EdgeMOD
pos.0
R00X
0. Camera
COS
image
EdgeMAX
pos.0
R00Y
1. Binary
ANGL
pos. comp
Reference0
R00SX
2. Edge
ATAN
MIN
position
Reference0
R00SY
3. Edge
DIST
SQRT
position
Judge1
R01JG
Const 4. Calculation
EdgeDEL
pos.1 R01X
BS
Unit
AND
OR
NOT
OK
ENT:Select
6.
Select the required items from the submenu.
The selected items will be displayed in the expression.
Selected item
Calculation0.
U2.R00X
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
7.
Repeat this operation to create the expression.
8.
Once the expression has been completed, select OK.
The expression will be saved.
Calculation0.
U2.R00X-U2.R01X
Measurement :
Upper
: [
Lower
: [
0.000
0.000]
0.000]
ENT:Change
9.
Set the upper and lower limits for judgement.
10. Press the ESC Key.
2-29-(5)
Section 2-29
Calculation
The settings will be registered.
4.Calculation
Conditions
0 . U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
CHECK
The expression can be copied or cleared by pressing the SHIFT + ESC
Keys on this screen.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-29-(6) and page 2-29-(7).
11. Repeat steps 2 to 10 to set the expressions.
12. Once the expressions have been set, press the ESC Key.
The screen in (1.) will return.
Copying Expressions
The copy function is useful when using the expression again elsewhere or
using the same expression with only one part changed.
If relative information is set for an expression, that information too will be copied.
1.
Use the Up and Down Keys to select the number to which the copy is to
be made from the calculation settings list then press the SHIFT + ESC
Keys.
4.Calculation
Conditions
0 . U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
The selections will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
2.
Select Copy.
The Original Calculation Selection Screen will be displayed.
Original :Calculation 1
Execute
3.
Select the number of the expression to be copied.
4.
Select Execute.
The selected expression will be copied and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-29-(6)
Section 2-29
Calculation
Clearing Expressions
1.
Use the Up and Down Keys to select the number of the expression to be
cleared from the calculation settings list then press the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
4.Calculation
Conditions
0 . U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
The selections will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Expression will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The expression will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
List of Items
Note 1
Note 2
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
Note 3
AND
SIN
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
Moves the cursor.
OK
Sets the expression.
Deletes the items.
DEL: Deletes the item to the right of the cursor.
BS: Deletes the item to the left of the cursor.
Numerals between 0 and 9,999,999.999 can be set.
Note
1.
Unit
Calculations can be performed using the measurement results for the units
set to the scene currently displayed.
If this item is selected, the unit numbers and processing item names will be
displayed. Select the unit number and then select the measurement item
to be used in the calculation from the submenu that is displayed.
CHECK
The submenus differ depending on the selected unit. Refer to page 2-29(9).
2-29-(7)
Section 2-29
Calculation
2.
Arithmetic Operators
Operators
3.
Meaning
+
Addition
-
Subtraction
*
Multiplication
/
Real number division
Functions
Function
ABS
Meaning
Calculates the absolute value.
ABS(argument)
MOD
Calculates the remainder when a number is divided by an ordinal
number.
MOD(dividend, ordinal number)
When multiplication and division are performed and real numbers
are used, the real numbers are rounded off to the nearest integer.
The result is the remainder from the division of the integer.
Examples
MOD(13, 4) = 1 (Remainder when 13 is divided by 4.)
MOD(25.68, 6.99) = 5 (Remainder when 26 is divided by 7.)
MAX
Gives the larger of two arguments.
MAX(argument 1, argument 2)
MIN
Gives the smaller of two arguments.
MIN(argument 1, argument 2)
SQRT
Calculates the square root. If the argument is negative, the calculation result will be 0 and the judgement will be NG.
SQRT(argument)
SIN
Calculates the sine. The result will be given between -1 and 1.
The angle in the expression is specified in degrees.
SIN(expression)
COS
Calculates the cosine. The result will be given between -1 and 1.
The angle in the expression is specified in degrees.
COS(expression)
ANGL
Calculates the angle between a straight line joining two points,
such as the center of gravity or the center of a model, and a horizontal line. The result will be in the range -180 to 180•.
ANGL(Y component, X component)
Example: Set the following to calculate the angle between the
straight line joining the center of gravity for region 0 and the center of gravity for region 1 and a horizontal line.
ANGL(R1.Y-R0.Y,R1.X-R0.X)
Horizontal line
First point
Second point
If both arguments are 0, the result will also be 0 and the judgement will be NG.
2-29-(8)
Section 2-29
Calculation
Function
ATAN
Meaning
Calculates the arc tangent for the Y component/X component.
The result is given as a radian of -pi to pi.
ATAN(Y component, X component)
Example: Set the following to calculate the angle between a
straight line joining the center of gravity for region 0 and the center of gravity for region 1 and a horizontal line.
ATAN(R1.Y-R0.Y,R1.X-R0.X)
If both arguments are 0, the calculation result will also be 0 and
the judgement will be NG.
DIST
Calculates the distance between two points, such as the center of
gravity and the center of the model.
DIST(X coordinate of first point, Y coordinate of first point, X coordinate of second point, Y coordinate of second point)
Example: Set the following to calculate the distance between the
center of gravity for region 0 and center of gravity for region 1.
DIST(R0.X,R0.Y,R1.X,R1.Y)
The following calculation is performed internally.
2
( R1.X – R0.X ) + ( R1.Y – R0.Y )
AND
2
Calculates the LOGICAL AND.
If one of the arguments is 0, the calculation result will be 0. Other
arguments will give -1.
AND(argument 1, argument 2)
OR
Calculates the LOGICAL OR.
If both arguments are 0, the calculation result will be 0. Other
arguments will give -1.
OR(argument 1, argument 2)
NOT
Calculates the LOGICAL NOT.
If the argument is 0, the calculation result will be -1. Otherwise it
will be 0.
NOT(argument)
Submenus
The following table shows the processing items that can be used in calculations.
Classification
Position compensation items
Processing item
Page
Binary position compensation
page 2-29-(11)
EC position compensation
page 2-29-(11)
Edge position compensation
page 2-29-(13)
Model position compensation
page 2-29-(13)
Circle position compensation
page 2-29-(14)
Scroll
page 2-29-(14)
2-29-(9)
Section 2-29
Calculation
Classification
Measurement
items
Measurement
support items
Processing item
Page
Binary defect inspection
page 2-29-(15)
Classification
page 2-29-(15)
Density defect inspection
page 2-29-(16)
EC defect inspection
page 2-29-(17)
EC positioning
page 2-29-(18)
Gray edge positioning
page 2-29-(19)
Fine matching
page 2-29-(19)
EC circle count inspection
page 2-29-(19)
Pattern inspection
page 2-29-(19)
QUEST character verification
page 2-29-(20)
Rotation positioning
page 2-29-(20)
ECM search
page 2-29-(20)
Lot No. OCV1
page 2-24-(1)
Labeling
page 2-25-(1)
Label data
page 2-26-(1)
Edge pitch
page 2-27-(1)
Density data
page 2-28-(1)
Calculation
page 2-29-(22)
Elapsed time
page 2-29-(22)
Get Unit data
page 2-29-(22)
Set Unit data
page 2-29-(22)
Trend Monitor
page 2-29-(22)
Branching control items
Conditional branching
page 2-29-(23)
DI input branching
page 2-29-(23)
Results output
items
Memory Card data output
page 2-29-(23)
DO data output
page 2-29-(23)
Results display
items
DO judgement output
page 2-29-(23)
Host link data output
page 2-29-(23)
Normal data output
page 2-29-(23)
Display measure
page 2-29-(23)
Display judgement
page 2-29-(24)
Display line
page 2-29-(24)
Display box
page 2-29-(24)
Display circle
page 2-29-(24)
Display cursor
page 2-29-(24)
How to Read Displays
Each measurement item shows the region number when there are multiple
measurement regions for a processing item.
Judgement
R
JG
Region number
Example: Reference position (X coordinate) for region 3
Reference position 3R03SX
2-29-(10)
Section 2-29
Calculation
Binary Position Compensation
Measurement item
Judgement JG
Details
For unit
Judgement result
Scroll X DX
Compensation in X direction for measurement result
Scroll Y DY
Compensation in Y direction for measurement result
Scroll q DT
Compensation angle for measurement
result
Measurement X X
X coordinate for measurement result
Measurement Y Y
Y coordinate for measurement result
Measurement angle TH
Angle for measurement result
Judgement @ R▲ JG
For region @ Judgement result
Gravity @ R▲ X
Gravity X coordinate for measurement
result
Gravity @ R▲Y
Gravity Y coordinate for measurement
result
Axis angle @ R▲TH
Axis angle for measurement result
Area @ R▲AR
Area for measurement result
Reversed area @ R▲RA
Difference between area of measurement region and area for measured
result
Reference position @ R▲SX
X coordinate for reference position
Reference position @ R▲SY
Y coordinate for reference position
Reference axis @ R▲ST
Axis angle when measurement region
drawn
Reference area @ R▲SA
Area when measurement region drawn
@: Region number (0 or 1)
▲ : Region number (00 or 01)
EC Position Compensation
Measurement item
Judgement JG
Details
For unit
Judgement result
Scroll X DX
Compensation in X direction for measurement result
Scroll Y DY
Compensation in Y direction for measurement result
Scroll q DT
Compensation angle for measurement
result
Measurement X X
X coordinate for measurement result
Measurement Y Y
Y coordinate for measurement result
Measurement angle TH
Angle for measurement result
2-29-(11)
Section 2-29
Calculation
Measurement item
Judgement @ R▲JG
Details
For region @ Judgement result
Search position @ R▲X
Y coordinate for where mark found.
Search angle @ R▲TH
Angle where mark found.
Reference position @ R▲SX
X coordinate for reference position
Reference position @ R▲SY
Y coordinate for reference position
Axis reference @ R▲ST
Reference angle (cross point, box, multiple cross points)
Radius @ R▲R
Radius of measured circle (for circles)
Circular value @ R▲CV
Evaluation results for measured circle
(for circles)
Line length @ R▲L1
Length of measured edge 1 (for cross
points and multiple cross points)
Line length @ R▲L2
Length of measured edge 2 (for cross
points and multiple cross points)
Apex @ R▲PX1
X coordinate of measured upper left corner (for boxes)
Apex @ R▲PY1
Y coordinate of measured upper left corner (for boxes)
Apex @ R▲PX2
X coordinate of measured lower left corner (for boxes)
Apex @ R▲PY2
Y coordinate of measured lower left corner (for boxes)
Apex @ R▲PX3
X coordinate of measured upper right
corner (for boxes)
Apex @ R▲PY3
Y coordinate of measured upper right
corner (for boxes)
Apex @ R▲PX4
X coordinate of measured lower right
corner (for boxes)
Apex @ R▲PY4
Y coordinate of measured lower right
corner (for boxes)
@: Region number (0 or 1)
▲: Region number (00 or 01)
2-29-(12)
X coordinate for where mark found.
Search position @ R▲Y
Section 2-29
Calculation
Edge Position Compensation
Measurement item
Judgement JG
Details
For unit
Judgement result
Scroll X DX
Compensation in X direction for measurement result
Scroll Y DY
Compensation in Y direction for measurement result
Scroll q DT
Compensation angle for measurement
result
Measurement X X
X coordinate for measurement result
Measurement Y Y
Y coordinate for measurement result
Measurement angle TH
Angle for measurement result
Judgement @ R▲JG
For region @ Judgement result
Edge position @ R▲X
X coordinate for measured edge position
Edge position @ R▲Y
Y coordinate for measured edge position
Reference position @ R▲SX
X coordinate for reference position
Reference position @ R▲SY
Y coordinate for reference position
@: Region number (0 or 1)
▲: Region number (00 or 01)
Model Position Compensation
Measurement item
Judgement JG
Details
For unit
Judgement result
Scroll X DX
Compensation in X direction for measurement result
Scroll Y DY
Compensation in Y direction for measurement result
Scroll q DT
Compensation angle for measurement
result
Measurement X X
X coordinate for measurement result
Measurement Y Y
Y coordinate for measurement result
Measurement angle TH
Angle for measurement result
Judgement @ R▲JG
For region @ Judgement result
Correlation @ R▲CR
Model correlation value
Search position @ R▲X
X coordinate for position where model
found
Search position @ R▲Y
Y coordinate for position where model
found
Measurement angle @ R▲TH
Angle of found model
@: Region number (0 or 1)
▲: Region number (00 or 01)
2-29-(13)
Section 2-29
Calculation
Circle Position Compensation
Measurement item
Judgement JG
Details
For unit
Judgement result
Scroll X DX
Compensation in X direction for measurement result
Scroll Y DY
Compensation in Y direction for measurement result
Scroll q DT
Compensation angle for measurement result
Measurement X X
X coordinate for measurement result
Measurement Y Y
Y coordinate for measurement result
Measurement angle TH
Angle for measurement result
Judgement @ R▲JG
For region @ Judgement result
Correlation @ R▲CR
Model correlation value
Search position @ R▲X
X coordinate for position where model found
Search position @ R▲Y
Y coordinate for position where model found
@: Region number (0 to 4)
▲: Region number (00 to 04)
Scroll
Measurement item
2-29-(14)
Details
Judgement JG
Judgement result
Scroll X DX
Compensation in X direction for measurement result
Scroll Y DY
Compensation in Y direction for measurement result
Scroll q DT
Compensation angle for measurement result
Measurement X X
X coordinate for measurement result
Measurement Y Y
Y coordinate for measurement result
Measurement angle TH
Angle for measurement result
Reference X SX
X coordinate of reference position
Reference Y SY
Y coordinate of reference position
Reference angle ST
Angle of reference position
Section 2-29
Calculation
Binary Defect Inspection
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
Judgement @ R▲JG
For region @ Judgement result
Measurement region @ R▲X1
Upper left X coordinate of measurement region
Measurement region @ R▲Y1
Upper left Y coordinate of measurement region
Measurement region @ R▲X2
Bottom right X coordinate of measurement region
Measurement region @ R▲Y2
Bottom right Y coordinate of measurement region
Gravity @ R▲X
X coordinate of center gravity for measurement result
Gravity @ R▲Y
Y coordinate of center gravity for measurement result
Axis angle @ R▲TH
Axis angle for measurement result.
Area @ R▲AR
Area for measurement result
Reversed area @ R▲RA
Difference between area measurement
value and area for measurement result
Reference position @ R▲SX
X coordinate for reference position
Reference position @ R▲SY
Y coordinate for reference position
Reference axis @ R▲ST
Axis angle when measurement region
drawn
Reference area @ R▲SA
Area when measurement region drawn
@: Region number (0 to 7)
▲: Region number (00 to 07)
Classification
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Judgement result
Search position X X
X coordinate of position where model found
Search position Y Y
Y coordinate of position where model found
Correlation CR
Correlation with model
Index IN
Number of model with highest correlation
2-29-(15)
Section 2-29
Calculation
Density Defect Inspection
Measurement item
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
Judgement @ R▲JG
For region @ Judgement result
Measurement region @ R▲X1
Upper left X coordinate of
measurement region
Measurement region @ R▲Y1
Upper left Y coordinate of
measurement region
Measurement region @ R▲X2
Bottom right X coordinate of
measurement region
Measurement region @ R▲Y2
Bottom right Y coordinate of
measurement region
Large defect @ R▲BD
Degree of large defect for
measurement result
Small defect @ R▲LD
Degree of small defect for
measurement result
Maximum density @ R▲GA
Maximum density in the measurement region
Minimum density @ R ▲GI
Minimum density in the measurement region
Deviation @ R▲DV
Density deviation for measurement result
Large defect position @ R▲BX
X coordinate of largest defect
measured
Large defect position @ R▲BY
Y coordinate of largest defect
measured
Small defect position @ R▲LX
X coordinate of smallest
defect measured
Small defect position @ R▲LY
Y coordinate of smallest
defect measured
Deviation position @ R▲VX
X coordinate of measured
deviation defect position
Deviation position @ RY▲VY
Y coordinate of measured
deviation defect position
Reference position large @ R▲SBX
X coordinate of position of
large defect when region
drawn
Reference position large @ R▲SBY
Y coordinate of position of
large defect when region
drawn
Reference position small @ R▲SLX
X coordinate of position of
small defect when region
drawn
Reference position small @ R▲SLY
Y coordinate of position of
small defect when region
drawn
Reference position deviation @ R ▲SVX
X coordinate of deviation
defect position when region
drawn
Reference position deviation @ R ▲SVX
Y coordinate of deviation
defect position when region
drawn
@: Region number (0 to 7)
▲: Region number (00 to 07)
2-29-(16)
Details
Section 2-29
Calculation
EC Defect Inspection
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
Judgement @ R▲JG
For region @ Judgement result
Defect width @ R▲SW
Defect width for measurement result
Defect length @ R▲SL
Defect length for measurement result
Gravity position @ R▲X
X coordinate of center of gravity for measurement result
Gravity position @ R▲Y
Y coordinate of center of gravity for measurement result
Area @ R▲AR
Area for measurement result
Number of Labels @
R▲DA
Number of measured labels
@: Region number (0 to7)
▲: Region number (00 to 07)
2-29-(17)
Section 2-29
Calculation
EC Positioning
Measurement items
Judgement JG
Judgement @ R▲JG
Measurement position @ R▲X
Measurement position @ R▲Y
Angle @ R▲TH
Reference position @ R▲SX
Reference position @ R▲SY
Reference angle @ R▲ST
Radius @ R▲R
Circular value @ R▲CV
Line length @ R▲L1
Line length @ R▲L2
Apex @ R▲PX1
Apex @ R▲PY1
Apex @ R▲PX2
Apex @ R▲PY2
Apex @ R▲PX3
Apex @ R▲PY3
Apex @ R▲PX4
Apex @ R▲PY4
Num. of points @ R▲CN
Cross point position @ R▲CX1
Cross point position @ R▲CY1
to
Cross point position @ R▲CXK
Cross point position @ R▲CYK
Details
Unit judgement result
For region @ Judgement result
X coordinate of position where tag
found
Y coordinate of position where tag
found
Axis angle of found tag
X coordinate for reference position
Y coordinate for reference position
Reference angle (cross point, box,
multiple cross points)
Radius of measured circle (for circles)
Evaluation results for measured circle (for circles)
Length of measured edge 1 (for
cross points and multiple cross
points)
Length of measured edge 2 (for
cross points and multiple cross
points)
X coordinate of measured upper left
corner (for boxes)
Y coordinate of measured upper left
corner (for boxes)
X coordinate of measured lower left
corner (for boxes)
Y coordinate of measured lower left
corner (for boxes)
X coordinate of measured upper
right corner (for boxes)
Y coordinate of measured upper
right corner (for boxes)
X coordinate of measured lower right
corner (for boxes)
Y coordinate of measured lower right
corner (for boxes)
Number of measured cross points
(for multiple cross points)
X coordinate of 1st measured cross
point (for multiple cross points) (See
note.)
Y coordinate of 1st measured cross
point (for multiple cross points) (See
note.)
to
X coordinate of 20th measured cross
point (for multiple cross points) (See
note.)
Y coordinate of 20th measured cross
point (for multiple cross points) (See
note.)
Note The order will be based on the sorting order set under cross point extraction
conditions (0 to 20).
@: Region number (0 to 7)
▲: Region number (00 to 07)
2-29-(18)
Section 2-29
Calculation
Edge Position
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
Judgement @ R▲JG
For region @ Judgement result
Edge position @ R▲X
X coordinate of measured edge position
Edge position @ R▲Y
Y coordinate of measured edge position
Reference position @ R▲SX
X coordinate for reference position
Reference position @ R▲SY
Y coordinate for reference position
@: Region number (0 to 7)
▲: Region number (00 to 07)
Fine Matching
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Judgement result
Quantity DA
Number of labels for measurement result
Area AR
Area for measurement result
Gravity X
X coordinate of center of gravity for measurement result
Gravity Y
Y coordinate of center of gravity for measurement result
EC Circle Count Inspection
Measurement item
Judgement JG
Details
For unit
Quantity CN
Circle center @ CX ▲
Judgement result
Number of measured circles
For region @ X coordinate of center of measured circle
Circle center @ CY ▲
Y coordinate of center of measured circle
Circle radius @ CR ▲
Radius of measured circle
Circular value @ CV ▲
Evaluation value of measured circle
@: Region number (0 to 63)
▲: Region number (00 to 63)
Pattern Inspection
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Judgement result
Judgement @ R▲JG
For region @ Judgement result
Correlation @ R▲CR
Correlation with model
Search position @ R▲X
X coordinate of position where model
found
Search position @ R▲Y
Y coordinate of position where model
found
Reference position @ R▲SX
X coordinate of reference position
Reference position @ R▲SY
Y coordinate of reference position
@: Region number (0 to 63)
▲: Region number (00 to 63)
2-29-(19)
Section 2-29
Calculation
QUEST Character Verification
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
Judgement @ R @ JG
For region @ Judgement result
Similarity R @ VO01
Similarity for character set as character 1,
line 1
Candidate 1 R @ CF01
Character code for 1st candidate for character 1, line 1
Similarity 1 R @ VF01
Similarity for 1st candidate for character 1,
line 1
Candidate 2 R @ CS01
Character code for 2nd candidate for character 1, line 1
Similarity 2 R @ VS01
Similarity for 2nd candidate for character 1,
line 1
to
to
Similarity R @ VO40
Similarity for candidate set for character 20,
line 2
Candidate 1 R @ CF40
Character code for 1st candidate for character 20, line 2
Similarity 1 R @ VF40
Similarity for 1st candidate for character 20,
line 2
Candidate 2 R @ CS40
Character code for 2nd candidate for character 20, line 2
Similarity 2 R @ VS40
Similarity for 2nd candidate for character 20,
line 2
@: Region number (0 to 3)
Rotation Positioning
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
Judgement @ R▲JG
For region @ Judgement result
Correlation @ R▲CR
Correlation with model
Search position @ R▲X
X coordinate of position where
model found
Search position @ R▲Y
Y coordinate of position where
model found
Search angle @ R▲TH
Angle of found model
Reference position @ R▲SX
X coordinate for reference position
Reference position @ R▲ SY
Y coordinate for reference position
@: Region number (0 to 7)
▲ : Region number (00 to 07)
ECM Search
Measurement item
2-29-(20)
Details
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
EC correlation CR
Correlation with model
Search position X
X coordinate of position where model found
Search position Y
Y coordinate of position where model found
Reference position SX
X coordinate of reference position
Reference position SY
Y coordinate of reference position
Section 2-29
Calculation
Lot Number OCV1
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
Judgement @ JG
Digit @
Judgement result
Candidate @ 1 CF
First candidate lot number
Similarity 1 @ VF
Similarity of first candidate lot
number
Candidate 2 @ CS
Second candidate lot number
Similarity 2 @ VS
Similarity of second candidate lot
number
Note @: Digit number (1 to 4)
Labeling
Measurement item
Details
Judge JG
Judgement result
Number of labels L
Number of labels measured
Gravity X X
X coordinate of center of gravity for measurement result
Gravity Y Y
Y coordinate of center of gravity for measurement result
Area AR
Area of measurement result
Reference X SX
X coordinate when measurement region drawn
Reference Y SY
Y coordinate when measurement region drawn
Reference area SA
Area when measurement region drawn
Displacement X DX
Difference between measured and reference X coordinate
Displacement Y DY
Difference between measured and reference Y coordinate
Difference area DA
Difference between measured area and reference area
Label Data
Measurement item
Details
Judge JG
Judgement result
Label No. LN
Measured label number
Gravity X X
X coordinate of center of gravity for measurement result
Gravity Y Y
Y coordinate of center of gravity for measurement result
Area AR
Area for measurement result
Edge Pitch
Measurement item
Judge JG
Details
Judgement result
Number of edges N
Number of detected edges
Average pitch P
Average detected edge pitch
Max. pitch PH
Maximum detected edge pitch
Min. pitch PL
Minimum detected edge pitch
Average width W
Average detected edge width
Max. width WH
Maximum detected edge width
Min. width WL
Minimum detected edge width
Density Data
Measurement item
Details
Judge JG
Judgement result
Density average AV
Average density of measurement result
Density deviation DV
Density deviation of measurement result
Reference average SA
Average density when measurement region drawn
2-29-(21)
Section 2-29
Calculation
Measurement item
Details
Reference deviation SD
Density deviation when measurement region drawn
Difference average DA
Difference between the measured and reference average
density
Difference deviation DD
Difference between the measured and reference density
deviation
Calculation
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
Data 0 D00
Result of expression set to calculation 0
Data 1 D01
Result of expression set to calculation 1
Data 2 D02
Result of expression set to calculation 2
Data 3 D03
Result of expression set to calculation 3
Data 4 D04
Result of expression set to calculation 4
Data 5 D05
Result of expression set to calculation 5
Data 6 D06
Result of expression set to calculation 6
Data 7 D07
Result of expression set to calculation 7
Judgement 0 J00
Judgement result for expression set to calculation 0
Judgement 1 J01
Judgement result for expression set to calculation 1
Judgement 2 J02
Judgement result for expression set to calculation 2
Judgement 3 J03
Judgement result for expression set to calculation 3
Judgement 4 J04
Judgement result for expression set to calculation 4
Judgement 5 J05
Judgement result for expression set to calculation 5
Judgement 6 J06
Judgement result for expression set to calculation 6
Judgement 7 J07
Judgement result for expression set to calculation 7
Elapsed Time
Measurement item
Elapsed Time TM
Details
Time since trigger input
Get Unit Data
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Judgement result
Acquired Data DT
Obtained unit data
Set Unit Data
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Judgement result
Data DT
Calculation result for set data
Trend Monitor
Measurement item
2-29-(22)
Details
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
Measurement DT
Latest measurement
Warning WN
Warnings generated (0: No, -1: Yes)
Maximum value MX
Maximum measurement value for recording interval
Minimum value MN
Minimum measurement value for recording interval
Average AV
Average measurement value for recording interval
Normal deviation DV
Deviation in measurement results since measurement
started
Section 2-29
Calculation
Measurement item
Details
Measure count MC
Number of measurements since measurement started
NG count NC
Number of NG results for the number of measurements
Warning count WC
Number of warnings for the number of measurements
Conditional Branching
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
Data A D0
Result of expression set to data A
Data B D1
Result of expression set to data B
Value RS
Comparative expression result
Branch destination BU
Number of the unit that was branched to
DI Input Branching
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
DI data DI
DI input value
Branch destination BU
Number of the unit that was branched to
Memory Card Data Output, DO Data Output, Host Link Data Output, and
Normal Data Output
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
Data 0 D00
Result of expression set to output number 0
Data 1 D01
Result of expression set to output number 1
Data 2 D02
Result of expression set to output number 2
Data 3 D03
Result of expression set to output number 3
Data 4 D04
Result of expression set to output number 4
Data 5 D05
Result of expression set to output number 5
Data 6 D06
Result of expression set to output number 6
Data 7 D07
Result of expression set to output number 7
DO Judgement Output
Measurement item
Details
Judgement JG
Unit judgement result
Data 0 D00
Result of expression set to output number 0
Data 1 D01
Result of expression set to output number 1
to
Data 30 D30
Result of expression set to output number 30
Data 31 D31
Result of expression set to output number 1
Judgement 0 J00
Judgement result for expression set to output number 0
Judgement 1 J01
Judgement result for expression set to output number 1
to
Judgement 30 J30
Judgement result for expression set to output number 30
Judgement 31 J31
Judgement result for expression set to output number 31
Measurement Value Display
Measurement item
Measurement data DT
Details
Result of set expression
2-29-(23)
Section 2-29
Calculation
Judgement Character Display
Measurement item
Details
Display judgement DJ
Displayed judgement result characters
Measurement data DT Result of set expression
Line Result Display and Box Result Display
Measurement item
1st point X X1
Details
Result of expression set to 1st point X
1st point Y Y1
Result of expression set to 1st point Y
2nd point X X2
Result of expression set to 2nd point X
2nd point Y Y2
Result of expression set to 2nd point Y
Circle Result Display
Measurement item
Center X X
Details
Result of expression set to center X
Center Y Y
Result of expression set to center Y
Radius R
Result of expression set to radius
Display Cursor Results Display
Measurement item
Details
X coordinate X
Result of expression set to X coordinate
Y coordinate Y
Result of expression set to Y coordinate
Judgment JG
When unit judgement results are used in expressions, the following two-stage
judgement is performed.
1.
Judgement based on judgement conditions set for each unit
As a result, “0.000” (OK) or “-1.000” (NG) is output to the measurement result.
2.
Judgement of the measurement result from (1) based on the upper and
lower judgement limits for that screen
Example 1: Calculation Using Judgement Result for Unit 0
Calculation0.
U0.JG
Measurement :
Upper
: [
Lower
: [
ENT:Change
2-29-(24)
0.000
0.000]
0.000]
Unit 0 judgement result
Judgement value displayed based
on judgement conditions for unit 0
(0:000: OK; -1.000:NG)
Judgement conditions for U0.JG
Set both upper and lower
judgement limits to 0.000 to have
only 0.000 give an OK result.
Section 2-29
Calculation
Example 2: Calculation Using Judgement Results for Unit 0 and Unit 1
Calculation0.
U0.JG+U1.JG
Measurement :
Upper
: [
Lower
: [
0.000
0.000]
0.000]
ENT:Change
If set to “0.000”, the following
evaluations will occur:
If both OK: Measurement value 0.000
and judgement OK.
If either one is NG: Measurement
value is -1.000 and judgement is NG.
If both are NG: Measurement value is
-2.000 and judgement is NG.
Calculations Using Other Expression Values
The expression values set in a calculation unit can be used for other calculations. The calculation result for the expression being used will be D00 to D07
and the judgement result for the expression will be J01 to J07.
Example for the Following Scene Settings
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Pattern
2.Pattern
3.Calculation
4.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
Example 1: Finding the reference position distance and measurement result
distance using pattern inspection and outputting the difference
Region 0 for unit 1
Region 0 for unit 2
2-29-(25)
Section 2-29
Calculation
The settings for the expression are shown in the following diagram.
Calculation0.
DIST(U1.R00SX,U1.R00SY,
U2.R00SX,U2.R00SY)
Calculation1.
DIST(U1.R00X,U1.R00Y,U2.R00X,
U2.R00Y)
Measurement :
Upper
:[
Lower
:[
Measurement :
Upper
:[
Lower
:[
158.121
180.000]
130.000]
ENT:Change
Set an expression to find the distance between
two reference position points.
158.121
180.000]
130.000]
ENT:Change
Set an expression to find the distance
between two measurement position points.
Calculation2.
U3.D01-U3.D00
Substituted with calculation 1 and
calculation 0 results
ENT:Change
Finds the difference between calculation 0 and calculation 1.
CHECK
Expressions are calculated in the order shown in the following diagram.
When using the calculation results from another expression, set the calculation number to a value larger than the number of the calculation for which the
results are being used. If a smaller number is set, the result of a previous calculation will be inserted instead of the results of the latest calculation.
Calculation order
Calculation 0
↓
Calculation 1
...
↓
↓
Calculation 7
2-29-(26)
Section 2-29
Calculation
To find the distance between the 2 measurement region points in example 1
and then add 120.25 to that value.
Calculation0.
DIST(U1.R00X,U1.R00Y,U2.R00X,
U2.R00Y)
Measurement :
Upper
:[
Lower
:[
158.121
180.000]
130.000]
Calculation1.
U3.D00+120.25
Measurement :
Upper
:[
Lower
:[
Find the distance between 2 points.
Add 120.25 to the result for calculation 0.
158.121
180.000]
130.000]
If the expression was set in the reverse order
Calculation0.
U3.D01+120.25
Measurement :
Upper
:[
Lower
:[
Calculation 0 would be calculated before
calculation 1 and the previous calculation
result for U3.D01 would be used.
158.121
180.000]
130.000]
Calculation1.
DIST(U1.R00X,U1.R00Y,U2.R00X,
U2.R00Y)
Measurement :
Upper
:[
Lower
:[
158.121
180.000]
130.000]
Example 2: Counting the number of measurements
Calculation0.
U3.D00+1
Measurement :
Upper
:[
Lower
:[
0.000
0.000]
0.000]
ENT:Change
CHECK
U3.D00 will return to “0” if the measurement value is cleared or the power is
turned OFF so the count of the number of measurements will also be reset.
2-29-(27)
Section 2-30
Elapsed Time
2-30
Elapsed Time
The Elapsed Time processing item finds the amount of time (in ms) that has
passed since the measurement trigger was input.
All that is necessary is to set the Time processing item for a unit. No other settings are required.
The processing time can then be calculated by setting the Elapsed Time processing item for units before and after other units, and then using the Calculation processing item to find the time.
Example 1: Finding the Processing Time for A Particular Unit
1.
Elapsed Time
2.
EC defect
3.
Elapsed Time
4.
If an expression to find [3.Elapsed Time] - [1.Elapsed
Time] is set, the processing time between units 2 and 3
can be found.
Calculation
Example 2: Stopping Measurement if Processing Time Exceeds Set Time
The settings are combined with conditional branching.
1.
Model position
compensation
2.
Elapsed Time
3.
Branching condition:
Time ˆ 100 “ Unit 4
Time > 100 “ Unit 7
Branch
7.
4.
EC defect
5.
DO judgement
6.
End
2-30-(1)
End
Section 2-31
Get Unit Data
2-31
Get Unit Data
The Get Unit Data processing item is used to obtain one piece of processing
item data (measurement result, settings parameter, etc.) set in a flowchart.
Example: Obtaining Binary Level Automatically Set for QUEST Character
Verification
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.QUEST OCV
2.Get unit data
3.
Unit: [1. Quest OCV]
Data: [903] (Lower limit of binary level
Set the data to be obtained.
Item
Details
Unit
Select the number of the unit for which the processing item data is
to be obtained.
Data
Select the number of the data to be obtained. The data number
will differ between processing items.
The data numbers are the same as for UNITDATA for serial interfaces (Normal).
1.
Select Get unit data.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.QUEST OCV
2.Get unit data
3.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
Data no. will be displayed.
Data no.
2.
Press the ENT Key.
The screen for selecting the unit and data numbers will be displayed.
Unit : 1.QUEST OCV
Data : [903]
End
2-31-(1)
Section 2-31
Get Unit Data
3.
4.
Make the unit and data number settings.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-31-(2)
Section 2-32
Wait
2-32
Wait
The Wait processing item temporarily stops the execution of the flowchart and
holds processing for a set time. The wait time is set in ms.
Example
Measurement at one place
Wait processing item used to hold
processing during the time required
Camera moved
Measurement at another place
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary defect
2.Wait
3.Camera image
4.EC defect
5.
Once the processing has been
held for the set time, the
processing starts for the next unit.
1.
Select Wait.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary defect
2.Wait
3.Camera image
4.EC defect
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The Waiting Time Settings screen will be displayed.
Waiting time : [
0]ms
End
2.
3.
Set the waiting time to 0 ms or longer (0 to 9999).
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-32-(1)
Section 2-33
Set Unit Data
2-33
Set Unit Data
The Set Unit Data processing item is used to replace data during measurement with processing item data (e.g., set parameters) set in the flowchart.
Example: Adjusting Search Regions According to Measurement Object Size
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Edge position
2.Set unit data
3.Set unit data
4.Set unit data
5.Set unit data
6.Classification
7.
• Detects outline of measurement object in regions 0 to 3 of [1. Edge position].
• Adjusts the search region for [6. Classification] based on that result.
Upper left Y coordinate for search region for [6. Classification]
replaced with the detected Y coordinate.
Region 1
Region 0
Upper left X coordinate for
search region for [6.
Classification] replaced with
the detected X coordinate.
A
Region 3
Region 2
Lower right X coordinate for
search region for [6.
Classification] replaced with
the detected X coordinate.
Lower right Y coordinate for search region for [6. Classification]
replaced with the detected Y coordinate.
2-33-(1)
Section 2-33
Set Unit Data
2-33-1
Selecting Unit and Data Numbers
Select the unit number and data number to be replaced. The data number allocations differ for each processing item. The data numbers are the same, however, as the serial interface (Normal) UNITDATA.
SeeAlso
Refer to 1RUPDO6HULDO,QWHUIDFH (Normal).
1.
Select Set unit data.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Edge position
2.Set unit data
3.Classification
4.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The initial Set Unit Data Screen will be displayed.
Data no.
Data
2.
Select Data no.
The screen for setting unit and data numbers will be displayed.
Unit : 3.Classification
Data : [ 16]
End
3.
Set the unit and data numbers.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-33-(2)
Section 2-33
Set Unit Data
2-33-2
Setting the Replacement Details
Set an expression for the data to be replaced.
1.
Select Data.
2.Set unit data
Data no.
Data
The Expression Settings Screen will be displayed.
Data
Measurement:
ENT:Change
2.
Place the cursor in the square brackets and press the ENT Key.
The list of setting items will be displayed.
Data
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
3.
Select the desired items and write the expression.
Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ.
SeeAlso
4.
Once the expression has been set, select OK.
The expression will be saved and the second screen in (1.) will return.
Data
U1.R00X
Measurement : 126.312
5.
Press the ESC Key.
The settings will be registered and the first screen in (1.) will return.
2-33-(3)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
2-34
Trend Monitor
The Trend Monitor processing item is used to display the measurement results
history on the Monitor. Observation of the measurement value trends helps to
prevent frequent occurrences of non-conforming articles and to find the cause
of NG results when they occur.
Measurement results over time are shown on a graph.
The latest 1,000 measurement results are held.
Judgement upper limit
450.000
Warning range (upper limit)
400.000
Warning range (lower limit)
Judgement lower limit
350.000
Warning
Feedback can be provided to earlier processes by setting the warning
range and sounding a warning before too many NG results occur.
2-34-(1)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
Operational Flow
1
page 2-34-(3)
Select measurement
value to be
displayed.
2
page 2-34-(5)
Set warning range
and judgement
conditions.
3
page 2-34-(8)
Perform
measurement.
4
(As required) page 2-34-(11)
Change graph
display range.
5
(As required) page 2-34-(14)
Change detailed
conditions.
6
(As required) page 2-34-(16)
Reference NG
results.
7
(As required) page 2-34-(18)
Save measurement
data.
2-34-(2)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
2-34-1
Selecting Measurement Values to be Displayed
Select the measurement values that are to be displayed on the Trend Monitor.
The measurement values are set using expressions. One item can be displayed for each Trend Monitor unit.
Measurement
U1.X
Expression
Select the value to be displayed on the
Trend Monitor.
Measurement : 379.000
Measurement result for the set expression
Use as reference when setting judgment
conditions.
ENT:Change
1.
Select Trend monitor.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Classification
2.Density defect
3.Trend monitor
4.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The settings selections will be displayed.
Measurement
Judgement conditions
Display range
Detailed conditions
NG display
Save data
2.
Select Measurement.
The Measurement Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement
Measurement :
ENT:Change
2-34-(3)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
3.
Place the cursor in the square brackets for the expression and press the
ENT Key.
A list of expression items will be displayed.
Measurement
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Change
4.
Select the items to be set.
Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ.
SeeAlso
CHECK
When setting unit, select the unit number before the Trend Monitor. The
trend graph will not be displayed if later unit numbers are selected.
5.
Once the expression has been set, select OK.
The expression will be saved and the screen in (2.) will return.
Measurement
U1.X
Measurement:
379.000
ENT:Change
6.
Press the ESC Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-34-(4)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
2-34-2
Setting Warning Ranges and Judgement Conditions
Set the judgement conditions for determining if a measurement result will be
OK or NG and set the warning range to encourage caution before too many
NG results are obtained. There are two setting methods: Parameter and
Graph.
Judgement conditions(Graph)
Upper judgement limit
NG
Warning
Warning range (upper limit)
Warning range (lower limit)
Warning
Lower judgement limit
NG
CHECK
SeeAlso
CHECK
A warning count can be specified to set the number of times the measurement
value must consecutively enter the warning range before a warning is generated.
Refer to page 2-34-(14).
When a warning is generated, the word Warning appears on the screen.
If an expression is set to output the Trend Monitor measurement result (warning) using DO Judgement Output or other results output processing items, an
external device can be notified that a warning was generated.
Parameter
Use parameters to set the upper and lower judgement limits and the warning
range.
Judgement conditions(Parameter)
Lower judgement limit
Upper judgement limit
Limits of judgement :
[
346.500:
Limits of warning :
[
365.750:
423.500]
404.250]
Warning range (upper limit)
End
Warning range (lower limit)
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
3.Trend monitor
Measurement
Judgement conditions
Display range
Detailed conditions
NG display
Save data
2-34-(5)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
The Parameter and Graph setting method selections will be displayed.
Parameter
Graph
2.
Select Parameter.
The Parameter Judgement Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judgement conditions(Parameter)
Limits of judgement :
[
346.500:
Limits of warning :
[
365.750:
423.500]
404.250]
End
3.
4.
Set the judgement and warning conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Graph
Move lines on the graph to set the upper and lower judgement limits and the
warning range.
CHECK
SeeAlso
Actual measurements can be executed and the measurement values displayed on a graph to be used as a guide when setting lines here.
Refer to page 2-34-(8).
1.
Select Judgement conditions.
3.Trend monitor
Measurement
Judgement conditions
Display range
Detailed conditions
NG display
Save data
The Parameter and Graph setting method selections will be displayed.
Parameter
Graph
2.
2-34-(6)
Select Graph.
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
The graph will be displayed.
Judgement conditions(Graph)
450.000
400.000
350.000
Set
Judge:
Warn :
CHECK
-365.500 to
-385.550 to
Disp.200
423.500
404.250
The scale of the vertical axis in the graph and the display range are automatically set based on the measurement values for the displayed image.
Press the SHIFT + ESC Keys to move to the screen for changing the display range.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-34-(11).
3.
Use the Up and Down Keys to specify the line to be changed and press
the ENT Key.
The cursor will change to a vertical movement cursor.
Judgement conditions(Graph)
450.000
400.000
350.000
Set
Judge:
Warn :
4.
-365.500 to
-385.550 to
Disp.200
423.500
404.250
Use the Up and Down Keys to move the line and press the ENT Key to set
the position.
The setting will be registered.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change other lines on the graph.
Judgement conditions(Graph)
450.000
400.000
350.000
Set
Judge:
Warn :
5.
-365.500 to
-385.550 to
Disp.200
423.500
404.250
Select Set.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-34-(7)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
2-34-3
Performing Measurement
Perform an actual measurement and display the Trend Monitor.
NG 45ms
0.Scn 0 RUN
2.Trend monitor
500.000
Measurement values are displayed on
the graph.
450.000
400.000
Disp.200
Meas. : 226.000
Judge : NG
Warning
The latest measurement value is
displayed.
Warning will be displayed only when a
warning has been generated.
The latest judgement result is displayed.
1.
Enter Monitor or Run modes.
0.Scn 0
2.
---- --ms
RUN
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
The screen for changing display data will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
---- --ms
RUN
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
2-34-(8)
3.
Change Display results to Details.
4.
Select End.
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
The settings will be registered and the Details Screen will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
RUN
---- --ms
0.Camera image
Judge :
5.
6.
Press the Down Key to display the unit to which the Trend Monitor is set.
Execute the measurement.
The measurement result will be displayed on a graph.
CHECK
Measurement Screens
Press the Shift + Right/Left Keys to display following three graphs in order.
1.
200 Measurement Results Display
0.Scn 0 RUN
3.Trend monitor
NG 45ms
450.000
400.000
350.000
Meas. : 226.000
Judge : NG
Warning
2.
Disp.200
1,000 Measurement Results Display
0.Scn 0 RUN
3.Trend monitor
NG 45ms
450.000
400.000
350.000
Disp.1000
Meas. : 226.000
Judge : NG
Warning
2-34-(9)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
3.
Statistics
0.Scn 0 RUN
3.Trend monitor
Statistic
Maximum : 409.250
Minimum :
86.000
Average : 140.564
Deviation :
68.208
Measure count : 1251
: 808
NG count
Warning count : 685
2-34-(10)
NG 45ms
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
2-34-4
Changing Graph Display Ranges
If the section required is not displayed, scroll the vertical display range of the
graph and enlarge or reduce the display.
The number of measurement results shown horizontally can also be switched
between 200 or 1,000 measurement result display.
Changing the Vertical Display Range
The vertical axis can be scrolled and the scale of the vertical display can be
changed.
Example: NG Measurement Results Not Shown with Default Display
Range
Not displayed
Display range(Move)
Display range(Move)
450.000
500.000
400.000
450.000
350.000
Disp.200
Use Down Key
to scroll
400.000
Disp.200
:Move ESC:Back ENT:Zoom
:Move ESC:Back ENT:Zoom
Example: Measurement Results are Cluttered and That Section Needs to
Be Enlarged
Enlarge
Display range(Zoom)
Display range(Zoom)
450.000
430.000
400.000
410.000
350.000
Disp.200
Use Up Key to
enlarge
:Move ESC:Back ENT:Set
1.
Disp.200
:Move ESC:Back ENT:Set
Select Display range.
3.Trend monitor
Measurement
Judgement conditions
Display range
Detailed conditions
NG display
Save data
2-34-(11)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
The Display Range (Move) Screen will be displayed.
Display range(Move)
450.000
400.000
350.000
Disp.200
:Move ESC:Back ENT:Zoom
2.
3.
Use the Up and Down Keys to scroll up and down the vertical axis.
Press the ENT Key to set the display.
The Display Range (Zoom) Screen will be displayed.
Display range(Zoom)
430.000
410.000
390.000
Disp.200
:Move ESC:Back ENT:Set
4.
Use the Up and Down Keys to change the vertical scale.
Up Key:
Enlarges the scale.
Down Key: Reduces the scale.
5.
Press the ENT Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Changing the Number of Displayed Measurement Results
The number of measurement results displayed horizontally on the graph can
be changed to either 200 or 1,000. The display number can be changed any
time the graph is displayed on the Monitor.
200 Measurement Results Display
Display range(Move)
1,000 Measurement Results Display
Display range(Move)
450.000
450.000
400.000
400.000
350.000
350.000
Disp.200
:Move ESC:Back ENT:Zoom
Each graduation indicates 50
measurements.
2-34-(12)
Disp.1000
:Move ESC:Back ENT:Zoom
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
1.
Press the SHIFT + Left/Right Keys while the graph is displayed.
Display range(Move)
450.000
400.000
350.000
Disp.200
:Move ESC:Back ENT:Zoom
The number of displayed measurement results changes.
Each time the SHIFT+Left/Right Keys are pressed, the display switches
between 200 and 1,000 measurement results.
Display range(Move)
450.000
400.000
350.000
Disp.1000
:Move ESC:Back ENT:Zoom
2-34-(13)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
2-34-5
Changing Detailed Conditions
The items displayed on the Trend Monitor and the timing of warnings can be
changed. Change these detailed conditions as required.
Specify an interval between 1 and 99,999 (1*) for recording
values for the graph, i.e., the number of measurements
before a value is recorded. (See note 1.)
Specify the number of times the measurement must fall in
the warning range before a warning is generated. (1 to 999
(1*)) (See note 2.)
Detailed conditions
Recording interval:
:
Warning count
Display average :
Display maximum :
Display minimum :
NG by warning :
:
Graph line
[
[
1]
1]
ON
ON
ON
OFF
2dot
Select whether or not to display the average for the number of
measurements set under recording interval. (ON*, OFF)
Select whether or not to display the maximum and minimum
for the number of measurements set under recording interval.
(ON*, OFF)
Select whether or not to set the judgement for this unit to NG
if a warning is generated. (ON, OFF*)
End
Specify the width of graph lines (1 dot, 2 dot*)
Lines are finer if set to 1 dot and processing time is faster
than if 2 dot is set.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Note
1.
If the recording interval is set to 2 or higher, the minimum and maximums
for that interval will be displayed as shown in the following diagram.
0.Scn 0
Maximum displayed in OK color.
RUN
450.000
Average displayed in NG color.
Minimum displayed in OK color.
400.000
350.000
Disp.200
Meas. : 226.000
Judge : NG
Warning
2.
The measurement value is updated for
each measurement, regardless of the
recording interval.
If the warning count is set to 2 or higher, Warning will appear on the screen
if the measurement result enters the warning range continuously that number of times or more.
No warning display the first time.
Upper
judgement limit
Warning range
(upper limit)
2-34-(14)
Warning appears on the screen
when measurement result enters
warning range continuously for the
number of times set to warning
count or more.
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
1.
Select Detailed conditions.
3.Trend monitor
Measurement
Judgement conditions
Display range
Detailed conditions
NG display
Save data
The Detailed Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Detailed conditions
Recording interval:
:
Warning count
Display average :
Display maximum :
Display minimum :
NG by warning :
:
Graph line
[
[
1]
1]
ON
ON
ON
OFF
2dot
End
2.
3.
Set the detailed conditions.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-34-(15)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
2-34-6
Referencing NG Results
The NG measurement values and time the NG results were generated can be
browsed from the measurement results recorded on the Trend Monitor. Up to
the latest 35 NG results can be browsed.
This NG referencing function is useful for analyzing the cause of NG results by
giving a grasp of the time frame in which the NG results occurred.
NG display
450.000
400.000
A number of past NG results are
displayed.
350.000
Disp.200
Last 35 NG Meas.: 126.000
Time : 13:25:35
Measurement value and time NG
result occurred.
Number of past NG results
CHECK
To View the Trend Monitor NG Image
Set the conditions as described below to save measurement images on the
Trend Monitor only when NG results are returned.
• Set System/Measurement control/Save image to NG only.
• Set all units other than Trend Monitor unit to OK.
Press the SHIFT+Up/Down Keys on the Measurement Screen to display the
desired NG image and then go to NG display on the Trend Monitor and switch
to the NG result for that NG image.
1.
Select NG display.
3.Trend monitor
Measurement
Judgement conditions
Display range
Detailed conditions
NG display
Save data
The graph will be displayed.
NG display
450.000
400.000
350.000
Disp.200
Last 35 NG Meas.: 126.000
Time : 13:25:35
2-34-(16)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
2.
Use the Left/Right Keys to switch the displayed NG result.
Left Key:
Previous result
Right Key: Next result
CHECK
To Change the Graph Display Range
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys to move to the screen for changing the display
range.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 2-34-(11).
To Change the Number of Displayed Results per Screen
Press the SHIFT+Left/Right Keys to switch between 200 and 1,000 measurement results per screen.
3.
Press the ESC Key.
The screen in (1.) will return.
2-34-(17)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
2-34-7
Saving Measurement Data
Measurement data recorded by the Trend Monitor can be saved to a Memory
Card. The data is saved in CSV format and can be edited on a personal computer.
All the statistical data, the measurement values and times for up to 36 NG
results, and up to 1,000 measurement results on the graph are saved.
CHECK
If the data save function is used, a directory called TRENDMON is automatically created in the root directory on the Memory Card and the data is saved to
that directory.
NG display
0.Scn 0 RUN
3.Trend monitor
Statistic
450.000
400.000
350.000
Disp.200
Last 35 NG Meas.: 126.000
Time : 13:25:35
NG 45ms
Maximum : 409.250
86.000
Minimum :
Average : 140.564
68.208
Deviation :
Measure count : 1251
: 808
NG count
Warning count : 685
Data can be saved.
CSV Data Format
Data delimited by commas.
Statistics
<Maximum>, <Minimum>, <Average>, <Deviation>, <Measure count>,<NG count>,<Warning count>
Last NG
Last 1 NG
Last 2 NG
0, <Measurement value>, <Time>
1, <Measurement value>, <Time>
2, <Measurement value>, <Time>
.
.
.
35, <Measurement value>, <Time >
Last 35 NG
0, <Average>, <Maximum>, <Minimum>
1, <Average>, <Maximum>, <Minimum>
2, <Average>, <Maximum>, <Minimum>
Last
Last 1
Last 2
46,<Average>, <Maximum>, <Minimum>
Last 46
.
.
.
1.
Mount a Memory Card.
3.Trend monitor
Measurement
Judgement conditions
Display range
Detailed conditions
NG display
Save data
2-34-(18)
Measurement
value for NG
(for up to 35
NG results)
Measurement
results on graph
(for up to 1,000
measurements)
Section 2-34
Trend Monitor
2.
Select Save data.
The Save Data Settings Screen will be displayed.
Save Data
Drive : C1
File : [0410
].CSV
End
3.
Select the drive to which the Memory Card is mounted (either CO or C1).
4.
Move the cursor to the file name square brackets and press the ENT Key.
CHECK
Before the file name is set, the date for the data save is displayed in the
square brackets.
The software keyboard will be displayed.
File:
[ 0410
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
].CSV
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS
K
Y
k
y
.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
Ins.
ENT:Select
5.
CHECK
Set a file name of up to 8 characters.
Periods (.) cannot be used in file names.
6.
Move the cursor to END and press the ENT Key.
The screen in (2.) will return.
Save Data
Drive : C1
File : [ABC00000].CSV
End
7.
Select End.
The data will be saved to the TRENDMON directory and the screen in (1.)
will return.
2-34-(19)
Section 2-35
Conditional Branching
2-35
Conditional Branching
When the Branch processing item is used, two expressions and a condition
are set and the processing is branched depending on the result of the comparison for the condition.
This processing item is used, for example, when two or more products are
being processed on the same production line and a different inspection is
required for each.
Example: Inspecting Printing on Confectionery Packaging
Product 2
Product 1
0
Camera image
1
Classification
2
Branch
Expression A: Obtains index
number
Expression B: 0
Condition: A = B
YES
3. Edge position
NO
6. Pattern
“
“
NO
YES
3
Edge position
Product 1
inspection
4
DO judgement
6
Pattern
7
DO judgement
8
5
End
2-35-(1)
End
Product 2
inspection
Section 2-35
Conditional Branching
The settings details are shown below.
Set the evaluation expressions that will
serve as the basis for conditional
branching. Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ.
Specify the evaluation method for expressions
A and B.
A = B (default)
AˆB
A˜B
A<B
A>B
2.Branch
Exp.A : U1.IN
Exp.B : 0
Conditions :A=B
YES 3.Edge position
NO
6.Pattern
Set the unit number for when the comparative
calculation result is true.
Set the unit number for when the comparative
calculation result is false.
Operational Flow
1
Set
expressions.
2
Set condition.
3
Select
branch destination unit
numbers.
2-35-(2)
Section 2-35
Conditional Branching
2-35-1
Setting Expressions
Set the evaluation expression for conditional branching. Set two expressions,
A and B.
1.
Select Branch.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Classification
2.Branch
3.Edge position
4.DO judge
5.End
6.Pattern
7.DO judge
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The Branch Settings Screen will be displayed.
2.Branch
Exp.A :
Exp.B :
Conditions :A=B
YES (End processing)
NO
(End processing)
2.
Select Exp A.
The Expression A Settings Screen will be displayed.
Exp.A
Measurement :
ENT:Change
3.
2-35-(3)
Move the cursor to the square brackets for expression A and press the ENT
Key.
Section 2-35
Conditional Branching
The expression items will be displayed.
Exp.A
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
4.
Select the items to be set. (The explanation here will be based on Unit being selected.)
A list of units for the current scene will be displayed.
Exp.A
0. Camera image
1. Classification
ABS SIN
2. Branch
MOD COS
3. Edge MAX
position
ANGL
4. DO judge
MIN ATAN
5. End SQRT DIST
Const 6. Pattern
7. DO judge
DEL BS
Unit
AND
OR
NOT
OK
ENT:Select
5.
Select the unit number to be set.
A submenu will be displayed.
The displayed submenu will differ depending on the processing item.
Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ for a list of submenus.
SeeAlso
Exp.A
0. Camera image
1. Classification
ABS SIN
2. Branch
MOD COS
3. Edge MAX
position
ANGL
4. DO
judge
Judge
MIN ATAN
JG
5. End
Search
pos.DIST
SQRT
X
Search pos. Y
Const 6. Pattern
7. DO
judge
Correlation
DEL BS
CR
Index
IN
ENT:Select
Unit
6.
AND
OR
NOT
OK
Select an item from the submenu.
2-35-(4)
Section 2-35
Conditional Branching
The selected item will be set to the expression.
Exp.A
U1.IN
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
7.
8.
Create the expression.
Once the expression has been set, select OK.
Expression A will be registered.
Exp.A
U1.IN
MEasurement:
0.000
ENT:Change
9.
Repeat steps 2 to 8 to set expression B.
Move to the next operation, setting conditions.
2-35-(5)
Section 2-35
Conditional Branching
2-35-2
Setting Conditions
Select the method for comparing the two pieces of data obtained by expressions A and B.
1.
Select Conditions.
2.Branch
Exp.A :
Exp.B :
Conditions :A=B
YES (End processing)
NO
(End processing)
The conditions selections will be displayed.
Conditions
Cond. : A = B
A=B
EndA B
A B
A B
A B
2.
Select the evaluation method.
3.
Select End.
The evaluation method will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-35-(6)
Section 2-35
Conditional Branching
2-35-3
Selecting the Branch Destination Unit Numbers
Select the numbers of the branching destination units. Select a destination unit
for both YES and NO results (for when the comparative calculation results are
true and false).
1.
Select Yes “ (End processing).
2.Branch
Exp.A : U1. IN
Exp.B : 0
Conditions :A=B
YES (End processing)
NO
(End processing)
The list of units for the current scene will be displayed.
YES
(End processing)
0.Camera image
1.Classification
2.Branch
3.Edge position
4.DO judge
5.End
6.Pattern
2.
Select the branch destination unit and press the ENT Key.
Up/Down Keys: Scroll through the unit numbers.
CHECK
Set a unit number after the Branch unit number. If an earlier unit number is
set, the processing may continue in a loop.
The settings will be registered.
2.Branch
Exp.A :
Exp.B :
Conditions :A=B
YES 3.Edge position
NO
(End processing)
3.
CHECK
SeeAlso
2-35-(7)
Set the No “ (End processing) destination unit in the same way.
Always register End as the last of the processing items for the branch destination units for both Yes “ and No “ to indicate that the branch has ended.
Refer to (QG.
Section 2-36
DI Branch
2-36
DI Branch
The DI Branch processing item is useful for applications such as differentiating
between product inspections on the same production line based on the time.
The subsequent processing items are branched based on the information
input to DI0 to DI4 on the terminal block. Up to 32 branches can be set.
Example: Different Product Inspections for Confectionery Based on Time
Product 1 inspection Product 2 inspection
DI = 00000
DI = 00001
Product 3 inspection
DI = 00010
0
Camera image
1
DI branch
DI = 00000
DI = 00001
DI = 00010
5
2
Edge position
Pattern
8
Binary defect
6
3
DO judge
9
DO judge
DO judge
7
10
End
4
End
End
“ 2. Edge position
“ 5. Pattern
“ 8. Binary defect
Select the branch destination unit. Set a unit for each DI input data.
1.
Select DI branch.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.DI branch
2.Edge position
3.DO judge
4.End
5.Pattern
6.DO judge
7.End
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
2-36-(1)
Section 2-36
DI Branch
The DI Branch Settings Screen will be displayed.
1.DI branch
DI = 00000
DI = 00001
DI = 00010
DI = 00011
DI = 00100
DI = 00101
DI = 00110
DI = 00111
2.
(End processing)
(End processing)
(End processing)
(End processing)
(End processing)
(End processing)
(End processing)
(End processing)
Select the DI input to be used.
Up/Down Keys: Scroll through the DI inputs.
A list of units for the current scene will be displayed.
DI4-0=0000 Destination
(End processing)
0.Camera image
1.DI branch
2.Edge position
3.DO judge
4.End
5.Pattern
6.DO judge
3.
Select the branch destination unit.
Up/Down Keys: Scroll through the units.
CHECK
Set a unit number after the DI branch unit number. If an earlier unit number
is set, the processing may continue in a loop.
The settings will be registered.
1.DI branch
DI = 00000
DI = 00001
DI = 00010
DI = 00011
DI = 00100
DI = 00101
DI = 00110
DI = 00111
4.
2-36-(2)
2. Edge position
(End processing)
(End processing)
(End processing)
(End processing)
(End processing)
(End processing)
(End processing)
Set the branch destination units for other DI input numbers in the same
way.
Section 2-36
DI Branch
5.
Press the ESC Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.DI branch
2.Edge position
3.DO judge
4.End
5.Pattern
6.DO judge
7.End
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
CHECK
SeeAlso
Always register End as the last of the processing items for the branch destination units to indicate that the branch has ended.
Refer to (QG.
0
Camera image
1
DI branch
2 00001
00000
Pattern
Edge position
CHECK
9
DO judge
DO judge
7
10
End
4
End
End
8
Binary defect
6
3
DO judge
5 00010
The status of the DI signal is referenced, and it is referenced when the DI
Branch processing item is processed.
2-36-(3)
Section 2-37
End
2-37
End
The End processing item is the processing item set to the last unit in a branch
flow. The End item is used to end the processing after branching.
No other conditions need to be set when this processing item is added to the
flowchart.
2
Branch
6
3
Pattern
Edge position
7
4
DO judge
5
End
DO judge
8
End
Screen image
0.Scn 0=SET=
2.Branch
3.Edge position
4.DO judge
5.End
6.Pattern
7.DO judge
8.End
2-37-(1)
Delimiters for processing
items
Section 2-38
Memory Card Data
2-38
Memory Card Data
Use the Memory Card Data processing item to output data to a Memory Card.
Measurement values and calculation results can be output.
Memory Card
Memory Card slot
Data is output only when measurement is performed in Run Mode. Data will
not be output if measurement is executed in Monitor Mode. The overall judgement for the set processing items will be output to the parallel interface OR
signal, regardless of whether or not the Memory Card Data processing item is
set.
2-38-(1)
Section 2-38
Memory Card Data
2-38-1
Selecting Output Formats
Select the format for outputting data to the Memory Card.
ASCII Format
The following items can be set.
Item
Details
Output form
Select ASCII*.
Digits of integer
Set the number of digits for integer output. When 0 is selected, all
digits of data are output without leading zeros. Select a value
between 0 and 8*.
If the data has more digits than the number set, 9 will be output
for each digit.
Example: If 4 digits have been set and the data is “15619,” the
output will be “9999.”
Digits of decimal
Set the number of digits for decimal output. When 0 is selected,
the decimal places are rounded off. Select a value between 0 and
3*.
Minus
Select what sign will be displayed for negative values. Select
either - * or 8.
Field separator
Select the separator between data fields.
Select none, comma*, tab, space, or CR+LF.
Record separator
Select the separator between data records.
Select none, comma, tab, space, or CR+LF*.
0 Suppress
Select how to adjust any empty digits to the left of output data.
Select either ON or OFF*:
ON: Inserts a 0 into empty digits.
OFF: Inserts a space into empty digits.
Example: If “5” has been set for Digits of integer and “3” for Digits
of decimal, and the data is 100.000, the following output will be
made.
When ON is set: 00100.000
When OFF is set: (space)100.000 (i.e., a space is inserted).
Output drive
Select the number of the drive to which the Memory Card is
mounted. Select either C0 or C1*.
Output file
Set the name of the file that will store the measurement results.
Data will not be output if no file name is set.
Note The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Binary Format
The measurement result multiplied by 1,000 is output as four consecutive
bytes as one unit of data.
Item
Select Binary.
Digits of integer
These settings are only for ASCII format. No settings are required
for binary format.
Digits of decimal
Minus
Field separator
Record separator
0 Suppress
2-38-(2)
Details
Output form
Section 2-38
Memory Card Data
Item
Details
Output drive
Select the number of the drive to which the Memory Card is
mounted.
Output file
Set the name of the file that will store the measurement results.
Data will not be output if no file name is set.
1.
Select Memory card data.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Edge position
4.Memory card data
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The list of set expressions will be displayed.
4.Memory card data
Conditions
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
2.
Select Conditions.
The Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Conditions
Output form
Digits of integer
Digits of decimal
Minus
Field separator
Record separator
0 suppress
Output drive
: ASCII
: [8]
: [3]
:
: Comma
: CR+LF
: OFF
:
C1
End
3.
Change the settings for each item.
4.
Move the cursor to the square brackets for the output file name and press
the ENT Key.
Use the Down Key to scroll the cursor and display the output file name.
2-38-(3)
Section 2-38
Memory Card Data
The software keyboard will be displayed.
Output file:
[RSLT000 ].DAT
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS
ENT:Select
K
Y
k
y
.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
Ins.
5.
Set up to 8 characters.
6.
Move the cursor to END and press the ENT Key.
CHECK
The output file will be saved in the OUTFILE directory in the root directory.
The screen in (2.) will return.
7.
Select End.
The settings will be saved and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-38-(4)
Section 2-38
Memory Card Data
2-38-2
Setting Output Details
Use expressions to set the output data.
For each unit, 8 expressions (0 to 7) can be set.
Output number
Data 0 to data 7
Data0.
U2.R00X-U2.R01X
Expression
Measurement result for set expression
Measurement: 578908.965
ENT:Change
1.
Select Memory card data.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Edge position
4.Memory card data
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
A list of set expressions will be displayed.
4.Memory card data
Conditions
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
Output number
2.
Select the output number to which the expression will be set.
2-38-(5)
Section 2-38
Memory Card Data
The Expression Settings Screen will be displayed.
Data0.
Measurement:
ENT:Change
3.
Move the cursor to the square brackets for Data 0 and press the ENT Key.
A list of expression items will be displayed.
Data0.
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
4.
Select the desired items and set the expression.
Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ.
SeeAlso
5.
Once the expression has been set, select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
Data0.
U2.R00X-U2.R01X
Measurement: 578908.965
ENT:Change
6.
2-38-(6)
Press the ESC Key.
Section 2-38
Memory Card Data
The Expression Settings Screen will return.
4.Memory card data
Conditions
0.U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys in this screen to copy or clear the expression.
7.
Repeat steps 2 to 6 and set the expressions.
8.
Once the expressions have been set, press the ESC Key.
The screen in (1.) will return.
Copying Expressions
The copy function is useful when using the expression again elsewhere or
using the same expression with only one part changed.
If relative information is set for an expression, that information too will be copied.
1.
Use the Up and Down Keys in the screen in (6.) to select the output number for the copy destination then press the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
4.Memory card data
Conditions
0.U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
The selections will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
2.
Select Copy.
The Original Region Screen will be displayed.
Original : Data1
Execute
3.
Select the output number to which the expression to be copied is set.
4.
Select Execute.
The selected expression will be copied and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-38-(7)
Section 2-38
Memory Card Data
Clearing Expressions
1.
Use the Up and Down Keys in the screen in (6.) to select the output number of the expression to be cleared then press the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
4.Memory card data
Conditions
0.U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
The selections will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Expression will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The expression will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-38-(8)
Section 2-39
DO Data
2-39
DO Data
The DO Data processing item is used to output data to Programmable Controllers, personal computers, and other external devices via a parallel interface.
Measurement values and calculation results can be output.
Programmable Controller
Personal computer
Parallel interface
Data is output only when measurement is performed in Run Mode. Data will
not be output if measurement is executed in Monitor Mode. The overall judgement for the set processing items will be output to the parallel interface OR
signal, regardless of whether or not the DO Data processing item is set.
2-39-(1)
Section 2-39
DO Data
2-39-1
Selecting Output Formats
Select the format for outputting data.
Format
Details
Binary*
Data is output in 32-bit 2’s complement binary format.
BCD
Sign and 7-digit integer output using 4 bits per digit (32 bits).
Bits
28 to 31
24 to 27
...
4 to 7
Sign
1,000,000s ... 10s digit
(See note.) digit
0 to 3
1s digit
Note Positive: 0000
Negative: 1111
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Select DO data.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Edge position
4.DO data
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The list of set expressions will be displayed.
4.DO data
Conditions
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
2.
Select Conditions.
The Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Output form : Binary
End
3.
4.
Select the output format.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-39-(2)
Section 2-39
DO Data
2-39-2
Setting Output Details
Use expressions to set the output data.
For each unit, 8 expressions (0 to 7) can be set.
Output number
Data 0 to data 7
Data0.
U2.R00X-U2.R01X
Expression
Measurement result for set expression
Only the integer portion is output to the
external device. The decimal portion is
rounded off.
Measurement: 578908.965
ENT:Change
1.
Select DO data.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Edge position
4.DO data
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
A list of set expressions will be displayed.
4.DO data
Conditions
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
Output number
2.
Select the output number to which the expression will be set.
2-39-(3)
Section 2-39
DO Data
The Expression Settings Screen will be displayed.
Data0.
Measurement:
ENT:Change
3.
Move the cursor to the square brackets for Data 0 and press the ENT Key.
A list of expression items will be displayed.
Data0.
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
4.
Select the desired items and set the expression.
Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ.
SeeAlso
5.
Once the expression has been set, select OK.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
Data0.
U2.R00X-U2.R01X
Measurement: 578908.965
ENT:Change
6.
2-39-(4)
Press the ESC Key.
Section 2-39
DO Data
The Expression Settings Screen will return.
4.DO data
Conditions
0. U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys in this screen to copy or clear the expression.
7.
Repeat steps 2 to 6 and set the expressions.
8.
Once the expressions have been set, press the ESC Key.
The screen in (1.) will return.
Copying Expressions
The copy function is useful when using the expression again elsewhere or
using the same expression with only one part changed.
If relative information is set for an expression, that information too will be copied.
1.
Use the Up and Down Keys in the screen in (6.) to select the output number for the copy destination then press the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
4.DO data
Conditions
0.U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
The selections will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
2.
Select Copy.
The Original Region Screen will be displayed.
Original : Data1
Execute
3.
Select the output number to which the expression to be copied is set.
4.
Select Execute.
The selected expression will be copied and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-39-(5)
Section 2-39
DO Data
Clearing Expressions
1.
Use the Up and Down Keys in the screen in (6.) to select the output number of the expression to be cleared then press the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
4.DO data
Conditions
0. U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
The selections will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Expression will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The expression will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-39-(6)
Section 2-40
DO Judgement
2-40
DO Judgement
The DO Judgement processing item is used to output judgements to Programmable Controllers, personal computers, and other external devices via a parallel interface.
Judgement results for processing items and scenes and judgement results for
calculation results can be output.
Programmable Controller
Personal computer
Parallel interface
Data is output only when measurement is performed in Run Mode. Data will
not be output if measurement is executed in Monitor Mode. The overall judgement for the set processing items will be output to the parallel interface OR
signal, regardless of whether or not the DO Judgement processing item is set.
2-40-(1)
Section 2-40
DO Judgement
2-40-1
Selecting Reflection in Overall Judgement
Select whether or not to reflect the judgement result for this processing item in
the overall judgement output to the parallel interface OR signal.
CHECK
The overall judgement is also displayed on the Monitor and Measurement
Screens.
The overall judgement can be set to not be displayed also by using the display
settings.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6FUHHQ'LVSOD\DQG0RQLWRU.
0.Scn 0
1.
OK 67ms
MON
Select DO judge.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Edge position
4.DO judge
5.
The list of set expressions will be displayed.
4.DO judge
Conditions
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
Select Conditions.
The Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Conditions
Reflect in overall judge : OFF
End
3.
Change the setting.
4.
Select End.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-40-(2)
Section 2-40
DO Judgement
2-40-2
Setting Output Details
Use expressions to set the output data.
For each unit, 32 expressions (0 to 31) can be set.
Output number
Judge 0 to 31
Judge0.
U2.R00X-U2.R01X
Expression
Measurement result for set expression
Use as reference for judgement conditions.
Measurement : 578908.965
Upper : [ 600000.000]
Lower : [ 550000.000]
Judgement conditions
Set the judgement conditions for the
expression. Set the OK range between
-9,999,999.999 and 9,999,999.999.
ENT:Change
1.
Select DO judge.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Edge position
4.DO judge
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
A list of set expressions will be displayed.
4.DO judge
Conditions
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SFT+ESC:Edit
Output number
2.
Select the output number to which the expression will be set.
2-40-(3)
Section 2-40
DO Judgement
The Expression Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judge0.
Measurement :
Upper : [
Lower : [
0.000]
0.000]
ENT:Change
3.
Move the cursor to the square brackets for Judge 0 and press the ENT Key.
A list of expression items will be displayed.
Judge0.
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
4.
Select the desired items and set the expression.
Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ.
SeeAlso
5.
Once the expression has been set, select OK.
The expression will be set.
Judge0.
U2.R00X-U2.R01X
Measurement : 578908.965
Upper : [ 600000.000]
Lower : [ 550000.000]
ENT:Change
2-40-(4)
6.
Set the upper and lower judgement limits.
7.
Press the ESC Key.
Section 2-40
DO Judgement
The Expression Settings Screen will return.
4.DO judge
Conditions
0.U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SFT+ESC:Edit
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys in this screen to copy or clear the expression.
8.
Repeat steps 2 to 7 and set the expressions.
9.
Once the expressions have been set, press the ESC Key.
The screen in (1.) will return.
Copying Expressions
The copy function is useful when using the expression again elsewhere or
using the same expression with only one part changed.
If relative information is set for an expression, that information too will be copied.
1.
Use the Up and Down Keys in the screen in (7.) to select the output number for the copy destination then press the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
4.DO judge
Conditions
0.U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SFT+ESC:Edit
The selections will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
2.
Select Copy.
The Original Region Screen will be displayed.
Original : Judge1
Execute
3.
Select the output number to which the expression to be copied is set.
4.
Select Execute.
The selected expression will be copied and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-40-(5)
Section 2-40
DO Judgement
Clearing Expressions
1.
Use the Up and Down Keys in the screen in (7.) to select the output number of the expression to be cleared then press the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
4.DO judge
Conditions
0.U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
SFT+ESC:Edit
The selections will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Expression will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The expression will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-40-(6)
Section 2-41
Host Link Data
2-41
Host Link Data
The Host Link Data processing item is used to output data to Programmable
Controllers and other external devices via a serial interface.
Measurement values and calculations results can be output.
Programmable Controller
or other external device
Serial interface
Data is output only when measurement is performed in Run Mode. Data will
not be output if measurement is executed in Monitor Mode. The overall judgement for the set processing items will be output to the parallel interface OR
signal, regardless of whether or not the Host Link Data processing item is set.
2-41-(1)
Section 2-41
Host Link Data
2-41-1
Setting Output Details
Use expressions to set the output data.
For each unit, 8 expressions (0 to 7) can be set.
Output number
Data 0 to data 7
Data0.
U2.R00X-U2.R01X
Expression
Measurement: 578908.965
Measurement result for set expression
ENT:Change
1.
Select Host link data.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Edge position
4.Host link data
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
A list of set expressions will be displayed.
4.Host link data
0.
1.
2
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
Output number
2.
2-41-(2)
Select the output number to which the expression will be set.
Section 2-41
Host Link Data
The Expression Settings Screen will be displayed.
Data0.
Measurement:
ENT:Change
3.
Move the cursor to the square brackets for Data 0 and press the ENT Key.
A list of expression items will be displayed.
Data0.
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
4.
Select the desired items and set the expression.
Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ.
SeeAlso
5.
Once the expression has been set, select OK.
The settings will be saved and the screen in (2.) will return.
Data0.
U2.R00X-U2.R01X
Measurement: 578908.965
ENT:Change
6.
Press the ESC Key.
2-41-(3)
Section 2-41
Host Link Data
The Expression Settings Screen will return.
4.Host link data
0 . U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys in this screen to copy or clear the expression.
7.
Repeat steps 2 to 6 and set the expressions.
8.
Once the expressions have been set, press the ESC Key.
The screen in (1.) will return.
Copying Expressions
The copy function is useful when using the expression again elsewhere or
using the same expression with only one part changed.
If relative information is set for an expression, that information too will be copied.
1.
Use the Up and Down Keys in the screen in (6.) to select the output number for the copy destination then press the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
4.Host link data
0 . U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
The selections will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
2.
Select Copy.
The Original Region Screen will be displayed.
Original : Data1
Execute
3.
Select the output number to which the expression to be copied is set.
4.
Select Execute.
The selected expression will be copied and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-41-(4)
Section 2-41
Host Link Data
Clearing Expressions
1.
Use the Up and Down Keys in the screen in (6.) to select the output number of the expression to be cleared then press the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
4.Host link data
0 . U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
The selections will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Expression will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The expression will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-41-(5)
Section 2-42
Normal Data
2-42
Normal Data
Use the Normal Data processing item to output data to Programmable Controllers, personal computers, and other external devices via a serial interface.
Measurement values and calculation results can be output.
Programmable Controller
Personal computer
Serial interface
Data is output only when measurement is performed in Run Mode. Data will
not be output if measurement is executed in Monitor Mode. The overall judgement for the set processing items will be output to the parallel interface OR
signal, regardless of whether or not the Normal Data processing item is set.
2-42-(1)
Section 2-42
Normal Data
2-42-1
Selecting Output Formats
Select the format for outputting data to a serial interface.
ASCII Format
The following items can be set.
Item
Details
Output form
Select ASCII*.
Digits of integer
Set the number of digits for integer output. When 0 is selected, all
digits of data are output without leading zeros. Select a value
between 0 and 8*.
If the data has more digits than the number set, 9 will be output
for each digit.
Example: If 4 digits have been set and the data is “15619,” the
output will be “9999.”
Digits of decimal
Set the number of digits for decimal output. When 0 is selected,
the decimal places are rounded off. Select a value between 0 and
3*.
Minus
Select what sign will be displayed for negative values. Select
either - * or 8.
Field separator
Select the separator between data fields.
Select none, comma*, tab, space, or delimiter.
Record separator
Select the separator between data records.
Select none, comma, tab, space, or delimiter*.
0 Suppress
Select how to adjust any empty digits to the left of output data.
Select either ON or OFF*:
ON: Inserts a 0 into empty digits.
OFF: Inserts a space into empty digits.
Example: If “5” has been set for Digits of integer and “3” for Digits
of decimal, and the data is 100.000, the following output will be
made.
When ON is set: 00100.000
When OFF is set: (space)100.000 (i.e., a space is inserted).
Note The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Binary Format
The measurement result multiplied by 1,000 is output as four consecutive
bytes as one unit of data.
Item
Details
Output form
Select Binary.
Digits of integer
These settings are only for ASCII format. No settings are required
for binary format.
Digits of decimal
Minus
Field separator
Record separator
0 Suppress
2-42-(2)
Section 2-42
Normal Data
1.
Select Normal data.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Edge position
4.Normal data
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The list of set expressions will be displayed.
4.Normal data
Conditions
0.
1.
2
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
2.
Select Conditions.
The Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Conditions
Output form
Digits of integer
Digits of decimal
Minus
Field separator
Record separator
0 suppress
: ASCII
: [8]
: [3]
:
: Comma
: Delimiter
: OFF
End
3.
Change the settings for each item.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-42-(3)
Section 2-42
Normal Data
2-42-2
Setting Output Details
Use expressions to set the output data.
For each unit, 8 expressions (0 to 7) can be set.
Output number
Data 0 to data 7
Data0.
U2.R00X-U2.R01X
Expression
Measurement result for set expression
Measurement: 578908.965
ENT:Change
1.
Select Normal data.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Edge position
4.Normal data
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
A list of the set expressions will be displayed.
4.Normal data
Conditions
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
Output number
2.
Select the output number to which the expression will be set.
2-42-(4)
Section 2-42
Normal Data
The Expression Settings Screen will be displayed.
Data0.
Measurement:
ENT:Change
3.
Move the cursor to the square brackets for Data 0 and press the ENT Key.
A list of expression items will be displayed.
Data0.
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
4.
Select the desired items and set the expression.
Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ.
SeeAlso
5.
Once the expression has been set, select OK.
The settings will be saved and the screen in (2.) will return.
Data0.
U2.R00X-U2.R01X
Measurement: 578908.965
ENT:Change
6.
2-42-(5)
Press the ESC Key.
Section 2-42
Normal Data
The Expression Settings Screen will return.
4.Normal data
Conditions
0 . U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
CHECK
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys in this screen to copy or clear the expression.
7.
Repeat steps 2 to 6 and set the expressions.
8.
Once the expressions have been set, press the ESC Key.
The screen in (1.) will return.
Copying Expressions
The copy function is useful when using the expression again elsewhere or
using the same expression with only one part changed.
If relative information is set for an expression, that information too will be copied.
1.
Use the Up and Down Keys in the screen in (6.) to select the output number for the copy destination then press the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
4.Normal data
Conditions
0 . U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
The selections will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
2.
Select Copy.
The Original Region Screen will be displayed.
Original : Data1
Execute
3.
Select the output number to which the expression to be copied is set.
4.
Select Execute.
The selected expression will be copied and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-42-(6)
Section 2-42
Normal Data
Clearing Expressions
1.
Use the Up and Down Keys in the screen in (6.) to select the output number of the expression to be cleared then press the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
4.Normal data
Conditions
0 . U2.R00X-U2.R01X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SFT+ESC:Edit
The selections will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Expression will be cleared.
Execute
3.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The expression will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-42-(7)
Section 2-43
Display String
2-43
Display String
The Display String processing item is used to display any characters on the
Run and Monitor Mode screens.
Example: Displaying Measurement Details in Combination with Display Measurement Processing Item
Measurement details
0.Scn 0
RUN
OK 45ms
Difference from reference: 20
Measurement result
Image 0 freeze
Use this processing item to display any alphanumeric characters in Run and
Monitor Modes.
CHECK
The data set here will be enabled when None or Positions is selected under
System/Display/Display settings/Display results.
CHECK
Even when the display image is set to be displayed as a reduced image, the
characters will always be displayed in the specified position.
Operational Flow
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Set display
characters.
Set display
conditions.
Set display
position.
STEP 1: Setting Display Characters
Up to 29 standard size alphanumeric characters can be set. The characters
can be selected from the list of characters on the displayed software keyboard.
1.
Select Display string.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Calculation
4.Display string
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
2-43-(1)
Section 2-43
Display String
The setting selections will be displayed.
4.Display string
String
Conditions
Position
2.
Select String.
The software keyboard screen will be displayed.
String
A B CDE F GH I J
OP QR S T U VWX
a b c d e f g h i j
o p q r s t u v w x
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
# $ %
SPC DEL BS INS
ENT:Select
3.
K
Y
k
y
.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
Ins.
Select a character and press the ENT Key.
The selected character will be set.
4.
Repeat step 3 and set all characters to be displayed.
5.
Once all characters have been selected, select END.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 2: Setting Display Conditions
Set the conditions for display. The font cannot be specified. The display font
will be the same as the menu font.
Size
Large: Twice the height and width of Normal
Normal*: Same size as menu font (Normal)
Small: 1/2 the height and width of Normal
Conditions
Font size: Normal
Color
: Normal
Reverse : OFF
End
Color
Normal:*White
OK color:Green
NG color:Red
Reverse
OFF*
ON
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
The font colors can be changed. Refer to 6(&7,216\VWHP6HWWLQJV.
When Color is set to Normal and the characters have been displayed on the
screen once, they will continue to be displayed whether or not Display String
has been executed as one of the branching control processing items.
2-43-(2)
Section 2-43
Display String
1.
Select Conditions.
4.Display string
String
Conditions
Position
The Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Conditions
Font size: Normal
Color
: Normal
Reverse : OFF
End
2.
Make the settings for each item.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-43-(3)
Section 2-43
Display String
STEP 3: Setting Display Position
Set the position for character display. The size of the display region shown on
the screen is the same as the actual size when the string is displayed. Use this
as a reference for deciding positions.
Care must be taken because characters in any part of the display region that
protrudes past the right edge of the screen will not be displayed.
1.
Select Position.
4.Display string
String
Conditions
Position
The cursor for setting position and the display region will be displayed.
Position
(10,13)
Display region
2.
3.
Use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the display region.
Press the ENT Key to set the position.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-43-(4)
Section 2-44
Display Measurement
2-44
Display Measurement
The Display Measurement processing item is used to display any measurement data on the screen in Run and Monitor Modes.
The display is set using expressions so the calculation results of expressions
using region measurement values or measurement values can be displayed.
Example: Displaying Measurement Values in Combination with Display String
Measurement details
0.Scn 0
RUN
OK 45ms
Difference from reference: 20
Measurement value
Image 0 freeze
Use this processing item to display any measurement data on the screens in
Run and Monitor Modes. The display is set using expression, so region measurements or calculations using measurement values can be displayed.
CHECK
The data set here will be enabled when None or Positions are selected under
System/Display/Display settings/Display results.
CHECK
Even when the display image is set to be displayed as a reduced image, the
characters will always be displayed in the specified position.
Operational Flow
STEP 1
Set
measurement
data.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Set display
conditions.
Set display
position.
STEP 1: Setting Measurement Conditions
Use expressions to set the measurement data to be displayed.
1.
Select Display measure.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Calculation
4.Display measure
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
2-44-(1)
Section 2-44
Display Measurement
The setting selections will be displayed.
4.Display measure
Measurement
Conditions
Position
2.
Select Measurement.
The Measurement Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement
Measurement:
ENT:Change
3.
Move the cursor to the square brackets for the measurement data and
press the ENT Key.
A list of setting items will be displayed.
Measurement
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
4.
Select the items to be set and set the expressions.
Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ.
SeeAlso
5.
Once the expression has been set, select OK.
The expression will be set and the screen in (2.) will return.
Measurement
U2.R00X-U2.R00SX
Measurement: 0.000
ENT:Change
2-44-(2)
Section 2-44
Display Measurement
6.
Press the ESC Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 2: Setting Display Conditions
Set the conditions for display. The font cannot be specified. The display font
will be the same as the menu font.
Size
Large: Twice the height and width of Normal
Normal*: Same size as menu font (Normal)
Small: 1/2 the height and width of Normal
Color
Normal:*White
OK color:Green
NG color:Red
Conditions
Font size
: Normal
Color
: Normal
Reverse
:
OFF
Digits of integer : [ 8]
Digits of decimal: [ 3]
End
Reverse
OFF*
ON
No. of display digits:
Integer: 0 to 8 (8*)
Decimal: 0 to 3 (3*)
*The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
The font colors can be changed. Refer to 6(&7,216\VWHP6HWWLQJV.
When Color is set to Normal and the characters have been displayed on the
screen once, they will continue to be displayed whether or not Display Measure has been executed as one of the branching control processing items.
1.
Select Conditions.
4.Display measure
Measurement
Conditions
Position
The Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Conditions
Font size
: Normal
Color
: Normal
Reverse
:
OFF
Digits of integer : [ 8]
Digits of decimal: [ 3]
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-44-(3)
Section 2-44
Display Measurement
STEP 3: Setting Display Position
Set the position for character display. The size of the display region shown on
the screen is the same as the actual size when the measurement is displayed.
Use this as a reference for deciding positions.
Care must be taken because characters in any part of the display region that
protrudes past the right edge of the screen will not be displayed.
1.
Select Position.
4.Display measure
Measurement
Conditions
Position
The cursor for setting position and the display region will be displayed.
Position
(10,13)
Display region
2.
Use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the display region.
3.
Press the ENT Key to set the position.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-44-(4)
Section 2-45
Display Judgement
2-45
Display Judgement
The Display Judgement processing item is used to display different characters
for OK and NG calculation results on the screens in Run and Monitor Modes.
Expressions are set as criteria and the characters to be displayed for the different judgement results (OK or NG) are set.
Example: Displaying Characters in Combination with Display String and Display Measure.
Measurement details
0.Scn 0
OK 45ms
RUN
Measurement value
Difference from reference: 20
Product OK
Image 0 freeze
OK judgement result: Product OK
NG judgement result: Product fault
Use this processing item to display suitable characters in Run and Monitor
Modes based on judgement results. Set the expressions as criteria and set the
characters to be displayed for the different judgement results (OK, NG).
CHECK
The data set here will be enabled when None or Positions is selected under
System/Display/Display settings/Display results.
CHECK
Even when the display image is set to be displayed as a reduced image, the
characters will always be displayed in the specified position.
Operational Flow
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Set judgement
conditions.
Set display
characters
for OK and NG.
Set display
conditions.
Set display
position.
STEP 1: Setting Judgement Criteria
Use expressions to set the judgement criteria.
1.
Select Display judge.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Calculation
4.Display judge
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
2-45-(1)
Section 2-45
Display Judgement
The setting selections will be displayed.
4.Display judge
Judge conditions
OK string
NG string
Conditions
Position
2.
Select Judge conditions.
The Judge Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Judge conditions
Measurement :
[
Upper :
[
Lower :
0.000]
0.000]
ENT:Change
3.
Move the cursor to the square brackets for the expression and press the
ENT Key.
A list of setting items will be displayed.
Judge conditions
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
4.
Select the items to be set and set the expression.
Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ.
SeeAlso
5.
Once the expression has been set, select OK.
The expression will be set and the screen in (2.) will return.
Judge conditions
U2.R00X-U2.R00SX
Measurement :
[
Upper :
[
Lower :
0.000
0.000]
0.000]
ENT:Change
6.
2-45-(2)
Set the conditions for OK and NG judgements.
Section 2-45
Display Judgement
7.
Press the ESC Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 2: Setting Display Characters for OK and NG Judgements
When the judgement result for the expression set in STEP 1: Setting Judgement Criteria is OK, set the characters to be displayed for a NG judgement. Up
to 29 standard size alphanumeric characters can be set.
The characters can be selected from the list of characters on the displayed
software keyboard.
1.
Select either OK string or NG string.
4.Display judge
Judge conditions
OK string
NG string
Conditions
Position
The software keyboard screen will be displayed.
OK string
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS
K
Y
k
y
.
END
Ins.
ENT:Select
2.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
Select a character and press the ENT Key.
The selected character will be set.
3.
Repeat step 2 and set all characters to be displayed.
4.
Once all characters have been selected, select END.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting Display Conditions
Set the conditions for display. The font cannot be specified. The display font
will be the same as the menu font.
Conditions
Font size : Normal
OK reverse : OFF
NG reverse : OFF
End
Size
Large: Twice the height and width of Normal
Normal*: Same size as menu font (Normal)
Small: 1/2 the height and width of Normal
Reverse
OFF*
ON
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-45-(3)
Section 2-45
Display Judgement
1.
Select Conditions.
4.Display judge
Judge conditions
OK string
NG string
Conditions
Position
The Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Conditions
Font size : Normal
OK reverse : OFF
NG reverse : OFF
End
2.
Make the settings for each item.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 4: Setting Display Position
Set the position for character display. The size of the display region shown on
the screen is the same as the actual size when the judgement is displayed.
Use this as a reference for deciding positions.
Care must be taken because characters in any part of the display region that
protrudes past the right edge of the screen will not be displayed.
1.
Select Position.
4.Display judge
Judge conditions
OK string
NG string
Conditions
Position
2-45-(4)
Section 2-45
Display Judgement
The cursor for setting position and the display region will be displayed.
Position
(10,13)
Display region
2.
3.
Use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the display region.
Press the ENT Key to set the position.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-45-(5)
Section 2-46
Display Item
2-46
Display Item
The Display Item processing item is used to display the name of one processing item set to the current scene on the screen in Run and Monitor Modes.
If comments are entered for the processing item, the comment will also be displayed.
Example: Displaying Names in Combination with Display String and Display
Measure
Measurement details
0.Scn 0
OK 45ms
RUN
Difference from reference: 20
Measurement value
Pattern
Image 0 freeze
Processing item name
The name of one processing item set to the current scene is displayed on the
screen in Run and Monitor Modes. If a comment is entered for the processing
item, the comment will also be displayed.
CHECK
The data set here will be enabled when None or Positions is selected under
System/Display/Display settings/Display results.
CHECK
Even when the display image is set to be displayed as a reduced image, the
characters will always be displayed in the specified position.
Operational Flow
1
2
Select
display items.
Set display
conditions.
Selecting Display Items
Select the processing item names to be displayed.
1.
Select Display item.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Calculation
4.Display item
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
2-46-(1)
3
Set display
position.
Section 2-46
Display Item
The selections will be displayed.
4.Display item
Select item
Conditions
Position
2.
Select Select item.
The selection of processing items set to the current scene will be displayed.
If a comment has been set to the item, the comment will also be displayed.
Select item
Item : Camera image
End
3.
Select the processing item name and select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 2: Setting Display Conditions
Set the conditions for display. The font cannot be specified. The display font
will be the same as the menu font.
Size
Large: Twice the height and width of Normal
Normal*: Same size as menu font (Normal)
Small: 1/2 the height and width of Normal
Conditions
Font size: Normal
Color
: Normal
Reverse : OFF
Color
Normal:*White
OK color:Green
NG color:Red
End
Reverse
OFF*
ON
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
The font colors can be changed. Refer to 6(&7,216\VWHP6HWWLQJV.
When Color is set to Normal and the characters have been displayed on the
screen once, they will continue to be displayed whether or not Display item has
been executed as one of the branching control processing items.
1.
Select Conditions.
4.Display item
Select item
Conditions
Position
2-46-(2)
Section 2-46
Display Item
The Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Conditions
Font size: Normal
Color
: Normal
Reverse : OFF
End
2.
Make the settings for each item.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
STEP 3: Setting Display Position
Set the position for character display. The size of the display region shown on
the screen is the same as the actual size when the item is displayed. Use this
as a reference for deciding positions.
Care must be taken because characters in any part of the display region that
protrudes past the right edge of the screen will not be displayed.
1.
Select Position.
4.Display item
Select item
Conditions
Position
The cursor for setting position and the display region will be displayed.
Position
(10,13)
Display region
2.
Use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the display region.
3.
Press the ENT Key to set the position.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-46-(3)
Section 2-47
Display Time
2-47
Display Time
The Display Time processing item is used to display the date and time measurement was performed on the screens in Run and Monitor Modes.
Example: Displaying the Time in Combination with Display String and Display
Measure
Measurement details
0.Scn 0
OK 45ms
RUN
Difference from reference: 20
Measurement value
02/03 01:23:45
Image 0 freeze
Measurement date and time
This processing item displays the date and time of the measurement on the
screens in Run and Monitor Modes. The calendar in the Controller must be
adjusted and set beforehand.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,216\VWHP6HWWLQJV.
CHECK
The data set here will be enabled when None or Positions is selected under
System/Display/Display settings/Display results.
CHECK
Even when the display image is set to be displayed as a reduced image, the
characters will always be displayed in the specified position.
Operational Flow
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Select the
display data.
Set display
conditions.
Set display
position.
STEP 1: Selecting the Display Data
Select the format for the date and time display.
Format
MM/DD hh:mm:ss*
Display
10/01 01:23:45
MM/DD hh:mm
10/01 01:23
hh:mm:ss
01:23:45
hh:mm
01:23
*The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-47-(1)
Section 2-47
Display Time
1.
Select Display time.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Calculation
4.Display time
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The setting selections will be displayed.
4.Display time
Contents
Conditions
Position
2.
Select Contents.
The Contents Settings Screen will be displayed.
Contents
Contents : MM/DD hh:mm:ss
End
3.
Select the display contents.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-47-(2)
Section 2-47
Display Time
STEP 2: Setting Display Conditions
Set the conditions for display. The font cannot be specified. The display font
will be the same as the menu font.
Size
Large: Twice the height and width of Normal
Normal*: Same size as menu font (Normal)
Small: 1/2 the height and width of Normal
Conditions
Font size: Normal
Color
: Normal
Reverse : OFF
Color
Normal:*White
OK color:Green
NG color:Red
End
Reverse
OFF*
ON
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
The font colors can be changed. Refer to 6(&7,216\VWHP6HWWLQJV.
When Color is set to Normal and the characters have been displayed on the
screen once, they will continue to be displayed whether or not Display time has
been executed as one of the branching control processing items.
1.
Select Conditions.
4.Display time
Contents
Conditions
Position
The Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Conditions
Font size: Normal
Color
: Normal
Reverse : OFF
End
2.
3.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-47-(3)
Section 2-47
Display Time
STEP 3: Setting Display Position
Set the position for character display. The size of the display region shown on
the screen is the same as the actual size when the time is displayed. Use this
as a reference for deciding positions.
Care must be taken because characters in any part of the display region that
protrudes past the right edge of the screen will not be displayed.
1.
Select Position.
4.Display time
Contents
Conditions
Position
The cursor for setting position and the display region will be displayed.
Position
(10,13)
Display region
2.
3.
Use the Up/Down and Right/Left Keys to move the display region.
Press the ENT Key to set the position.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-47-(4)
Section 2-48
Display Figure
2-48
Display Figure
The Display Figure processing item is used to display figures (lines, boxes, circles, and arcs) at fixed positions on the screens in Run and Monitor Modes.
Example: Displaying Lines To Indicate the Center of the Screen as a Guide to
the Position of the Measurement Object
Always display lines
0.Label
RUN
OK 45ms
Image 0 freeze
Use this processing item to display lines, boxes, circles, and arcs at a fixed
position on screens in Run and Monitor Modes.
CHECK
The data set here will be enabled when None or Positions is selected under
System/Display/Display settings/Display results.
CHECK
Even when the display image is set to be displayed as a reduced image, the
reduced figure is displayed in the corresponding position.
CHECK
The figure will be displayed if it is registered to the unit, regardless of whether
or not Display figure is executed using the branching control processing items.
CHECK
Select Display Line, Display Box, Display Circle, or Display Cursor under displaying results to display figures using measurement results.
SeeAlso
Refer to 'LVSOD\/LQH'LVSOD\%R['LVSOD\&LUFOHDQG'LVSOD\&XUVRU.
Operational Flow
STEP 1
Set display
conditions.
STEP 2
Draw figure.
STEP 1: Setting Display Conditions
Set the conditions for display.
Conditions
Figure color
Figure 0 to Figure 6 (Figure 0)
Color : Figure0
End
Refer to 6(&7,21
6\VWHP6HWWLQJV.
2-48-(1)
Section 2-48
Display Figure
1.
Select Display figure.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Calculation
4.Display figure
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The setting selections will be displayed.
4.Display figure
Conditions
Draw figure
2.
Select Conditions.
The Conditions Settings Screen will be displayed.
Conditions
Color : Figure0
End
3.
4.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-48-(2)
Section 2-48
Display Figure
STEP 2: Drawing Figures
Select a line, box, circle, circumference, or arc.
1.
Select Draw.
4.Display figure
Conditions
Draw figure
The setting selections will be displayed.
Draw figure
Line
Box
Circle
Circum
Arc
2.
Select a figure.
This explanation will use Box as an example.
The Draw Screen will be displayed.
Draw figure
225,221
When Line has been selected, line options of Solid line and Dash line will
be displayed. Choose one of these options.
3.
Draw the figure in the desired position.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-48-(3)
Section 2-48
Display Figure
Correcting Figures
Select Correct to correct figures that have already been drawn.
1.
Select Draw figure.
4.Display figure
Conditions
Draw figure
The Correct and Clear selections will be displayed.
Draw figure
Correct
Clear
2.
Select Correct.
The Draw Figure Screen will be displayed.
Draw figure
3.
225,221
Draw the figure to be displayed.
The setting will be registered, and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-48-(4)
Section 2-48
Display Figure
Clearing Figures
Select Clear to delete drawn figures.
1.
Select Draw figure.
4.Display figure
Conditions
Draw figure
The Correct and Clear selections will be displayed.
Draw figure
Correct
Clear
2.
Select Clear.
The figure will be cleared and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-48-(5)
Section 2-49
Display Line, Display Box, Display Circle, and Display Cursor
2-49
Display Line, Display Box, Display Circle, and Display
Cursor
Use the Display Line, Display Box, Display Circle, and Display Cursor processing items to display figures based on measurement results on screens in Run
and Monitor Modes. The position of the figure coordinates is set using an
expression.
Example: Displaying a Display Cursor at the Label Detection Position
0.Label
OK 45ms
RUN
Image 0 freeze
Display cursor appears at the detection position.
Use these processing items to display on screens in Run and Monitor Modes
the figures based on measurement results.
Set the coordinates of the position of the figure using expressions.
CHECK
The data set here will be enabled when None or Positions is selected under
System/Display/Display settings/Display results.
CHECK
Even when the display image is set to be displayed as a reduced image, the
reduced figure is displayed in the corresponding position.
CHECK
Select Results display/Display figure to display figures in fixed positions.
SeeAlso
Refer to 'LVSOD\)LJXUH.
Operational Flow
STEP 1
STEP 2
Set display
conditions.
Draw the
figure.
The operational flow will be described here using Display box as an example.
Make adjustments as necessary when other options are selected.
Setting Display Conditions
Set the conditions for display.
Color
OK color*:Green
NG color:Red
Conditions
: OK color
Color
Property : Solid line
End
Only displayed for lines, boxes, and circles.
Solid line*
Dash line
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
2-49-(1)
Display Line, Display Box, Display Circle, and Display Cursor
1.
Section 2-49
Select Display box.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Binary pos. comp
2.Edge position
3.Calculation
4.Display box
5.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
The setting selections will be displayed.
4.Display box
Conditions
1st point X
1st point Y
2nd point X
2nd point Y
2.
Select Conditions.
The screen for setting display conditions will be displayed.
Conditions
: OK color
Color
Property : Solid line
End
3.
4.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
2-49-(2)
Display Line, Display Box, Display Circle, and Display Cursor
Section 2-49
STEP 2: Drawing Figures
The coordinates for the figure are set using expressions.
Display
Box result
Coordinate specification method
Upper left coordinate (1st point X, 1st point Y)
Lower right coordinate (2nd point X, 2nd point Y)
Circle result
Center coordinate (Center X, Center Y)
Radius
Line result
Start point (1st point X, 1st point Y)
End point (2nd point X, 2nd point Y)
Cursor result
X coordinate, Y coordinate
Origin and Setting Range
The defaults are shown below. (When calibration is set, the default will be the
set coordinates for calibration.)
0
X coordinate
511
Y coordinate
483
1.
Select 1st point X.
4.Display box
Conditions
1st point X
1st point Y
2nd point X
2nd point Y
The 1st Point X Settings Screen will be displayed.
1st point X
Measurement :
ENT:Change
2-49-(3)
Section 2-49
Display Line, Display Box, Display Circle, and Display Cursor
2.
Place the cursor in the square brackets for 1st point X and press the ENT
Key.
The setting items will be displayed.
1st point X
Unit
ABS
MOD
MAX
MIN
SQRT
SIN
AND
COS OR
ANGL NOT
ATAN
DIST
Const
DEL BS
OK
ENT:Select
3.
Select the item to be set and set the expression.
Refer to &DOFXODWLRQ.
SeeAlso
4.
Once the expression has been set, select OK.
The expression will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
1st point X
256
Measurement :
256.000
ENT:Change
5.
Press the ESC Key.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Repeat the above steps to set the 1st point Y, 2nd point X, and 2nd point Y.
2-49-(4)
SECTION 3
Monitor Mode and Run Mode
This section explains how to check if measurements are being correctly performed with the set measurement
conditions using Monitor Mode, and how to make actual measurements using Run Mode.
3-1
3-2
Testing Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-(2)
3-1-1
Entering Monitor Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-(2)
3-1-2
Test Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-(3)
3-1-3
Changing Display Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-(4)
Starting Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-(5)
3-2-1
Entering Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-(5)
3-2-2
Performing Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-(6)
3-(1)
Section 3-1
Testing Measurements
3-1
3-1-1
Testing Measurements
Entering Monitor Mode
Use the following procedure to check that measurements are being correctly
performed with the set measurement conditions.
CHECK
The key allocations for the Console Keys used to make input can be changed.
In the following explanations, it is assumed that the key allocations are at the
default settings. If they are not, adapt the procedure accordingly. Refer to
6(&7,216\VWHP6HWWLQJV.
Entering Monitor Mode from Set Mode
1. Display the Set Mode Screen.
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.Fine matching
2.
ENT:Set SFT+ESC:Edit
2.
Press the ESC Key to leave Set Mode and enter Monitor Mode automatically.
0.Scn 0
MON
---- ---ms
Image 0 freeze
Entering Monitor Mode from Run Mode
1. Move the cursor to RUN and press the ENT Key. The mode selections will
be displayed.
0.Scn 0
RUN
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
OK 67ms
Image 0 freeze
2.
3-(2)
Select MON to enter Monitor Mode.
Section 3-1
Testing Measurements
3-1-2
Test Measurement
Use the following procedure to execute measurements according to the conditions set for the scene currently displayed. The test is completed internally by
the Controller and the measurement results are not output via serial or parallel
interfaces. The measurement commands can be input, however, via serial or
parallel interfaces.
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,21&RPPXQLFDWLQJZLWK([WHUQDO'HYLFHV.
1.
Press the TRIG Key on the Console or input the measurement command
from an external device.
Overall judgement
0.Scn 0
MON
Measurement time (see note)
OK
67ms
Image 0 freeze
Note Through display requires longer measurement time than freeze display.
• Frame: 16.7 ms max.
• Field:
8.3 ms max.
Measurement will be executed and the measurement results displayed on
the screen.
CHECK
When the image size is set to All and image input processing items such
as Camera image and Switch camera are set to 2 or more units, use the
Up and Down Keys to switch between input images.
Image 0 freeze0
CHECK
Shows the number of the image
input processing item.
Up to 35 measurement images can be saved. The oldest image will be
overwritten first. Refer to6(&7,216\VWHP6HWWLQJV.
Measurement can be repeated for stored images. Display the desired
stored image using the SHIFT+Up/Down Keys and press SHIFT+TRIG
Keys to execute measurement. Measurement can also be repeated for
freeze images without re-inputting the image using the SHIFT+TRIG Keys.
This feature can be used after judgement conditions have been changed
to check that the new conditions are appropriate.
3-(3)
Section 3-1
Testing Measurements
3-1-3
Changing Display Results
The information displayed on the screen can be changed. The judgement conditions can be changed while monitoring detailed measurement values.
This section gives an outline only. Refer to 6(&7,21 6\VWHP 6HWWLQJV for
details.
1.
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
The display will change to the Measurement Screen settings.
0.Scn 0
MON
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : Details
End
2.
Move the cursor to Display results and press the ENT Key.
Change the settings as required.
0.Scn 0
MON
Image status :
Freeze(Before scroll)
Display image :Image0
Image size
:
All
Display results : None
None
EndPositions
Results
Details
3-(4)
Section 3-2
Starting Measurement
3-2
3-2-1
Starting Measurement
Entering Run Mode
CHECK
The key allocations for the Console Keys can be changed from MON and RUN
screens. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the key allocations are
at the default settings. If they are not, adapt the procedure accordingly. Refer
to 6(&7,216\VWHP6HWWLQJV.
1.
Move the cursor to MON and press the ENT Key.
0.Scn 0
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
OK 67ms
Image 0 freeze
2.
Select RUN.
Run Mode will be entered.
3-(5)
Section 3-2
Starting Measurement
3-2-2
Performing Measurement
Use the following procedure to execute measurement according to the conditions set for the scene currently displayed. The measurement results will be
output to external devices as well.
Press the TRIG Key on the Console or input the measurement command from
an external device.
Overall judgement
0.Scn 0
RUN
Measurement time (see note)
OK
67ms
Image 0 freeze
Note A through display requires longer measurement time than a freeze display.
• Frame: 16.7 ms max.
• Field:
8.3 ms max.
Measurement will be executed and the measurement results will be displayed
on the screen.
CHECK
SeeAlso
CHECK
3-(6)
The key operations are the same as for Monitor Mode.
Refer to 7HVW0HDVXUHPHQW for details.
The lighting will become progressively darker if used for long periods. Make
periodic adjustments to the judgement conditions. When Intelligent Lighting is
used, the lighting will lose approximately 20% illumination after 1,500 hours of
use.
SECTION 4
Other Functions
This section describes additional functions such as changing the measurement setup or backing up data.
4-1
Changing Scenes and Scene Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1
4-2
4-(2)
Setting Measurement Conditions for Different Models:
Changing Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(3)
4-1-2
Copying Scene Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(5)
4-1-3
Initializing Measurement Conditions: Clearing Scenes . . . . . . . . . .
4-(6)
4-1-4
Adding Comments to Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(7)
4-1-5
Using Scene Group Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(8)
Backing Up Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(9)
4-2-1
Backing Up to a Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(10)
4-2-2
Backing Up to Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(16)
4-2-3
Backing Up to Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(20)
4-2-4
Backing Up Flash Memory Data to a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(21)
4-3
Clearing Measurement Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(24)
4-4
Checking Image Density Distribution: Line Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(25)
4-5
Checking I/O Status with External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(28)
4-5-1
Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(28)
4-5-2
Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(31)
Memory Card Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(33)
4-6-1
Creating Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(33)
4-6-2
Copying Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(36)
4-6-3
Checking File Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(38)
4-6-4
Changing File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(39)
4-6-5
Deleting Files and Directories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(41)
4-6-6
Changing Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(42)
4-6-7
Turning OFF the Power Supply to the Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-(43)
4-6
4-(1)
Section 4-1
Changing Scenes and Scene Groups
4-1
Changing Scenes and Scene Groups
The different situations (types of measurement object and types of measurements required) in which measurements are performed are called “scenes”
and the measurement conditions set in Set Mode are called “scene data.” The
scene function can be used to set 32 types of measurement conditions. If
detection conditions change, simply switch scenes to change to a different
measurement setup.
The normal limit of 32 scenes may not be possible for some settings if there is
insufficient memory. A message will appear on the screen if there is insufficient memory. Make the region smaller or delete unnecessary regions or models.
CHECK
Up to 1,024 scenes can be stored if a 128-Mbyte Memory Card is inserted into
Memory Card slot 1. Up to 32 scenes make up a scene group and up to 32
scene groups can be set, i.e., 32 scenes x 32 scene groups = 1,024.
Scene group 0 will be saved in the internal flash memory and scene groups 1
to 31 will be saved to the Memory Card.
If a Memory Card is not used, only Scene group 0 can be used.
Scene group 0
Scene 0
Scene 1
Controller
Scene 30
Scene 31
Scene groups 1 to 31 can be used if a Memory Card is mounted.
Scene group 0
Scene 0
Scene 1
1
0
1 0
1
2
Scene group 31
Memory Card
(128 Mbytes)
Scene 30
Scene 31 30
31 30
31
Scene 0
Scene 1
Controller
Scene 30
Scene 31
Always mount the
Memory Card to
Memory Card slot 1.
1,024 scenes max.
Scene group 0:
Saved to internal flash memory
Scene groups 1 to 31: Saved to Memory Card
4-(2)
Section 4-1
Changing Scenes and Scene Groups
4-1-1
Setting Measurement Conditions for Different Models:
Changing Scenes
Use the scene changing function to switch between different measurement
conditions for different measurement setups or measurement objects. Scene 0
will be displayed by default when the power is turned ON, however, the Controller also accommodates scenes 1 to 31. If a Memory Card is inserted and
the scene group function used, up to 1,024 scenes can be set.
The command for changing scenes or scene groups can be input from an
external device via a parallel or serial interface.
1.
Display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
2.
Move the cursor to Scn and press the ENT Key.
The Scn 0 to Scn 7 options will be displayed.
Use the Down Key to display scene numbers 8 to 31.
---- ---ms
0.Scn 0
MON
0.Scn 0
1.Scn 1
2.Scn 2
3.Scn 3
4.Scn 4
5.Scn 5
6.Scn 6
7.Scn 7
↑↓
Image 0 freeze
S+ESC:Edit S+ENT:Scn Group
3.
Move the cursor to the scene number to be switched to and press the
ENT Key.
The selected scene will be displayed.
1.Scn 1
MON
---- ---ms
Image 0 freeze
4-(3)
Section 4-1
Changing Scenes and Scene Groups
Using Scene Group Function
CHECK
Always mount the Memory Card for storing scene group data into slot 1. If
scene groups 1 to 31 are switched to, a directory called DEFSCNGR will be
automatically created in the root directory of the Memory Card. The scene
group data will be stored in that directory in files called SGR_00**.SGR (where
** is the scene group number).
1.
Insert a Memory Card.
0.Scn 0
MON
---- ---ms
Image 0 freeze
2.
3.
Display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
Move the cursor to Scn and press the ENT Key.
The Scn 0 to Scn 7 options will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
MON
0.Scn 0
1.Scn 1
2.Scn 2
3.Scn 3
4.Scn 4
5.Scn 5
6.Scn 6
7.Scn 7
↑↓
---- ---ms
Image 0 freeze
S+ESC:Edit S+ENT:Scn Group
4.
Press the SHIFT+ENT Keys.
The Scene Group 0 to Scene Group 7 options will be displayed.
Use the Down Key to display scene group numbers 8 to 31.
Scn Group select
0.Scn Group 0
1.Scn Group 1
2.Scn Group 2
3.Scn Group 3
4.Scn Group 4
5.Scn Group 5
6.Scn Group 6
7.Scn Group 7
↑↓
S+ESC:Edit
5.
Move the cursor to the scene group number to be switched to and press
the ENT Key.
The selected scene group will be displayed.
4-(4)
Section 4-1
Changing Scenes and Scene Groups
4-1-2
Copying Scene Data
This function is useful for creating new scenes by copying scene data from
another scene and changing some settings to suit the new requirements.
CHECK
Scene data can be copied only within the same scene group. To copy data
between scene groups, copy the whole scene group. Refer to 8VLQJ
6FHQH*URXS)XQFWLRQ.
1.
Move the cursor to Scn and press the ENT Key.
---- ---ms
0.Scn 0
MON
0.Scn 0
1.Scn 1
2.Scn 2
3.Scn 3
4.Scn 4
5.Scn 5
6.Scn 6
7.Scn 7
↑↓
Image 0 freeze
S+ESC:Edit S+ENT:Scn Group
2.
3.
Move the cursor to the scene number where the copy is to be placed.
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
The Copy/Clear/Comment Menu will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
Comment
4.
Select Copy.
The screen for copying will be displayed.
Original scene : 0.Scn 0
Execute
5.
Cancel
Enter the number of the scene to be copied (Original scene), and select
Execute.
The data will be copied.
4-(5)
Section 4-1
Changing Scenes and Scene Groups
4-1-3
Initializing Measurement Conditions: Clearing Scenes
Use the following procedure to clear measurement conditions set in Set Mode,
and to return scenes to their default settings. This section explains the procedure performed separately for each scene.
SeeAlso
Refer to 8VLQJ 6FHQH *URXS )XQFWLRQ for information on initializing
whole scene groups.
1.
Move the cursor to Scn and press the ENT Key.
0.Scn 0
MON
0.Scn 0
1.Scn 1
2.Scn 2
3.Scn 3
4.Scn 4
5.Scn 5
6.Scn 6
7.Scn 7
↑↓
---- ---ms
Image 0 freeze
S+ESC:Edit S+ENT:Scn Group
2.
3.
Move the cursor to the number of the scene to be cleared.
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
The Copy/Clear/Comment Menu will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
Comment
4.
Select Clear.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
This scene data
will be cleared
Execute Cancel
5.
Select Execute.
The scene will be cleared.
4-(6)
Section 4-1
Changing Scenes and Scene Groups
4-1-4
Adding Comments to Scenes
Any comment can be added to each scene. This is useful for understanding
settings when many regions have been registered.
1.
Move the cursor to Scn and press the ENT Key.
0.Scn 0
MON
0.Scn 0
1.Scn 1
2.Scn 2
3.Scn 3
4.Scn 4
5.Scn 5
6.Scn 6
7.Scn 7
↑↓
---- ---ms
Image 0 freeze
S+ESC:Edit S+ENT:Scn Group
2.
Move the cursor to the number of the scene for the name change.
3.
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
The Copy/Clear/Comment Menu will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
Comment
4.
Select Comment.
A software keyboard will be displayed.
Input comment(Scn 0)
[LABEL ]
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS ← →
6.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
Ins.
ENT:Select
5.
K
Y
k
y
.
Set up to 8 characters.
Move the cursor to END and press the ENT Key.
The scene name will be changed.
0.LABEL
MON
---- ---ms
4-(7)
Section 4-1
Changing Scenes and Scene Groups
4-1-5
Using Scene Group Function
Use the scene group function to copy and clear whole scene groups and
change the scene group name to any 11 standard characters.
1.
Insert a Memory Card.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
2.
Display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
3.
Move the cursor to Scn and press the ENT Key.
The Scene 0 to Scene 7 options will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
MON
0.Scn 0
1.Scn 1
2.Scn 2
3.Scn 3
4.Scn 4
5.Scn 5
6.Scn 6
7.Scn 7
↑↓
---- ---ms
Image 0 freeze
S+ESC:Edit S+ENT:Scn Group
4.
Press the SHIFT+ENT Keys.
The Scene Group 0 to Scene Group 7 options will be displayed.
Scn Group select
0.Scn Group 0
1.Scn Group 1
2.Scn Group 2
3.Scn Group 3
4.Scn Group 4
5.Scn Group 5
6.Scn Group 6
7.Scn Group 7
↑↓
S+ESC:Edit
5.
Move the cursor to the desired scene group number.
6.
Press the SHIFT + ENT Keys.
The Copy/Clear/Comment Menu will be displayed.
Copy
Clear
Comment
The rest of the operations are the same as when using the scene function.
4-(8)
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
4-2
Backing Up Data
This section explains how to make backup copies of data to flash memory or a
computer.
When the power to the Controller is turned OFF, all data settings are cleared.
The Controller loads data saved to flash memory at startup. Therefore, when
settings are changed, in order not to lose these settings, be sure to save them
to flash memory.
The 5 types of system and scene data listed below can be backed up on a
computer or Memory Card. This function is convenient for using the same settings on another Controller.
It is recommended that data is backed up in case data is lost or the Controller
malfunctions.
Data
CHECK
Contents
System data
Settings under SYS are backed up to a computer or Memory
Card.
Scene group data
Scene data (scenes 0 to 31) for specified scene group are
backed up to a computer or Memory Card.
Scene data
Settings under SET are backed up to a computer or Memory
Card.
System data and
scene group data
Both the system data and scene group data (for the scene group
currently displayed) are backed up together to a computer or
Memory Card.
Image data
Saved measurement images in BMP format are backed up to a
computer or Memory Card. This is the basic image format for
Windows and so the images can be displayed on a personal computer.
When backing up images saved when Frame was selected for the Frame/Field
mode, save those images while displaying frame images.
When backing up images saved when Field was selected for the Frame/Field
mode, save those images while displaying field images.
Precaution
Do not turn OFF the power or input a RESET signal while a message is being
displayed in any save or load operation. Data in memory will be destroyed, and
the Controller may not operate correctly the next time it is started.
4-(9)
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
4-2-1
Backing Up to a Personal Computer
This section describes the procedure for data transfer using Hyper Terminal,
which is standard software in Windows.
If other communications software is being used, refer to the relevant manual.
Data communications are performed in XMODEM (-CRC or -SUM) or ZMODEM protocols. XMODEM (-1K) is not supported.
Saving Data to the Computer
Data
Controller
Personal computer
1.
Connect the personal computer and the Controller.
2.
Make the Controller communications settings (serial).
The default communications settings are as shown in the following table.
These settings can normally be used.
Item
Setting
Interface
RS-232C
Baud rate
38,400 (bps)
Data length
8 (bits)
Parity bits
None
Stop bits
1 (bit)
Protocol
XMODEM (See note.)
Note XMODEM and ZMODEM transfer protocols are available. Use the
protocol that matches the personal computer settings.
3.
Start the Hyper Terminal program on the computer and make the following
communications settings. The same communications settings must be
used on both the Controller and the modem on the computer.
For RS-232C and RS-422 Connections
Item
Connection
method
Setting
COM*
(*: COM number to which the cable is
connected)
Baud rate
38,400 (bps)
Data length
8 (bits)
Parity bits
None
Stop bits
1 (bit)
Flow control
None
For Ethernet Connections
Item
Connection
method
4-(10)
Setting
TCP/IP (Winsock)
Host address
IP address of Controller
Port number
23 (TELNET)
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
4.
Once the communications settings have been made on the computer, display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
5.
Move the cursor to MON (or RUN) and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
6.
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
---- ---ms
Select TOOL.
The data selections will be displayed.
TOOL
System data
Scn Group data
Scene data
System + Scn Group
Image data
Memory card
Clear images
Clear measurement
7.
Select the data to be saved.
The destination selections for load and save will be displayed.
Load(Serial)
Save(Serial)
Load(Memory card)
Save(Memory card)
8.
Select Save (Serial).
4-(11)
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
9.
Select the desired number for scene group, scene, or image data.
Scene group
No.
Scn Group 0
Scn Group 1
Scn Group 2
Scn Group 3
Scn Group 4
Scn Group 5
Scn Group 6
Scn Group 7
↑↓
Scene No.
Scn 0
Scn 1
Scn 2
Scn 3
Scn 4
Scn 5
Scn 6
Scn 7
↑↓
(0 to 31)
CHECK
Image data
No.
Memory 0
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
Memory 4
Memory 5
Memory 6
Memory 7
↑↓
(0 to 31)
(0 to 35)
When backing up system and scene group data, the currently displayed
scene group will be saved.
When Communicating with ZMODEM Protocol, set a data file name of up
to 8 characters.
Example
Screen for saving system data
System data Save
[
].SYD
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS
K
Y
k
y
.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
Ins.
ENT:Select
A confirmation message will be displayed.
For XMODEM communications
Data will be loaded.
System data
Execute Cancel
For ZMODEM communications
Data will be saved.
System data
SYD0001.SYD
Execute
4-(12)
Cancel
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
10. Select Execute.
A screen showing the transfer progress will be displayed.
System data Save
Saving data.
11. Select Transfer/Receive File from the Hyper Terminal menu on the computer.
12. Specify where the file is to be saved.
13. Set the protocol to Xmodem or Zmodem.
14. Select Receive.
When XModem is selected, enter the file name.
The data will be transferred from the Controller to the computer.
When the transfer has been completed, the screen in (7.) will return.
Loading Data from the Computer
Data
Controller
Personal computer
1.
Follow steps 1 to 3 in the above procedure to connect the Controller and
the computer.
Refer to %DFNLQJ8SWRD3HUVRQDO&RPSXWHU.
SeeAlso
2.
Select Transfer/Send File from the Hyper Terminal menu.
3.
Select the file to be sent.
4.
Set the protocol to Xmodem or Zmodem.
5.
Select Send.
The data transfer screen will be displayed.
4-(13)
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
6.
Once the preparations have been completed on the computer, display the
Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
7.
Move the cursor to MON (or RUN) and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
8.
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
---- ---ms
Select TOOL.
The data selections will be displayed.
TOOL
System data
Scn Group data
Scene data
System + Scn Group
Image data
Memory card
Clear images
Clear measurement
9.
Select the data to be loaded.
The destination selections for load and save will be displayed.
Load(Serial)
Save(Serial)
Load(Memory card)
Save(Memory card)
10. Select Load (Serial).
4-(14)
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
11. Select the desired number for scene group, scene, or image data.
Scene group
No.
Scn Group 0
Scn Group 1
Scn Group 2
Scn Group 3
Scn Group 4
Scn Group 5
Scn Group 6
Scn Group 7
↑↓
(0 to 31)
CHECK
Scene No.
Scn 0
Scn 1
Scn 2
Scn 3
Scn 4
Scn 5
Scn 6
Scn 7
↑↓
(0 to 31)
Image data
No.
Memory 0
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
Memory 4
Memory 5
Memory 6
Memory 7
↑↓
(0 to 35)
When backing up system and scene group data, the currently displayed
scene group will be loaded.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Example: Screen when loading system data.
Data will be loaded.
System data
Execute Cancel
12. Select Execute.
The data will be transferred from the computer to the Controller.
When loading has been completed, the screen in (9.) will return.
4-(15)
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
4-2-2
Backing Up to Memory Cards
This section describes inserting a Memory Card and backing up settings data
to the Memory Card.
CHECK
Data can be backed up to Memory Cards inserted for scene group data.
Data for scene groups 1 to 31 will be saved in the files listed below. Do not
overwrite these files.
[DEFSCNGR]
SGR_0001.SGR
SGR_0002.SGR
SGR_0031.SGR
Precaution
Directory for saving scene group data
Scene group 1 file
Scene group 2 file
Scene group 31 file
Turn OFF the power supply to the Memory Card before removing the Memory
Card. Refer to 7XUQLQJ2))WKH3RZHU6XSSO\WRWKH0HPRU\&DUG.
Saving from the Controller to the Memory Card
1.
Insert the Memory Card.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
2.
Display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
3.
Move the cursor to MON (or RUN) and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn
4.
4-(16)
Select TOOL.
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
---- ---ms
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
The data selections will be displayed.
TOOL
System data
Scn Group data
Scene data
System + Scn Group
Image data
Memory card
Clear images
Clear measurement
5.
Select the data to be saved.
The destination selections for load and save will be displayed.
Load(Serial)
Save(Serial)
Load(Memory card)
Save(Memory card)
6.
Select Save (Memory card).
7.
Select the desired number for scene group, scene, or image data.
Scene group
No.
Scn Group 0
Scn Group 1
Scn Group 2
Scn Group 3
Scn Group 4
Scn Group 5
Scn Group 6
Scn Group 7
↑↓
(0 to 31)
CHECK
Scene No.
Scn 0
Scn 1
Scn 2
Scn 3
Scn 4
Scn 5
Scn 6
Scn 7
↑↓
(0 to 31)
Image data
No.
Memory 0
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
Memory 4
Memory 5
Memory 6
Memory 7
↑↓
(0 to 35)
When backing up system and scene group data, the currently displayed
scene group will be saved.
A list of files in the Memory Card root directory will be displayed.
System data Save
/C1
[.
]
SYSDAT1 SYD
SYSDAT2 SYD
SYSDAT3 SYD
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
Drive name
Slot 0 Memory Card: /C0
Slot 1 Memory Card: /C1
Refer to &KDQJLQJ'ULYHV for information on how to change drives.
SeeAlso
CHECK
To overwrite existing files, select the file by pressing the ENT Key and then
go to step 12.
To specify a new file name, perform steps 8 to 11.
8.
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
4-(17)
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
The edit menu will be displayed.
Property
Make directory
New file
Change name
Delete
9.
CHECK
Select New file.
If Make directory is selected, the screen for creating new directories will be
displayed. Files can be saved in the newly created directory.
The software keyboard will be displayed.
New file(System data)
[SYSDAT4 ].SYD
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS ← →
K
Y
k
y
.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
ENT:Select
END
Ins.
10. Set the file name with up to 8 characters.
CHECK
Periods (.) cannot be used in file names.
11. Move the cursor to END and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Example:
Confirmation message when saving system data
Data will be saved.
System data
↓
SYSDAT4.SYD
Execute Cancel
12. Select Execute.
When saving has been completed, the screen in (5.) will return.
Loading from the Memory Card to the Controller
1.
SeeAlso
Follow steps 1 to 5 for Saving from the Controller to the Memory Card and
move to the screen for selecting load destinations.
Refer to page 4-(9).
TOOL
Load(Serial)
System data
Save(Serial)
Scn Group
data
Load(Memory card)
Scene data
System +Save(Memory
Scn Group card)
Image data
Memory card
Clear images
Clear measurement
4-(18)
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
2.
Select Load (Memory card).
3.
Select the desired number for scene group, scene, or image data.
Scene group
No.
Scn Group 0
Scn Group 1
Scn Group 2
Scn Group 3
Scn Group 4
Scn Group 5
Scn Group 6
Scn Group 7
↑↓
(0 to 31)
CHECK
Scene No.
Scn 0
Scn 1
Scn 2
Scn 3
Scn 4
Scn 5
Scn 6
Scn 7
↑↓
(0 to 31)
Image data
No.
Memory 0
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
Memory 4
Memory 5
Memory 6
Memory 7
↑↓
(0 to 35)
When backing up system and scene group data, the currently displayed
scene group will be loaded.
The screen for selecting files will be displayed.
Example:
Screen for loading system data
System data Load
/C1
[
]
SYSDAT1 SYD
SYSDAT2 SYD
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
ENT:Select S+ESC:Edit
Refer to &KDQJLQJ'ULYHV for information on changing drives.
SeeAlso
4.
Select the file to be loaded.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Example:
Screen when loading system data
Data will be saved.
SYSDAT1.SYD
↓
System data
Execute Cancel
5.
Select Execute.
When the loading has been completed, the screen in (1.) will return.
4-(19)
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
4-2-3
Backing Up to Flash Memory
The scene data set to scene group 0 and system data will be saved to the
Controller internal flash memory. If this save operation is performed for scene
groups 1 to 31, the data will overwrite the contents of the files on the Memory
Card.
Precaution
Flash memory and Memory Card data is loaded each time the Controller is
started up. Therefore, when settings have been changed, be sure to save to
flash memory before turning the power OFF. If the power is turned OFF without saving, all of the setting changes will be lost.
1.
Display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
2.
Move the cursor to MON (or RUN) and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
3.
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
---- ---ms
Select SAVE.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Setting data will be saved.
Execute Cancel
4.
Precaution
Select Execute.
Do not turn OFF the power or input a RESET signal while a message is
being displayed in any save or load operation. Data in memory will be destroyed, and the Controller may not operate correctly the next time it is
started.
When saving has been completed, the screen for step 1 will return.
4-(20)
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
4-2-4
Backing Up Flash Memory Data to a Memory Card
Data saved to flash memory can be backed up to a Memory Card. This function enables saving both the installed processing items and settings data
(including system data and scene data for scene group 0) on a Memory Card.
This function is also useful for copying the same settings to a different Controller when more than one Controller is being used.
It is recommended that data is backed up in case data is lost or the Controller
malfunctions.
1.
Display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
2.
Move the cursor to MON (or RUN) and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
3.
---- ---ms
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Select TOOL.
The tool selections will be displayed.
TOOL
System + Scn Group
Image data
Memory card
Clear images
Clear measurement
Line brightness
I/O monitor
Back up Flash memory
4.
Select Back up Flash memory.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
Back up Flash memory
to Memory card.
Drive : C1
Execute
Cancel
4-(21)
Section 4-2
Backing Up Data
5.
Select the drive to which the Memory Card to be used for backup is mounted.
6.
Select Execute.
Precaution
Do not turn OFF the power or input a RESET signal executing backup.
Data in memory will be destroyed, and the Controller may not operate correctly the next time it is started.
When the save operation has been completed, the screen in (4.) will return.
CHECK
Once backup has been completed, two files, bkupdata and bkupprog, will
be created in the root directory of the Memory Card. These files are the
flash memory backup data. Do not change the file names.
Loading Data
The load operation is performed using the Setup Menu.
The Memory Card used to install the F250-UME Application Software is
needed to start the Setup Menu.
1.
Turn OFF the Controller power supply.
2.
Mount the F250-UME to Memory Card slot 0.
3.
Mount the Memory Card with the backup data into Memory Card slot 1.
4.
Turn ON the Controller power supply.
The Setup Menu will be displayed.
Set up
Select items
Install
Backup data load
Clear memory
5.
Select Backup data load.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
The Backup Data
stored in memory card
will be loaded.
The programs and data
stored at present
are cleared.
Execute
6.
4-(22)
Select Execute.
Cancel
Backing Up Data
Section 4-2
Precaution
Do not turn OFF the power or input a RESET signal executing backup.
Data in memory will be destroyed, and the Controller may not operate correctly the next time it is started.
When the save operation has been completed, a confirmation message
will be displayed.
Loading Backup Data
finished.
Put off the memory card
and restart.
OK
7.
Press the ENT Key.
The display will return to the main setup menu.
Set up
Select items
Install
Backup data load
Clear memory
8.
Turn OFF the Controller power supply.
9.
Remove the F250-UME from Memory Card slot 0.
10. Turn ON the Controller power supply.
CHECK
If the power supply is turned ON while the F250-UME is still mounted, the
Setup Menu will be started again. Always remove the F250-UME before
starting the Controller.
The Main Menu will start.
0.Scn 0
MON
---- ---ms
Image 0 freeze
4-(23)
Section 4-3
Clearing Measurement Values
4-3
Clearing Measurement Values
All the measurement values for the scene currently displayed can be cleared.
This function is useful, for example, for clearing the measurement count when
setting an expression to count the number of measurements.
1.
Display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
2.
Move the cursor to MON (or RUN) and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
3.
---- ---ms
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Select TOOL.
The tool selections will be displayed.
TOOL
System data
Scn Group data
Scene data
System + Scn Group
Image data
Memory card
Clear images
Clear measurement
4.
Select Clear measurement.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
All measurements
will be cleared.
Execute
5.
Cancel
Select Execute.
The measurement values will be cleared and the screen in (3.) will return.
4-(24)
Section 4-4
Checking Image Density Distribution: Line Brightness
4-4
Checking Image Density Distribution: Line Brightness
The graph showing the density distribution for 1 line in an image is called the
line brightness graph. The line brightness can be shown for any line in a horizontal or vertical direction.
0
Vertical line
Use the Left and Right Keys
to move this line to where the
density is to be checked.
Vertical line
density
255
Line brightness
Density range
X: 36 - 235
Y: 20 - 232
Graph line
The graph lines displayed
at the left of the screen
indicate density distribution
for vertical lines.
Horizontal line density
0
Horizontal line
Use the Up and Down Keys to
move this line to where the density
is to be checked.
CHECK
Minimum to maximum density
for horizontal lines
Minimum to maximum density
for vertical lines
255
Graph line
The graph lines displayed at the bottom
of the screen indicate density distribution
for horizontal lines.
Line brightness cannot be shown in the following circumstances:
• When the image is either Last NG (before scroll) or Last NG (after scroll)
• When the image size is set to Reduced
SeeAlso
CHECK
Refer to 6(&7,216\VWHP6HWWLQJV.
Using Line Brightness
• Use to check if the light distribution is uneven.
If a homogeneous color is being displayed
but the graph has an incline, it indicates
that the lighting is uneven.
4-(25)
Section 4-4
Checking Image Density Distribution: Line Brightness
• Use to find how great the density difference is between the location to be
measured and the background.
Example: Defect detection
Observe the bumps in the graph line
to determine how much difference in
density can be detected in what areas.
1.
Display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
2.
Move the cursor to MON (or RUN) and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
3.
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Select TOOL.
The tool selections will be displayed.
TOOL
Scn Group data
Scn data
System+Scn Group data
Image data
Memory card
Clear images
Clear measurement
Line brightness
↑↓
4.
4-(26)
Select Line brightness.
---- ---ms
Section 4-4
Checking Image Density Distribution: Line Brightness
The Line Brightness screen will be displayed.
Line brightness
Density range
X: 36 - 200
Y: 20 - 232
5.
Move the solid line to the desired position for observing density distribution.
Use the Up/Down Keys to move the horizontal line.
Use the Right/Left Keys to move the vertical line.
6.
Press the ESC Key to exit this screen.
The screen in (3.) will return.
4-(27)
Section 4-5
Checking I/O Status with External Devices
4-5
Checking I/O Status with External Devices
Use the I/O monitor function to check the communications status via serial or
parallel interfaces. Wiring and communications settings can be checked to see
if they are correct.
4-5-1
Serial Interface
The communications status via the serial interface can be checked.
1.
Display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
2.
Move the cursor to MON (or RUN) and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
3.
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
Select TOOL.
The tool selections will be displayed.
Down Key: Scrolls through the menu.
TOOL
System + Scn Group
Image data
Memory card
Clear images
Clear measurement
Line brightness
I/O monitor
Back up Flash memory
4.
Select I/O monitor.
The interface selections will be displayed.
Serial
Parallel
4-(28)
---- ---ms
Section 4-5
Checking I/O Status with External Devices
5.
Select Serial.
The Serial I/O Monitor Screen will be displayed.
Serial I/O monitor
[SO]TEST STRING
[S I ]RECEIVE TEST
[SO]RECEIVE TEST
TRIG:Test S+ENT:Settings
CHECK
Display Details
Display
SO
Meaning
Output to external device.
Press the TRIG Key once to send a test character string “TEST STRING”
from the Controller to the external device. The contents of the test character string can be changed. Refer to&KDQJLQJ7HVW&KDUDFWHU6WULQJDQG
(FKR%DFN, below.
SI
Input from external device. If more than 26 characters are received, only
the first 26 characters will be displayed.
If Echo back is set to ON, the received data will be returned as is to the
external device. Refer to&KDQJLQJ7HVW&KDUDFWHU6WULQJDQG(FKR%DFN,
below.
6.
Press the ESC Key to exit this screen.
The screen in (4.) will return.
Changing Test Character String and Echo Back
1.
Display the Serial I/O Monitor Screen and press the SHIFT+ENT Keys.
The screen for making detailed settings will be displayed.
Echo back : ON
Test string : [TEST STRING]
End
2.
Select ON or OFF for Echo back.
3.
Move the cursor to the square brackets and press the ENT Key.
The software keyboard will be displayed.
Test string :
[TEST STRING ]
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
ENT:Selet
4.
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS ← →
K
Y
k
y
.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
Ins.
Change the test string. Up to 12 characters can be inserted.
4-(29)
Checking I/O Status with External Devices
5.
6.
Select END and the screen in (1.) will return.
Move the cursor to End and press the ENT Key.
The Serial I/O Monitor Screen will return.
4-(30)
Section 4-5
Section 4-5
Checking I/O Status with External Devices
4-5-2
Parallel Interface
The communications status via the parallel interface can be checked.
1.
Display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
2.
Move the cursor to MON (or RUN) and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
3.
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
---- ---ms
Select TOOL.
The tool selections will be displayed.
Down Key: Scrolls through the menu.
TOOL
System + Scn Group
Image data
Memory card
Clear images
Clear measurement
Line brightness
I/O monitor
Back up Flash memory
4.
Select I/O monitor.
The interface selections will be displayed.
Serial
Parallel
4-(31)
Section 4-5
Checking I/O Status with External Devices
5.
Select Parallel.
The Parallel I/O Monitor Screen will be displayed.
Parallel I/O monitor
STEP : OFF
DSA : OFF
DI 15-0 : 000000000000000
RUN : OFF
ERR : OFF
OR
BUSY : OFF
: OFF
GATE : OFF
DO 31-16 : 0000000000000000
DO 15-0 : 0000000000000000
CHECK
Display Details
Display
STEP
DSA
Meaning
Displays the input status for each signal from the external device to
the Controller.
DI
RUN
ERR
OR
BUSY
GATE
Displays the output status for each signal from the Controller to the
external device.
These displays can be changed to ON/OFF or 0/1 even if measurements are not executed.
Move the cursor to the display item. The display will change each
time the ENT Key is pressed.
DO
6.
Press the ESC Key to exit this screen.
The screen in (4.) will return.
4-(32)
Section 4-6
Memory Card Operations
4-6
Memory Card Operations
Data settings and measurement images can be saved from the Controller to a
Memory Card. The files on the Memory Card can be copied and the file names
changed. This section explains these operations for Memory Cards.
Precaution
4-6-1
Turn OFF the power supply to the Memory Card before removing the Memory
Card. If the power is not turned OFF before the Memory Card is removed, the
Memory Card and the Controller may be damaged. Refer to 7XUQLQJ
2))WKH3RZHU6XSSO\WRWKH0HPRU\&DUG.
Creating Directories
Directories can be created in the Memory Card and files can be stored in
those directories. It is easier to find files if separate directories are created for
related files.
1.
Insert the Memory Card.
2.
Display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
3.
Move the cursor to MON (or RUN) and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
4.
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
---- ---ms
Select TOOL.
The tool selections will be displayed.
TOOL
System data
Scn Group data
Scene data
System + Scn Group
Image data
Memory card
Clear images
Clear measurement
5.
Select Memory card.
4-(33)
Section 4-6
Memory Card Operations
The Copy file/File operation/Drive status Menu will be displayed.
Copy file
File operation
Drive status
6.
Select File operation.
A list of files in the Memory Card root directory will be displayed.
Refer to &KDQJLQJ'ULYHV for information on changing drives.
File operation
/C1
[.
SYSDAT1
SYSDAT2
SYSDAT3
BOTTLE
SEAL
]
SYD
SYD
SYD
SCN
SCN
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/02
00/11/02
ENT:Select S+ESC:Edit
7.
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
The edit menu will be displayed.
Property
Make directory
Change name
Delete
8.
Select Make directory.
A software keyboard will be displayed.
Make directory
[DIR_001 ]
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS ← →
K
Y
k
y
.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
ENT:Select
9.
CHECK
Ins.
Input the directory name, using up to 8 characters.
Periods (.) cannot be used in directory names.
10. Move the cursor to END and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Directory will be made.
DIR_001
Execute Cancel
4-(34)
Section 4-6
Memory Card Operations
11. Select Execute.
The directory will be created and the screen in (6.) will return.
CHECK
The directory is displayed in the list of files, encased in square brackets.
Move the cursor to the directory and press the ENT Key to display a list of
files in that directory.
Example
When directory [DIC_1] is selected...
/C1[]
00-11-01
[.
]
[DIC_1
]
SYSDAT1 SYD
SYSDAT2 SYD
SYSDAT3 SYD
SEAL
SCN
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/02
The files in [DIC_1] will be displayed.
/C1/DIC_1
[.
[. .
MARK-B
MARK-C
MARK-D
Select [. .
]
]
SCN
SCN
SCN
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/02
] to move up a level.
4-(35)
Section 4-6
Memory Card Operations
4-6-2
Copying Files
1.
Perform steps 1 to 5 for Creating Directories and display the Copy file/File
operation/Drive status Menu.
Refer to &UHDWLQJ'LUHFWRULHV.
SeeAlso
2.
Select Copy file.
Copy file
File operation
Drive status
A list of files in the Memory Card root directory will be displayed.
Original
/C1
[.
SYSDAT1
SYSDAT2
SYSDAT3
BOTTLE
SEAL
]
SYD
SYD
SYD
SCN
SCN
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/02
00/11/02
ENT:Select S+ESC:Edit
Refer to &KDQJLQJ'ULYHV for information on changing drives.
SeeAlso
3.
Move the cursor to the file to be copied and press the ENT Key.
A screen for specifying the copy destination will be displayed.
Copy (Original: SYSDAT1.SYD)
/C1
[.
SYSDAT1
SYSDAT2
CHECK
]
SYD
SYD
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
To overwrite existing files, select the file by pressing the ENT Key and then
go to step 8.
To specify a new file name, perform steps 4 to 8.
4.
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys.
The edit menu will be displayed.
Property
Make directory
New file
Change name
Delete
5.
CHECK
4-(36)
Select New file.
If Make directory is selected, the screen for creating new directories will be
displayed. Files can be saved in the newly created directory.
Section 4-6
Memory Card Operations
The software keyboard will be displayed.
New file(System data)
[SYSDA
].SYD
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS ← →
K
Y
k
y
.
ENT:Select
6.
CHECK
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
Ins.
Set the file name with up to 8 characters.
Periods (.) cannot be used in file names.
7.
Move the cursor to END and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Copy file
Original:/C1/SYSDAT1.SYD
Copy :/C1/SYS0010.SYD
File will be copied.
Execute Cancel
8.
Select Execute.
The file will be copied and the screen in (2.) will return.
4-(37)
Section 4-6
Memory Card Operations
4-6-3
Checking File Properties
The size, type, or date a file was created can be checked.
1.
Perform steps 1 to 6 for Creating Directories and display the list of file
names.
Refer to &UHDWLQJ'LUHFWRULHV.
SeeAlso
2.
Move the cursor to the file for which the information is to be checked and
press the SHIFT + ENT Keys.
File operation
/C1
[.
SYSDAT1
SYSDAT2
SYSDAT3
BOTTLE
SEAL
]
SYD
SYD
SYD
SCN
SCN
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/02
00/11/02
ENT:Select S+ESC:Edit
Refer to &KDQJLQJ'ULYHV for information on changing drives.
SeeAlso
The edit menu will be displayed.
Property
Make directory
Change name
Delete
3.
Select Property.
The properties of the selected file will be displayed.
File name :SYSDAT1.SYD
:System data
Type
:/C1
Path
:
2KB
Size
Creation :00/11/01 12:30:24
End
4.
Select End.
The screen in (2.) will return.
4-(38)
Section 4-6
Memory Card Operations
4-6-4
Changing File Names
CHECK
Only the file name can be changed. The directory name cannot be changed.
1.
Perform steps 1 to 6 for Creating Directories and display the list of file
names.
2.
Move the cursor to the file for which the name is to be changed and press
the SHIFT + ESC Keys.
Refer to &UHDWLQJ'LUHFWRULHV.
SeeAlso
File operation
/C1
[.
SYSDAT1
SYSDAT2
SYSDAT3
BOTTLE
SEAL
]
SYD
SYD
SYD
SCN
SCN
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/02
00/11/02
ENT:Select S+ESC:Edit
Refer to &KDQJLQJ'ULYHV for information on changing drives.
SeeAlso
The edit menu will be displayed.
Property
Make directory
Change name
Delete
3.
Select Change name.
A software keyboard will be displayed.
Change name(System data)
[SYSDA ].SYD
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS ← →
K
Y
k
y
.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
ENT:Select
4.
CHECK
Ins.
Set the file name with up to 8 characters.
Periods (.) cannot be used in file names.
5.
Move the cursor to END and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
File name will be changed.
Before:SYSDAT1.SYD
After :SYS0001.SYD
Execute Cancel
6.
Select Execute.
The file name will be changed and the screen in (2.) will return.
4-(39)
Section 4-6
Memory Card Operations
CHECK
When the scene group function is used, scene groups 1 to 31 are saved in
the C1 Memory Card (Memory Card in Memory Card slot 1) under the file
names shown below.
Do not change these file names. If these file names are changed, measurement setups will no longer be able to be changed by switching scene
groups.
[DEFSCNGR]
SGR_0001.SGR
SGR_0002.SGR
SGR_0031.SGR
4-(40)
Directory where scene groups are stored
Scene group 1 file
Scene group 2 file
Scene group 31 file
Section 4-6
Memory Card Operations
4-6-5
Deleting Files and Directories
1.
Perform steps 1 to 6 for Creating Directories and display the list of file
names.
2.
Move the cursor to the file or directory to be deleted and press the SHIFT
+ ESC Keys.
Refer to &UHDWLQJ'LUHFWRULHV.
SeeAlso
File operation
/C1
[.
SYSDAT1
SYSDAT2
SYSDAT3
BOTTLE
SEAL
]
SYD
SYD
SYD
SCN
SCN
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/02
00/11/02
ENT:Select S+ESC:Edit
Refer to &KDQJLQJ'ULYHV for information on changing drives.
SeeAlso
CHECK
A directory can be deleted only when there are no files in that directory.
The edit menu will be displayed.
Property
Make directory
Change name
Delete
3.
Select Delete.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
SYSDAT1.SYD
will be deleted.
Execute Cancel
4.
Select Execute.
The file or directory will be deleted and the screen in (2.) will return.
4-(41)
Section 4-6
Memory Card Operations
4-6-6
Changing Drives
The Controller has two Memory Card slots and the drive name is displayed as
shown below when the list of files is displayed.
System data save
/C1
[.
]
SYSDAT1 SYD
SYSDAT2 SYD
SYSDAT3 SYD
Drive name
Memory Card in slot 0: /C0
Memory Card in slot 1: /C1
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
If there are Memory Cards mounted in both slots 0 and 1, use the following
procedure to switch between drives.
1.
Press the SHIFT+ESC Keys on the screen where the list of files is displayed.
File operation
/C1
[.
]
SYSDAT1
SYSDAT2
SYSDAT3
BOTTLE
SEAL
SYD
SYD
SYD
SCN
SCN
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/01
00/11/02
00/11/02
ENT:Select S+ESC:Edit
The edit menu will be displayed.
Property
Make directory
New file
Change name
Delete
Switch Drive
2.
CHECK
Select Switch Drive.
The Switch Drive option will not be displayed if only one Memory Card is
mounted in either slot 0 or slot 1.
Switch to the other drive.
File operation
/C0
[.
SCN1
SCN1
4-(42)
]
SCN
SCN
01/02/01
01/11/01
01/02/01
Section 4-6
Memory Card Operations
4-6-7
Turning OFF the Power Supply to the Memory Card
Turn OFF the power supply to the Memory Card before removing the Memory
Card. If the power is not turned OFF before the Memory Card is removed, the
Memory Card and the Controller may be damaged.
CHECK
The total space and free space on the Memory Card will be displayed on this
screen.
1.
Perform steps 1 to 5 for Creating Directories and display the Copy file/File
operation/Drive status Menu.
Refer to &UHDWLQJ'LUHFWRULHV.
SeeAlso
2.
Select Drive status.
Copy file
File operation
Drive status
The Drive Status Screen will be displayed.
Drive status
Drive C0 : Inserted
Free space: InsertedB/62436KB
Stop
Drive C1 :
Free space: 24650B/62436KB
End
3.
CHECK
If a Memory Card is inserted, “Inserted” will be displayed. Change the display to Stop.
If a Memory Card is not inserted, the display will be “Not inserted.”
4.
Select End.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Memory card C0
can be removed safely.
Push ENT after remove it.
OK
5.
Remove the Memory Card and press the ENT Key.
The screen in (2.) will return.
4-(43)
SECTION 5
System Settings
This section describes how to set conditions related to the system environment. Refer to 6(&7,21 &RPPXQLFDWLQJZLWK([WHUQDO'HYLFHV for information on communications specifications.
5-1
Entering System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(2)
5-2
Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(3)
5-3
Screen Display and Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(5)
5-3-1
Changing Font Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(5)
5-3-2
Measurement Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(6)
5-3-3
Selecting Color or Monochrome Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(12)
5-3-4
Changing Character or Figure Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(13)
5-3-5
Creating Original Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(15)
Customizing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(17)
5-4-1
Changing Console Key Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(17)
5-4-2
Capturing and Saving Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(21)
5-4-3
Shortening Scene Group Switching Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(23)
5-4-4
Setting Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(24)
5-4-5
Nonstop Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(26)
Setting Conditions for Saving Measurement Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(27)
5-5-1
Displaying Stored Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(28)
5-5-2
Clearing All Stored Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(30)
5-6
Using BUSY Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(31)
5-7
Setting Startup Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(33)
5-8
Setting the Calendar Date and Time (Date/Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(34)
5-9
Checking System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(35)
5-9-1
Checking Remaining Memory Space and Battery Status . . . . . . . . .
5-(35)
5-9-2
Checking the Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-(36)
5-4
5-5
5-(1)
Section 5-1
Entering System Mode
5-1
Entering System Mode
To set conditions related to the system environment it is necessary to enter
System Mode.
1.
Display the Basic Screen for Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
2.
Move the cursor to MON and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
3.
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
---- ---ms
Select SYS.
The System Settings Screen will be displayed.
System settings
Camera settings
Communication
Display
Operation settings
Measurement control
Startup mode
Date/Time
System information
5-(2)
Section 5-2
Camera Settings
5-2
Camera Settings
Specify the model of the connected Camera and Intelligent Lighting (if using
any). The model is written on each unit.
Menu item
Camera
Models
F150-S1A
Details
Select the model of the connected Camera.
F160-S1*
Others
Intelligent Lighting 0
Out of use*
Intelligent Lighting 1
LTC20
Intelligent Lighting 2
LTC50
Intelligent Lighting 3
If a Camera with Intelligent Lighting is connected, select the model of the Intelligent
Lighting.
Always set the DIP switch on the Intelligent
Lighting to 0, regardless of the Camera
number.
Refer to the Setup Manual.
Note The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Enter System Mode and select Camera settings.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The Camera Settings Screen will be displayed.
Camera settings
Camera
:F160-S1
Intelligent Lighting 0:
Out of use
Intelligent Lighting 1:
Out of use
Intelligent Lighting 2:
Out of use
Intelligent Lighting 3:
Out of use
End
2.
Select the model of the connected Camera.
3.
If using Intelligent Lighting, select the model.
5-(3)
Section 5-2
Camera Settings
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the System Settings Screen will return.
CHECK
If Others is selected under Camera, the Camera Settings (Detail) Screen
will be displayed.
The settings for F200/F300 Cameras are listed in the Setup Manual.
SeeAlso
Refer to the Setup Manual.
Camera settings(Detail)
Camera Speed : Double
Shutter
: SYNC RESET
Synchronization : External
Strobe disable, start : [ 0]H
Strobe disable, end : [ 0]H
Clamp pulse timing : [ 80]CLK
Clamp pulse width : [ 25]CLK
Shutter trigger width : [ 3]H
↑↓
End
Precaution
5-(4)
When changing the Camera model, save settings data in flash memory.
Set the measurement conditions after starting the Controller again.
Section 5-3
Screen Display and Monitor
5-3
5-3-1
Screen Display and Monitor
Changing Font Sizes
Select the size of the font for screen display.
Selections
CHECK
Details
Normal
Default font size.
Small
Half the normal font size.
The font sizes set for each results display processing item will be enabled for
any results data being displayed under those items.
1.
Enter System Mode and select Display.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The selections menu will be displayed.
Character size
Display settings
Monitor
Designate colors
Make colors
2.
Select Character size.
The Character Size Selection Screen will be displayed.
Character size
Character size: Normal
End
3.
Change the setting as required.
4.
Select End.
The setting will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
5-(5)
Section 5-3
Screen Display and Monitor
5-3-2
Measurement Screen Settings
Set the items below to determine the information displayed in Run Mode and
Monitor Mode. The display settings made here will be reflected in all scenes.
Scene/Mode
Select whether or not to display
the scene and mode.
0.Scn 0
MON
Overall Judgement
Select whether or not to display the overall judgement.
NG
67ms
1.Fine matching
Processing Time
Select whether or not to display the processing
time.
Display Image
Select which image to display, the image stored
at Image 0 or the image stored at Image 1.
Judge
:NG
Quantity : 1
Area
:12
Gravity X :290.000
Gravity Y :280.000
Image 0 freeze
Image Status
Select the type of image to display.
Image Size
Select whether to display a full-screen or
reduced image.
Image Type
Select whether or not to display these items.
Display Results
Select whether or not to display detailed measurement results, e.g., detailed results
for each unit.
CHECK
Scene/Mode
Even if Scene/Mode is set to not be displayed, the scene or mode can be displayed temporarily by pressing the ENT Key. However, measurement cannot
be performed while the scene or mode is being displayed this way. Press the
ESC Key again to turn OFF the display.
1.
Enter System mode and select Display.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The Display Settings/Monitor/Designate Colors/Make Colors Menu will be
displayed.
Character size
Display settings
Monitor
Designate colors
Make colors
2.
5-(6)
Select Display settings.
Section 5-3
Screen Display and Monitor
The Display Settings Screen will be displayed.
System settings
:
Image status
Freeze(Before scroll)
: Image0
Display image
:
All
Image size
: None
Display results
:
ON
Scene/mode
ON
Overall judgement :
:
ON
Processing time
End
3.
4.
Change the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (2.) will return.
Image Status
Select the type of itmage to be displayed in the background.
Selection
Through
Details
The latest image taken by the Camera is displayed directly.
If measurement is performed using a Through display, the measurement time will be increased by the amount of time from when
the measurement command is input until the image input starts.
This delay is included in the measurement time shown on the
Monitor and Run Mode screens.
Freeze* (before
scroll)
A still of the image taken by the Camera is displayed. This image
is updated when measurement is performed.
Select Freeze when measuring moving objects.
If position displacement compensation is set, an unscrolled
image is displayed. The region will be scrolled by the position displacement amount.
Freeze (after
scroll)
A still of the image taken by the Camera is displayed. This image
is updated when measurement is performed.
Select Freeze when measuring moving objects.
If position displacement compensation is set, an image scrolled
the position displacement amount will be displayed.
5-(7)
Section 5-3
Screen Display and Monitor
Selection
Last NG (before
scroll)
Details
The image of the latest image to receive an overall judgement of
NG is displayed.
If position displacement compensation is set, an unscrolled
image will be displayed. The region will be scrolled the position
displacement amount.
The latest measurement results are always displayed for overall
judgement and measurement time.
Be careful, because the display image and the overall judgement
will not match when this image type is selected if the latest measurement gave an OK judgement.
Overall judgement
0.Scn 0
RUN
Measurement time
OK
100ms
NG region
Last NG
Most recent NG image
The following operations cannot be performed, while the last NG
image is being displayed.
• Re-measurement
• Display capture
• Line Brightness display
• Stored image display
When operations other than measurement are performed, the latest NG image will be cleared and the display will remain clear
until the next NG result is returned.
Last NG (after
scroll)
The image of the latest image to receive an overall judgement of
NG is displayed.
If position displacement compensation is set, an image scrolled
the position displacement amount will be displayed.
All other operations are the same as for Last NG (before scroll).
Note *The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
When After scroll is selected, the measurement times will be lengthened by
the following amounts:
Frame images: (No. of displayed images) ™ 16.7 ms
Field images: (No. of displayed images) ™ 8.3 ms
Image Size
Select the size of the image in relation to the screen.
All
One image will cover the whole screen. This is the default setting.
Reduced
Depending on the number of units set for the displayed scene under Camera
image/Switch camera, 1 to 4 screens will be reduced and displayed.
5-(8)
Section 5-3
Screen Display and Monitor
Example: When Camera Image Set to 1 and Switch Camera Set to 1
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.Switch camera
4.Binary defect
0. Image from
Camera image
3. Image from
Switch camera
Example: When Camera Image Set to 1 and Switch Camera Set to 3
0.Scn 0=SET=
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.Switch camera
4.Binary defect
5.Switch camera
6.Fine matching
7.Switch camera
8.Fine matching
CHECK
0. Image from
Camera image
3. Image from
Switch camera
5. Image from
Switch camera
7. Image from
Switch camera
Light brightness cannot be displayed for reduced images.
Display Results
Detailed measurement results can be displayed on the screen. Judgement
conditions can also be set while monitoring measurement values.
CHECK
None (default)
The description given here is based on default key allocations. Be careful if the
key allocations have been changed.
Only the overall judgement will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
MON
NG 67ms
Image 0 freeze
CHECK
If the image size is set to All and the Camera image or Switch camera settings
in the image input-related processing items are set to 2 or more, use the Up
and Down Keys to switch between images.
Image 0 freeze0
Indicates the position of the image input
processing item in the list of items.
5-(9)
Section 5-3
Screen Display and Monitor
Positions
Displays all the regions set to the unit that executed the measurement. Figures
drawing using OR are shown in solid lines and figures drawn using NOT are
shown in dash lines.
0.Scn 0
MON
NG 67ms
Image 0 freeze
CHECK
Results
If the image size is set to All and the Camera image or Switch camera settings
in the image input-related processing items are set to 2 or more, use the Up
and Down Keys to switch between images.
Displays a list of judgement results for the set unit.
If the character size is set to Normal, 8 sets of results will be shown on one
screen. If the character size is set to Small, 32 sets of results will be shown on
one screen.
SHIFT + Right/Left Keys: Scroll through the unit numbers.
0.Scn 0
MON
0.Camera image
1.EC pos. comp
2.Fine matching
3.Fine matching
4.Switch camera
5.EC pos. comp
6.Fine matching
7.Fine matching
CHECK
Details
NG 67ms
OK
OK
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Image 0 freeze
If the image size is set to All and the Camera image or Switch camera settings
in the image input-related processing items are set to 2 or more, use the Up
and Down Keys to switch between images.
Displays detailed information for each unit. Use the Up and Down Keys to
switch between units. The displayed data differs depending on the processing
item and some processing items have multiple Details Screens.
Use the SHIFT + Left/Right Keys to switch between Details Screens.
Refer to the explanation for each processing item for information on the
respective Details Screens.
5-(10)
Section 5-3
Screen Display and Monitor
SeeAlso
Refer to 6(&7,213URFHVVLQJ,WHPV6HWWLQJ3URFHGXUHV.
Example: Details Screen for fine matching
Measurement values
0.Scn 0 MON
1.Fine matching
Position
NG 67ms
NG 67ms
SHIFT + Right Keys
Judge
:NG
Quantity : 1
Area
:12
Gravity X :290.000
Gravity Y :280.000
SHIFT + Left Keys
Image 0 freeze
CHECK
0.Scn 0 MON
1.Fine matching
Image 0 freeze
Press the SHIFT + ENT Keys in the Details Screen to display the menu for
changing settings. The measurement conditions can be changed while in Run
Mode or Monitor Mode. However, measurement will not be performed while in
the screen to change the settings, even if the measurement command is input.
5-(11)
Section 5-3
Screen Display and Monitor
5-3-3
Selecting Color or Monochrome Monitors
Select the type of monitor to be connected. When color monitors are used,
characters and figures can be color-coded and displayed in color.
1.
Enter System mode and select Display.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The Display Settings/Monitor/Designate Colors/Make Colors Menu will be
displayed.
Character size
Display settings
Monitor
Designate colors
Make colors
2.
Select Monitor.
The Monitor Settings Screen will be displayed.
Monitor
Monitor
3.
4.
: Color
Color
Monochrome
End
Select the monitor type.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
5-(12)
Section 5-3
Screen Display and Monitor
5-3-4
Changing Character or Figure Colors
The color for characters or added figures can be set. Change the color when it
is difficult to see the character or figure on the image. The display color set
here, however, will be reflected in all scenes.
For color monitors, select white, black, red, green, blue, yellow, or original. (A
combination of up to any 7 colors can be set.)
For monochrome monitors, select white or black.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 5-(15) for information on creating original colors.
The positions where color can be changed are described below.
Normal and Background Colors
Messages displayed on the screen will be appear in the color set under Normal. Menu boxes will shaded in the color set under Background.
Normal
(Screen message color)
0.Camera image
Camera settings
Select camera
Filtering order(Image0)
Filtering(Image0)
BGS levels(Image0)
Filtering order(Image1)
Filtering(Image1)
BGS levels(Image1)
Frame/Field
Background
(Menu box color)
OK and NG Colors
The judgement display, all measurement values, and the measurement region
will be displayed in the color set under OK color or NG color, depending on the
measurement result.
OK color
OK 67ms
0.Scn 0 MON
1.Fine matching
Judge
:OK
Quantity : 0
Area
: 0
Gravity X :0.000
Gravity Y :0.000
NG color (square color)
Judge
:NG
Quantity : 1
Area
:12
Gravity X :290.000
Gravity Y :280.000
Image 0 freeze
Image 0 freeze
OK color
NG 67ms
0.Scn 0 MON
1.Fine matching
OK color (region line color)
OK color
NG color (region line color)
Figure Colors 0 to 6
The figure color is the color for figures or characters displayed on the screen
using the results display-related processing items.
5-(13)
Section 5-3
Screen Display and Monitor
1.
Enter System mode and select Display.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The Display Settings/Monitor/Designate Colors/Make Colors Menu will be
displayed.
Character size
Display settings
Monitor
Designate colors
Make colors
2.
Select Designate colors.
The Designate Colors Screen will be displayed.
Designate colors
Normal
Background
OK color
NG color
Figure 0
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
↑↓
:
White
:
Black
:
Green
:
Red
: Original 0
: Original 1
: Original 2
: Original 3
End
3.
Make the settings for each item.
4.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
5-(14)
Section 5-3
Screen Display and Monitor
5-3-5
Creating Original Colors
Up to 7 original colors can be created for displaying characters or figures,
using a combination of red, green, and blue.
SeeAlso
Refer to &KDQJLQJ&KDUDFWHURU)LJXUH&RORUV for information on how to
display the original color.
The default settings are shown below.
Display item
R (red)
G (green)
B (blue)
Original 0
32
32
32
Original 1
64
64
64
Original 2
96
96
96
Original 3
128
128
128
Original 4
160
160
160
Original 5
196
196
196
Original 6
224
224
224
1.
SeeAlso
Enter System mode and select Display.
Refer to page 5-(2).
The Display Settings/Monitor/Designate Colors/Make Colors Menu will be
displayed.
Display settings
Monitor
Designate colors
Make colors
2.
Select Make colors.
The menu for selecting color numbers will be displayed.
Original 0
Original 1
Original 2
Original 3
Original 4
Original 5
Original 6
3.
Select a color number to set for the new color.
The Make Color Screen will be displayed.
Make Color(Original 0)
R : [200]
G : [127]
B : [255]
End
The set color will be displayed here.
4.
Make the settings for each item.
Up and Down Keys:
Moves the cursor
5-(15)
Section 5-3
Screen Display and Monitor
Left and Right Keys:
Increases or reduces the color at the cursor position by one.
SHIFT+Left/Right Keys: Increases or reduces the color at the cursor position by ten.
5.
Select End.
The settings will be saved and the screen in (2.) will return.
5-(16)
Section 5-4
Customizing Operations
5-4
Customizing Operations
5-4-1
Changing Console Key Allocations
It is possible to change the allocations for Console key operations.
CHECK
The set allocations are only enabled in Monitor Mode or Run Mode.
Default Key Allocations
Key
Allocation
Allocatable functions
None
None
SHIFT + ESC
Measurement display
Measurement display
SHIFT + ENT
Judgement conditions
Previous image
SHIFT +
Next sub-display
Next image
SHIFT +
Previous sub-display
Judgement conditions
SHIFT +
Previous image
Previous scene
SHIFT +
Next image
Next scene
F1 to F8
(See note 1.)
None
Previous scene group
ESC
Next scene group
Note 1 Function keys are suppported only for
F160-KP.
If the F150-KP is being used, input will
not be possible using these keys, even if
key allocations are made.
Clear image
Erase characters
Save
Through/Freeze
Measurement control
Monitor
Designate Color
Note 2 Changing display capture key allocations
Inputs based on the key allocations made
here will be accepted in Monitor or Run Mode,
even if SYS/Operation settings/Display
capture is set to OFF.
Thumbnail
Drive status
Scene/mode
Line Brightness
Display capture (Note 2.)
Previous sub-display
Next sub-display
Clear measurement
Switch nonstop (Note 3.)
Proc. data transfer (Note 3.)
Switch Proc. monitor (Note 3.)
Refer to &XVWRPL]LQJ2SHUDWLRQV for
information on the role of each function.
Note 3 These functions cannot be used
with the F250-C50/C55.
5-(17)
Section 5-4
Customizing Operations
Function of Allocated Functions
Item
Function
None
Nothing allocated.
Measurement
display
Displays the SYS/Conditions/Display settings screen.
Previous image
(See note 1.)
Displays the previous memory image.
Next image (See
note 1.)
Displays the next memory image.
Judge conditions
Displays the screen for setting evaluation criteria.
Previous scene
Displays the previous scene.
Next scene
Displays the next scene.
Previous scene
group
Displays the previous scene group.
Next scene group Displays the next scene group.
Clear image
Erase characters
A message confirming whether all stored images are to be cleared
is displayed. Images stored in memory are cleared when power is
turned OFF. By allocating this function to a Console Key, stored
images can be cleared without turning power OFF.
Displays the menu for character display settings.
To prevent scorching of the monitor screen, it is possible to delete
screen characters.
Save
Displays a confirmation message for saving to flash memory or
Memory Card.
Through/Freeze
(See note 1.)
Switches to Freeze (before scroll) display if currently on Through
display.
Switches to Through display if currently on Freeze @/ Last NG display.
Measurement
control
Displays the SYS/Measurement control screen.
Monitor
Displays the SYS/Display/Monitor screen.
Designate colors
Displays the SYS/Display/Designate colors screen.
Thumbnail (See
note 2.)
The saved measurement images are displayed 4 at a time.
Drive status
Displays the Tool/Memory card/Drive status screen.
Scene/mode
The scene number and mode display shown at the top left corner
of the Basic Screen in Monitor and Run Modes is deleted. Press
the ENT Key to display the scene number and mode display temporarily. Measurement cannot be performed, however, during this
display. Press the ESC Key to make the display disappear.
Line Brightness
Displays the Tool/Line brightness screen. Line brightness cannot
be displayed, however, when Last NG is set for Image status or
Image size is set to Reduced.
Display capture
Saves the displayed image to the Memory Card.
Refer to &DSWXULQJDQG6DYLQJ,PDJHV.
5-(18)
Previous sub-display
When results display is set to Detail, the display will switch to the
previous Details Screen for the displayed unit. The unit number will
be switched when set to Results.
Next sub-display
When results display is set to Detail, the display will switch to the
next Details Screen for the displayed unit. The unit number will be
switched when set to Results.
Clear measurements
Clears all measurement values for the currently displayed scene.
Switch nonstop
(See note 3.)
These functions cannot be used with the F250-C50/C55.
Section 5-4
Customizing Operations
Item
Note
Function
Proc. data transfer
These functions cannot be used with the F250-C50/C55.
Switch Proc.
monitor
These functions cannot be used with the F250-C50/C55.
1.
Previous image, Next image, and Through/Freeze
When the image display is set to Last NG (before scroll) or Last NG (after
scroll), the display will not switch even if this allocated key is input.
2.
Thumbnail Display
Stored images are displayed 4 at a time, making it faster to find a particular
measurement image.
Last (Mem 0)
Last 1 (Mem 1)
Last 2 (Mem 2)
Last 3 (Mem 3)
SHIFT+Up/Down Keys:
Switches to the last four or next four images.
Up/Down and Left/Right Keys: Moves the thick frame for selecting images.
ENT Key:
CHECK
Selects the image inside the thick frame
and returns to the previous screen.
Measurement cannot be performed during thumbnail display.
1.
Enter System mode and select Operation settings.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The menu will be displayed.
Set key operation
Display capture
Save at switch Scn Group
Password
Nonstop/Fast
2.
Select Set key operation.
The Set Key Operation Screen will be displayed.
Set key operation
ESC
:
None
SFT+ESC : Measurement display
SFT+ENT : Judgement conditions
:
SFT+
Next sub-display
: Previous sub-display
SFT+
:
SFT+
Previous image
:
SFT+
Next image
:
F1
None
End
5-(19)
Section 5-4
Customizing Operations
3.
4.
Make the settings for each item.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
5-(20)
Section 5-4
Customizing Operations
5-4-2
Capturing and Saving Images
Turn ON the display capture function to capture the image displayed on the
monitor screen and save it to the Memory Card.
Stored images can be pasted to documents on a personal computer or loaded
to the Controller and re-measured.
The default setting is OFF.
CHECK
• The capture operation takes several seconds, during which measurement
cannot be performed. To prevent incorrect operation, set this function to
OFF.
• When the image display is set to Last NG, captured images are not
accepted.
1.
Enter System mode and select Operation settings.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The Menu will be displayed.
Set key operation
Display capture
Save at switch Scn Group
Password
Nonstop/Fast
2.
Select Display capture.
The Display Capture Screen will be displayed.
Display capture
Display capture : OFF
:
Output drive
C1
End
3.
Set the display capture function to either ON or OFF.
4.
Select the destination output Memory Card drive.
5.
Select End.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
Execution Keys
The following keys execute display capture when the display capture function
is turned ON.
• For F160-KP: F9 Key
• For F150-KP: SHIFT+Left+Right Keys (Press 3 keys at the same time.)
CHECK
In Monitor and Run Modes only, the display capture function can be allocated
to another key. For example, the key allocation can be changed when the
F150-KP is being used to enable one-touch operation, rather than having to
press three keys at the same time. However, if display capture is allocated to
another key, care must be taken because that key will be enabled in Monitor
and Run Modes even if Display capture is set to OFF. Refer to &XVWRPL]LQJ
2SHUDWLRQV.
5-(21)
Section 5-4
Customizing Operations
Display Capture Results
When display capture is executed, a directory called IMAGE will automatically
be created in the root directory of the Memory Card and the following two
types of files will be stored in that directory.
LIVE***.BMP
Density images with 256 gradations will be
saved in bitmap format. These images can
be loaded to the Controller and remeasured. (Binary images will also be
saved in density images.)
However, LIVE***.BMP files will not be
saved in the following circumstances. Only
CAPT***.BMP files will be saved
- When display capture is executed in Set,
System, or Tool Modes.
- When Image size is set to Reduced.
Captured display
0.Scn 0 MON
1.Fine matching
OK 67ms
Judge
:OK
Quantity : 0
Area
: 0
Gravity X : 0.000
Gravity Y : 0.000
Image 0 freeze
CAPT***.BMP
0.Scn 0 MON
1.Fine matching
OK 67ms
The displayed image will be saved in a bitmap.
(The image will only have 192 gradations.)
Judge
:OK
Quantity : 0
Area
: 0
Gravity X : 0.000
Gravity Y : 0.000
Image 0 freeze
A serial number starting from 000 will be automatically allocated to ***.
The same number is used for both files.
5-(22)
Section 5-4
Customizing Operations
5-4-3
Shortening Scene Group Switching Time
Normally, settings data is saved to flash memory and the Memory Card when
scene groups are changed. The time taken to save is, therefore, added to the
time taken to change scene groups. The time to change scene for changes in
measurement setups can be reduced by omitting the save process.
Precaution
If this function is set to OFF and settings data changed, always save the data
before changing scene groups. When scene groups are changed, data from
the flash memory or the Memory Card is loaded. So if the changed settings
data is not saved, the data will be replaced by the loaded data. Refer to 6(&
7,212WKHU)XQFWLRQV.
1.
Enter System mode and select Operation settings.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The Menu will be displayed.
Set key operation
Display capture
Save at switch Scn Group
Password
Nonstop/Fast
2.
Select Save at switch Scn Group.
The Saving at Switch Scn Group Settings Screen will be displayed.
Saving at switch Scn Group
ON
OFF
ON
End
Save :
3.
Select ON or OFF.
ON: Saves the data (default)
OFF: Does not save the data
4.
Select End.
The setting will be saved and the screen in (1.) will return.
5-(23)
Section 5-4
Customizing Operations
5-4-4
Setting Passwords
Passwords can be set to prevent settings being changed through incorrect
operation. Set whether or not a password is required for the following two
operations.
• When moving from Run Mode to Set, Monitor, or other modes
• When changing scenes in Run Mode
1.
Enter System mode and select Operation settings.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The Menu will be displayed.
Set key operation
Display capture
Save at switch Scn Group
Password
Nonstop/Fast
2.
Select Password.
The Password Settings Screen will be displayed.
Password
Mode switch : Unnecessary
Scene switch : Unnecessary
End
3.
4.
Set Necessary or Unnecessary.
Select End.
If Necessary has been selected, the Input Password Settings Screen will
be displayed.
Input Password
[
]
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS ← →
ENT:Select
5.
6.
K
Y
k
y
.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
Ins.
Set a password of 6 to 8 characters.
Select END.
The settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
5-(24)
Section 5-4
Customizing Operations
Example: Password Set for Mode Switching
1.
Move the cursor to the mode and press the ENT Key.
0.Scn 0
MON
---- ---ms
The Input Password Settings Screen will be displayed.
Input Password
[
]
A B
OP
a b
o p
0 1
# $
SPC
CD
QR
c d
q r
2 3
%
DEL
E F GH I J
S T U VWX
e f g h i j
s t u v w x
4 5 6 7 8 9
( ) ^ `
BS INS ← →
K
Y
k
y
.
L MN
Z
l m n
z
- - !
END
Ins.
ENT:Select
2.
Enter the password.
3.
Select END.
If the entered password is correct, the mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
---- ---ms
If the entered password is incorrect, an error message will be displayed.
Password is incorrect.
OK
CHECK
Forgotten Passwords
The password can be checked by inputting a password confirmation command from the serial interface. Refer to 1RUPDO6HULDO,QWHUIDFH.
5-(25)
Section 5-4
Customizing Operations
5-4-5
Nonstop Adjustment
System settings
Camera settings
Communication
Display
Operation Set
settings
key operation
Measurement
control
Display
capture
Startup mode
Save at Scn Group switch
Date/TimePassword
System information
Nonstop/Fast
5-(26)
This function is not supported by
the F250-C50/C55 Controller.
Section 5-5
Setting Conditions for Saving Measurement Images
5-5
Setting Conditions for Saving Measurement Images
The Controller can save up to 35 measured images. These 35 images are
shared by 32 scenes. The condition for saving the images can be selected
from saving only when the measurement result is NG or saving all images
regardless of the measurement result. When 35 images have been stored,
new images will be stored by overwriting old images, starting with the oldest.
Production line
Previous 3
OK
Previous 2
Previous 1
NG
Last
measurement
object
NG
OK
Saved images
When only NG images
are set to be saved
Previous 1
Latest
When all images are
set to be saved
Previous 3
Precaution
Previous 1
Previous 2
Latest
Stored images will be cleared when the power is turned OFF. Images to be
kept must be backed up to a personal computer or Memory Card.
Refer to 6(&7,212WKHU)XQFWLRQV.
SeeAlso
1.
Enter System mode and select Measurement control.
The Measurement Control Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement control
Image storage
:
None
STEP in measure :
None
: Only NG
BUSY range
All
End
2.
Change the conditions under Image storage.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be recorded and the System Mode Screen will return.
5-(27)
Section 5-5
Setting Conditions for Saving Measurement Images
5-5-1
Displaying Stored Images
By displaying a stored image on the screen, the reason for a previous NG
judgement can be checked. Also, measurement can be re-performed on the
stored image with different evaluation criteria. The current image is displayed
in the lower-right corner of the screen. However, the current image will not be
displayed if Image type is set to OFF under Conditions.
SeeAlso
0.Scn 0
Refer to 0HDVXUHPHQW6FUHHQ6HWWLQJV.
----
MON
---ms
When saved images are displayed (See note 4.)
---- ---ms
0.Scn 0 MON
See note 3.
Image 0 Freeze 0
Display image (See note 1.)
Last2 0 (Mem3)
Memory number where currently
displayed image is stored
See note 3
Image status (See note 2.)
2nd last NG image saved
Details
Display
Note 1
Image 0
The image stored at Image 0 is displayed.
Image 1
The image stored at Image 1 is displayed.
Freeze
Note 2
Through
The image immediately after measurement is displayed.
Last NG
If the image input processing items Camera image or Switch
camera are set to 2 or more units, a number will be displayed to
show the position of the item in the list. The number will not be
shown, however, if the screen size is set to Small.
(Number)
Note 3
(Memory
)
Past saved measurement images are displayed. The images that
match the image save conditions (Only NG/All) will be stored in
Memory 0 to Memory 35. Specify a number for Memory
when
backing up saved images to a personal computer or Memory
Card.
Types of saved images
Last
The measured image most recently stored is displayed. If this
image had an NG judgement, "Last" will be highlighted.
Last *
The * after "Last" contains the number of screens stored before
the image. Up to 35 previous images can be displayed. "Last *"
will be highlighted for NG images.
Note 4
Either no image is stored in memory, or an image other than a
measurement image (an image loaded from a personal computer)
is displayed.
The display image and image status will change depending on the settings
under SYS/Display/Display settings.
SeeAlso
5-(28)
Refer to ,PDJH6WDWXVRQSDJH .
Setting Conditions for Saving Measurement Images
Section 5-5
Switching Method
In Monitor Mode or Run Mode, press the SHIFT+Up/Down Keys to switch
between images.
Last * (Mem
)
SHIFT +
Last 2 (Mem
)
SHIFT +
Last 1 (Mem
)
SHIFT +
Last (Mem
)
SHIFT +
Image just after measurement
SHIFT +
Last 35 (Mem
)
SHIFT +
Last 34 (Mem
CHECK
)
The image display status changes
depending on the settings under
SYS/Conditions.
If the following conditions hold, the
number of stored images will not
exceed 34.
Image storage: Set to only NG
Last measurement was OK.
• When Display is set to Last NG, the display cannot be switched to stored
images. Change the display to Freeze or another display mode and then
use the SHIFT+Up/Down Keys to switch between images.
• When the image input processing items Camera image or Switch camera
are set to 2 or more units, use the Up and Down Keys to switch between
images.
5-(29)
Section 5-5
Setting Conditions for Saving Measurement Images
5-5-2
Clearing All Stored Images
All images are automatically cleared when the power is turned OFF, but the
images can also be cleared without turning OFF the power by using the following procedure.
1.
Display the Basic Screen in Monitor or Run Modes.
0.Scn 0
---- ---ms
MON
Image 0 freeze
2.
Move the cursor to MON (or RUN) and press the ENT Key.
The mode selections will be displayed.
0.Scn 0
3.
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
---- ---ms
Select TOOL.
The data selections will be displayed.
TOOL
System data
Scn Group data
Scene data
System + Scn Group
Image data
Memory card
Clear images
Clear measurement
4.
Select Clear image.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
All of stored images
will be cleard.
Execute Cancel
5.
Select Execute.
The stored images will be cleared and the screen in (3.) will return.
CHECK
5-(30)
Change the Console Key allocations to clear the stored images with a onetouch key operation. Refer to &XVWRPL]LQJ2SHUDWLRQV.
Section 5-6
Using BUSY Signals
5-6
Using BUSY Signals
The BUSY signal is a control signal used to show that the Controller is busy
processing. The ON/OFF timing of this BUSY signal is monitored at the external device to time communications. The handling of the BUSY signal can be
changed to create a smoother system.
BUSY Range
Select at what point in the processing that the BUSY signal will turn OFF.
Selection
Details
Input image completed
The BUSY signal turns OFF when the image input has been completed. This can
be used as a guide as to whether or not the workpiece can be moved. If Camera
image is set to multiple units, the BUSY signal turns OFF when the first Camera
image input has been completed.
STEP
Image input
Measurement
Display
BUSY OFF
ON
Measuring
When this selection is made, do not enter the next command until measurement
has been completed, even if the BUSY signal has turned OFF. If the next command is input before the measurement has been completed, the current processing and the input command may not be executed correctly.
Measurement completed*
The BUSY signal turns OFF when the measurement has been completed.
STEP
Image input
Measurement
Display
BUSY OFF
ON
Measuring
Display completed
The BUSY signal turns OFF when the display of the measurement result has
been completed. The busy signal remains ON and the Controller is treated as
“measuring” until the display has been completed.
STEP
Image input
Measurement
Display
BUSY OFF
ON
Measuring
Note *The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
CHECK
The measurement times shown in Monitor and Run Modes will change
depending on the settings for the BUSY range.
The time taken for “Measuring” indicated in the above table is displayed as the
measurement time.
Measurement time
0.Scn 0
RUN
OK 67ms
5-(31)
Section 5-6
Using BUSY Signals
STEP in Measure
Measurement will not be performed by the Controller during another measurement, even if the STEP signal turns ON. Set whether or not the ERR signal will
turn ON to notify the external device that the STEP signal was not accepted.
Selection
Details
ERR ON* (See note.) Measurement will not be performed and the ERR signal will
turn ON if the STEP signal turns ON during processing. The
ERR signal will turn OFF when the next STEP signal is input at
the correct timing.
OFF
The ERR signal will not turn ON even if the STEP signal turns
ON during processing. Measurement will not be performed.
Note *The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Enter System mode and select Measurement control.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The Measurement Control Settings Screen will be displayed.
Measurement control
Image storage
:
All
STEP in measure : ERR ON
BUSY range : Measurement
End
2.
3.
Change the STEP in measure and BUSY range settings.
Select End.
The settings are registered and the System Mode Screen will return.
5-(32)
Section 5-7
Setting Startup Conditions
5-7
Setting Startup Conditions
Use the following procedure to set the status when the power is turned ON. If
the Controller is set to start in Run Mode for the scene where the desired measurement conditions are registered, measurement of objects can be started by
simply turning the power ON.
Also, unnecessary menu selection screens and Camera setting screens that
are always displayed at startup can be set to not be displayed.
Item
Details
Startup scene
group
Selections: 0* to 31
Startup scene
Selections: 0* to 31, OFF(scene number when saved to flash
memory)
Startup mode
Selections: Set, Monitor*, Run, OFF(mode when saved to flash
memory)
Startup language
Select the language for screen messages.
When a scene group between 1 and 31 is selected, make sure
the Memory Card where that scene group is stored is inserted.
Selections: Japanese, English*
Camera settings at Select whether or not to display the Camera Settings Screen.
startup
Selections: ON* (display), OFF (no display)
Note *The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
1.
Enter System mode and select Startup mode.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The Startup Mode Settings Screen will be displayed.
Startup mode
Startup Scn Group :
Scn Group 0
Startup scene
: Scn 0
Startup mode
: MON
Language
: English
Camera settings :
ON
End
2.
Change the settings.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be saved and the System Mode Screen will return.
5-(33)
Section 5-8
Setting the Calendar Date and Time (Date/Time)
5-8
Setting the Calendar Date and Time (Date/Time)
Check if the internal calendar is set to the correct date and time and adjust if
necessary.
1.
Enter System mode and select Date/Time.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The Date/Time Settings Screen will be displayed.
Date/Time
Year
:
Month :
:
Day
:
Hour
Minute :
Second :
[2000]
[11]
[ 1]
[14]
[21]
[32]
Update Cancel
2.
Check if the date and time is correct. Adjust if necessary.
3.
If the settings do not require adjustment, select Cancel to exit this screen.
Select Update to save changes to the date and time.
The settings will be registered and the System Mode Screen will return.
5-(34)
Section 5-9
Checking System Information
5-9
5-9-1
Checking System Information
Checking Remaining Memory Space and Battery Status
Use the following procedure to check the remaining work memory and internal
flash memory and the status of the battery mounted for date and time data
backup.
1.
Enter System mode and select System information.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The Memory capacity/Version Menu will be displayed.
Memory capacity
Version
2.
Select Memory capacity.
The memory capacity will be displayed.
Free space
Total space
Memory capacity
Work memory(Main)
11992/16384 KB
Work memory(Model)
7168/ 7168 KB
Work memory(RT Search)
511/ 511
KB
Flash memory(Data)
2048/ 3840 KB
OK
Press the Down Key to scroll down and display the rest of the information.
The battery status will be displayed at the bottom of the list.
Flash memory(Data)
2048/ 3840 KB
Battery Sufficient
OK
If Insufficient is displayed, the battery must
be replaced. Take the Controller to your
OMRON representative to replace the
battery. The battery must be changed by a
professional.
3.
Select OK to exit this screen.
The screen in (1.) will return.
5-(35)
Section 5-9
Checking System Information
5-9-2
Checking the Software Version
Use the following procedure to check the software system version.
1.
Enter System mode and select System information.
Refer to (QWHULQJ6\VWHP0RGH.
SeeAlso
The Memory Capacity/Version Menu will be displayed.
Memory capacity
Version
2.
Select Version.
The version information will be displayed.
Version
F250-UM Ver2.00
XXXX/XX/XX XX:XX
OK
3.
Select OK to exit this screen.
The screen in (1.) will return.
5-(36)
SECTION 6
Communicating with External Devices
This section describes the methods for communications with external devices, such as personal computers and
Programmable Controllers, via parallel or serial interfaces.
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-(1)
6-1-1
Setting Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-(2)
6-1-2
I/O Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-(5)
6-1-3
Timing Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-(8)
Normal Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-(1)
6-2-1
Setting Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-(2)
6-2-2
Input Format (Normal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-(11)
6-2-3
Output Format (Normal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-(105)
Host Link Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-(1)
6-3-1
Setting Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-(2)
6-3-2
Input Format (Host Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-(9)
6-3-3
Output Format (Host Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-(14)
6-3-4
Sample Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-(17)
Serial Interface Menu Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-(1)
6-4-1
Setting Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-(2)
6-4-2
Inputting Characters from the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4-(5)
6-(1)
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
6-1
Parallel Interface
This section explains the I/O format and the required communications settings
when using the Controller’s parallel interface to communicate with external
devices.
Command
input
Controller
6-1-(1)
Processing
result output
Programmable
Controller
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
6-1-1
Setting Communications Specifications
This section explains how to set the communications specifications. Set the
same communications specifications in the Controller and the external device.
1.
Move the cursor to MON or RUN and press the ENT Key.
0.Scn 0
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
----
---ms
Image 0 freeze
2.
Select SYS.
The System settings menu will be displayed.
System settings
Camera settings
Communication
Display
Operation settings
Measurement control
Startup mode
Date/Time
System information
3.
Select Communications.
6-1-(2)
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
The communications menu will be displayed.
System settings
Camera settings
Communication
Display Serial
Normal
Operation
settings
Host link
Measurement
control
Parallel
Startup mode
Ethernet
Date/Time
System information
4.
Select Parallel.
The Communications (Parallel) window will be displayed.
Communications(Parallel)
: NG:ON
ON state
Output control : None
10.0]ms
Output period :[
1.0]ms
Gate ON delay:[
5.0]ms
Gate ON time :[
:[
10.0]s
Timeout
Num. of delay :[ 1]
End
5.
The Communications (Parallel) window will be displayed.
6.
Select End.
The displayed settings will be registered and the screen in (3.) will return.
The following table shows the possible communications settings.
Item
Settings
ON state
Select whether the OR and DO0 to DO31 signals will
go ON when the judgement is OK or NG.
(The default setting is ON for an NG judgement.)
Output control
None
The Controller outputs the measurement results without
synchronizing with the external device. (This is the
default setting.)
Handshaking
The Controller outputs the measurement results while
synchronizing the transmission with the external device.
Sync. The Controller outputs the measurement results while
output synchronizing with processing on the line. The number
of STEP signals specified for the Number of delays setting is ignored and measurement results are output on
the next STEP signal.
6-1-(3)
Output period
Set the period for outputting the measurement result.
(Effective only when
output control is set to
None.)
Set a value between 2.0 and 10,000.0 ms that is
greater than the “Gate ON delay + Gate ON time,” and
less than the measurement interval. If the period is
longer than the measurement interval, the output timing
will fall behind as the measurements are repeated. The
default setting is 10.0 ms.
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
Item
Settings
Gate ON delay
Set the time from when the result is output to the parallel interface to when the GATE signal is turned ON. This
time is used to wait until the data output becomes stable. Set a time between 1.0 and 1,000 ms that is longer
than the external device’s delay time. The default setting is 1.0 ms.
Gate ON time
Set the length of time that the GATE signal remains ON.
Set a value between 1.0 and 1,000 ms so that the
external device can read the measurement result. The
default setting is 5.0 ms.
(Effective only when
output control is set to
None or Sync.output.)
Timeout
(Effective only when
handshaking is used.)
Num. of delays
(Effective only with
Sync. output.)
A timeout error will occur if there is no response from
the external device within the timeout time. Set a value
between 0.5 and 120.0 s. The default setting at 10.0 s.
Set the number of times the STEP signal turning ON
will be ignored from the time the STEP signal first turns
ON until that measurement result is output.
6-1-(4)
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
6-1-2
I/O Format
Input Format
The following commands can be input when the Controller is in Monitor or Run
mode.
STEP Signal
A one-time measurement is performed if the STEP signal is turned ON.
DI Signals
DI signals can input the following commands. After the command information
is set, allow at least 1 ms before turning ON DI7 (execution trigger). Signals
DI8 to DI15 are used only when units 31 and later are specified using the
model re-registration command.
(In the following table, 0 indicates the signal is OFF, and 1 indicates the signal
is ON. An asterisk indicates that the Controller does not read the bit status, so
the bit status can be either 0 or 1.)
Command
Input command (DI)
Execute
7
Command
6
5
4
0
*
3
*
2
0
*
*
Measurements continue while the command
is being input.
0
Switches to scene 2.
1
Switch scene
1
0
1
Scene number
Example 1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Scene group number
Switches the scene group data.
Example 1
1
1
0
Switches to scene group 2.
0
0
*
1
Continuous measurement
Switch scene group
0
Operation
Information
0
Switches the scene to measure.
1
0
1
0
• Model Re-registration Command
Re-register model
1
1
0
Unit number
Registers the models again for all regions for
the specified unit number. (When the through
display is being used, the models will be registered based on the last image that was
measured.)
(This command is enabled only if model position compensation, circle position compensation, fine matching, pattern inspection,
rotation positioning, or ECM search unit numbers are specified. Other unit numbers will be
ignored if they are specified.) (See note.)
Example 1
CHECK
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
Re-registers the model of unit 6.
Use I/O connectors DI0 to DI4 and DI8 to DI10 when specifying units 31 and
later.
Example: To Re-register Model for Unit 50
Input command (DI)
Information
Execute
Information
Command
1
110010 = Unit 50
6-1-(5)
0 0 1 0
Parallel Interface
CHECK
Section 6-1
The ERR signal will turn ON if the input command was not received correctly.
Note Model re-registration is executed for the currently displayed Camera image.
Therefore, change to the Camera image for the unit to be re-registered before
executing this command. Use the Up and Down Keys on the Console to switch
Camera images.
6-1-(6)
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
Output Format
Measurement results are output each time a measurement is made. Data is
output only when the Controller is in Run Mode; data is not output when the
Controller is in Monitor Mode. The user can select whether a signal is output
when the judgement result is OK or when it is NG. The default setting is for a
signal to be output when the judgement result is NG. Refer to 6HWWLQJ
&RPPXQLFDWLRQV6SHFLILFDWLRQV for details.
Signal
Output function
OR
Outputs the overall judgement result.
DO0 to DO31
DO Judgement Output
The judgement results for expressions 0 to 31 set using the results output processing item DO
judge will be output to DO0 to DO31. (DO0 to DO15 will be output to connector 0 and DO16 to
DO31 will be output to connector 1.)
Refer to '2-XGJHPHQW.
DO Data Output
The measurement values set to expressions 0 to 31 set using the results output processing item
DO data will be output.
Refer to '2'DWD.
Only the integer values will be output. Decimal values will be rounded off.
The value range that can be output is -9,999,999 to 9,999,999.
The output for measurement values less than -9,999,999 will be -9,999,999.
The output for measurement values greater than 9,999,999 will be 9,999,999.
Select either 2’s complement binary format or BCD format.
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\ for a definition of “2’s complement”
Output Order
The measurement results will be output in order from the smallest unit number.
Example: DO judge set for unit 5 and DO data set for unit 8
STEP input
OFF
BUSY
ON
Measuring
DO
Judge 0
to 31
Unit 5 result
CHECK
Data 0
Data 2
Unit 8 results
After measurements have been made in Run Mode, the data that is output to
the OR and DO signals is retained until new measurements are made in Run
Mode. The status of these output is retained even if the Controller is switched
from Run Mode to another Mode.
Output signals will return to OFF if TOOL/Clear measurement is executed.
SeeAlso
CHECK
6-1-(7)
Refer to 6(&7,212WKHU)XQFWLRQV.
The initial value for output signals is OFF, but the signals may go ON about 0.5
seconds after the power is turned ON. Take any necessary precautions when
these signals are read by externals devices.
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
6-1-3
Timing Charts
No Output Control
The Controller outputs measurement results to the external device without
synchronizing communications. Monitor the Controller’s GATE signal from the
external device and read the measurement results at the external device while
the Controller’s GATE signal is ON.
Using the STEP Signal as the Measurement Trigger
Example: When 3 Expressions Are Set for DO data
Enter Run Mode
Exit Run Mode
OFF
RUN
ON
STEP input
BUSY
OFF
ON
Measuring
OR
Overall judgement
DO
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
OFF
GATE
ON
Gate ON
delay
Gate ON
time
Output period
The total output period = Output period ™
Number of data items to be output
Output Signals
Signal
Function
RUN
ON while the Controller is in Run Mode.
BUSY
Indicates that the Controller is performing an operation such as measuring
or switching scenes. Do not input the next command while the BUSY signal is ON. If another command is input while the BUSY signal is ON, either
the operation being performed or the command that was input may not be
properly executed.
When the BUSY signal’s OFF timing is changed to Image Input Completed, the Controller will continue measuring even though the BUSY signal is OFF. Do not input the next command until the measurement is
completed. Refer to the 6(&7,216\VWHP6HWWLQJV for more details.
OR
Outputs the overall judgement.
There is a parameter in the communications settings window that allows
the user to select whether the ON signal is output when the judgement
result is OK or NG. Refer to 6HWWLQJ&RPPXQLFDWLRQV6SHFLILFDWLRQV
for details.
6-1-(8)
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
Signal
DO
Function
Outputs the results of the expressions that were set in Do judge and DO
data.
There is a parameter in the communications settings window that allows
the user to select whether the ON signal is output when the judgement
result is OK or NG. Refer to 6HWWLQJ&RPPXQLFDWLRQV6SHFLILFDWLRQV
for details.
GATE
Use the GATE signal to control the timing for the external device to read
measurement results. Set a GATE ON time that is long enough for the
external device to read the measurement results properly.
Set the output period so that the total output time is shorter than the measurement interval (STEP input interval.)
Input Signals
Signal
STEP
CHECK
Function
Input a measurement trigger from an external source such as a Photoelectric Sensor. Synchronize the STEP signal’s rising edge (OFF-to-ON) transition and make one measurement. Keep the STEP signal ON for at least
0.5 ms.
Busy Signal Operation
The operation of the BUSY signal can be changed in the SYS/Measurement
control window.
• Set the point in processing when the BUSY signal is turned OFF. The
BUSY signal can be set to go OFF when the image input is completed,
the measurement is completed (default setting), or the display is completed.
• Set whether or not the ERR signal will be turned ON if another STEP signal is input while the Controller is still measuring.
SeeAlso
6-1-(9)
Refer to the 6(&7,216\VWHP6HWWLQJV for details.
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
Continuous Measurement
CHECK
Set the output period so that the total output time is shorter than the measurement interval. If the output cycle is longer than the measurement cycle, the
output will gradually fall behind as measurements are repeated.
Example: When 3 Expressions Are Set for DO data
Enter Run Mode
Exit Run Mode
OFF
RUN
ON
DI0 to 6
OFF
DI7
ON
OFF
BUSY
ON
Measuring
Measuring
Overall judgement
OR
Data 0
DO
Data 1
Data 2
OFF
GATE
ON
Gate ON
delay
Gate ON
time
Output period
The total output period = Output period ™
Number of data items to be output
Output Signals
The functions of the output signals are the same as they are when the STEP
signal is used as the measurement trigger. (Refer to the tables on the preceding pages.)
Input Signals
Signal
Function
DI0 to DI4
OFF
DI5
OFF
DI6
OFF
DI7
DI7 is the execution trigger.
After DI0 to DI6 are set, allow at least 1 ms before turning ON DI7. The
BUSY signal will be ON while continuous measurement is being performed.
CHECK
The ERR signal will turn ON if the input command was not received correctly.
6-1-(10)
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
Handshaking
When handshaking is set, the Controller outputs measurement results to the
external device while synchronizing communications. Handshaking is effective
when multiple measurement results are output in numerical order and the
handshaking function transfers data with more certainty.
Using the STEP Signal as the Measurement Trigger
Example: When 3 Expressions Are Set for DO data
Enter Run Mode
Exit Run Mode
OFF
RUN
ON
STEP input
OFF
BUSY
ON
Measuring
OR
Overall judgement (Output when measurement is
completed, regardless of the status of DSA.)
DO
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
OFF
GATE
ON
Gate ON
delay
OFF
DSA
ON
Timeout time
A timeout error will be generated if the
DSA signal does not turn ON within
the set time from when the
measurement was completed.
CHECK
Timeout time
A timeout error will be generated if
the DSA signal does not turn OFF
within the set time from when the
GATE signal turned ON.
With the exception of DSA, the functions of the I/O signals are the same as
when output control is set to None.
I/O Signals
Signal
DSA
Function
DSA is the signal from the external device that requests transmission of
the next batch of data. The Controller does not output data until DSA goes
ON. Turn ON the DSA signal when the following conditions are met:
œ The external device’s data receiving system is ready to receive more
data.
œ The Controller has completed measurements.
Generally, the BUSY signal will be ON while the Controller is measuring
and the BUSY signal can be used to indicate when measurements are
completed. If the BUSY signal’s OFF timing has been changed to go OFF
when image inputting is completed, the Controller may still be measuring
even though the BUSY signal has gone OFF. (The BUSY signal’s OFF timing is set in SYS/Measurement control.)
Refer to the 6(&7,216\VWHP6HWWLQJV for more details.
6-1-(11)
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
Synchronous Output
The synchronous output function is used to synchronize the results output timing and the processing timing on the production line. The measurement results
are output when the next STEP signal turns ON after the number of STEP signals set under Num. of delays in the communications settings have turned ON.
CHECK
When Sync. output is set, the delay is calculated by the number of times the
STEP signal turns ON. Therefore, set the measurement results output so that
the result is output only once for each measurement.
Set one unit for DO judge and one expression for DO data.
CHECK
Set measurement command input to STEP signals only.
If TRIG or serial command measurement or continuous measurement are performed, the output timing will no longer match and the Controller may malfunction.
Example: For Process-feed Production Lines Using a Star Wheel
The timing of the rejection of NG products and measurement results output
can be synchronized.
3 times
4 times
Twice
OK
Once
Results
output
Encoder
NG
Rejection
device
GATE
DO
STEP
Controller
If Num. of delays is set to 4, the measurement result will be output after 4
STEP signals have been detected.
6-1-(12)
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
Inputting Measurement Triggers to STEP Signal
Example: When Num. of delays is Set to 2
Enter Run Mode
Exit Run Mode
OFF
RUN
ON
STEP input
OFF
STEP input
(1)
BUSY
STEP input
STEP input
(3)
(2)
STEP input
(5)
(4)
ON
Measuring
Overall judgement
for (1)
OR
Overall judgement
for (2)
(No results output)
DO
Overall judgement
for (3)
Result for
(1)
Overall judgement
for (4)
Result for
(2)
Result for
(3)
OFF
GATE
ON
Gate ON Gate ON
delay
time
CHECK
The functions of the I/O signals are the same as when output control is set to
None.
Switching Scenes or Scene Groups
Enter Run Mode
Exit Run Mode
OFF
RUN
ON
DI0 to 6
OFF
DI7
ON
OFF
BUSY
ON
Executing command
Output Signals
Signal
Function
RUN
ON while the Controller is in Run Mode.
BUSY
Indicates that the Controller is switching scenes or scene groups. Do not
input the next command while the BUSY signal is ON. If another command
is input while the BUSY signal is ON, either the operation being performed
or the command that was input may not be properly executed.
Input Signals: Switching the Scene
Signal
6-1-(13)
Function
DI0 to
DI4
Set the scene number (0 to 31).
DI5
ON
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
Signal
Function
DI6
OFF
DI7
DI7 is the execution trigger.
After DI0 to DI6 are set, allow at least 1 ms before turning ON DI7. The
BUSY signal will be ON while the command is being executed.
After confirming that the BUSY signal is ON, turn OFF DI7, and finally turn
OFF DI0 to DI6.
Input Signals: Switching the Scene Group
Signal
Function
DI0 to
DI4
Set the scene group number (0 to 31).
DI5
ON
DI6
ON
DI7
DI7 is the execution trigger.
After DI0 to DI6 are set, allow at least 1 ms before turning ON DI7. The
BUSY signal will be ON while the command is being executed.
After confirming that the BUSY signal is ON, turn OFF DI7, and finally turn
OFF DI0 to DI6.
CHECK
The ERR signal will turn ON if the command to switch scene groups is input
while there is no Memory Card mounted to the Memory Card slot 1.
Re-registering Models
Enter Run Mode
Exit Run Mode
OFF
RUN
ON
DI0 to 6
8 to 15
OFF
DI7
ON
OFF
BUSY
ON
Executing command
Output Signals
Signal
RUN
BUSY
Function
ON while the Controller is in Run Mode.
Indicates that the Controller is re-registering models.
Do not input the next command while the BUSY signal is ON. If another
command is input while the BUSY signal is ON, either the operation being
performed or the command that was input may not be properly executed.
Input Signals: Registering the Model Again
Signal
DI0 to
DI4
Function
Set the unit number (0 to 31).
(See note.)
DI8 to
DI15
DI5
OFF
6-1-(14)
Section 6-1
Parallel Interface
Signal
Function
DI6
ON
DI7
DI7 is the execution trigger.
After DI0 to DI6 and DI8 to DI15 are set, allow at least 1 ms before turning
ON DI7. The BUSY signal will be ON while the command is being executed.
After confirming that the BUSY signal is ON, turn OFF DI7, and finally turn
OFF DI0 to DI6 and DI8 to DI15.
Note Use DI8 to DI15, in addition to DI0 to DI4, when setting re-registration of models for units 31 and later.
SeeAlso
CHECK
6-1-(15)
Refer to ,2)RUPDW.
The ERR signal will turn ON if the input command was not received correctly.
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
6-2
Normal Serial Interface
This section explains how to set the required communications specifications
and the I/O format for using the Controller’s serial interface (with a RS-232C/
RS-422 connection or Ethernet connection) to communicate with an external
device, such as a personal computer.
Command
input
Controller
Processing
result output
Personal computer
Note RS-232C/RS-422 and Ethernet connections cannot be used at the same time.
Use only one of these type of connections for the serial interface.
6-2-(1)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
6-2-1
Setting Communications Specifications
If the communications mode is set to Normal, the Controller can communicate
with an external device such as a personal computer through its serial interface (with a RS-232C/RS-422 connection or Ethernet connection) using the
normal (no-protocol) format.
CHECK
Set the output data under the Normal data results output processing item.
• Setting Mode
Command inputs are not received.
• Monitor Mode
Command inputs are received, but the measurement results are not output to external devices. Only the command execution result (OK or ER) is
output.
When a command is input to read a set value, the appropriate value will
be output.
• Run Mode
Command inputs are received and measurement results are output.
CHECK
After measurements have been made in Run Mode, the data up through
the last measurement will be output even if the mode is changed to another
mode. The data output will not be interrupted midway.
Operational Flowcharts
RS-232C and RS-422 Connections
1:1 Connection
In the following example, a measurement command is input and those results
are read.
Controller
Personal computer
Input command.
Execute measurement.
MEASURE
The parallel interface’s BUSY signal will be ON during measuring.
Output processing
results.
Receive measurement
results.
Note When the Flow control is set to Xon/off and a response is not received from
the computer within the specified timeout time, a timeout error will occur
because the computer may be disconnected or malfunctioning. An error message will be displayed on the Controller's screen and the parallel interface's
ERR signal will be turned ON.
6-2-(2)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Multi-drop Connection (1:N)
Branching Link Adapters can be used to connect up to 31 Controllers to a single host computer.
CHECK
When a multi-drop connection is used, the Controller will not output measurement results until a command to get measurement results is received from the
host. Specify the Controller from which data is to be obtained from the host.
Use the following communications settings for multi-drop connections.
Item
SeeAlso
Setting
Multi-drop
ON
Unit number
1 to 31 (Set a unique number for each Controller.)
Refer to 1RUPDO&RPPXQLFDWLRQVRQSDJH for details on setting the unit
number.
In the following example, a measurement command is input for the Controller
with unit number 01 and those results are read.
6-2-(3)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Link Adapter
Personal computer
Branching Link
Adapter
Controller
(Unit number 03)
Branching Link
Adapter
Controller
(Unit number 02)
Branching Link
Adapter
Controller
(Unit number 01)
Input the measure
command.
Execute measurement.
@01 MEASURE
Return execution result.
Receive execution result.
OK or ER
(The OK/ER result will not be output when the
unit number is set to @XX (all nodes).
Input the read measurement
results command.
Output the previous
measurement results.
@01 UNITDATA
Receive measurement
results.
6-2-(4)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Ethernet Connections
CHECK
Communications with the Controller from outside the LAN and communications between multiple personal computers and the Controller may not function properly. Also, communications cannot be performed between two
Controllers or between a Programmable Controller and the Controller.
1:1 Connection
In the following example, a measurement command is input and those results
are read.
If communications software for TELNET connections
is activated on the personal computer to access the
Controller, the Controller will automatically change to
Ethernet connection.
Controller
Personal computer
Input command.
Execute
measurement.
MEASURE
The parallel interface’s BUSY signal will be ON during measuring.
Output processing
result.
Receive
measurement results.
Input the EXIT command when
quitting the Ethernet connection.
1:N Connections
With this connection format, one personal computer can communicate with
multiple Controllers via a hub.
Make sure the IP addresses set for the Controllers are not duplicated.
Example:
IP address
192.168.250.010
Start the TELNET communications software on the personal computer for
each IP address and access each Controller.
The method for inputting commands is the same as for 1:1 connections.
Hub
IP address
192.168.250.100
Controller
IP address
192.168.250.101
IP address
192.168.250.102
Controller
Controller
6-2-(5)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Controller Settings for RS-232C and RS-422 Connections
Serial Communications
Use the following procedure to set communications specifications such as the
baud rate and data length. Set the same communications specifications in the
Controller and the external device.
1.
Move the cursor to MON or RUN and press the ENT Key.
0.Scn 0
MON
SET
MON
RUN
SYS
TOOL
SAVE
----
---ms
Image 0 freeze
2.
Select SYS.
The System settings menu will be displayed.
System settings
Camera settings
Communication
Display
Operation settings
Measurement control
Startup mode
Date/Time
System information
3.
Select Communications.
The communications menu will be displayed.
System settings
Camera settings
Communication
Display Serial
Normal
Operation
settings
Host link
Measurement
control
Parallel
Startup mode
Ethernet
Date/Time
System information
4.
6-2-(6)
Select Serial.
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
The Communications (Serial) window will be displayed.
Communications (Serial)
Interface
Baud rate
Data length
Parity bits
Stop bits
Mode
Protocol
: RS-232C
: 38400bps
:
8bit
:
None
:
1bit
:
Normal
: XMODEM
End
5.
6.
Set each parameter to the desired setting.
Select End.
The displayed settings will be registered and the System settings menu
(from step 3) will be displayed.
The following table shows the possible communications settings. The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Item
Possible settings
Interface
RS-232C* or RS-422
Baud rate
(See note a.)
2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400*, 57,600,
115,200 (bps)
Data length
7 or 8* (bits)
Parity bits
None*, Odd, or Even
Stop bits
1* or 2 (bits)
Mode
Select Normal.
Transfer protocol XMODEM*, ZMODEM
(See note b.)
Set the same
settings that
are set in the
personal computer.
Set the same
settings that
are set in the
personal computer.
Note a) RS-232C standards are not defined for speeds over 20 kbps. Depending on the cable length, communications may be unreliable
at speeds of 38,400 bps and higher when RS-232C is selected.
If there are problems with communications, reduce the baud rate
to 19,200 bps.
b) XMODEM (-1K) is not supported.
CHECK
Make the following settings when saving or loading with commands such
as SCNLOAD and SCNSAVE.
Item
Data length
SeeAlso
Possible settings
8 bits
Parity bits
None
Stop bits
1 bit
Flow control
None
Refer to 1RUPDO&RPPXQLFDWLRQVRQSDJH for details on setting the
flow control.
6-2-(7)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Normal Communications
Make the settings for flow control and multi-drop connections.
1.
Select Normal communications
System settings
Camera settings
Communication
Display Serial
Normal
Operation
settings
Host link
Measurement
control
Parallel
Startup mode
Ethernet
Date/Time
System information
The Communications (Normal) window will be displayed.
Communications(Normal)
Flow control : None
Delimiter
: CR
Timeout
: [ 5]s
Multi-drop : OFF
Unit No.
: [ 1]
End
2.
3.
Set the various communications parameters.
Select End.
The new settings will be registered and the screen in (1.) will return.
The following table shows the possible communications settings. The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Item
Flow control
Possible settings
None*
Flow control is not performed.
Use this setting when saving or loading with commands such as SCNLOAD and SCNSAVE.
Delimiter
Xon/Xoff
Flow control is performed by software. Data is transmitted according to the Xon/Xoff codes sent from the
external device.
CR*
Use the same setting that is being used in the personal computer.
LF
CR + LF
Timeout
Sets the time (in seconds) allowed before a timeout error is generated.
(1 to 120 s, default setting: 5 s)
6-2-(8)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Item
Multi-drop
Unit No.
Possible settings
OFF*
Multi-drop connections are not used. If a unit number
is set, it will be ignored.
ON
Multi-drop connections are used. With multi-drop connections, results are not output even in Run Mode. To
output measurement results, a command to get the
measurement results must be input from the external
device. Refer to 81,7'$7$ for details.
When multi-drop connections are used, set the Controller’s
unique unit number.
(1 to 31, default setting: 1)
HELP
SeeAlso
Flow control checks the conditions of the external device during communications. If a response is not received from the external device within the timeout
time, a timeout error is generated and an error message is displayed on the
Controller. The parallel interface’s ERR signal is also turned ON.
Refer to 7HUPLQRORJ\.
Controller Settings for Ethernet Connections
Serial Communications
The settings operations are the same as for RS-232C and RS-422 connections.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 6-2-(6) for details.
The following table shows the possible communications settings.
The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Item
Interface
Possible settings
Cannot be used with Ethernet connections. These settings will be
ignored.
Baud rate
Data length
Parity bits
Stop bits
Mode
Select Normal.
Transfer protocol (See note.)
XMODEM*, ZMODEM
Set the same settings that are set in
the personal computer.
Note XMODEM (-1K) is not supported.
Normal Communications
The settings operations are the same as for RS-232C and RS-422 connections.
SeeAlso
Refer to page 6-2-(8) for details.
The following table shows the possible communications settings. The asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
Item
Possible settings
Flow control
Cannot be used with Ethernet connections. This setting will be
ignored.
Delimiter
CR*
LF
Set the same settings that are set in the personal
computer.
CR + LF
Timeout
Cannot be used with Ethernet connections. The setting will be
ignored.
6-2-(9)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Item
Possible settings
Multi-drop
Set to OFF.
Unit No.
Cannot be used with Ethernet connections. The setting will be
ignored.
Ethernet Settings
Set the IP address and the subnet mask.
Consult with the network administrator to make sure that the IP addresses are
not duplicated in the network.
1.
Select Ethernet.
System settings
Camera settings
Communication
Display Serial
Normal
Operation
settings
Host link
Measurement
control
Parallel
Startup mode
Ethernet
Date/Time
System information
The Communication (Ethernet) Settings Screen will be displayed.
Do not duplicate.
Same as personal computer
Communications(Ethernet)
IP address :[192.168.250.100]
Subnet mask:[255.255.255.0]
End
2.
CHECK
Make the IP address and subnet mask settings.
Make the IP address and subnet mask settings as follows:
IP address: For all except the rightmost part of the address, set the same
address as the connected computer.
Set a value for the rightmost part of the address that is not duplicated in
the network.
Subnet mask: Make the same setting as the connected computer.
3.
Select End.
The settings will be registered.
6-2-(10)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
6-2-2
Input Format (Normal)
The following commands can be input from the host computer to the Controller. Common commands have abbreviations that are shown in parentheses.
Unify the communications specifications in the Controller and external device
before initiating communications.
CHECK
Input commands from either the RS-232C/RS-422 or Ethernet connection.
Commands from both cannot be input at the same time.
Commands that Control Controller Operations
Use the following commands to execute operations in the Controller, such as
executing measurements and switching scenes.
Command
Function
Page
CLRMEAS
Clears the measurement values for the current
scene.
DISPCOND
Reads the current image display conditions.
page 6-2-(14)
Changes the current image display conditions.
page 6-2-(14)
Reads the memory number containing the image
being displayed.
page 6-2-(15)
Changes the display image.
page 6-2-(15)
EXIT
Ends the Ethernet (TELNET) connection and disconnects the line.
page 6-2-(16)
MEASOUT
Confirms the Controller mode (Monitor/Run).
page 6-2-(18)
Changes the Controller mode (Monitor/Run).
page 6-2-(18)
DISPIMG
MEASURE(M)
page 6-2-(13)
Executes one measurement.
page 6-2-(18)
Executes one measurement on the image being
displayed.
page 6-2-(19)
Starts continuous measurement.
page 6-2-(19)
Stops continuous measurement.
page 6-2-(19)
Switches the serial interface input to Menu Operation.
page 6-2-(19)
MODELSET
Registers the specified unit’s model again.
page 6-2-(20)
RESET
Resets the Controller.
page 6-2-(21)
Reads the scene number being used.
page 6-2-(21)
MENUKEY
SCENE(S)
SCNGROUP
Switches the scene number.
page 6-2-(21)
Reads the scene group number being used.
page 6-2-(23)
Switches the scene group number.
page 6-2-(24)
Commands that Read or Change Current Settings
Use the following commands to change settings or specify operations while
reading the Controller settings on the host side.
Settings conditions can be read or reset and measurement results can be
obtained.
Command
DATE
Function
Page
Reads the current date and time.
page 6-2-(13)
Sets the date and time.
page 6-2-(14)
PASSWORD
Reads the password.
page 6-2-(20)
UNITDATA
Reads or sets data for units set for the current
scene.
page 6-2-(27)
UNITDAT2
Reads or sets character strings for QUEST character verification.
page 6-2-(103)
VERGET
Reads the system’s version information.
page 6-2-(104)
6-2-(11)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Commands that Save and Load Data
Use the following commands to backup data set in the Controller and stored
images.
Command
DATASAVE
Function
Page
Saves the current scene group data and system
data being used.
page 6-2-(13)
IMGLOAD
Loads image data from an external device.
page 6-2-(16)
IMGLOADM
Loads image data from a Memory Card.
page 6-2-(16)
IMGSAVE
Saves image data to an external device.
page 6-2-(17)
IMGSAVEM
Saves image data to a Memory Card.
page 6-2-(17)
SCNLOAD
Loads scene data from an external device.
page 6-2-(22)
SCNLOADM
Loads scene data from a Memory Card.
page 6-2-(22)
SCNSAVE
Saves scene data to an external device.
page 6-2-(22)
SCNSAVEM
Saves scene data to a Memory Card.
page 6-2-(23)
SGRLOAD
Loads scene group data from an external device.
page 6-2-(24)
SGRLOADM
Loads scene group data from a Memory Card.
page 6-2-(24)
SGRSAVE
Saves scene group data to an external device.
page 6-2-(25)
SGRSAVEM
Saves scene group data to a Memory Card.
page 6-2-(25)
SYSLOAD
Loads system data from an external device.
page 6-2-(26)
SYSLOADM
Loads system data from a Memory Card.
page 6-2-(26)
SYSSAVE
Saves system data to an external device.
page 6-2-(26)
SYSSAVEM
Saves system data to a Memory Card.
page 6-2-(27)
Format (Normal)
The commands are listed in alphabetical order. Input the commands in ASCII
code. Either upper-case or lower-case characters can be input.
Example 1
Format for 1:1 Connection for RS-232C, RS-422, or Ethernet
UNITDATA
1
2
3
<unit number>
<data>
Delimiter
Example 2
Format for Multi-drop Connections (1:N Connections) for RS-232C, RS-422
4
@01
6-2-(12)
UNITDATA
1
2
3
<unit number>
<data>
Delimiter
1.
Set numerical values for the items in <> brackets.
2.
Input a space between each parameter. (A space is not needed before the
delimiter.)
3.
Input the delimiter at the end of the command.
4.
When multi-drop connections are being used, set the Controller’s unit number (@01 to @31) at the beginning of the command. The response will be
returned with the unit number at the beginning.
To broadcast a command to all of the connected Controllers, input @XX
instead of a unit number. The Controllers will not return responses to a
broadcast command.
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
6-2-2-1
CLRMEAS: Clear Measure
Function
Clears the measurement values for the current scene.
Input
CLRMEAS Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
6-2-2-2
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
DATASAVE
Function
Saves the current scene group data and system data. (Data for scene group 0
is saved to flash memory, data for scene groups 1 to 31 is saved to the Memory Card, and the system data is saved to the Memory Card.)
Input
DATASAVE Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
Precaution
6-2-2-3
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Do not turn OFF the Controller’s power supply until a response has been
received.
DATE
Function 1
Reads the current date and time.
Input
DATE Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Month Day Hour Minute Year. Second Delimiter
OK Delimiter
Command not executed correctly:
ER Delimiter
Example
This example returns the time and date at 12:30:00 on August, 30 2000.
Input
DATE Delimiter
Output 083012302000.00 Delimiter
OK Delimiter
6-2-(13)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Function 2
Sets the date and time.
Input
DATE <Month Day Hour Minute Year (first 2 digits) Year (last 2 digits). Seconds> Delimiter
Input item
Range
Month
01 to 12
Remarks
---
Day
01 to 31
---
Hour
00 to 23
---
Minute
00 to 59
---
Year (first 2 digits)
19 or 20
Year (last 2 digits)
00 to 99
All four digits can be omitted or just the
first two digits can be omitted.
Second
00 to 59
These two digits can be omitted.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
This example sets the time and date to 12:30:00 on August, 30 2000.
CHECK
6-2-2-4
Input
DATE 083012302000.00 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
Either all four digits of the year can be omitted or just the first two digits can be
omitted. The last two digits cannot be omitted without omitting the first two as
well.
DISPCOND: Display Condition
Function 1
Reads the current image display conditions.
Input
DISPCOND Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
Condition code
Condition code Delimiter
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Meaning
0
Through
1
Freeze (before scroll)
2
Freeze (after scroll)
3
Last NG (before scroll)
4
Last NG (after scroll)
Example
This example shows the output response when the display image is in
“through.”
6-2-(14)
Input
DISPCOND Delimiter
Output
0 Delimiter
OK Delimiter
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Function 2
Changes the image display condition to the specified condition.
Input
DISPCOND <Condition code> Delimiter
The condition codes are the same as shown for Function 1 above.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
This example shows how to change the display image to the “Last NG (before
scroll)”.
6-2-2-5
Input
DISPCOND 3 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
DISPIMG: Display Image
Function 1
Reads the memory number containing the image that is currently being displayed.
Input
DISPIMG Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
CHECK
Memory number Delimiter
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
A value of -1 will be output when “Through,” “Freeze,” or “Last NG” is being displayed.
Example
In this example, the image in memory number 12 is being displayed.
Input
DISPIMG Delimiter
Output
12 Delimiter
OK Delimiter
Function 2
Changes the display image.
Input
DISPIMG <Memory number> Delimiter
• Set the memory number between -1 and 35.
• When -1 is specified, the display condition set with DISPCOND or in the
Display settings window (for example, “Through,” “Freeze,” or “Last NG”)
will be used.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
6-2-(15)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Example
This example shows how to display the image in memory number 8.
6-2-2-6
Input
DISPIMG 8 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
EXIT
Function
Ends the TELNET connection for Ethernet communications and disconnects
the line.
Input
EXIT Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
CHECK
6-2-2-7
None (Exits normally)
ER Delimiter
This function can be used only when using an Ethernet connection.
IMGLOAD: Image Load
Function
Loads image data from an external device.
Input
IMGLOAD <Memory number> Delimiter
The memory number (0 to 35) specifies the destination for the image data
being loaded from the external device.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
CHECK
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
The data transfer is performed with XMODEM (-CRC or SUM) or ZMODEM
protocol. (The XMODEM (-1K) protocol is not supported.)
The Controller sends the character string “READY” to the external device
when the Controller has completed preparations.
Example
This example loads image data from the external device to memory 2.
6-2-2-8
Input
IMGLOAD 2 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
IMGLOADM: Image Load Memory Card
Function
Loads image data from a Memory Card.
Input
IMGLOADM <Memory number> <Filename> Delimiter
• The memory number (0 to 35) specifies the destination for the image data
being loaded from the Memory Card.
• Specify the drive (C0 or C1) at the beginning of the file name.
• Specify the absolute path from the root directory.
• Add the filename extension.BMP to the filename.
6-2-(16)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
This example loads the file “LABEL1.BMP” in the Memory Card 0 directory
DIR01 to memory 2.
6-2-2-9
Input
IMGLOADM 2 /C0/DIR01/LABEL1.BMP Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
IMGSAVE: Image Save
Function
Saves image data to an external device.
Input
For XMODEM transfers: IMGSAVE <Memory number> Delimiter
For ZMODEM transfers: IMGSAVE <Memory number> <Filename> Delimiter
The memory number (0 to 35) specifies the memory location containing the
image data to be saved to the external device.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
CHECK
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
The XMODEM (-1K) protocol is not supported.
Example
This example saves the image data contained in memory 2 to the external
device.
6-2-2-10
Input
IMGSAVE 2 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
IMGSAVEM: Image Save Memory Card
Function
Saves image data to a Memory Card.
Input
IMGSAVEM <Memory number> <Filename> Delimiter
• The memory number (0 to 35) specifies the memory location containing
the image data to be saved to the Memory Card.
• Specify the drive (C0 or C1) at the beginning of the file name.
• Specify the absolute path from the root directory.
• Add the filename extension .BMP to the filename.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
This example saves the image data contained in memory 2 as the file
“LABEL1.BMP” in Memory Card 0 directory DIR01.
Input
IMGSAVEM 2 /C0/DIR01/LABEL1.BMP Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
6-2-(17)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
6-2-2-11
MEASOUT: Measure Out
Function 1
Confirms the mode of the Controller: Monitor (results not output) or RUN
(results output).
Input
MEASOUT Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
Mode number Delimiter
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
• Mode numbers are as follows:
Mode
number
Mode
0
Monitor (results not output)
1
RUN (results output)
Example
This example indicates that the Controller is in Run Mode.
Input
MEASOUT Delimiter
Output
1 Delimiter
OK Delimiter
Function 2
Changes the mode of the Controller: Monitor (results not output) or RUN
(results output).
Input
MEASOUT <Mode number> Delimiter
• Refer to Function 1 for mode numbers.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
This example changes the Controller to Run Mode.
6-2-2-12
Input
MEASOUT 1 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
MEASURE (M)
Function 1
Executes one measurement.
Input
MEASURE Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
6-2-(18)
Measurement result Delimiter
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
CHECK
SeeAlso
Set Normal data to the unit to output measurement results. Only the command
response will be output if Normal data is not set.
Refer to 2XWSXW)RUPDW1RUPDO.
Function 2
Executes one measurement on the image being displayed.
Input
MEASURE /I Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
CHECK
SeeAlso
Measurement result Delimiter
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Set Normal data to the unit to output measurement results. Only the command
response will be output if Normal data is not set.
Refer to 2XWSXW)RUPDW1RUPDO.
Function 3
Starts continuous measurement.
Input
MEASURE /C Delimiter
Output
CHECK
SeeAlso
Command executed correctly:
OK Delimiter (One time)
Measurement result Delimiter (Continuous measurement)
Command not executed correctly:
ER Delimiter
Set Normal data to the unit to output measurement results. Only the command
response will be output if Normal data is not set.
Refer to 2XWSXW)RUPDW1RUPDO.
Function 4
Stops continuous measurement.
Input
MEASURE /E Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
6-2-2-13
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
MENUKEY
Function
Switches the serial interface input to Menu Operation mode.
Input
MENUKEY Delimiter
Output
None
6-2-(19)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
CHECK
6-2-2-14
The Controller will revert to Normal mode if the Ctrl + Q Key combination ($11)
is input while the Controller is in Menu Operation mode.
MODELSET
Function
Registers the models again for all regions for the specified unit number. (When
the through display is being used, the models will be registered based on the
last image that was measured.)
Input
MODELSET <unit number> Delimiter
Specify the desired unit (0 to 9999).
CHECK
Model re-registration is enabled only if model position compensation, circle
position compensation, fine matching, pattern inspection, rotation positioning
or ECM search unit numbers are specified. Other unit numbers will be ignored
if they are specified.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example 1
This example re-registers the unit 2 (pattern inspection) model.
CHECK
Input
MODELSET 2 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
If a unit number other than a model position compensation, circle position
compensation, fine matching, pattern inspection, rotation positioning, or ECM
search unit number is specified, the command will be ignored and only OK will
be output.
Example 2
In this example, unit 1, where binary defect inspection is set, is specified.
CHECK
6-2-2-15
Input
MODELSET 1 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
Model re-registration is executed for the currently displayed Camera image.
Switch to the Camera image for which the model is to be re-registered before
executing this command. Use the Up and Down Keys on the Console to switch
Camera images. Key codes corresponding to the Up and Down Keys can also
be input from a personal computer if the MENUKEY command is executed.
PASSWORD
Function
Reads the password.
CHECK
If the password has been forgotten, the set password can be obtained using
this command.
Input
PASSWORD Delimiter
6-2-(20)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
Password data Delimiter
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
In this example, the password is set to AAAAAAA.
6-2-2-16
Input
PASSWORD Delimiter
Output
AAAAAAA Delimiter
OK Delimiter
RESET
Function
Resets the Controller.
Input
RESET Delimiter
Output
None
6-2-2-17
SCENE
Function 1
Reads the scene number of the scene being used.
Input
SCENE Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
Scene number Delimiter
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
In this example, scene 0 is being used.
Input
SCENE Delimiter
Output
0 Delimiter
OK Delimiter
Function 2
Switches the scene number.
Input
SCENE <scene number> Delimiter
Specify a scene number between 0 and 31.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
In this example, the scene is switched to scene 2.
Input
SCENE 2 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
6-2-(21)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
6-2-2-18
SCNLOAD: Scene Load
Function
Loads scene data from an external device.
Input
SCNLOAD <scene number> Delimiter
Specify a scene number between 0 and 31.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
CHECK
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
The data transfer is performed with XMODEM (-CRC or SUM) or ZMODEM
protocol. (The XMODEM (-1K) protocol is not supported.)
The Controller sends the character string “READY” to the external device
when the Controller has completed preparations. Wait for the “READY” string
to be received at the external device before starting the data transfer.
Example
This example loads scene data from the external device to scene 2.
6-2-2-19
Input
SCNLOAD 2 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
SCNLOADM: Scene Load Memory Card
Function
Loads scene data from a Memory Card.
Input
SCNLOADM <scene number> <file name> Delimiter
• Specify a scene number between 0 and 31.
• Specify the drive (C0 or C1) at the beginning of the file name.
• Specify the absolute path from the root directory.
• Add the filename extension .SCN to the filename.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
This example loads the file “LABEL.SCN” to scene 2 from Memory Card 0
directory DIR01.
6-2-2-20
Input
SCNLOADM 2 /C0/DIR01/LABEL.SCN Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
SCNSAVE: Scene Save
Function
Saves scene data to an external device.
Input
For XMODEM transfer: SCNSAVE <scene number> Delimiter
For ZMODEM transfer: SCNSAVE <scene number> <filename> Delimiter
Specify a scene number between 0 and 31.
6-2-(22)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
CHECK
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
The XMODEM (-1K) protocol is not supported.
Example
This example saves the scene 2 scene data to the external device.
6-2-2-21
Input
SCNSAVE 2 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
SCNSAVEM: Scene Save Memory Card
Function
Saves scene data to a Memory Card.
Input
SCNSAVEM <scene number> <file name> Delimiter
• Specify a scene number between 0 and 31.
• Specify the drive (C0 or C1) at the beginning of the file name.
• Specify the absolute path from the root directory.
• Add the filename extension .SCN to the filename.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
This example saves the scene 2 scene data as file “LABEL.SCN” in Memory
Card 0 directory DIR01.
6-2-2-22
Input
SCNSAVEM 2 /C0/DIR01/LABEL.SCN Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
SCNGROUP: Scene Group
Function 1
Reads the scene group number being used.
Input
SCNGROUP Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
Scene group number Delimiter
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
In this example, scene group 0 is being used.
Input
SCNGROUP Delimiter
Output
0 Delimiter
OK Delimiter
6-2-(23)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Function 2
Switches the scene group number.
Input
SCNGROUP <scene group number> Delimiter
Specify a scene group number between 0 and 31.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
This example switches to scene group 2.
6-2-2-23
Input
SCNGROUP 2 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
SGRLOAD: Scene Group Load
Function
Loads scene group data from an external device.
Input
SGRLOAD <scene group number> Delimiter
Specify a scene group number between 0 and 31.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
CHECK
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
The data transfer is performed with XMODEM (-CRC or SUM) or ZMODEM
protocol. (The XMODEM (-1K) protocol is not supported.)
The Controller sends the character string “READY” to the external device
when the Controller has completed preparations. Wait for the “READY” string
to be received at the external device before starting the data transfer.
Example
This example loads the scene group data from the external device to scene
group 2.
6-2-2-24
Input
SGRLOAD 2 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
SGRLOADM: Scene Group Load Memory Card
Function
Loads scene group data from a Memory Card.
Input
SGRLOADM <scene group number> <file name> Delimiter
• Specify a scene group number between 0 and 31.
• Specify the drive (C0 or C1) at the beginning of the file name.
• Specify the absolute path from the root directory.
• Add the filename extension .SGR to the filename.
6-2-(24)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
This example loads the file “LABEL.SGR” to scene group 2 from Memory Card
0 directory DIR01.
6-2-2-25
Input
SGRLOADM 2 /C0/DIR01/LABEL.SGR Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
SGRSAVE: Scene Group Save
Function
Saves scene group data to an external device.
Input
For XMODEM transfer: SGRSAVE <scene group number> Delimiter
For ZMODEM transfer: SGRSAVE <scene group number> <filename> Delimiter
Specify a scene group number between 0 and 31.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
CHECK
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
The XMODEM (-1K) protocol is not supported.
Example
This example saves the scene group data of scene group 2 to the external
device.
6-2-2-26
Input
SGRSAVE 2 Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
SGRSAVEM: Scene Group Save Memory Card
Function
Saves scene group data to a Memory Card.
Input
SGRSAVEM <scene group number> <file name> Delimiter
• Specify a scene group number between 0 and 31.
• Specify the drive (C0 or C1) at the beginning of the file name.
• Specify the absolute path from the root directory.
• Add the filename extension .SGR to the filename.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
This example saves the scene group data of scene group 2 as file
“LABEL.SGR” in Memory Card 0 directory DIR01.
Input
SGRSAVEM 2 /C0/DIR01/LABEL.SGR Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
6-2-(25)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
6-2-2-27
SYSLOAD: System Load
Function
Loads system data from an external device.
Input
SYSLOAD Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
CHECK
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
The data transfer is performed with XMODEM (-CRC or SUM) or ZMODEM
protocol. (The XMODEM (-1K) protocol is not supported.)
The Controller sends the character string “READY” to the external device
when the Controller has completed preparations. Wait for the “READY” string
to be received at the external device before starting the data transfer.
Example
This example loads the system data from the external device.
6-2-2-28
Input
SYSLOAD Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
SYSLOADM: System Load Memory Card
Function
Loads system data from a Memory Card.
Input
SYSLOADM <file name> Delimiter
• Specify the drive (C0 or C1) at the beginning of the file name.
• Add the filename extension .SYD to the filename.
• Specify the absolute path from the root directory.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
This example loads the file “SYSDAT1.SYD” from Memory Card 0 directory
DIR01.
6-2-2-29
Input
SYSLOADM /C0/DIR01/SYSDAT1.SYD Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
SYSSAVE: System Save
Function
Saves system data to an external device.
Input
For XMODEM transfer: SYSSAVE Delimiter
For ZMODEM transfer: SYSSAVE <filename> Delimiter
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
6-2-(26)
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
CHECK
The XMODEM (-1K) protocol is not supported.
Example
This example saves the system data to the external device.
6-2-2-30
Input
SYSSAVE Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
SYSSAVEM: System Save Memory Card
Function
Saves system data to a Memory Card.
Input
SYSSAVEM <file name> Delimiter
• Specify the drive (C0 or C1) at the beginning of the file name.
• Specify the absolute path from the root directory.
• Add the filename extension .SYD to the filename.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
This example saves the system data as the file “SYSDAT1.SYD” in Memory
Card 0 directory DIR01.
6-2-2-31
Input
SYSSAVEM /C0/DIR01/SYSDAT1.SYD Delimiter
Output
OK Delimiter
UNITDATA
Function 1
Reads settings parameters and measurement values for the unit set to the
current scene.
Input
UNITDATA <unit number> <data> Delimiter
• Specify a unit number between 0 and 9,999.
• The data will depend on the processing item for the specified unit.
SeeAlso
Refer to the tables later in this section for a list of data.
Output
Command executed correctly:
Command not executed correctly:
Value Delimiter
OK Delimiter
ER Delimiter
Example
This example reads the judgement results for pattern inspection.
Input
UNITDATA 5 0 Delimiter
Output
0 Delimiter
OK Delimiter
6-2-(27)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
List of Data
Input image
Camera image
page 6-2-(29)
Switch camera
page 6-2-(31)
Change filtering
page 6-2-(32)
Filtering again
page 6-2-(33)
Position displacement compensation
Binary position compensation
page 6-2-(34)
EC position compensation
page 6-2-(37)
Edge position compensation
page 6-2-(42)
Model position compensation
page 6-2-(44)
Circle position compensation
page 6-2-(47)
Scroll
page 6-2-(49)
Measurement
Binary defect
page 6-2-(50)
Classification
page 6-2-(53)
Density defect
page 6-2-(55)
EC defect
page 6-2-(59)
EC positioning
page 6-2-(63)
Edge position
page 6-2-(68)
Fine matching
page 6-2-(70)
EC circle count
page 6-2-(72)
Pattern inspection
page 6-2-(74)
QUEST character verification
page 6-2-(76)
Rotation positioning
page 6-2-(81)
ECM search
page 6-2-(83)
Lot No. OCV1
page 6-2-(85)
Labeling
page 6-2-(88)
Label data
page 6-2-(90)
Edge pitch
page 6-2-(90)
Density data
page 6-2-(91)
Measurement support
Calculation
page 6-2-(93)
Trend Monitor
page 6-2-(94)
Branching control
Branching
page 6-2-(96)
DI branching
page 6-2-(96)
Results output
6-2-(28)
Memory card data
page 6-2-(96)
DO data
page 6-2-(97)
DO judgement
page 6-2-(98)
Host link data
page 6-2-(98)
Normal data
page 6-2-(99)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Results display
Display string
page 6-2-(99)
Display measure
page 6-2-(100)
Display judge
page 6-2-(100)
Display item
page 6-2-(101)
Display time
page 6-2-(101)
Display figure
page 6-2-(101)
Display line
page 6-2-(101)
Display box
page 6-2-(102)
Display circle
page 6-2-(102)
Display cursor
page 6-2-(102)
Input Image
Camera Images (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Details
Judgement result
0: OK
-2: Not measured
6-2-(29)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Camera Images (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
16
Input Camera number (0 to 3)
17
Filtering (Image 0)
0: OFF 1: Weak smoothing 2: Strong smoothing
3: Dilate 4: Erosion 5: Median
6: Enhance edges 7: Vertical edges
8: Horizontal edges 9: Extract edges
18
Filtering (Image 1)
19
Filter size (Image 0)
0 to 9: Same as filtering (Image 0)
0: 3 ™ 3
1: 5 ™ 5
20
Filter size (Image 1)
0: 3 ™ 3
1: 5 ™ 5
21
BGS levels lower limit (Image 0) (0 to 255)
22
BGS levels upper limit (Image 0) (0 to 255)
23
BGS levels lower limit (Image 1) (0 to 255)
24
BGS levels upper limit (Image 1) (0 to 255)
25
Filtering order (Image 0)
0: Filtering “ BGS levels
1: BGS levels “ Filtering
26
Filtering order (Image 1)
0: Filtering “ BGS levels
1: BGS levels “ Filtering
32
Camera 0 shutter speed
0: 1/120 1: 1/200 2: 1/500 3: 1/1,000
4: 1/2,000 5: 1/4,000 6: 1/6,000
7: 1/8,000 8: 1/12,000 9: 1/16,000
10: 1/20,000 11: 1/30,000 12: 1/60,000
13: 1/100,000 14: 1/160,000 15: 1/200,000
33
Camera 1 shutter speed
34
Camera 2 shutter speed
35
Camera 3 shutter speed
36 to 43
Camera 0 light level data (0 to 7) (See note.)
52 to 59
Camera 1 light level data (0 to 7) (See note.)
0 to 15: Same as for Camera 0
0 to 15: Same as for Camera 0
0 to 15: Same as for Camera 0
Settings
data
68 to 75
Camera 2 light level data (0 to 7) (See note.)
84 to 91
Camera 3 light level data (0 to 7) (See note.)
100
Frame/Field
0: Frame
1: Field
6-2-(30)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Note The following table shows the light levels for Intelligent Lighting.
Data
Camera 0
Camera 1
Camera 2
Camera
light level
adjustment
section
Camera 3
Light level
number
36
52
68
84
A
0
37
53
69
85
B
1
38
54
70
86
C
2
39
55
71
87
D
3
40
56
72
88
E
4
41
57
73
89
F
5
42
58
74
90
G
6
43
59
75
91
H
7
F150-LTC20
F160-LTC20
F150-LTC50
F160-LTC50
E
A
B
E A
C
D
H D
B F
C
G
Switch Camera (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Details
Judgement result
0: OK
-2: Not measured.
6-2-(31)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Switch Camera (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
16
Input Camera number (0 to 3)
17
Filtering (Image 0)
0: OFF 1: Weak smoothing 2: Strong smoothing
3: Dilate 4: Erosion 5: Median
6: Enhance edges 7: Vertical edges
8: Horizontal edges 9: Extract edges
18
Filtering (Image 1)
19
Filter size (Image 0)
0 to 9: Same as filtering (Image 0)
0: 3 ™ 3
1: 5 ™ 5
20
Filter size (Image 1)
0: 3 ™ 3
1: 5 ™ 5
21
BGS levels lower limit (Image 0) (0 to 255)
22
BGS levels upper limit (Image 0) (0 to 255)
23
BGS levels lower limit (Image 1) (0 to 255)
24
BGS levels upper limit (Image 1) (0 to 255)
25
Filtering order (Image 0)
0: Filtering “ BGS levels
1: BGS levels “ Filtering
26
Filtering order (Image 1)
0: Filtering “ BGS levels
1: BGS levels “ Filtering
Change Filtering (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
6-2-(32)
Details
Judgement result
0: OK
-2: Not measured.
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Change Filtering (Settings Data
Data
Settings
data
Details
16
Input Camera number (0 to 3)
17
Filtering (Image 0)
0: OFF 1: Weak smoothing 2: Strong smoothing
3: Dilate 4: Erosion 5: Median
6: Enhance edges 7: Vertical edges
8: Horizontal edges 9: Extract edges
18
Filtering (Image 1)
19
Filter size (Image 0)
0 to 9: Same as filtering (Image 0)
0: 3 ™ 3
1: 5 ™ 5
20
Filter size (Image 1)
0: 3 ™ 3
1: 5 ™ 5
21
BGS levels lower limit (Image 0) (0 to 255)
22
BGS levels upper limit (Image 0) (0 to 255)
23
BGS levels lower limit (Image 1) (0 to 255)
24
BGS levels upper limit (Image 1) (0 to 255)
25
Filtering order (Image 0)
0: Filtering “ BGS levels
1: BGS levels “ Filtering
26
Filtering order (Image 1)
0: Filtering “ BGS levels
1: BGS levels “ Filtering
Filtering Again (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Details
Judgement result
0: OK
-2: Not measured.
Filtering Again (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
16
Details
Image transfer mode
0: Image 1 “ Image 0
1: Image 0 “ Image 1
17
Filtering
0: OFF 1: Weak smoothing 2: Strong smoothing
3: Dilate 4: Erosion 5: Median
6: Enhance edges 7: Vertical edges
8: Horizontal edges 9: Extract edges
19
Filter size
0: 3 ™ 3
1: 5 ™ 5
21
BGS levels lower limit (Image 0) (0 to 255)
22
BGS levels upper limit (Image 0) (0 to 255)
25
Filtering order
0: Filtering first and then background cut
1: Background cut first and then filtering
6-2-(33)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Position Displacement Compensation
Binary Position Compensation (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Scroll X
2
Scroll Y
3
Scroll q
4
Measurement X
5
Measurement Y
6
Measurement angle
7
Region 0
8
Judgement result
Gravity X
9
Gravity Y
10
Axis angle
11
Area
12
Reversed area
13
Reference position X
14
Reference position Y
15
Reference angle
16
17
Reference area
Region 1
Judgement result
18
Gravity X
19
Gravity Y
20
Axis angle
21
Area
22
Reversed area
23
Reference position X
24
Reference position Y
25
Reference angle
26
Reference area
Binary Position Compensation (Settings Data)
Data
Details
30
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
31
6-2-(34)
Displacement direction (0 to 18) (See note 1.)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following settings data is for gravity and area and gravity and axis measurement.
Settings
data
32
Region 0
Binary level upper limit (0 to 255)
33
Binary level lower limit (0 to 255)
34
Reverse binary level
0: Not reversed
1: Reversed
35
X upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
36
X lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
37
Y upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
38
Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
39
Area upper limit (0.000 to 9,999,999.999)
40
Area lower limit (0.000 to 9,999,999.999)
41
Skipping X (1 to 15)
42
Skipping Y (1 to 15)
The following settings data is for gravity and area measurement.
43
Region 0
Fill profile
0: OFF
1: ON
The following settings data is for gravity and axis measurement.
44
Region 0
45
Axis angle upper limit (-180.000 to 180.000)
Axis angle lower limit (-180.000 to 180.000)
The following settings data is for processing item region and reference position measurement.
Settings
data
46
Region 0
Region upper left X (0 to 511) (See note 2.)
47
Region upper left Y (0 to 483) (See note 2.)
48
Region lower right X (0 to 511) (See note 2.)
49
Region lower right Y (0 to483) (See note 2.)
50
Reference position X (0 to 511)
51
Reference position Y (0 to 483)
The following settings data is for gravity and area and gravity and axis measurement.
Settings
data
52
Region 1
Binary level upper limit (0 to 255)
53
Binary level lower limit (0 to 255)
54
Reverse binary level
0: Not reversed
1: Reversed
55
X upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
56
X lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
57
Y upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
58
Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
59
Area upper limit (0.000 to 9,999,999.999)
60
Area lower limit (0.000 to 9,999,999.999)
61
Skipping X (1 to 15)
62
Skipping Y (1 to 15)
The following settings data is for gravity and area measurement.
63
Region 1
Fill profile
0: OFF
1: ON
6-2-(35)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following settings data is for gravity and axis.
64
Region 1
65
Axis angle upper limit (-180.000 to 180.000)
Axis angle lower limit (-180.000 to 180.000)
The following settings data is for processing item region and reference position measurement.
Settings
data
Note
1.
Region 1
Region upper left X (0 to 511) (See note 2.)
67
Region upper left Y (0 to 483) (See note 2.)
68
Region lower right X (0 to 511) (See note 2.)
69
Region lower right Y (0 to483) (See note 2.)
70
Reference position X (0 to 511)
71
Reference position Y (0 to 483)
The displacement direction settings are shown in the following table.1
No.
Displacement X
Displacement Y
Displacement q
0
None
None
None
1
Displacement compensation region 0
None
None
2
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 0
None
3
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 1
None
4
None
Displacement compensation region 0
None
5
Displacement compensation region 1
None
None
6
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 0
None
7
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 1
None
8
None
Displacement compensation region 1
None
9
Midpoint
None
None
10
None
Midpoint
None
11
Midpoint
Midpoint
None
12
Displacement compensation region 0
Midpoint
None
13
Midpoint
Displacement compensation region 0
None
14
Displacement compensation region 1
Midpoint
None
15
Midpoint
Displacement compensation region 1
None
16
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 0
17
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 1
18
Midpoint
Midpoint
Relative angle
2.
6-2-(36)
66
If these settings are changed, one rectangular region will be set and any
previously drawn figures will be deleted.
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
EC Position Compensation (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Scroll X
2
Scroll Y
3
Scroll q
4
Measurement X
5
Measurement Y
6
Measurement angle
7
Region 0
Judgement result
8
Measurement position X
9
Measurement position Y
10
Measurement angle
11
Reference position X
12
Reference position Y
13
Reference angle
14
Radius
15
Circular value
16
Line length 1
17
Line length 2
18
Upper left apex X
19
Upper left apex Y
20
Lower left apex X
21
Lower left apex Y
22
Upper right apex X
23
Upper right apex Y
24
Lower right apex X
25
26
27
Lower right apex Y
Region 1
Judgement result
Measurement position X
to
.... (Same as for region 0)
43
Lower right apex X
44
Lower right apex Y
6-2-(37)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
EC Position Compensation (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
50
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
51
Edge extraction mask size
0: 3 ™ 3
1: 5 ™ 5
52
Edge extraction lower limit (10 to 255)
53
Edge extraction upper limit (10 to 255)
54
Displacement direction (0 to 18) (See note.)
55
Region 0
Search region upper left X (0 to 511)
56
Search region upper left Y (0 to 483)
57
Search region lower right X (0 to 511)
58
Search region lower right Y (0 to 483)
The following settings data is for circle measurement.
Settings
data
59
Region 0
Circle color
0: Black
1: White
2: Both
60
Skipping
0: OFF
1: ON
6-2-(38)
61
Circular value (0 to 100)
62
Center X (0 to 511)
63
Center Y (0 to 483)
64
Circumference radius (3 to 512)
65
Circumference width (1 to 64)
66
Radius judgement upper limit (1 to 9,999.999)
67
Radius judgement lower limit (1 to 9,999.999)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following settings are for line conditions (common to cross points, boxes, and multiple cross points).
Settings
data
68
Region 0
Extracting level
0: Level 1 1: Level 2 2: Level 3
3: Level 4 4: Level 5
69
Line angle specification
0: OFF
1: ON
70
Line angle 0 specification
0: OFF
1: ON
71
Line angle 0 (0 to 359)
72
Line angle 1 specification
0: OFF
1: ON
73
Line angle 1 (0 to 359)
74
Line angle 2 specification
0: OFF
1: ON
75
Line angle 2 (0 to 359)
76
Line angle 3 specification
0: OFF
1: ON
77
Line angle 3 (0 to 359)
The following settings data is for cross point and multiple cross point measurement.
Settings
data
78
Region 0
Target color
0: Black
1: White
79
Angle specification
0: OFF
1: ON
80
Range of angle (0 to 359)
81
Limits of angle (0 to 99)
82
Length specification
0: OFF
1: ON
83
Length 1 (1 to 999)
84
Length 1 lower limit (0 to 200)
85
Length 1 upper limit (0 to 200)
86
Length 2 (1 to 999)
87
Length 2 lower limit (0 to 200)
88
Length 2 upper limit (0 to 200)
89
Defined side of q
0: Midline of corner
1: Side 1
2: Side 2
6-2-(39)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following settings data is for box measurement.
Settings
data
90
Region 0
Box color
0: Black
1: White
91
Result coordinate
0: Center 1: Upper left 2: Lower left
3: Upper right 4: Lower right
Defined side of q
92
0: All 1: Upper 2: Lower 3: Left 4: Right
93
Long side (1 to 512)
94
Short side (1 to 484)
95
Long side lower limit (1 to 200)
96
Long side upper limit (1 to 200)
97
Short side lower limit (1 to 200)
98
Short side upper limit (1 to 200)
99
Long side distance lower limit (1 to 200)
100
Long side distance upper limit (1 to 200)
101
Short side distance lower limit (1 to 200)
102
Short side distance upper limit (1 to 200)
103
Line parallelism (1 to 99)
The following settings data is for multiple cross point measurement.
104
Region 0
Sorting method
0: X ascending order
1: X descending order
2: Y ascending order
3: Y descending order
The following settings data is for all measurements.
Settings
data
105
Region 1
Search region upper left X (0 to 511)
106
Search region upper left Y (0 to 483)
107
Search region lower right X (0 to 511)
108
Search region lower right Y (0 to 483)
to
... (Same as for region 0)
153
Line parallelism (1 to 99)
154
Sorting method
0: X ascending order
1: X descending order
2: Y ascending order
3: Y descending order
Note The displacement direction settings are shown in the following table.
No.
6-2-(40)
Displacement X
Displacement Y
Displacement q
0
None
None
None
1
Displacement compensation region 0
None
None
2
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 0
None
3
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 1
None
4
None
Displacement compensation region 0
None
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
No.
Displacement X
Displacement Y
Displacement q
5
Displacement compensation region 1
None
None
6
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 0
None
7
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 1
None
8
None
Displacement compensation region 1
None
9
Midpoint
None
None
10
None
Midpoint
None
11
Midpoint
Midpoint
None
12
Displacement compensation region 0
Midpoint
None
13
Midpoint
Displacement compensation region 0
None
14
Displacement compensation region 1
Midpoint
None
15
Midpoint
Displacement compensation region 1
None
16
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 0
17
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 1
18
Midpoint
Midpoint
Relative angle
Edge Position Displacement (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Scroll X
2
Scroll Y
3
Scroll q
4
Measurement X
5
Measurement Y
6
Measurement angle
7
Region 0
Judgement result
8
Edge position X
9
Edge position Y
10
Reference position X
11
12
Reference position Y
Region 1
Judgement result
13
Edge position X
14
Edge position Y
15
Reference position X
16
Reference position Y
6-2-(41)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Edge Position Compensation (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
20
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
21
Displacement direction (0 to 16) (See note.)
22
Region 0
Edge detection direction
0: ’
1: ”
2: “
3: ‘
23
Edge color
0: Light “ dark
1: Dark “ light
24
X upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
25
X lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
26
Y upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
27
Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
28
Edge level (0 to 100)
29
Noise level (0 to 255)
30
Noise width (0 to 255)
31
Region upper left X (0 to 511)
32
Region upper left Y (0 to 483)
33
Region lower right X (0 to 511)
34
Region lower right Y (0 to 483)
35
Reference position X (0 to 511)
36
37
Reference position Y (0 to 483)
Region 1
Edge detection method
0: ’
1: ”
2: “
3: ‘
38
Edge color
0: Light “ dark
1: Dark “ light
6-2-(42)
39
X upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
40
X lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
41
Y upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
42
Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
43
Edge level (0 to 100)
44
Noise level (0 to 255)
45
Noise width (0 to 255)
46
Region upper left X (0 to 511)
47
Region upper left Y (0 to 483)
48
Region lower right X (0 to 511)
49
Region lower right Y (0 to 483)
50
Reference position X (0 to 511)
51
Reference position Y (0 to 483)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Note The displacement direction settings are shown in the following table.l
No.
Displacement X
Displacement Y
Displacement q
0
None
None
None
1
Displacement compensation region 0
None
None
2
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 0
None
3
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 1
None
4
None
Displacement compensation region 0
None
5
Displacement compensation region 1
None
None
6
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 0
None
7
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 1
None
8
None
Displacement compensation region 1
None
9
Midpoint
None
None
10
None
Midpoint
None
11
Midpoint
Midpoint
None
12
Displacement compensation region 0
Midpoint
None
13
Midpoint
Displacement compensation region 0
None
14
Displacement compensation region 1
Midpoint
None
15
Midpoint
Displacement compensation region 1
None
16
Midpoint
Midpoint
Relative angle
6-2-(43)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Model Position Compensation (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Scroll X
2
Scroll Y
3
Scroll q
4
Measurement X
5
Measurement Y
6
Measurement angle
7
Region 0
8
Correlation
9
Position X
10
Position Y
11
12
6-2-(44)
Judgement result
Angle
Region 1
Judgement result
13
Correlation
14
Position X
15
Position Y
16
Angle
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Model Position Compensation (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
32
33
Displacement direction (0 to 18) (See note.)
Rotation range
0: None 1: – 5• 2: – 15• 3: – 30•
4: – 45•
5: 0 – 15•, 180 – 15•
6: 0 – 30•, 180 – 30• 7: All angles
34
Skipping angle
0: 1• 1: 2• 3: 5• 4: 6• 5: 10•
6: 15• 7: 20• 8: 30•
35
Verification
0: ON
1: OFF
36
Candidate level (0 to 99)
37
Region 0
Model position upper left X (0 to 511)
38
Model position upper left Y (0 to 483)
39
Model position lower right X (0 to 511)
40
Model position lower right Y (0 to 483)
41
Search region upper left X (0 to 511)
42
Search region upper left Y (0 to 483)
43
Search region lower right X (0 to 511)
44
Search region lower right Y (0 to 483)
45
Correlation judgement (0 to 100)
46
X upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
47
X lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
48
Y upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
49
Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
50
Angle judgement upper limit (-360.00 to 360.00)
51
52
Angle judgement lower limit (-360.00 to 360.00)
Region 1
Model position upper left X (0 to 511)
53
Model position upper left Y (0 to 483)
54
Model position lower right X (0 to 511)
55
Model position lower right Y (0 to 483)
56
Search region upper left X (0 to 511)
57
Search region upper left Y (0 to 483)
58
Search region lower right X (0 to 511)
59
Search region lower right Y (0 to 483)
60
Correlation judgement (0 to 100)
61
X upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
62
X lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
63
Y upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
64
Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
65
Angle judgement upper limit (-360.00 to 360.00)
66
Angle judgement lower limit (-360.00 to 360.00)
6-2-(45)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Note The displacement direction settings are shown in the following table.
No.
6-2-(46)
Displacement X
Displacement Y
Displacement q
0
None
None
None
1
Displacement compensation region 0
None
None
2
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 0
None
3
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 1
None
4
None
Displacement compensation region 0
None
5
Displacement compensation region 1
None
None
6
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 0
None
7
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 1
None
8
None
Displacement compensation region 1
None
9
Midpoint
None
None
10
None
Midpoint
None
11
Midpoint
Midpoint
None
12
Displacement compensation region 0
Midpoint
None
13
Midpoint
Displacement compensation region 0
None
14
Displacement compensation region 1
Midpoint
None
15
Midpoint
Displacement compensation region 1
None
16
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 0
Displacement compensation region 0
17
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 1
Displacement compensation region 1
18
Midpoint
Midpoint
Relative angle
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Circle Position Compensation Data (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Scroll X
2
Scroll Y
3
Scroll q
4
Measurement X
5
Measurement Y
6
Measurement angle
7
Model 0
Judgement result
8
Correlation
9
Position X
10
11
Position Y
Model 1
Judgement result
12
Correlation
13
Position X
14
15
Position Y
Model 2
Judgement result
16
Correlation
17
Position X
18
19
Position Y
Model 3
Judgement result
20
Correlation
21
Position X
22
23
Position Y
Model 4
Judgement result
24
Correlation
25
Position X
26
Position Y
6-2-(47)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Circle Position Compensation Data (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
33
Verification
0: ON
1: OFF
34
Candidate level (0 to 99)
35
Model correlation judgement value (0 to 100)
36
Center X coordinate (0 to 511)
37
Center Y coordinate (0 to 483)
38
Radius (0 to 232)
39
Model width WX (15 to 67)
40
Model width WY (15 to 466)
41
Model 0
Search region upper left X (0 to 511)
42
Search region upper left Y (0 to 483)
43
Search region lower right X (0 to 511)
44
45
Search region lower right Y (0 to 483)
Model 1
Search region upper left X (0 to 511)
46
Search region upper left Y (0 to 483)
47
Search region lower right X (0 to 511)
48
Search region lower right Y (0 to 483)
49
Model 2
Search region upper left X (0 to 511)
50
Search region upper left Y (0 to 483)
51
Search region lower right X (0 to 511)
52
53
Search region lower right Y (0 to 483)
Model 3
Search region upper left X (0 to 511)
53
Search region upper left Y (0 to 483)
55
Search region lower right X (0 to 511)
56
Search region lower right Y (0 to 483)
The following settings data is for 1 Model measurement.
Settings
data
57
Rotation range
0: None 1: – 5• 2: – 15• 3: – 30•
4: – 45•
5: 0 – 15•, 180 – 15•
6: 0 – 30•, 180 – 30• 7: All angles
58
Skipping angle
0: 1• 1: 2• 3: 5• 4: 6• 5: 10•
6: 15• 7: 20• 8: 30•
59
6-2-(48)
Model 4
Model position upper left X (14 to 497)
60
Model position upper left Y (16 to 467)
61
Model position lower right X (14 to 497)
62
Model position lower right Y (16 to 467)
63
Search position upper left X (0 to 511)
64
Search position upper left Y (0 to 483)
65
Search position lower right X (0 to 511)
66
Search position lower right Y (0 to 483)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following settings data is for defect (circle) and defect (arc) measurement.
Settings
data
67
Defect color
0: White
1: Black
2: White and black
68
Element size (4 to 80)
69
Comparing pitch (1 to 6)
70
Defect circle radius (20 to 242)
71
Defect circle width (3 to 39)
The following settings data is for defect (arc) measurement.
72
Start angle (arc) (-180.000 to 180.000)
73
End angle (arc) (-180.000 to 180.000)
The following settings data is for circular angle measurement.
Settings
data
74
Mode
0: Black 1: White 2: Black defect 3: White defect
4: Edge
75
Circle 0 radius (circumference) (20 to 242)
76
Circle 1 radius (circumference) (20 to 242)
77
Skipping angle (0.4 to 2.0)
78
Comparing pitch (1 to 9)
79
Necessary number of elements (1 to 99)
80
Edge pitch (1 to 9)
81
Number of circles (1 or 2)
Scroll (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Scroll X
2
Scroll Y
3
Scroll q
4
Measurement X
5
Measurement Y
6
Measurement angle
7
Reference X
8
Reference Y
9
Reference angle
Scroll (Measurement Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
32
Scroll X
Judgement lower limit (-1,024 to 1,024)
33
34
Scroll Y
36
Judgement upper limit (-1,024 to 1,024)
Judgement lower limit (-1,024 to 1,024)
35
37
Judgement upper limit (-1,024 to 1,024)
Scroll q
Judgement upper limit (-180.00 to 180.00)
Judgement lower limit (-180.00 to 180.00)
6-2-(49)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Measurement
Binary Defect (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Region 0
Judgement result
2
Region X 1 (See note.)
3
Region Y 1 (See note.)
4
Region X 2 (See note.)
5
Region Y 2 (See note.)
6
Gravity X
7
Gravity Y
8
Axis angle
9
Area
10
Reversed area
11
Reference position X
12
Reference position Y
13
Reference angle
14
15
Reference area
Region 1
Judgement result
Region 7
Judgement result
to
99
... (Same as for region 0)
to
... (Same as for region 0)
111
Reference angle
112
Reference area
Note The upper left and lower right coordinates of the calculated measurement
region will be output whenever Area (Variable Box) is set for any of the regions
0 to 7. These coordinates will be output in pixels regardless of the setting for
calibration.
Binary Defect (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
120
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
121
Coordinate mode
0: After scroll, calibration OFF
1: Before scroll, calibration OFF
2: After scroll, calibration ON
3: Before scroll, calibration ON
122
Binary level (common) upper limit (0 to 255)
123
Binary level (common) lower limit (0 to 255)
124
Reverse binary level (common)
0: Not reversed
1: Reversed
6-2-(50)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following settings data is for gravity and area, gravity and axis and area (var. box)
measurement.
Settings
data
125
Region 0
Binary level upper limit (0 to 255)
126
Binary level lower limit (0 to 255)
127
Reverse binary level
0: Not reversed
1: Reversed
128
Binary tracking
0: OFF
1: ON
129
X upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
130
X lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
131
Y upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
132
Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
133
Area upper limit (0.000 to 9,999,999,999)
134
Area lower limit (0.000 to 9,999,999,999)
135
Skipping X (1 to 15)
136
Skipping Y (1 to 15)
The following settings data is for gravity and area and area (var. box) measurement.
137
Region 0
Fill profile
0: OFF
1: ON
The following settings data is for gravity and axis measurement.
138
139
Region 0
Axis angle upper limit (-180.000 to 180.000)
Axis angle lower limit (-180.000 to 180.000)
6-2-(51)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following settings data is for area (var. box) measurement.
Settings
data
140
Region 0
Edge detection direction (left edge)
0: ’
1: ”
2: “
3: ‘
141
Edge color (left edge)
0: Light “ dark
1: Dark “ light
142
Edge level (left edge) (0 to 100)
143
Noise level (left edge) (0 to 255)
144
Noise width (left edge) (0 to 255)
145
Offset width (left edge) (-511 to 511)
146
Edge detection direction (upper edge)
0: ’
1: ”
2: “
3: ‘
147
Edge color (upper edge)
0: Light “ dark
1: Dark “ light
148
Edge level (upper edge) (0 to 100)
149
Noise level (upper edge) (0 to 255)
150
Noise width (upper edge) (0 to 255)
151
Offset width (upper edge) (-511 to 511)
152
Edge detection direction (right edge)
0: ’
1: ”
2: “
3: ‘
153
Edge color (right edge)
0: Light “ dark
1: Dark “ light
154
Edge level (right edge) (0 to 100)
155
Noise level (right edge) (0 to 255)
156
Noise width (right edge) (0 to 255)
157
Offset width (right edge) (-511 to 511)
158
Edge detection direction (lower edge)
0: ’
1: ”
2: “
3: ‘
159
Edge color (lower edge)
0: Light “ dark
1: Dark “ light
160
6-2-(52)
Edge level (lower edge) (0 to 100)
161
Noise level (lower edge) (0 to 255)
162
Noise width (lower edge) (0 to 255)
163
Offset width (lower edge) (-511 to 511)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following settings data is for processing item region and reference position measurement.
164
Region 0
Region upper left X (0 to 511) (See note.)
165
Region upper left Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
166
Region lower right X (0 to 511) (See note.)
167
Region lower right Y (0 to483) (See note.)
168
Region upper left X (left edge) (0 to 511)
169
Region upper left Y (left edge) (0 to 483)
170
Region lower right X (left edge) (0 to 511)
171
Region lower right Y (left edge) (0 to483)
172
Region upper left X (upper edge) (0 to 511)
173
Region upper left Y (upper edge) (0 to 483)
174
Region lower right X (upper edge) (0 to 511)
175
Region lower right Y (upper edge) (0 to483)
176
Region upper left X (right edge) (0 to 511)
177
Region upper left Y (right edge) (0 to 483)
178
Region lower right X (right edge) (0 to 511)
179
Region lower right Y (right edge) (0 to483)
180
Region upper left X (lower edge) (0 to 511)
181
Region upper left Y (lower edge) (0 to 483)
182
Region lower right X (lower edge) (0 to 511)
183
Region lower right Y (lower edge) (0 to483)
184
Reference position X (0 to 511)
185
186
Reference position Y (0 to 483)
Region 1
Binary level upper limit (0 to 255)
Region 7
Binary level upper limit (0 to 255)
to
552
... (Same as for region 0)
to
... (Same as for region 0)
611
Reference position X (0 to 511)
612
Reference position Y (0 to 483)
Note If these settings are changed, one rectangular region will be set and any previously drawn figures will be deleted. This is true for regions 1 to 7 as well.
CHECK
Only the allocations for region 0 are listed here. Refer to the allocations for
region 0 to calculate the numbers for regions 1 to 7.
Classification (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Details
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Measurement position X
2
Measurement position Y
3
Correlation
4
Index number
6-2-(53)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Classification (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
16
Search region upper left X (0 to 511)
17
Search region upper left Y (0 to 483)
18
Search region lower right X (0 to 511)
19
Search region lower right Y (0 to 483)
20
Verification
0: ON
1: OFF
21
Candidate level (0 to 99)
22
Interpolation
0: OFF
1: ON
23
X upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
24
X lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
25
Y upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
26
Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
27
Correlation upper limit (0 to 100)
28
Correlation lower limit (0 to 100)
29
Coordinate mode
0: After scroll, calibration OFF
1: Before scroll, calibration OFF
2: After scroll, calibration ON
3: Before scroll, calibration ON
6-2-(54)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Density Defect (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Region 0
Judgement result
2
Region X 1 (See note.)
3
Region Y 1 (See note.)
4
Region X 2 (See note.)
5
Region Y 2 (See note.)
6
Large defect
7
Small defect
8
Max. density
9
Min. density
10
Deviation
11
Large defect position X
12
Large defect position Y
13
Small defect position X
14
Small defect position Y
15
Deviation position X
16
Deviation position Y
17
Large defect reference position X
18
Large defect reference position Y
19
Small defect reference position X
20
Small defect reference position Y
21
Deviation reference position X
22
23
Deviation reference position Y
Region 1
Judgement result
Region 7
Judgement result
to
155
... (Same as for region 0)
to
... (Same as for region 0)
176
Deviation reference position Y
Note The upper left and lower right coordinates of the calculated measurement
region will be output whenever Defect (Variable Box) is set for any of the
regions 0 to 7. These coordinates will be output in pixels regardless of the setting for calibration.
Density Defect (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
180
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
181
Coordinate mode
0: After scroll, calibration OFF
1: Before scroll, calibration OFF
2: After scroll, calibration ON
3: Before scroll, calibration ON
6-2-(55)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following setting data is for Defect and area (var. box).
Settings
data
182
Region 0
Large defect flag
0: OFF
1: ON
183
Small defect flag
0: OFF
1: ON
184
Small defect color
0: White
1: Black
2: Both
185
Density flag
0: OFF
1: ON
186
Large defect judgement (0 to 255)
187
Small defect judgement (0 to 255)
188
Density upper limit (0 to 255)
189
Density lower limit (0 to 255)
190
Element size (4 to 80)
191
Comparing pitch (1 to 6)
The following settings data is for area (var. box) measurement.
Settings
data
192
Region 0
Measurement direction
0: X line
1: Y line
2: Box
193
Edge detection direction (left edge)
0: ’
1: ”
2: “
3: ‘
194
Edge color (left edge)
0: Light “ dark
1: Dark “ light
195
Edge level (left edge) (0 to 100)
196
Noise level (left edge) (0 to 255)
197
Noise width (left edge) (0 to 255)
198
Offset width (left edge) (-511 to 511)
199
Edge detection direction (upper edge)
0: ’
1: ”
2: “
3: ‘
200
Edge color (upper edge)
0: Light “ dark
1: Dark “ light
6-2-(56)
201
Edge level (upper edge) (0 to 100)
202
Noise level (upper edge) (0 to 255)
203
Noise width (upper edge) (0 to 255)
204
Offset width (upper edge) (-511 to 511)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Settings
data
Details
205
Region 0
Edge detection direction (right edge)
0: ’
1: ”
2: “
3: ‘
206
Edge color (right edge)
0: Light “ dark
1: Dark “ light
207
Edge level (right edge) (0 to 100)
208
Noise level (right edge) (0 to 255)
209
Noise width (right edge) (0 to 255)
210
Offset width (right edge) (-511 to 511)
211
Edge detection direction (lower edge)
0: ’
1: ”
2: “
3: ‘
212
Edge color (lower edge)
0: Light “ dark
1: Dark “ light
213
Edge level (lower edge) (0 to 100)
214
Noise level (lower edge) (0 to 255)
215
Noise width (lower edge) (0 to 255)
216
Offset width (lower edge) (-511 to 511)
The following settings data is for defect (deviation) measurement.
217
Region 0
Defect judgement (0 to 127)
The following data is for the defect (line) inspection region.
Settings
data
218
Region 0
Start X (0 to 511)
219
Start Y (0 to 483)
220
End X (0 to 511)
221
End Y (0 to 483)
222
Width (1 to 64)
The following data is for the defect (circumference) inspection region.
Settings
data
223
Center X (0 to 511)
224
Center Y (0 to 483)
225
Radius (1 to 512)
226
Width (1 to 64)
The following data is for the defect (arc) inspection region.
Settings
data
227
Center X (0 to 511)
228
Center Y (0 to 483)
229
Radius (1 to 512)
230
Width (1 to 64)
231
Start angle (-180.000 to 180.000)
232
End angle (-180.000 to 180.000)
6-2-(57)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following data is for the defect (region) inspection region.
Settings
data
233
Region 0
Region upper left X (0 to 511) (See note.)
234
Region upper left Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
235
Region lower right X (0 to 511) (See note.)
236
Region lower right Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
The following data is for the defect (variable box) inspection region.
Settings
data
237
Region 0
Region upper left X (left edge) (0 to 511)
238
Region upper left Y (left edge) (0 to 483)
239
Region lower right X (left edge) (0 to 511)
240
Region lower right Y (left edge) (0 to 483)
241
Region upper left X (upper edge) (0 to 511)
242
Region upper left Y (upper edge) (0 to 483)
243
Region lower right X (upper edge) (0 to 511)
244
Region lower right Y (upper edge) (0 to 483)
245
Region upper left X (right edge) (0 to 511)
246
Region upper left Y (right edge) (0 to 483)
247
Region lower right X (right edge) (0 to 511)
248
Region lower right Y (right edge) (0 to 483)
249
Region upper left X (lower edge) (0 to 511)
250
Region upper left Y (lower edge) (0 to 483)
251
Region lower right X (lower edge) (0 to 511)
252
Region lower right Y (lower edge) (0 to 483)
The following data is for the defect (deviation/box) inspection region.
253
Region 0
Region upper left X (0 to 511)
254
Region upper left Y (0 to 483)
255
Region lower right X (0 to 511)
256
Region lower right Y (0 to 483)
The following data is for the defect (deviation/circumference) inspection region.
257
Region 0
Center X (0 to 511)
258
Center Y (0 to 483)
259
Radius (10 to 242)
The following data is the inspection region parameters for processing items other than
defect (deviation).
260
6-2-(58)
Region 0
Large defect reference position X (0 to 511)
261
Large defect reference position Y (0 to 483)
262
Small defect reference position X (0 to 511)
263
Small defect reference position Y (0 to 483)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following data is the inspection region parameters for defect (deviation).
264
Region 0
Deviation reference position X (0 to 511)
Region 1
Large defect flag
265
266
Deviation reference position Y (0 to 483)
0: OFF
1: ON
to
770
... (Same as for region 0)
Region 7
Large defect flag
0: OFF
1: ON
to
... (Same as for region 0)
852
Deviation reference position X (0 to 511)
853
Deviation reference position Y (0 to 483)
Note If these settings are changed, one rectangular region will be set and any previously drawn figures will be deleted. This is true for regions 1 to 7 as well.
CHECK
Only the allocations for region 0 are listed here. Refer to the allocations for
region 0 to calculate the numbers for regions 1 to 7.
EC Defect (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Region 0
Judgement
2
Defect width (See note.)
3
Defect length (See note.)
4
Gravity X
5
Gravity Y
6
Area
7
Number of labels
8
Region 1
Judgement
Region 7
Judgement
to
50
51
... (Same as for region 0)
Defect width (See note.)
52
Defect length (See note.)
53
Gravity X
54
Gravity Y
55
Area
56
Number of labels
Note These values are output in pixels regardless of the calibration setting. This is
true for regions 1 to 7 as well.
6-2-(59)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
EC Defect (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
60
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
61
Coordinate mode
0: After scroll, calibration OFF
1: Before scroll, calibration OFF
2: After scroll, calibration ON
3: Before scroll, calibration ON
62
Edge extraction mask size
0: 3 ™ 3
1: 5 ™ 5
63
Edge extraction lower limit (10 to 255)
64
Edge extraction upper limit (10 to 255)
65
Removal
region 0
66
Region upper left X (0 to 511) (See note.)
Region upper left Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
67
Region lower right X (0 to 511) (See note.)
68
Region lower right Y (0 to483) (See note.)
The following settings data is for circle removal.
Settings
data
69
Removal
region 0
Circle color
0: Black
1: White
2: Both
70
Latitude of angle (0 to 99)
71
Circle search
0: OFF
1: ON
72
Circle center X coordinate (0 to 511)
73
Circle center Y coordinate (0 to 483)
74
Circumference radius (3 to 512)
75
Circumference width (1 to 64)
The following settings data is for line removal.
76
Removal
region 0
Extracting level
0: Level 1 1: Level 2 2: Level 3
3: Level 4 4: Level 5
The following settings data is for oriented line removal.
77
78
Removal
region 0
Range of angle (0 to 359)
Limits of angle (0 to 45)
The following settings data is common to all measurements.
79
to
Removal
region 1
Region upper left X (0 to 511)
... (Same as for removal region 0)
The following settings data is common to all measurements
Settings
data
163
to
Removal
region 7
Region upper left X (0 to 511)
... (Same as for removal region 0)
175
Range of angle (0 to 359)
176
Limits of angle (0 to 45)
The following settings data is common to all measurements
6-2-(60)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Settings
data
Details
177
178
Inspection
region 0
Region upper left X (0 to 511) (See note.)
Region upper left Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
179
Region lower right X (0 to 511) (See note.)
180
Region lower right Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
The following settings data is for defect measurement.
Settings
data
181
Inspection
region 0
Extracting level
0: Level 1 1: Level 2 2: Level 3
3: Level 4 4: Level 5
182
Defect color
0: Black
1: White
183
Defect width upper limit (0 to 100)
184
Defect width lower limit (0 to 100)
185
Defect length upper limit (0 to 999)
186
Defect length lower limit (0 to 999)
The following settings data is for gravity and area and labeling measurement.
Settings
data
187
188
Inspection
region 0
X upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
X lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
189
Y upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
190
Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
191
Area upper limit (0.000 to 9,999,999.999)
192
Area lower limit (0.000 to 9,999,999.999)
193
Binary level upper limit (0 to 255)
194
Binary level lower limit (0 to 255)
195
Reverse binary level
0: Not reversed
1: Reversed
196
Defect display
0: Simple
1: Detail
The following settings are for labeling measurement.
Settings
data
197
198
Inspection
region 0
No. of labels upper limit (0 to 2,500)
No. of labels lower limit (0 to 2,500)
199
Noise area upper limit (0 to 9,999,999.999)
200
Noise area lower limit (0 to 9,999,999.999)
201
Fill Holes Mode
0: OFF
1: ON
202
Sort
0: Area descending 1: Area ascending
2: X gravity descending 3: X gravity ascending
4: Y gravity descending 5: Y gravity ascending
203
Outside trimming
0: OFF
1: ON
204
No. of labels (0 to 2,499)
6-2-(61)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following settings data is for gravity and area.
Settings
data
205
206
Inspection
region 0
207
Skipping X (1 to 15)
Skipping Y (1 to 15)
Fill profile
0: OFF
1: ON
208
to
Inspection
region 1
Region upper left X (0 to 511)
... (Same as for inspection region 0)
The following settings data is for gravity and area.
Settings
data
394
to
424
Inspection
region 7
Region upper left X (0 to 511)
... (Same as for inspection region 0)
Fill profile
0: OFF
1: ON
Note If these settings are changed, one rectangular region will be set and any previously drawn figures will be deleted. This is true for regions 1 to 7 as well.
CHECK
6-2-(62)
Only the allocations for region 0 are listed here. Refer to the allocations for
region 0 to calculate the numbers for regions 1 to 7.
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
EC Positioning (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Region 0
Judgement result
2
Measurement X
3
Measurement Y
4
Measurement angle
5
Reference position X
6
Reference position Y
7
Reference angle
8
Radius
9
Circular value
10
Line length 1
11
Line length 2
12
Upper left apex X
13
Upper left apex Y
14
Lower left apex X
15
Lower left apex Y
16
Upper right apex X
17
Upper right apex Y
18
Lower right apex X
19
Lower right apex Y
20
No. of cross points
21
Cross point position 1 X
22
Cross point position 1 Y
23
Cross point position 2 X
24
Cross point position 2 Y
25
Cross point position 3 X
26
Cross point position 3 Y
27
Cross point position 4 X
28
Cross point position 4 Y
29
Cross point position 5 X
30
Cross point position 5 Y
31
Cross point position 6 X
32
Cross point position 6 Y
33
Cross point position 7 X
34
Cross point position 7 Y
(See note.)
6-2-(63)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
Measure- 35
ment
36
data
37
Region 0
Cross point position 8 X
Cross point position 8 Y
Cross point position 9 X
38
Cross point position 9 Y
39
Cross point position A X
40
Cross point position A Y
41
Cross point position B X
42
Cross point position B Y
43
Cross point position C X
44
Cross point position C Y
45
Cross point position D X
46
Cross point position D Y
47
Cross point position E X
48
Cross point position E Y
49
Cross point position F X
50
Cross point position F Y
51
Cross point position G X
52
Cross point position G Y
53
Cross point position H X
53
Cross point position H Y
55
Cross point position I X
56
Cross point position I Y
57
Cross point position J X
58
Cross point position J Y
59
Cross point position K X
60
61
Cross point position K Y
Region 1
Judgement result
Region 7
Judgement result
to
421
(See note.)
... (Same as for region 0)
to
... (Same as for region 0)
480
Cross point position K Y
Note These values will be output in pixels regardless of the setting for calibration.
This is true for regions 1 to 7 as well.
CHECK
6-2-(64)
Only the allocations for region 0 are listed here. Refer to the allocations for
region 0 to calculate the numbers for regions 1 to 7.
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
EC Positioning (Settings Data)
Data
Details
500
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
501
Coordinate mode
0: After scroll, calibration OFF
1: Before scroll, calibration OFF
2: After scroll, calibration ON
3: Before scroll, calibration ON
502
Edge extraction mask size
0: 3 ™ 3
1: 5 ™ 5
503
Edge extraction lower limit (10 to 255)
504
Edge extraction upper limit (10 to 255)
505
Region 0
Search region upper left X (0 to 511)
506
Search region upper left Y (0 to 483)
507
Search region lower right X (0 to 511)
508
Search region lower right Y (0 to483)
509
Reference position X (0 to 511)
510
Reference position Y (0 to 483)
511
Reference angle (0 to 359)
The following settings data is for circle measurement.
Settings
data
512
Region 0
Circle color
0: Black
1: White
2: Both
513
Skipping
0: OFF
1: ON
514
Circular value (0 to 100)
515
Center X (0 to 511)
516
Center Y (0 to 483)
517
Circumference radius (3 to 512)
518
Circumference width (1 to 64)
519
Radius judgement upper limit (1 to 9,999.999)
520
Radius judgement lower limit (1 to 9,999.999)
6-2-(65)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following settings are for line conditions (common to cross points, boxes, and multiple cross points).
Settings
data
521
Region 0
Extracting level
0: Level 1 1: Level 2 2: Level 3
3: Level 4 4: Level 5
522
Line angle specification
0: OFF
1: ON
523
Line angle 0 specification
0: OFF
1: ON
524
Line angle 0 (0 to 359)
525
Line angle 1 specification
0: OFF
1: ON
526
Line angle 1 (0 to 359)
527
Line angle 2 specification
0: OFF
1: ON
528
Line angle 2 (0 to 359)
529
Line angle 3 specification
0: OFF
1: ON
530
Line angle 3 (0 to 359)
The following settings data is for cross point and multiple cross point measurements.
Settings
data
531
Region 0
Target color
0: Black
1: White
532
Angle specification
0: OFF
1: ON
533
Range of angle (0 to 359)
534
Limits of angle (0 to 99)
535
Length specification
0: OFF
1: ON
536
Length 1 (1 to 999)
537
Length 1 lower limit (0 to 200)
538
Length 1 upper limit (0 to 200)
539
Length 2 (1 to 999)
540
Length 2 lower limit (0 to 200)
541
Length 2 upper limit (0 to 200)
542
Defined side of q
0: Midline of corner
1: Side 1
2: Side 2
6-2-(66)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Details
The following settings data is for box measurements.
Settings
data
543
Region 0
Box color
0: Black
1: White
544
Result coordinate
0: Center 1: Upper left 2: Lower left
3: Upper right 4: Lower right
Defined side of q
545
0: All 1: Upper 2: Lower 3: Left 4: Right
546
Long side (1 to 512)
547
Short side (1 to 484)
548
Long side lower limit (1 to 200)
549
Long side upper limit (1 to 200)
550
Short side lower limit (1 to 200)
551
Short side upper limit (1 to 200)
552
Long side distance lower limit (1 to 200)
553
Long side distance upper limit (1 to 200)
554
Short side distance lower limit (1 to 200)
555
Short side distance upper limit (1 to 200)
556
Line parallelism (1 to 99)
The following settings data is for multiple cross point measurements.
Settings
data
557
Region 0
Sorting method
0: X ascending order
1: X descending order
2: Y ascending order
3: Y descending order
558
Region 1
Search region upper left X (0 to 511)
Region 7
Search region upper left (0 to 511)
to
876
... (Same as for region 0)
to
... (Same as for region 0)
928
Sorting method
0: X ascending order
1: X descending order
2: Y ascending order
3: Y descending order
CHECK
Only the allocations for region 0 are listed here. Refer to the allocations for
region 0 to calculate the numbers for regions 1 to 7.
6-2-(67)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Edge Position (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Region 0
Edge position X
3
Edge position Y
4
Reference position X
5
6
Reference position Y
Region 1
to
36
6-2-(68)
Judgement result
2
Judgement result
... (Same as for region 0)
Region 7
Judgement result
37
Edge position X
38
Edge position Y
39
Reference position X
40
Reference position Y
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Edge Position (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
50
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
51
Coordinate mode
0: After scroll, calibration OFF
1: Before scroll, calibration OFF
2: After scroll, calibration ON
3: Before scroll, calibration ON
52
Region 0
Edge detection direction
0: ’
1: ”
2: “
3: ‘
53
Edge color
0: Light “ dark
1: Dark “ light
54
X upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
55
X lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
56
Y upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
57
Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
58
Edge level (0 to 100)
59
Noise level (0 to 255)
60
Noise width (0 to 255)
61
Region upper left X (0 to 511)
62
Region upper left Y (0 to 483)
63
Region lower right X (0 to 511)
64
Region lower right Y (0 to 483)
65
Reference position X (0 to 511)
66
67
Reference position Y (0 to 483)
Region 1
Edge detection method
0: ’
1: ”
2: “
3: ‘
to
157
... (Same as for region 0)
Region 7
Edge detection method
0: ’
1: ”
2: “
3: ‘
CHECK
to
... (Same as for region 0)
171
Reference position Y (0 to 483)
Only the allocations for region 0 are listed here. Refer to the allocations for
region 0 to calculate the numbers for regions 1 to 7.
6-2-(69)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Fine Matching (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Details
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
6-2-(70)
1
Quantity
2
Area
3
Gravity X
4
Gravity Y
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Fine Matching (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
32
Details
Coordinate mode
0: After scroll, calibration OFF
1: Before scroll, calibration OFF
2: After scroll, calibration ON
3: Before scroll, calibration ON
33
Boundary inspection
0: OFF
1: ON
34
Defect inspection
0: Labeling area
1: Binary area
35
Target
0: Black
1: White
2: Both
36
Area lower limit (0 to 9,999,999.999)
37
Area upper limit (0 to 9,999,999.999)
38
Sort
0: Area descending 1: Area ascending
2: X gravity descending 3: X gravity ascending
4: Y gravity descending 5: Y gravity ascending
39
Label number (0 to 999)
40
Boundary level (1 to 5)
41
Difference (0 to 255) (See note 1.)
42
Perturbation
0: OFF
1: ON
43
Normalization
0: OFF
1: ON
44
Defect display
0: Simple
1: Detail
45
Model registration area upper left X (0 to 511) (See note 2.)
46
Model registration area upper left Y (0 to 483) (See note 2.)
47
Model registration area lower right X (0 to 511) (See note 2.)
48
Model registration area lower right Y (0 to 483) (See note 2.)
49
Quantity upper limit (0 to 1,000)
50
Quantity lower limit (0 to 1,000)
51
Area upper limit (0 to 9,999,999.999)
52
Area lower limit (0 to 9,999,999.999)
53
Position X upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
54
Position X lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
55
Position Y upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
56
Position Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
57
Difference (white) (0 to 255) (See note 1.)
58
Difference (black) (0 to 255) (See note 1.)
6-2-(71)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Note
1.
The settings for differences in data 41, 57, and 58 are as following when
setting and reading the values.
Data
41
Setting
Reading
Reflected in the white defect and black
defect differences.
The white defect difference is output.
57
Reflected in the white defect difference. The white defect difference is output.
58
Reflected in the black defect difference. The black defect difference is output.
2.
If these settings are changed, one rectangular region will be set and any
previously drawn figures will be deleted.
EC Circle Count (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Quantity
2
Circle 0
Center Y
4
Radius
5
Circular value
6
Circle 1
Center Y
8
Radius
9
Circular value
254
6-2-(72)
Center X
7
to
CHECK
Center X
3
... (Same as for circle 0)
Circle 63
Center X
255
Center Y
256
Radius
257
Circular value
Only the allocations for circle 0 and circle 63 are listed here. Refer to the allocations for circle 0 to calculate the numbers for circles 1 to 62.
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
EC Circle Count (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
270
Details
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
271
Coordinate mode
0: After scroll, calibration OFF
1: Before scroll, calibration OFF
2: After scroll, calibration ON
3: Before scroll, calibration ON
272
Edge extraction mask size
0: 3 ™ 3
1: 5 ™ 5
273
Edge extraction lower limit (10 to 255)
274
Edge extraction upper limit (10 to 255)
275
Inspected region upper left X (0 to 511) (See note.)
276
Inspected region upper left Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
277
Inspected region lower right X (0 to 511) (See note.)
278
Inspected region lower right Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
279
Circle color
0: Black
1: White
2: Both
280
Circle center X coordinate (0 to 511)
281
Circle center Y coordinate (0 to 483)
282
Circumference radius (3 to 512)
283
Circumference width (1 to 64)
284
Quantity upper limit (0 to 64)
285
Quantity lower limit (0 to 64)
286
Skipping
0: OFF
1: ON
287
Circular value (0 to 100)
288
Radius upper limit (1 to 9,999.999)
289
Radius lower limit (1 to 9,999.999)
Note If these settings are changed, one rectangular region will be set and any previously drawn figures will be deleted.
6-2-(73)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Pattern Inspection (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Region 0
Correlation
3
Position X
4
Position Y
5
Reference position X
6
7
Reference position Y
Region 1
Judgement result
Region 63
Judgement result
to
379
6-2-(74)
Judgement result
2
... (Same as for region 0)
380
Correlation
381
Position X
382
Position Y
383
Reference position X
384
Reference position Y
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Pattern Inspection (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
512
Accuracy
0: Normal
1: Precise
513
Verification
0: ON
1: OFF
514
515
Candidate level (0 to 99)
Coordinate mode
0: After scroll, calibration OFF
1: Before scroll, calibration OFF
2: After scroll, calibration ON
3: Before scroll, calibration ON
516
Region 0
Model position upper left X (0 to 511) (See note.)
517
Model position upper left Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
518
Model position lower right X (0 to 511) (See note.)
519
Model position lower right Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
520
Model reference position X (0 to 511)
521
Model reference position Y (0 to 483)
522
Search region upper left X (0 to 511)
523
Search region upper left Y (0 to 483)
524
Search region lower right X (0 to 511)
525
Search region lower right Y (0 to 483)
526
Correlation upper limit (0 to 100)
527
Correlation lower limit (0 to 100)
528
Position X upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
529
Position X lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
530
Position Y upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
531
532
Position Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Region 1
Model position upper left X (0 to 511) (See note.)
Region 63
Model position upper left X (0 to 511) (See note.)
to
1524
... (Same as for region 0)
to
... (Same as for region 0)
1539
Position Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Note If these settings are changed, one rectangular region will be set and any previously drawn figures will be deleted. This is true for regions 1 to 63 as well.
CHECK
Only the allocations for region 0 are listed here. Refer to the allocations for
region 0 to calculate the numbers for regions 1 to 63.
6-2-(75)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
QUEST Character Verification (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Region 0
2
Judgement
Row 1 character 1
Candidate 1 code
4
Candidate 1 similarity
5
Candidate 2 code
6
Candidate 2 similarity
to
... (Row 1 characters 2 to 19 same as for row 1
character 1.)
97
Row 1 character 20
Candidate 1 code
99
Candidate 1 similarity
100
Candidate 2 code
Candidate 2 similarity
102
Row 2 character 1
String similarity
103
Candidate 1 code
104
Candidate 1 similarity
105
Candidate 2 code
106
Candidate 2 similarity
to
... (Row 2 characters 2 to 19 same as for row 2
character 1.)
197
Row 2 character 20
String similarity
198
Candidate 1 code
199
Candidate 1 similarity
200
Candidate 2 code
201
202
Candidate 2 similarity
Region 1
Judgement
Region 3
Row 2 character 20
to
800
... (Same as for region 0)
String similarity
801
Candidate 1 code
802
Candidate 1 similarity
803
Candidate 2 code
804
Candidate 2 similarity
QUEST Character Verification (Settings Data)
Data
Details
897
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
898
Character color
0: Black
1: White
6-2-(76)
String similarity
98
101
Settings
data
String similarity
3
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Settings
data
Details
899
Rotation compensation
0: OFF
1: ON
900
Inclination compensation
0: OFF
1: ON
901
Shading level compensation (0 to 10)
902
Binary method
0: Manual
1: Auto
903
Binary lower limit threshold (0 to 255)
904
Binary upper limit threshold (0 to 255)
905
Reverse binary
0: OFF
1: ON
906
Extraction method
0: Gap search 1: Dilate extraction
2: Even extraction
907
Forced extraction
0: OFF
1: ON
908
No. of dilations (0 to 9)
909
Extraction direction
0: From left
1: From right
6-2-(77)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Settings
data
Details
910
End image
0: Leave
1: Erase (horizontal)
2: Erase (vertical)
911
Horizontal noise (0 to 512)
912
Noise height (0 to 484)
913
Vertical noise (0 to 484)
914
Noise width (0 to 512)
915
Printer
0: IJP
1: Laser
2: Stamp
916
IJP font
0: All 1: 5 dot (Common)
2: 5 dot (Hitachi) 3: 5 dot (Marconi) 4: 5 dot (Domino)
5: 5 dot (Linx) 6: 5 dot (Willet) 7: 5 dot (Imaje) 8: 5 dot (KGK)
9: 7 dot (Common) 10: 7 dot (Hitachi) 11: 7 dot (Marconi)
12: 7 dot (Domino) 13: 7 dot (Linx) 14: 7 dot (Willet)
15: 7 dot (Imaje) 16: 7 dot (KGK) 17: 7 dot (EDM)
18: 9 to 12 dot 19: Over 14 dot
917
Laser font
0: All 1: Gothic 2: OCRA 3: OCRB 4: SEMI
918
Stamp font
0: All 1: Gothic 2: Ming-style 3: OCRA 4: OCRB
922
‡ start postilion (0 to 100)
‡ end position (0 to 100)
- start position (0 to 100)
- end position (0 to 100)
923
. start position (0 to 100)
919
920
921
924
. end position (0 to 100)
925
(space) judgement value(0 to 127)
926
Term year (0 to 99)
927
Term month (0 to 99)
928
Term day (0 to 999)
929
Auto update
0: OFF
1: ON
930
0 Suppress
0: ON
1: OFF
931
6-2-(78)
Aspect ratio (height/width) (0to 99.9)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Settings
data
Details
932
Matching similarity
0: OFF
1: ON
933
Speed
0: Normal
1: High speed
2: Quickest
934
Bar line character
0: I
1: 1
935
Measurement result output
0: OFF
1: ON
936
937
938
939
940
Common
judgement
Individual
judgement
conditions
Similarity level (0 to 100)
Differential level (0 to 100)
0 (-1 to 100)
1 (-1 to 100)
2 (-1 to 100)
941
3 (-1 to 100)
942
4 (-1 to 100)
943
5 (-1 to 100)
944
6 (-1 to 100)
945
7 (-1 to 100)
946
8 (-1 to 100)
947
9 (-1 to 100)
948
A (-1 to 100)
949
B (-1 to 100)
950
C (-1 to 100)
951
D (-1 to 100)
952
E (-1 to 100)
953
F (-1 to 100)
954
G (-1 to 100)
955
H (-1 to 100)
956
I (-1 to 100)
957
J (-1 to 100)
958
K (-1 to 100)
959
L (-1 to 100)
960
M (-1 to 100)
961
N (-1 to 100)
962
O (-1 to 100)
963
P (-1 to 100)
964
Q (-1 to 100)
965
R (-1 to 100)
966
S (-1 to 100)
967
T (-1 to 100)
968
U (-1 to 100)
969
V (-1 to 100)
970
W (-1 to 100)
6-2-(79)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Settings
data
Details
971
972
973
Individual
judgement
conditions
974
Y (-1 to 100)
Z (-1 to 100)
: (-1 to 100)
975
976
X (-1 to 100)
/ (-1 to 100)
Region 0
Mode
0: Fixed region
1: Auto extraction
977
Type of 1st line
0: Not specifying
1: Specifying
978
Type of 2nd line
0: Not specifying
1: Specifying
979
1st line string (See note.)
980
2nd line string (See note.)
981
Auto
982
Upper left Y coordinate (0
to 483)
983
Lower right X coordinate (0
to 511)
984
Lower right Y coordinate (0
to 483)
985
Fixed 1st character
Upper left X coordinate (0
to 511)
986
Upper left Y coordinate (0
to 483)
987
Lower right X coordinate (0
to 511)
988
Lower right Y coordinate (0
to 483)
989
6-2-(80)
Upper left X coordinate (0
to 511)
Fixed 2nd character
Upper left X coordinate (0
to 511)
990
Upper left Y coordinate (0
to 483)
991
Lower right X coordinate (0
to 511)
992
Lower right Y coordinate (0
to 483)
to
... (Fixed characters 3 to 19 same as for fixed 1st
character).
1061
Fixed 20th character Upper left X coordinate (0
to 511)
1062
Upper left Y coordinate (0
to 483)
1063
Lower right X coordinate (0
to 511)
1064
Lower right Y coordinate (0
to 483)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Settings
data
Details
1065
Region 1
Mode
0: Fixed region
1: Auto extraction
to
1154
... (Same as for region 0)
Region 2
Mode
0: Fixed region
1: Auto extraction
to
1243
... (Same as for region 0)
Region 3
Mode
0: Fixed region
1: Auto extraction
to
... (Same as for region 0)
1331
Fixed 20th character Lower right Y coordinate (0
to 483)
1332
CHECK
Ring characters (0: 0, 1: O)
Only the allocations for region 0 are listed here. Refer to the allocations for
region 0 and calculate the numbers for regions 1 to 3.
Rotation Positioning (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Region 0
2
Judgement result
Correlation
3
Position X
4
Position Y
5
Angle
6
Reference position X
7
8
Reference position Y
Region 1
Judgement result
Region 7
Judgement result
to
50
... (Same as for region 0)
51
Correlation
52
Position X
53
Position Y
54
Angle
55
Reference position X
56
Reference position Y
6-2-(81)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Rotation Positioning (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
72
Rotation range
0: None 1: – 2• 2: – 5• 3: – 8•
4: – 10• 5: – 15• 6: –30• 7: –45•
8: –60• 9: –90• 10: All angles
73
Skipping angle
0: 1• 1: 2• 3: 5• 4: 6• 5: 10•
6: 15• 7: 20• 8: 30•
74
Accuracy
0: Normal
1: Precise
75
Verification
0: ON
1: OFF
76
Candidate level (0 to 99)
77
Coordinate mode
0: After scroll, calibration OFF
1: Before scroll, calibration OFF
2: After scroll, calibration ON
3: Before scroll, calibration ON
78
Region 0
Model position upper left X (0 to 511) (See note.)
79
Model position upper left Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
80
Model position lower right X (0 to 511) (See note.)
81
Model position lower right Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
82
Model reference position X (0 to 511)
83
Model reference position Y (0 to 483)
84
Search region upper left X (0 to 511)
85
Search region upper left Y (0 to 483)
86
Search region lower right X (0 to 511)
87
Search region lower right Y (0 to 483)
88
Correlation upper limit (0 to 100)
89
Correlation lower limit (0 to 100)
90
Position X upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
91
Position X lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
92
Position Y upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
93
Position Y lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
94
Angle upper limit (-360.000 to 360.000)
95
Angle lower limit (-360.000 to 360.000)
96
Region 1
Model position upper left X (0 to 511) (See note.)
Region 7
Model position upper left X (0 to 511) (See note.)
to
204
... (Same as for region 0)
to
... (Same as for region 0)
221
Angle lower limit (-360.000 to 360.000)
Note If these settings are changed, one rectangular region will be set and any previously drawn figures will be deleted. This is true for regions 1 to 7 as well.
CHECK
6-2-(82)
Only the allocations for region 0 are listed here. Refer to the allocations for
region 0 to calculate the numbers for regions 1 to 7.
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
ECM Search (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Details
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
EC correlation
2
Search position X
3
Search position Y
4
Reference position X
5
Reference position Y
6-2-(83)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
ECM Search (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
16
Details
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
17
Coordinate mode
0: After scroll, calibration OFF
1: Before scroll, calibration OFF
2: After scroll, calibration ON
3: Before scroll, calibration ON
18
Edge extraction mask size
0: 3 ™ 3
1: 5 ™ 5
19
Edge extraction lower limit (10 to 255)
20
Edge extraction upper limit (10 to 255)
21
Black/white reverse
0: OFF
1: ON
22
Accuracy
0: Normal
1: Precise
23
Model region X 1 (0 to 511) (See note.)
24
Model region Y 1 (0 to 483) (See note.)
25
Model region X 2 (0 to 511) (See note.)
26
Model region Y 2 (0 to 483) (See note.)
27
Reference X (0 to 511)
28
Reference Y (0 to 483)
29
Search region X 1 (0 to 511)
30
Search region Y 1 (0 to 483)
31
Search region X 2 (0 to 511)
32
Search region Y 2 (0 to 483)
33
Correlation judgement upper limit (0 to 100)
34
Correlation judgement lower limit (0 to 100)
35
X judgement upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
36
X judgement lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
37
Y judgement upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
38
Y judgement lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
39
Candidate level (0 to 99)
40
Reduction ratio (25 to 100)
41
Model skipping (0 to 9)
42
Search skipping (0 to 9)
43
Matching edges display
0: OFF
1: ON
Note Mask figures cannot be registered.
6-2-(84)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Lot Number OCV1 (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Digit 1
Judgement
2
Candidate 1 code
3
Candidate 1 similarity
4
Candidate 2 code
5
6
Candidate 2 similarity
Digit 2
Judgement
7
Candidate 1 code
8
Candidate 1 similarity
9
Candidate 2 code
10
11
Candidate 2 similarity
Digit 3
Judgement
12
Candidate 1 code
13
Candidate 1 similarity
14
Candidate 2 code
15
Candidate 2 similarity
16
Digit 4
Judgement
17
Candidate 1 code
18
Candidate 1 similarity
19
Candidate 2 code
20
Candidate 2 similarity
Lot Number OCV1 (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
32
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
33
Character color
0: Black
1: White
6-2-(85)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Settings
data
Details
34
Rotation compensation
0: OFF
1: ON
35
Inclination compensation
0: OFF
1: ON
36
Shading level compensation (0 to 10)
37
Binary method
0: Manual
1: Auto
38
Binary lower limit threshold (0 to 255)
39
Binary upper limit threshold (0 to 255)
40
Reverse binary
0: OFF
1: ON
41
Extraction method
0: Gap search 1: Dilate extraction
2: Even extraction
42
Forced extraction
0: OFF
1: ON
43
No. of dilations (0 to 9)
44
Extraction direction
0: From left
1: From right
6-2-(86)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Settings
data
Details
45
End image
0: Leave
1: Erase (horizontal)
2: Erase (vertical)
46
Horizontal noise (0 to 512)
47
Noise height (0 to 484)
48
Vertical noise (0 to 484)
49
Noise width (0 to 512)
50
Printer
0: IJP
1: Laser
2: Stamp
51
IJP font
0: All 1: 5 dot (Common)
2: 5 dot (Hitachi) 3: 5 dot (Marconi) 4: 5 dot (Domino)
5: 5 dot (Linx) 6: 5 dot (Willet) 7: 5 dot (Imaje) 8: 5 dot (KGK)
9: 7 dot (Common) 10: 7 dot (Hitachi) 11: 7 dot (Marconi)
12: 7 dot (Domino) 13: 7 dot (Linx) 14: 7 dot (Willet)
15: 7 dot (Imaje) 16: 7 dot (KGK) 17: 7 dot (EDM)
18: 9 to 12 dot 19: Over 14 dot
52
Laser font
0: All 1: Gothic 2: OCRA 3: OCRB 4: SEMI
53
Stamp font
0: All 1: Gothic 2: Ming-style 3: OCRA 4: OCRB
60
Lot number digits (1 to 4)
61
Lot number default (0 to 9999)
62
Lot number maximum value (0 to 9999)
63
Lot number add value (0 to 9999)
64
Lot-No. add method
(0: Day, 1: Week, 2: Month, 3:Year)
65
0 suppress
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
66
Extraction mode
(0: Auto, 1: Fixed)
67
Position (0: Left-aligned, 1: Right-aligned)
68
Output (0: No, 1: Yes)
69
Day (1 to 31)
70
Month (1 to 12)
71
Year (2001 to 2099)
72
Similarity judgement condition (1 to 100)
73
Similarity difference judgement condition (1 to 100)
74
Density deviation judgement condition (1 to 127)
6-2-(87)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Data
Settings
data
Details
80
Auto
Upper left X coordinate (0 to 511)
81
Upper left Y coordinate (0 to 483)
82
Lower right X coordinate (0 to 511)
83
84
Lower right Y coordinate (0 to 483)
Fixed 1st digit
Upper left X coordinate (0 to 511)
85
Upper left Y coordinate (0 to 483)
86
Lower right X coordinate (0 to 511)
87
88
Lower right Y coordinate (0 to 483)
Fixed 2nd digit Upper left X coordinate (0 to 511)
89
Upper left Y coordinate (0 to 483)
90
Lower right X coordinate (0 to 511)
91
Lower right Y coordinate (0 to 483)
92
Fixed 3rd digit Upper left X coordinate (0 to 511)
93
Upper left Y coordinate (0 to 483)
94
Lower right X coordinate (0 to 511)
95
96
Lower right Y coordinate (0 to 483)
Fixed 4th digit
Upper left X coordinate (0 to 511)
97
Upper left Y coordinate (0 to 483)
98
Lower right X coordinate (0 to 511)
99
Lower right Y coordinate (0 to 483)
Labeling (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
6-2-(88)
1
Number of labels
2
Measured X
3
Measured Y
4
Area
5
Reference X
6
Reference Y
7
Reference area
8
Displacement X
9
Displacement Y
10
Difference area
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Labeling (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
31
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
32
Coordinate mode
0: After scroll, calibration OFF
1: Before scroll, calibration OFF
2: After scroll, calibration ON
3: Before scroll, calibration ON
33
Measurement region Upper left X (0 to 511) (See note.)
34
Upper left Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
35
Lower right X (0 to 511) (See note.)
36
37
Lower right Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
Binary level
Upper limit (0 to 255)
38
Lower limit (0 to 255)
39
Reverse binary level
0: Not reversed
1: Reversed
40
Area
41
42
Upper limit (0.000 to 9,999,999.999)
Lower limit (0.000 to 9,999,999.999)
Filling up holes
0: OFF
1: ON
43
Sort
0: Area descending 1: Area ascending
2: X gravity descending 3: X gravity ascending
4: Y gravity descending 5: Y gravity ascending
44
Outside trimming
0: OFF
1: ON
45
Label number (0 to 2,499)
46
Number of labels
47
48
Lower limit (0 to 2,500)
Area
49
50
53
Upper limit (0.000 to 9,999,999.999)
Lower limit (0.000 to 9,999,999.999)
Gravity X
51
52
Upper limit (0 to 2,500)
Upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Gravity Y
Upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Note If these settings are changed, one rectangular region will be set and the previously drawn figures will be deleted.
6-2-(89)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Label Data (Measurement Data)
Data
Details
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Label No.
2
Gravity X
3
Gravity Y
4
Area A
Label Data (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
32
Label unit (-1: None, 0 to 9,999)
33
Label number (0 to 2,499)
34
Region number (0 to 7)
35
Gravity X
36
37
Gravity Y
38
39
Upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Area
40
41
Upper limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Lower limit (-9,999.999 to 9,999.999)
Upper limit (0.000 to 9,999,999.999)
Lower limit (0.000 to 9,999,999.999)
Coordinate mode
0: After scroll, calibration OFF
1: Before scroll, calibration OFF
2: After scroll, calibration ON
3: Before scroll, calibration ON
Edge Pitch (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
6-2-(90)
1
Number of edges
2
Average pitch
3
Maximum pitch
4
Minimum pitch
5
Average width
6
Maximum width
7
Minimum width
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Edge Pitch (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
31
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
32
Coordinate mode
0: Calibration OFF
1: Calibration OFF
33
Number of edges upper limit (0 to 255)
34
Number of edges lower limit (0 to 255)
35
Pitch upper limit (0 to 9,999.999)
36
Pitch lower limit (0 to 9,999.999)
37
Width upper limit (0 to 9,999.999)
38
Width lower limit (0 to 9,999.999
39
Region upper left X (0 to 511)
40
Region upper left Y (0 to 483)
41
Region lower right X (0 to 511)
42
Region lower right Y (0 to483)
43
Target color
0: White
1: Black
44
Edge level (0 to 100)
45
Minimum level (0 to 255)
46
Mode
0: Normal
1: Fine
Density Data (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Density average
2
Density deviation
3
Reference average
4
Reference deviation
5
Difference average
6
Difference deviation
6-2-(91)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Density Data (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
31
Measurement image
0: Image 0
1: Image 1
32
Density average upper limit (0 to 255.000)
33
Density average lower limit (0 to 255.000)
34
Density deviation upper limit (0 to 127.000)
35
Density deviation lower limit (0 to 127.000)
36
Region upper left X (0 to 511) (See note.)
37
Region upper left Y (0 to 483) (See note.)
38
Region lower right X (0 to 511) (See note.)
39
Region lower right Y (0 to483) (See note.)
Note If these settings are changed, one rectangular region will be set and the previously drawn figures will be deleted.
6-2-(92)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Measurement Support
Calculation (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Details
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Calculation result 0
2
Calculation result 1
3
Calculation result 2
4
Calculation result 3
5
Calculation result 4
6
Calculation result 5
7
Calculation result 6
8
Calculation result 7
9
Judgement result 0
-1: NG
0: OK
10
Judgement result 1
-1: NG
0: OK
11
Judgement result 2
-1: NG
0: OK
12
Judgement result 3
-1: NG
0: OK
13
Judgement result 4
-1: NG
0: OK
14
Judgement result 5
-1: NG
0: OK
15
Judgement result 6
-1: NG
0: OK
16
Judgement result 7
-1: NG
0: OK
6-2-(93)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Calculation (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
17
Judgement lower limit 0 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
18
Judgement upper limit 0 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
19
Judgement lower limit 1 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
20
Judgement upper limit 1 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
21
Judgement lower limit 2 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
22
Judgement upper limit 2 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
23
Judgement lower limit 3 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
24
Judgement upper limit 3 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
25
Judgement lower limit 4 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
26
Judgement upper limit 4 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
27
Judgement lower limit 5 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
28
Judgement upper limit 5 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
29
Judgement lower limit 6 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
30
Judgement upper limit 6 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
31
Judgement lower limit 7 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
32
Judgement upper limit 7 (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
41
Reflect to overall judgement
0: ON
1: OFF
Trend Monitor (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Details
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Measurement value
2
Warning
-1: Warning
0: No warning
3
6-2-(94)
Maximum
4
Minimum
5
Average
6
Deviation
7
Measure count
8
NG count
9
Warning count
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Trend Monitor (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
Details
17
Judgement lower limit (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
18
Judgement upper limit (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
19
Warning lower limit (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
20
Warning upper limit (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
21
Display range lower limit (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
22
Display range upper limit (-9,999,999.999 to 9,999,999.999)
23
Recording interval (1 to 99,999)
24
Warning count (1 to 999)
25
Display average
0: ON
1: OFF
26
Display maximum
0: ON
1: OFF
27
Display minimum
0: ON
1: OFF
28
NG by warning
0: ON
1: OFF
29
Graph line
0: 1 dot
1: 2 dot
Branching Control
Branching (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Details
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
Expression A
2
Expression B
3
Evaluation result
4
Destination
6-2-(95)
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Conditional Branching (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
6
Details
Destination unit number for true
-1: End processing
0 to 32767: Unit number
7
Destination unit number for false
-1: End processing
0 to 32767: Unit number
10
Condition
0: A = B
1: A ˆ B
2: A < B
3: A ˜ B
4: A > B
DI Branching (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Details
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
1
DI input value
2
Destination
DI Branching (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
4
Details
Destination (DI = 0)
-1: End processing
0 to 32767: Unit number
5
Destination (DI = 1)
-1: End processing
0 to 32767: Unit number
to
... (DI = 2 to DI = 30 are the same as for DI = 0)
35
Destination (DI = 31)
-1: End processing
0 to 32767: Unit number
CHECK
Destination settings can be made for 0 to 31. Select the data number to match
the DI number.
Results Output
Memory Card Data (Measurement Data)
Data
Measure- 0
ment
data
Details
Judgement result
-2: Not measured.
-1: NG
0: OK
6-2-(96)
1
Calculation result 0
2
Calculation result 1
to
..
8
Calculation result 7
Section 6-2
Normal Serial Interface
Memory Card Data (Settings Data)
Data
Settings
data
17
Details
Output format
0: ASCII
1: Binary
18
Integer digits (0 to 8)
19
Decimal digits (0 to 3)
20
Negative expression
0: 1: 8
21
Field separator
0: None 1: Comma 2: Tab 3: Space
4: CR+LF
22
Record separator
0: None 1: Comma 2: Tab 3: Space
4: CR+LF
23
0 suppress
0: OFF
1: